The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutProject Manual SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK PHASE 2 CITY OF RENTON COMMUNITY SERVICES DEPARTMENT PARKS PLANNING AND NATURAL RESOURCES DIVISION 1055 SOUTH GRADY WAY RENTON,WASHINGTON 98057 BID SET ISSUED: 27 AUGUST 2019 PROJECT MANUAL SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS TITLE PAGES Tableof Contents..............................................................................................................1-3 DIVISION 0—PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 1113 Advertisement for Bids.......................................................................................1-2 00 1114 Synopsis of Bidding Information.........................................................................1-1 00 2100 Instructions to Bidders .......................................................................................1-8 00 4100 Bid Form.............................................................................................................1-3 00 45 13 Bidder's Qualification Statement........................................................................1-1 00 72 00 General Conditions...........................................................................................1-63 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions.................................................................................1-3 00 80 00 Forms: ..............................................................................................................1-11 Bid Bond Form Contract Bond Form Sample Agreement Form Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes Non-Collusion, Anti-trust and Minimum Wage Form DIVISION 1—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 01 00 Summary of Work ..............................................................................................1-7 0112 00 Delegated Design ...............................................................................................1-2 0120 00 Price and Payment Procedures ..........................................................................1-5 0130 00 Administrative Requirements ............................................................................1-7 0132 16 Construction Scheudule .....................................................................................1-3 0140 00 Quality Requirements ........................................................................................1-6 0142 16 Definitions .........................................................................................................1-3 0150 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls .....................................................................1-4 0157 00 Environmental Controls......................................................................................1-2 0158 13 Temporary Project Signage ................................................................................1-2 0170 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements ..............................................................1-9 0174 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal ................................................1-5 0178 00 Closeout Submittals ...........................................................................................1-7 DIVISION 2— EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 4100 Site Demolition...................................................................................................1-5 TC-1 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS TITLE PAGES DIVISION 3—CONCRETE 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories.....................................................................1-3 03 15 00 Concrete Joints and Accessories.........................................................................1-2 03 2100 Steel Reinforcement...........................................................................................1-4 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete .....................................................................................1-21 03 30 05 Concrete Mix Design...........................................................................................1-2 03 39 00 Concrete Curing..................................................................................................1-2 03 62 00 Grout..................................................................................................................1-4 03 62 00.1 Grout Supplement 1........................................................................................1-4 DIVISION 5— METALS 05 05 23 Welding ..............................................................................................................1-5 05 05 23.1 Welding Supplement 1....................................................................................1-1 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing...................................................................................1-11 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications............................................................................................1-11 05 73 00 Decorative Metal Railings...................................................................................1-7 DIVISION 6—WOOD, PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry ................................................................................................1-7 DIVISION 7—THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 4113 Batten-Seam Metal Roof Panels.......................................................................1-12 07 46 46 Fiber Cement Siding ...........................................................................................1-5 07 54 23 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing.............................................................1-7 DIVISION 9— FINISHES 09 9113 Painting ............................................................................................................ 1-14 DIVISION 12—FURNISHINGS 12 93 00 Site Furnishings ................................................................................................1-15 DIVISION 13—SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 12 00 Decorative Mist Feature...................................................................................1-15 DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods..............................................................1-7 26 05 19 Conductors and Cables.......................................................................................1-4 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding......................................................................................1-6 TC-2 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS TITLE PAGES 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes...........................................................................................1-7 26 05 43 Underground Sucts and Handholes....................................................................1-8 26 05 53 Electrical Identification.......................................................................................1-6 26 27 26 Wiring Devices....................................................................................................1-4 DIVISION 31—EARTHWORK 3110 00 Site Preparation..................................................................................................1-6 3123 13 Subgrade Preparation.........................................................................................1-3 3123 16 Excavation .......................................................................................................... 1-5 3123 23 Fill and Backfill....................................................................................................1-7 3123 23.15 Trench Backfill ...............................................................................................1-8 DIVISION 32—EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1123 Aggregate Base Courses .....................................................................................1-5 32 13 13 Concrete Paving................................................................................................1-23 32 18 16.13 Playground Protective Surfacing....................................................................1-8 32 84 00 Irrigation...........................................................................................................1-17 32 90 00 Planting ............................................................................................................ 1-32 DIVISION 33—UTILITIES 33 3100 Sanitary Sewer Utility.........................................................................................1-6 33 40 00 Storm Drainage Utility........................................................................................1-7 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ProjectSign Detail................................................................................................................ 1 Geotechnical Design Recommendations for Sunset Park Phase I .....................................1-7 OverallSite Plan................................................................................................................... 1 SiteSurvey ........................................................................................................................... 2 TC-3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 1113 27 AUGUST 2019 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS SECTION 00 1113 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS The City of Renton invites interested and qualified contractors to submit sealed bids for the following project: TITLE: Sunset Neighborhood Park, Phase 2 ESTIMATED BASE BID COST RANGE: approximately$4,685,000 including WSST. SUBMITTAL TIME/DATE/LOCATION: Prior to 3:00 P.M.on 17 September 2019 at the Office of the City Clerk Seventh Floor, Renton City Hall 1055 Grady Way, Renton,WA, 98057 Public Bid Opening will commence at approximately 3:10 P.M. in Room 621, Sixth Floor, Renton City Hall, 1055 Grady Way, Renton, WA 98057. PRE-BID CONFERENCE: 8:30 A.M. 5 September 2019 at Sunset Neighborhood Park, 2680 Sunset Lane NE, Renton, Washington, 98056. Attendance at the pre-bid conference and site walk-through is highly encouraged but is not mandatory. The work, to be substantially completed within 160 calendar days from the date of commencement under this contract shall include, but not be limited to: Construction of a park and related site work. Work includes earthwork, utility installation, picnic pavilion and pergola construction, lighting, concrete flatwork, site furnishings, playground equipment, poured-in-place playground safety surfacing, decorative water mist feature with pump room equipment, soil preparation, landscape planting, and landscape irrigation for the construction of Sunset Neighborhood Park, Phase 2, for the City of Renton, Washington, all as shown and described in the Contract Documents prepared by HBB Landscape Architecture, dated 27 August 2019. Bid documents will be available 28 August 2019. Plans and specifications may be viewed at Builder's Exchange of Washington. Free-of-charge access to project bid documents (plans, specifications, addenda, and Bidders List) is provided to Prime Bidders, Subcontractors, and Vendors by going to www.bxwa.com and clicking on "Posted Projects", "Public Works", and "City of Renton". This online plan room provides Bidders with fully usable online documents with the ability to: download,view, print, order full/partial plan sets from numerous reprographic sources, and a free online 00 1113— PAGE 1 OF 2 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 1113 27 AUGUST 2019 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS digitizer/take-off tool. It is recommended that Bidders "Register" in order to receive automatic e-mail notification of future addenda and to place themselves on the "Self-Registered Bidders List". Bidders that do not register will not be automatically notified of addenda and will need to periodically check the on-line plan room for addenda issued on this project. Contact Builders Exchange of Washington at (425) 258-1303 should you require assistance with access or registration. Daily Journal of Commerce: POB 11050, Seattle, WA 98111. Phone: (206) 622-8272. Website: plancenter.com Please direct questions regarding this project to the City, attn: Alan J. Wyatt, RLA, ASLA, LEED-AP phone (425) 430-6571, or email: awyatt@rentonwa.gov (Document clarification questions must be submitted in writing). The City's fair practices/non-discrimination policies and the State of Washington prevailing wage rates are applicable for this public works project located in King County. Bidders are responsible to verify and use the most recent prevailing wage rates. The "Effective Date" for this project is the Bid Form due date above. The applicable prevailing wage rates may be found on the Department of Labor & Industries website located at https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/wagelookup/prvWagelookup.aspx. A Bid Bond in the amount of 5% of the total amount of the bid must accompany each bid. The City reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive any informalities or irregularities in bids received.The City's Fair Practices and Non-Discrimination policies and State Prevailing Wage Rates apply to this project. Mandatory 15% apprentice labor hours of the total labor hours are a requirement of the construction contract. Voluntary workforce diversity goals for this apprentice participation are identified in the Instructions to Bidders. Bidders may contact the Department of Labor & Industries, Apprenticeship Section, to obtain information on available apprenticeship programs. Bids shall be in a sealed envelope marked "SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2". THE CITY OF RENTON Jason Seth City Clerk Published: Daily Journal of Commerce on 28 August 2019. 00 1113-PAGE 2 OF 2 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 1114 27 AUGUST 2019 SYNOPSIS OF BIDDING INFORMATION SECTION 00 1114 SYNOPSIS OF BIDDING INFORMATION A. PROJECT: SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 2680 Sunset Lane NE Renton, WA 98056 B. OWNER: City of Renton 1055 South Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 C. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: Alan Wyatt, RLA, LEED AP Capital Project Coordinator 1055 South Grady Way, 61" Floor Renton, WA 98057 Phone (425) 430-6571 D. CONSULTANT: HBB Landscape Architecture 215 Westlake Avenue North Seattle, WA 98109 E. BIDS DUE: Tuesday, 17 September 2019, 3:00 p.m. at City Clerk's Office, 7th Floor Renton City Hall, Renton, WA. F. NOTICE TO PROCEED: Approximately 6 November 2019 G. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION: Substantial Completion is expected to be no later than by Sunday, 31 May 2020. Final Completion is expected to be no later than by Tuesday, 30 June 2020. H. PERFORMANCE BOND & PAYMENT BOND: 100% of contract amount. I. WAGES: Pay state prevailing wage rates. END OF SECTION 00 11 14-PAGE 1 OF 1 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 2100 27 AUGUST 2019 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION 00 2100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.1 EXPLANATION TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS A. Any prospective Bidder desiring an explanation or interpretation of the solicitation, drawings, specifications, etc., must submit a request in writing to the Owner/Architect/Engineer(O/A/E) seven (7) calendar days before the bid due date. Oral explanations or instructions given before the award of a contract will not be binding. Any information given a prospective Bidder concerning a solicitation will be furnished promptly to all other prospective Bidders by addendum to the solicitation, if that information is necessary in submitting bids or if the lack of it would be prejudicial to other prospective Bidders. B. In accordance with the legislative findings and policies set forth in Chapter 39.19 RCW the City of Renton encourages participation in all of its contracts by MWBE firms certified by the Office of Minority and Women's Business Enterprises (OMWBE). Participation may be either on a direct basis in response to this invitation or as a subcontractor to a bidder. However, unless required by federal statutes, regulations, grants, or contract terms referenced in the contract documents, no preference will be included in the evaluation of bids, no minimum level of MWBE participation shall be required as a condition for receiving an award, and bids will not be rejected or considered nonresponsive on that basis. Any affirmative action requirements set forth in federal regulations or statutes included or referenced in the contract documents will apply. C. The City of Renton encourages participation in all of its contracts by Veteran-owned businesses (defined in RCW 43.60.010) and located at http://www.dva.wa.gov/program/certified-veteran-and-servicemember-owned- businesses and Small, Mini and Micro businesses(defined in RCW 39.26.010) which have registered in WEBS at https://fortress.wa.gov/ga/webs/ 1.2 PREPARATION OF BIDS—CONSTRUCTION A. Bids must be: (1) submitted on the Bid Form, or copies of forms,furnished by the Owner or the Owner's agent, and (2) signed in ink. The person signing a bid must initial each change appearing on any Bid Form. If the bid is made by a corporation, it shall be signed by the corporation's authorized designee. The address of the Bidder shall be typed or printed on the Bid Form in the space provided. B. The Bid Form may require Bidders to submit bid prices for one or more items on 00 2100-PAGE 1 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 2100 27 AUGUST 2019 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS various bases, including: (1) lump sum base bid; (2) lump sum bid alternate prices; (3) unit prices; or (4) any combination of items 1 through 3 above. C. If the solicitation includes alternate bid items, failure to bid on the alternates may disqualify the bid. If bidding on all items is not required, Bidders should insert the words"no bid" in the space provided for any item on which no price is submitted. D. Substitute bid forms will not be considered unless this solicitation authorizes their submission. 1.3 BID GUARANTEE A. When the sum of the base bid plus all additive bid alternates is$35,000.00 or less, bid security is not required. B. When the sum of the base bid plus all additive alternates is greater than $35,000.00, a bid guarantee in the amount of 5% of the base bid amount is required. Failure of the Bidder to provide bid guarantee when required shall render the bid non- responsive. C. Acceptable forms of bid guarantee are: A bid bond or postal money order, or certified check or cashier's check made payable to the City of Renton Treasurer. The Owner will return bid guarantees (other than bid bond) to unsuccessful Bidders as soon as practicable, but not sooner than the execution of a contract with the successful Bidder. The successful Bidder's bid guarantee will be returned to the successful Bidder with its official notice to proceed with the work of the contract. D. The Bidder will allow 60 days from bid opening date for acceptance of its bid by the Owner. E. The Bidder will return to the Owner a signed contract, insurance certificate and bond or bond waiver within 15 days after receipt of the contract. If the apparent successful Bidder fails to sign all contractual documents or provide the bond and insurance as required or return the documents within 15 days after receipt of the contract, the Owner may terminate the award of the contract. F. In the event a Bidder discovers an error in its bid following the bid opening, the Bidder may request to withdraw its bid under the following conditions: 1. Written notification is received by the Owner within 24 hours following bid 00 2100-PAGE 2 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 2100 27 AUGUST 2019 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS opening. 2. The Bidder provides written documentation of the claimed error to the satisfaction of the Owner within 72 hours following the bid opening. The Owner will approve or disapprove the request for withdrawal of the bid in writing. If the Bidder's request for withdrawal of its bid is approved, the Bidder will be released from further obligation to the Owner without penalty. If it is disapproved, the Owner may retain the Bidder's bid guarantee. 1.4 ADDITIVE OR DEDUCTIVE BID ITEMS The low Bidder, for purposes of award, shall be the responsive Bidder offering the low aggregate amount for the base bid item, plus additive or deductive bid alternates selected by the Owner,and within funds available for the project. The Bidder agrees to hold all bid alternate prices for sixty (60) days from date of bid opening. 1.5 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of all addenda to this solicitation by identifying the addenda numbers in the space provided for this purpose on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may result in the bid being declared non-responsive. 1.6 SITE INVESTIGATION AND CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE WORK The Bidder acknowledges that it has taken steps necessaryto ascertain the nature and location of the work,and that it has investigated and satisfied itself as to the general and local conditions which can affect the work or its cost, including but not limited to; (1) conditions bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling, and storage of materials; (2) the availability of labor, water, electric power, and road; (3) uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides, or similar physical conditions at the site; (4) the conformation and conditions of the ground; and (5) the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminaryto and during the work. The Bidder also acknowledges that it has satisfied itself as to character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or obstacles to be encountered insofar as this information is reasonably ascertainable from an inspection of the site, including exploratory work done by the Owner, as well as from the drawings and specifications made a part of this contract. Any failure of the Bidder to take the actions described and acknowledged in this paragraph will not relieve the Bidder from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty and cost of successfully 002100-PAGE 3 OF8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 2100 27 AUGUST 2019 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS performing the work. 1.7 BID AMOUNTS A. The bid prices shown for each item on the Bid Form shall include all labor, material, equipment, overhead and compensation to complete all of the work for that item. B. The Owner will obtain and pay for all permits for this project prior to project Notice to Proceed. C. The Bidder agrees to hold the base bid prices for sixty (60) days from date of bid opening. 1.8 TAXES All bid amounts shall include Washington Sales Tax (WSST) based on the City of Renton rate (currently 10%) entered on the appropriate location on the Bid Form. All other taxes imposed by law shall be included in the bid amount. The Owner will include WSST in progress payments. The Contractor shall pay the WSST to the Department of Revenue and shall furnish proof of payment to the Owner if requested. [NOTE: Contractor must bond for contract amount plus the WSST.] 1.9 SUBMISSION OF BIDS A. Bids must be submitted on or before the time specified in the Advertisement for Bids. B. Subcontractor Listing:As the sum of the base bid and additive alternates is anticipated to exceed one million dollars or more, the Bid Form contains the following requirements: 1. Pursuant to RCW 39.30.060, the Bidder shall provide names of the Subcontractors with whom the Bidder will subcontract for performance of heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC), plumbing, and electrical, if any of these trades are used. 2. The Bidder can name itself for the performance of the work. 3. The Bidder shall not list more than one Subcontractor for each category of work identified UNLESS Subcontractors vary with bid alternates, in which case the Bidder must indicate which Subcontractor will be used for which alternate. 00 2100-PAGE 4 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 2100 27 AUGUST 2019 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4. Failure of the Bidder to submit as part of the bid the NAMES of such Subcontractors or to name itself to perform such work shall render the Bidder's bid nonresponsive and, therefore,void. C. The Bid Form shall be submitted in a sealed envelope addressed to the office specified in the Advertisement for Bids. The envelope shall have printed on the outside: 1. The project number and description. 2. The name and address of the Bidder 3. Identification as Bid Form. D. Prior to the bid opening, the Owner's representative will designate the official bid clock. Any part of the Bid Form, or in the rare situation of a bid modification, not received prior to the times specified, per the designated bid clock, will not be considered and the bid will be returned to the Bidder unopened. E. A bid may be withdrawn in person by a Bidder's authorized representative before the opening of the bids. Bidder(s) representative will be required to show ID and sign on bid summary sheet before it will be released. F. People with disabilities who wish to request special accommodation, (e.g., sign language interpreters, braille, etc.) need to contact the Owner ten (10) working days prior to the scheduled bid opening. 1.10 BID RESULTS After the Bid Opening, Bidders may obtain bid results from the Owner. 1.11 LOW RESPONSIBLE BIDDER A. Mandatory Responsibility Criteria: Before award of a public works contract, a Bidder must meet the following mandatory responsibility criteria under RCW 39.04.350(1)to be considered a responsible Bidder and qualified to be awarded a public works project. The Bidder must: 1. At the time of bid submittal, have a certificate of registration in compliance with chapter 18.27 RCW; 002100-PAGE 5 OF8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 2100 27 AUGUST 2019 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 2. Have a current state unified business identifier number; 3. If applicable, have industrial insurance coverage for the Bidder's employees working in Washington as required in Title 51 RCW; an employment security department number as required in Title 50 RCW; and a state excise tax registration number as required in Title 82 RCW; 4. Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065(3); and 5. If bidding on a public works project subject to the apprenticeship utilization requirements in RCW 39.04.320, not have been found out of compliance by the City of Renton Apprenticeship and Training Council for working apprentices out of ratio, without appropriate supervision, or outside their approved work processes as outlined in their standards of apprenticeship under chapter49.04 RCW forthe one-year period immediately preceding the date of the bid solicitation. 6. Within the three-year period immediately preceding the date of the bid solicitation, not have been determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the department of labor and industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction to have willfully violated, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any provision of chapter 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW. (Before award of a public works contract, a bidder shall submit to the contracting agency a signed statement in accordance with RCW 9A.72.085 verifying under penalty of perjury that the bidder is in compliance with the responsible bidder criteria requirements. A contracting agency may award a contract in reasonable reliance upon such a sworn statement.) 00 2100-PAGE 6 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 2100 27 AUGUST 2019 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS B. Supplemental Responsibility Criteria: In addition to the mandatory Bidder responsibility, the Owner has adopted relevant supplemental criteria for determining Bidder responsibility which the Bidder must meet (RCW 39.04.350(3)). 1. At least seven (7) days prior to the bid submittal deadline, a potential Bidder may request that the Owner modifythe supplemental responsibility criteria.The Owner will evaluate the information submitted by the potential Bidder and respond before the bid submittal deadline. If the evaluation results in a change of the criteria, the Owner will issue an addendum to the bidding documents identifying the new criteria. 2. Upon Owner's request, the apparent low Bidder must supply the requested responsibility information within two (2) business days of request by Owner. Withholding information or failure to submit all the information requested within the time provided may render the bid non-responsive 3. If the Owner determines that the apparent low Bidder is not responsible, the Owner will notify the Bidder of its preliminary determination in writing. 4. Within three (3) days after receipt of the preliminary determination, the Bidder may withdraw its bid or request a hearing where the Bidder may appeal the preliminary determination and present additional information to the Owner. 5. The Owner will schedule a hearing within three (3) working days of receipt of the Bidder's request. 6. The Owner will issue a Final Determination after reviewing information presented at the hearing. 7. If the Owner determines a Bidder to be not responsible, the Owner will provide, in writing, the reasons for the determination. If the final determination affirms that the Bidder is not responsible, the Owner will not execute a contract with any other Bidder until two (2) business days after the Bidder determined to be not responsible has received the final determination. 8. The Owner's Final Determination is specific to this project, and will have no effect on other or future projects. 002100-PAGE 7 OF8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 2100 27 AUGUST 2019 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.2 CONTRACTAWARD A. The Owner will evaluate bid responsiveness and responsibility. 1. A bid will be considered responsive if it meets the following requirements: a. It is received at the proper time and place. b. It meets the stated requirements of the Bid Form. c. It is submitted by a licensed/registered contractor within the state of Washington at the time of bid opening and is not banned from bidding by the Department of Labor and Industries. d. It is accompanied by a bid guarantee, if required. 2. A bid will be considered responsible if it meets the following requirements: a. It meets the mandatory responsibility criteria established in RCW 39.04.350 and an overall accounting of the supplemental responsibility criteria established for the project. B. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids and to waive informalities. C. The apparent low Bidder,for purpose of award, shall be the responsive and responsible Bidder offering the low aggregate amount for the base bid plus selected additive or deductive bid alternates and meeting all other bid submittal requirements. 1.3 DOCUMENTS (ATTACHED) A. Advertisement for Bids B. Bid Form C. Supplemental Bidder Responsibility Criteria D. General Conditions for Construction E. Bonds - Bid and performance F. Sample contract G. Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes H. Non-Collusion, Anti-trust and Minimum Wage Form Note: Payment Bond and Performance Bond are required. These forms will be provided by the Owner. END OF SECTION 00 2100-PAGE 8 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 4100 27 AUGUST 2019 BID FORM CITY OF RENTON MAIL TO: CITY CLERK 1055 GRADY WAY, RENTON, WA, 98057 HAND DELIVER TO: OFFICE OF THE CITY CLERK SEVENTH FLOOR, RENTON CITY HALL 1055 GRADY WAY, RENTON, WA, 98057 BID FORM for SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 2680 Sunset Lane NE Renton, WA 98056 Bids Due: 3:00 pm Tuesday, 17 September 2019 The undersigned herby certifies that they have carefully examined the Contract Documents as defined in the General Conditions and have examined the site of the Work, and fully understands the manner in which payment is prposed to be made for the cost thereof, hereby proposed to furnish all materials and to perform all labor which may be required to complete said work within the time fixed, and upon the terms and conditions provided in said Contract Docuemnts for consideration of the following amount: A. BASE BID 1a) BASE BID: (Written) (Numeric) 1b) SALES TAX ON BASE BID (The combined sales tax rate for Renton, WA is 10%): (Written) (Numeric) 1c) TOTAL BASE BID (Written) (Numeric) 00 4100—PAGE 1 OF 3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 4100 27 AUGUST 2019 BID FORM B. CONDITIONS OF PROPOSAL 1. Determination of Low Bidder: a. The City of Renton, 'Owner/City', reserves the right to 'Award a Contract' based on the Contractor's Propoal Amount for Base Bid and/or Breakdown, in whatever manner is in the City's best interest. 2. Overhead and Profit: a. All of the above Bid Prices shall include overhead and profit. C. PERIOD OF BID VALIDITY/ACCEPTANCE OF BID 1. Base Bid The undersigned herby agrees that this BID as described in paragraph "A" shall be valid and firm offering for the period sixty(60) days from closing time for the "Reciept of Bids." Acceptance of Bid: Within sixty (60) days after the opening of Form of Proposal, the City will act either to accept the Poropal fromt helowest responsive, responsible Bidder, or to reject all Bids. The Ctiy reserves the right to request extesnsions of such Bid acceptance period. The acceptance of a Bid will be evidenced by a written Notice of Intent to Award Contract to the Bidder whose Bid is under consideration for acceptance, together with a request tofurnish a bod (if required), evidence of insurancdr to execute the agreement set forth in the Contract Documents, and other designated documents. D. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT If written "Notice of Intent to Award Contract" is mailed, teegraphed, facsimile, or delivered to the undersigned within the "period of Bid Validity" noted above, or any time thereafter vefore this Bid is withdrawn, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days after the date of such notification, execute a Contract in the form of"City of Renton Standard Form of Agreement." E.TIME FOR COMPLETION Contract Time-The undersigned hereby agrees to Substantially Complete all the work under the Base Bid within 160 calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed but not later than Sunday, 31 May 2020. Finol Completion — All the Work shall be fully and finally completed in accordance with the contract documents within 30 calendar days after the date of Substantial Completion, but no later than Tuesday, 30 June 2020. F. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES The undersigned agrees to pay the Owner as liquidated damages the sum of$250.00 for each consecutive calendar day that is in default after the Contract Time. Liquidated damages shall be deducted from the contract invoice after taxes and retainage. G. NON DISCRIMINATIONAL COMPLIANCE During the performance of the Agreement, the Contractor agrees to comply with all federal and state nondicriminatioinal laws, regulations, and policies. 004100—PAGE 2 OF3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 4100 27 AUGUST 2019 BID FORM H. RECEIPT OF ADDENDA Receipt of the following addenda is acknowledged: Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. I. Subcontractors List and contact information of Subcontractors: Subcontractor Name& Contact (Address, Phone Number): Electrical: Plumbing/Mechanical: Landscape: Irrigation: Metal Fabricator: Concrete: Name of Firm NOTE:If Bidder is a corporation,write State of Incorporation;if a partnership,give full names and addresses of all parties below. Signed by Official Capacity Print Name Address City State Zip Code Date Telephone FAX State of Washington Contractor's License No. Federal Tax ID# E-mail address: Employment Security Department No. 00 4100—PAGE 3 OF 3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 45 13 27 AUGUST 2019 BIDDER'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT SECTION 00 45 13 BIDDER'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Each Bidder submitting a proposal on work included in these contract drawings and specifications shall prepare and submit as part of his bid,the following information: 1. Name of Bidder: 2. BusinessAddress: 3. Telephone: 4. Howmanyyears hassaid Bidder beenengaged in the contracting business underthe present firm name: 5. Contracts now in hand (Gross Amount): $ 6. Experience with similar projects: List at least three (3) projects accomplished within the last seven (7) years in which the Bidder constructed comparable projects. Include the name, telephone number and email address of the Owner or Owner's Representative responsible for the project. Describe how the project met customer satisfaction. We will discuss performance with the named references. Limit 3 pages. 7. Work Plan: Provide a description of how the work will be done within the time window allowed. Include a schedule of activities planned. Indicate planned working hours and days. Limit 3 pages. 8. Assigned Key Personnel: Provide a resume for the Project Manager, Superintendent, and other key personnel that will be assigned and committed to this project. Limit 3 pages. 9. List of company's major equipment. END OF SECTION 0045 13-PAGE 1 OF 1 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Section Description PART 1 -GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 Definitions................................................................................................. 3 1.2 Order of Precedence................................................................................... 5 1.3 Execution and Intent................................................................................... 6 PART 2- INSURANCE AND BONDS 2.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance...................................................................... 7 2.2 Coverage Limits......................................................................................... 8 2.3 Insurance Coverage Certificates.................................................................... 8 2.4 Payment and Performance Bonds.................................................................. 9 2.5 Alternative Surety....................................................................................... 9 2.6 Builders Risk............................................................................................. 9 PART 3-TIME AND SCHEDULE 3.1 Progress and Completion............................................................................. 10 3.2 Construction Schedule................................................................................. 10 3.3 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work for Convenience......................................... 11 3.4 Owner's Right to Stop the Work for Cause....................................................... 12 3.5 Delay....................................................................................................... 12 3.6 Notice to Owner of Labor Disputes................................................................. 14 3.7 Damages for Failure to Achieve Timely Completion........................................... 14 PART 4-SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 4.1 Discrepancies and Contract Document Review................................................. 15 4.2 Project Record........................................................................................... 16 4.3 Shop Drawings........................................................................................... 16 4.4 Organization of Specifications........................................................................ 18 4.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications & other Documents...................... 18 PART 5-PERFORMANCE 5.1 Contractor Control and Supervision................................................................ 19 5.2 Permits, Fees and Notices............................................................................ 20 5.3 Patents and Royalties.................................................................................. 20 5.4 Prevailing Wages........................................................................................ 21 5.5 Hours of Labor........................................................................................... 22 5.6 Nondiscrimination....................................................................................... 22 5.7 Safety Precautions...................................................................................... 23 5.8 Operations, Material Handling, and Storage Areas............................................. 27 5.9 Unforeseen Physical Conditions..................................................................... 28 5.10 Protection of Existing Structures, Equipment, Vegetation, Utilities, & Improvements. 28 5.11 Layout of Work........................................................................................... 28 00 72 00-PAGE 1 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS 5.12 Material and Equipment................................................................................ 29 5.13 Availability and Use of Utility Services............................................................. 29 5.14 Tests and Inspections.................................................................................. 29 5.15 Correction of Nonconforming Work................................................................. 30 5.16 Clean Up................................................................................................... 32 5.17 Access to Work.......................................................................................... 32 5.18 Subcontractors and Suppliers........................................................................ 32 5.19 Warranty of Construction.............................................................................. 35 5.20 Indemnification........................................................................................... 35 PART 6-PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 6.1 Contract Sum............................................................................................. 36 6.2 Schedule of Values..................................................................................... 36 6.3 Application for Payment................................................................................ 36 6.4 Progress Payments..................................................................................... 38 6.5 Payments Withheld..................................................................................... 38 6.6 Retainage and Bond Claim Rights.................................................................. 39 6.7 Substantial Completion................................................................................. 39 6.8 Prior Occupancy......................................................................................... 40 6.9 Final Completion, Acceptance, and Payment.................................................... 40 PART 7-CHANGES 7.1 Change in the Work.................................................................................... 41 7.2 Change in the Contract Sum......................................................................... 43 7.3 Change in the Contract Time......................................................................... 52 PART 8-CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION 8.1 Claims Procedure....................................................................................... 54 8.2 Arbitration................................................................................................. 56 8.3 Claims Audits............................................................................................. 57 PART 9-TERMINATION OF THE WORK 9.1 Termination by Owner for Cause.................................................................... 59 9.2 Termination by Owner for Convenience........................................................... 61 PART 10-MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 10.1 Governing Law........................................................................................... 62 10.2 Successors and Assigns.............................................................................. 62 10.3 Meaning of Words....................................................................................... 62 10.4 Rights and Remedies................................................................................... 63 10.5 Contractor Registration................................................................................. 63 10.6 Time Computations..................................................................................... 63 10.7 Records Retention....................................................................................... 63 10.8 Third-Party Agreements............................................................................... 64 10.9 Antitrust Assignments.................................................................................. 64 10.10 Headings and Captions................................................................................ 64 10.11 Diverse Business Participation........................................................................ 64 00 72 00-PAGE 2 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1—GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. "Application for Payment" means a written request submitted by Contractor to Owner for payment of Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and approved Schedule of Values, supported by such substantiating data as Owner or A/E mayrequire. B. "Architect," "Engineer," or "A/E" means a person or entity lawfully entitled to practice architecture or engineering, representing Owner within the limits of its delegated authority. C. "Change Order" means a written instrument signed by Owner and Contractor stating their agreement upon all of the following: (1) a change in the Work; (2) the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any, and (3) the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. D. "Claim" means Contractor's exclusive remedy for resolving disputes with Owner regarding the terms of a Change Order or a request for equitable adjustment, as more fully set forth in Part8. E. "Contract Award Amount" is the sum of the Base Bid and any accepted Alternates. F. "Contract Documents" means the Advertisement for Bids, Instructions for Bidders, completed Bid Form, General Conditions, Modifications to the General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Public Works Contract, other Special Forms, Drawings and Specifications, and all addenda and modifications thereof. G. "Contract Sum" is the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor, for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including all taxes imposed by law and properly chargeable to the Work, except Washington State sales tax. H. "Contract Time" is the number of calendar days allotted in the Contract Documents for achieving Substantial Completion of the Work. I. "Contractor" means the person or entity who has agreed with Owner to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. J. "Da s : Unless otherwise specified, day(s) shall mean calendarday(s)." K. "Drawings" are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing 00 72 00-PAGE 3 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS the design, location, and dimensions of the Work, and may include plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams. L. "Final Acceptance" means the written acceptance issued to Contractor by Owner after Contractor has completed the requirements of the Contract Documents, as more fully set forth in Section 6.9 B. M. "Final Completion" means that the Work is fully and finally complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, as more fully set forth in Section 6.9 A. N. "Force Majeure" means those acts entitling Contractor to request an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time, as more fully set forth in paragraph 3.05A. O. "Notice" means a written notice which has been delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended or, if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, to the last business address known to the party giving notice. P. "Notice to Proceed" means a notice from Owner to Contractor that defines the date on which the Contract Time begins. Q. "Owner" means the City of Renton, or its authorized representative with the authority to enter into, administer, and/or terminate the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and make related determinations and findings. R. "Owner's Representative" a person or entity lawfully entitled and licensed to practice their professional discipline, representing Owner within the limits of its delegated authority. S. "Person" means a corporation, partnership, business association of any kind, trust, company, or individual. T. "Prior Occupancy" means Owner's use of all or parts of the Project before Substantial Completion, as more fully set forth in Section 6.08 A. U. "Progress Schedule" means a schedule of the Work, in a form satisfactory to Owner, as further set forth in Section 3.02. V. "Proiect" means the total construction of which the Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by Owner or by separate contractors. W. "Proiect Record" means the separate set of Drawings and Specifications as further set 00 72 00-PAGE 4 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS forth in paragraph 4.02A. X. "Schedule of Values" means a written breakdown allocating the total Contract Sum to each principal category of Work, in such detail as requested by Owner. Y. "Specifications" are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. Z. "Subcontract" means a contract entered into by Subcontractor for the purpose of obtaining supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind for or in connection with the Work. AA. "Subcontractor" means any person, other than Contractor, who agrees to furnish or furnishes any supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind in connection with the Work. AA. "Substantial Completion" means that stage in the progress of the Work when the construction is sufficiently complete, as more fully set forth in Section 6.7. AB. "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, and includes, but is not limited to, labor, materials, supplies, equipment, services, permits, and the manufacture and fabrication of components, performed, furnished, or provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE Any conflict or inconsistency in the Contract Documents shall be resolved by giving the documents precedence in the following order: 1. Signed Agreement, including any Change Orders. 2. Supplemental Conditions. 3. Modifications to the General Conditions. 4. General Conditions. 5. Specifications. Provisions in Division 1 shall take precedence over provisions of any other Division. 6. Drawings. In case of conflict within the Drawings, large scale drawings shall take 00 72 00-PAGE 5 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS precedence over small scale drawings. 7. Signed and Completed Bid Form. 8. Instructions to Bidders. 9. Advertisement for Bids. 1.3 EXECUTION AND INTENT 1. Contractor Representations: Contractor makes the following representations to Owner: 2. Contract Sum reasonable: The Contract Sum is reasonable compensation for the Work and the Contract Time is adequate for the performance of the Work, as represented by the Contract Documents; 3. Contractor familiar with project: Contractor has carefully reviewed the Contract Documents, visited and examined the Project site, become familiar with the local conditions in which the Work is to be performed, and satisfied itself as to the nature, location, character, quality and quantity of the Work, the labor, materials, equipment, goods, supplies, work, services and other items to be furnished and all other requirements of the Contract Documents, as well as the surface and subsurface conditions and other matters that may be encountered at the Project site or affect performance of the Work or the cost or difficulty thereof; 4. Contractor financially capable: Contractor is financially solvent, able to pay its debts as they mature, and possesses sufficient working capital to complete the Work and perform Contractor's obligations required by the Contract Documents;and 5. Contractor can complete Work: Contractor is able to furnish the plant, tools, materials, supplies, equipment and labor required to complete the Work and perform the obligations required by the Contract Documents and has sufficient experience and competence to do so. 00 72 00-PAGE 6 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 2—INSURANCE AND BONDS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE General insurance requirements: Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor shall obtain all the insurance required by the Contract Documents and provide evidence satisfactory to Owner that such insurance has been procured. Review of the Contractor's insurance by Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of Contractor. Companies writing the insurance to be obtained by this part shall be licensed to do business under Chapter 48 RCW or comply with the Surplus Lines Law of the City of Renton. Contractor shall include in its bid the cost of all insurance and bond costs required to complete the base bid work and accepted alternates. Insurance carriers providing insurance in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be acceptable to Owner. A. Term of insurance coverage: Contractor shall maintain the following insurance coverage during the Work and for one year after Final Acceptance, with the exception of Professional Liability insurance, when required, which shall be maintained for a minimum of three years. Contractor shall also maintain the following insurance coverage during the performance of any corrective Work required by Section 5.16. 1. Commercial General Liability Insurance: Commercial General Liability (CGL) on an Occurrence Form. Coverage shall include, but not be limited to: a. Completed operations/products liability; b. Explosion, collapse, and underground, when applicable to the work being performed;and G. Stop loss coverage applicable to the State of Washington. 2. Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance: Required if a commercial vehicle will be used in performance of work or delivery of products by the contractor, beyond normal commutes. 3. Professional Liability: Required if professional services (e.g. architect, engineering, surveying, legal, or medical) are being provided to the Owner and if those professional services are excluded from the CGL policy. Coverage may be on a Claims Made basis, if coverage is maintain at least 3-years beyond the conclusion of work. 4. Excess Liability or Umbrella: Required if needed to reach minimum CGL or auto liability coverage limits. 5. Builders Risk—When applicable to the work being performed, is required up to the amount of the completed value of a new building or major construction project, with no coinsurance provisions. See section 2.6. 6. Pollution Liability— Required if work involves a pollution risk to the environment. Coverage may be included in other required policies. 00 72 00-PAGE 7 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS B. Industrial Insurance compliance (Workers' Compensation): Contractor shall comply with the Washington State Industrial Insurance Act and, if applicable, the Federal Longshoremen's and Harbor Workers' Act and the Jones Act. C. Insurance to protect for the following: All insurance coverages shall protect against claims for damages for personal and bodily injury or death, as well as claims for property damage, which may arise from operations in connection with the Work whether such operations are by Contractor or any Subcontractor. D. Owner as Additional Insured: Name the City of Renton as a Primary and Non- contributory Additional Insured on the policy (only applies to Commercial General, Auto Liability, Excess/Umbrella, when applicable). E. Insurance certificate requirements and minimum limits may be waived or modified by the Risk Manager or with Risk Manager approval. 2.2 COVERAGE LIMITS Insurance amounts: The minimum coverage limits shall be as follows for applicable required insurance: A. Limits of General Liability shall not be less than $1,000,000 per each Occurrence; including Personal Injury and Advertising Liability for Each Occurrence and $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate B. $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit for Automobile Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, Each Accident or Loss. C. $1,000,000 for Professional Liability. D. $1,000,000 for Pollution Liability. E. The Owner does not represent that the minimum required insurance coverage or limits are adequate to protect the vendor/contractor/consultant from all liabilities. 2.3 INSURANCE COVERAGE CERTIFICATES A. Certificate required: Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor shall furnish to Owner a completed and acceptable certificate of insurance coverage showing all required insurance coverage. B. List Project info: All insurance certificates shall name Owner as the certificate holder. The certificate holder should read: City of Renton ATTN: Kelsey Ternes 1055 South Grady Way Renton, WA. 98057 C. Cancellation provisions: The Owner shall be provided with written notice of any policy cancellation within a minimum of two business days of receipt of such notice by the policy holder. 00 72 00-PAGE 8 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS 2.4 PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BONDS Conditions for bonds: Payment and performance bonds for 100% of the Contract Award Amount, plus state sales tax, shall be furnished for the Work, using the City of Renton Contract Bond Form provided. Prior to execution of a Change Order that, cumulatively with previous Change Orders, increases the Contract Award Amount by 15% or more, the Contractor shall provide either new payment and performance bonds for the revised Contract Sum, or riders to the existing payment and performance bonds increasing the amount of the bonds. The Contractor shall likewise provide additional bonds or riders when subsequent Change Orders increase the Contract Sum by 15% or more. No payment or performance bond is required if the Contract Sum is $35,000 or less and Contractor agrees that Owner may, in lieu of the bond, retain 50% of the Contract Sum for the period allowed by RCW 39.08.010. 2.6 ALTERNATIVE SURETY When alternative surety required: Contractor shall promptly furnish payment and performance bonds from an alternative surety as required to protect Owner and persons supplying labor or materials required by the Contract Documents if: A. Owner has a reasonable objection to the surety;or B. Any surety fails to furnish reports on its financial condition if required byOwner. 2.6 BUILDER'S RISK A. Contractor to buy Builders Risk Insurance: When the project involves substantial new building construction, as determined by the Owner, Contractor shall purchase and maintain Builders Risk insurance in the amount of the Contract Sum including all Change Orders for the Work on a replacement cost basis until Substantial Completion. For projects not involving New Building Construction, "Installation Floater" is an acceptable substitute for the Builder's Risk Insurance. The insurance shall cover the interest of Owner, Contractor, and any Subcontractors, as their interests may appear. B. Losses covered: Contractor property insurance shall be placed on an "all risk" basis and insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false work, temporary buildings, debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for A/E's services and expenses required as a result of an insured loss. C. Waiver of subrogation rights: Owner and Contractor waive all subrogation rights against each other, any Subcontractors, A/E, A/E's sub-consultants, separate contractors described in Section 5.20, if any, and any of their subcontractors, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this section or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by Owner as 00 72 00-PAGE 9 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS fiduciary. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. PART 3—TIME AND SCHEDULE 3.1 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION Contractor to meet schedule: Contractor shall diligently prosecute the Work, with adequate forces, achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time, and achieve Final Completion within a reasonable period thereafter. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Preliminary Progress Schedule: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, Contractor shall, within 14 Days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed, submit a preliminary Progress Schedule. The Progress Schedule shall show the sequence in which Contractor proposes to perform the Work, and the dates on which Contractor plans to start and finish major portions of the Work, including dates for shop drawings and other submittals, and for acquiring materials and equipment. 1. The Schedule Duration shall be based on the Contract Time of Completion listed on the Bid Form. The Owner shall not be obligated to accept any Early Completion Schedule suggested by the Contractor.The Contract Time for Completion shall establish the Schedule Completion Date. 2. If the Contractor feels that the work can be completed in less than the Specified Contract Time, then the Surplus Time shall be considered Project Float. This Float time shall be shown on the Project Schedule. It shall be available to accommodate changes in the work and unforeseen conditions. Neither the Contractor nor the Owner have exclusive right to this Float Time. It belongs to the project. 3 Form of Progress Schedule: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, the Progress Schedule shall be in the form of a bar chart, or a critical path method analysis, as specified by Owner. The preliminary Progress Schedule may be general, showing the major portions of the Work, with a more detailed Progress Schedule submitted as directed byOwner. 4 Owner comments on Progress Schedule: Owner shall return comments on the 00 72 00-PAGE 10 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS preliminary Progress Schedule to Contractor within 14 Days of receipt. Review by Owner of Contractor's schedule does not constitute an approval or acceptance of Contractor's construction means, methods, or sequencing, or its ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time. Contractor shall revise and resubmit its schedule, as necessary. Owner may withhold a portion of progress payments until a Progress Schedule has been submitted which meets the requirements of this section. 5 Monthly updates and compliance with Progress Schedule: Contractor shall utilize and comply with the Progress Schedule. On a monthly basis, or as otherwise directed by Owner, Contractor shall submit an updated Progress Schedule at its own expense to Owner indicating actual progress. If, in the opinion of Owner, Contractor is not in conformance with the Progress Schedule for reasons other than acts of Force Majeure as identified in Section 3.05, Contractor shall take such steps as are necessary to bring the actual completion dates of its work activities into conformance with the Progress Schedule, and if directed by Owner, Contractor shall submit a corrective action plan or revise the Progress Schedule to reconcile with the actual progress of the Work. 6 Contractor to notify Owner of delays: Contractor shall promptly notify Owner in writing of any actual or anticipated event which is delaying or could delay achievement of any milestone or performance of any critical path activity of the Work. Contractor shall indicate the expected duration of the delay, the anticipated effect of the delay on the Progress Schedule, and the action being or to be taken to correct the problem. Provision of such notice does not relieve Contractor of its obligation to complete the Work within the Contract Time. 3.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK FOR CONVENIENCE A. Owner may suspend Work: Owner may, at its sole discretion, order Contractor, in writing, to suspend all or any part of the Work for up to 90 Days, or for such longer period as mutually agreed. B. Compliance with suspension; Owner's options: Upon receipt of a written notice suspending the Work, Contractor shall immediately comply with its terms and take all reasonable steps to minimize the incurrence of cost of performance directly attributable to such suspension. Within a period up to 90 Days after the notice is delivered to Contractor, or within any extension of that period to which the parties shall have agreed, Owner shall either: 1. Cancel the written notice suspending the Work;or 2. Terminate the Work covered by the notice as provided in the termination provisions of Part 9. 00 72 00-PAGE 11 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS C. Resumption of Work: If a written notice suspending the Work is cancelled or the period of the notice or any extension thereof expires, Contractor shall resume Work. D. Equitable Adjustment for suspensions: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time, or Contract Sum, or both, for increases in the time or cost of performance directly attributable to such suspension, provided Contractor complies with all requirements set forth in Part 7. 3.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK FOR CAUSE A. Owner may stop Work for Contractor's failure to perform: If Contractor fails or refuses to perform its obligations in accordance with the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor, in writing, to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. B. No Equitable Adjustment for Contractor's failure to perform: Contractor shall not be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum for any increased cost or time of performance attributable to Contractor's failure or refusal to perform or from any reasonable remedial action taken by Owner based upon such failure. 3.6 DELAY A. Force Maieure actions not a default; Force Maieure defined: Any delay in or failure of performance by Owner or Contractor, other than the payment of money, shall not constitute a default hereunder if and to the extent the cause for such delay or failure of performance was unforeseeable and beyond the control of the party ("Force Majeure"). Acts of Force Majeure include, but are not limited to: 1. Acts of God or the public enemy; 2. Acts or omissions of any government entity; 3. Fire or other casualty for which Contractor is not responsible; 4. Quarantine or epidemic; 5. Strike or defensive lockout; 6. Unusually severe weather conditions which could not have been reasonably anticipated; and 00 72 00-PAGE 12 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS 7. Unusual delay in receipt of supplies or products which were ordered and expedited and for which no substitute reasonably acceptable to Owner was available. B. Contract Time adjustment for Force Majeure: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time for changes in the time of performance directly attributable to an act of Force Majeure, provided it makes a request for equitable adjustment according to Section 7.03. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum resulting from an act of Force Majeure. C. Contract Time or Contract Sum adjustment if Owner at fault: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Time, and may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Sum, if the cost or time of Contractor's performance is changed due to the fault or negligence of Owner, provided the Contractor makes a request according to Sections 7.02 and 7.03. D. No Contract Time or Contract Sum adjustment if Contractor at fault: Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Time or in the Contract Sum for any delay or failure of performance to the extent such delay or failure was caused by Contractor or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible. E. Contract Time adjustment only for concurrent fault:To the extent any delay or failure of performance was concurrently caused by the Owner and Contractor, Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time for that portion of the delay or failure of performance that was concurrently caused, provided it makes a request for equitable adjustment according to Section 7.03, but shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Sum. F. Contractor to mitigate delay impacts: Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to prevent and mitigate the effects of any delay, whether occasioned by an act of Force Majeure orotherwise. 3.6 NOTICE TO OWNER OF LABOR DISPUTES A. Contractor to notify Owner of labor disputes: If Contractor has knowledge that any actual or potential labor dispute is delaying or threatens to delay timely performance in accordance withthe Contract Documents, Contractor shall immediately give notice, including all relevant information, to Owner. B. Pass through notification provisions to Subcontractors: Contractor agrees to insert a provision in its Subcontracts and to require insertion in all sub-subcontracts, that in the 00 72 00-PAGE 13 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS event timely performance of any such contract is delayed or threatened by delay by any actual or potential labor dispute, the Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor shall immediately notify the next higher tier Subcontractor or Contractor, as the case may be, of all relevant information concerning the dispute. 3.7 DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO ACHIEVE TIMELY COMPLETION A. Liquidated Damages 1. Reason for Liquidated Damages: Timely performance and completion of the Work is essential to Owner and time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. Owner will incur serious and substantial damages if Substantial Completion of the Work does not occur within the Contract Time. However, it would be difficult if not impossible to determine the exact amount of such damages. Consequently, provisions for liquidated damages are included in the Contract Documents. 2. Calculation of Liquidated Damages amount:The liquidated damage amounts set forth in the Contract Documents will be assessed not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for breach of the Contract Documents. This amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain.This amount shall be construed as the actual amount of damages sustained by the Owner, and may be retained by the Owner and deducted from periodic payments to the Contractor. 3. Contractor responsible even if Liquidated Damages assessed: Assessment of liquidated damages shall not release Contractor from any further obligations or liabilities pursuant to the Contract Documents. B. Actual Damages Calculation of Actual Damages: Actual damages will be assessed for failure to achieve Final Completion within the time provided. Actual damages will be calculated on the basis of direct architectural, administrative, and other related costs attributable to the Project from the date when Final Completion should have been achieved, based on the date Substantial Completion is actually achieved, to the date Final Completion is actually achieved. Owner may offset these costs against any payment due Contractor. 00 72 00-PAGE 14 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 4—SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS,AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 4.1 DISCREPANCIES AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT REVIEW A. Specifications and Drawings are basis of the Work:The intent of the Specifications and Drawings is to describe a complete Project to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation, permits, and supplies, and perform the Work required in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Parts of the Contract Documents are complementary:The Contract Documents are complementary. What is required by one part of the Contract Documents shall be binding as if required by all. Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Contractor to report discrepancies in Contract Documents: Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by Owner. If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor finds a conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission in the Contract Documents, it shall promptly and before proceeding with the Work affected thereby, report such conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission to Owner in writing. D. Contractor knowledge of discrepancy in documents— responsibility: Contractor shall do no Work without applicable Drawings, Specifications, or written modifications, or Shop Drawings where required, unless instructed to do so in writing by Owner. If Contractor performs any construction activity, and it knows or reasonably should have known that any of the Contract Documents contain a conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission, Contractor shall be responsible for the performance and shall bear the cost for its correction. E. Contractor to perform Work implied by Contract Documents: Contractor shall provide any work or materials the provision of which is clearly implied and is within the scope of the Contract Documents even if the Contract Documents do not mention them specifically. F. Interpretation questions referred to Owner: Questions regarding interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be referred to the Owner. 00 72 00-PAGE 15 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS 4.2 PROJECT RECORD A. Contractor to maintain Project Record Drawings and Specifications: Contractor shall legibly mark in ink on a separate set of the Drawings and Specifications all actual construction, including horizontal and vertical locations of sub-structural materials referenced to permanent visible and accessible surface improvements, field changes of dimensions and details, actual suppliers, manufacturers and trade names, models of installed equipment, and Change Order Proposals (COP). This separate set of Drawings and Specifications shall be the "Project Record." B. Update Project Record weekly and keep on site:The Project Record shall be maintained on the project site throughout the construction and shall be clearly labeled "PROJECT RECORD."The Project Record shall be updated at least weekly noting all changes and shall be available to Owner at all times. C. Final Project Record to Owner before Final Acceptance: Contractor shall submit the completed and finalized Project Record to Owner prior to Final Acceptance 4.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Definition of Shop Drawings: "Shop Drawings" means documents and other information required to be submitted to Owner by Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents, showing in detail: the proposed fabrication and assembly of structural elements; and the installation (i.e. form, fit, and attachment details) of materials and equipment. Shop Drawings include, but are not limited to, drawings, diagrams, layouts, schematics, descriptive literature, illustrations, schedules, performance and test data, samples, and similar materials furnished by Contractor to explain in detail specific portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents. For materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, Contractor submittal shall include the name of the manufacturer, the model number, and other information concerning the performance, capacity, nature, and rating of the item. When directed, Contractor shall submit all samples at its own expense. Owner may duplicate, use, and disclose Shop Drawings provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Approval of Shop Drawings by Contractor and A/E: Contractor shall coordinate all Shop Drawings, and review them for accuracy, completeness, and compliance with the Contract Documents and shall indicate its approval thereon as evidence of such coordination and review. Where required by law, Shop Drawings shall be stamped by an appropriate professional licensed by the City of Renton. Shop Drawings submitted to A/E without evidence of Contractor's approval shall be returned for resubmission. Contractor shall review, approve, and submit Shop Drawings with reasonable 00 72 00-PAGE 16 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of Owner or separate contractors. Contractor's submittal schedule shall allow a reasonable time for A/E review. A/E will review, approve, or take other appropriate action on the Shop Drawings. Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings until the respective submittal has been reviewed and the A/E has approved or taken other appropriate action. A/E shall respond to Shop Drawing submittals with reasonable promptness. Any Work by Contractor shall be in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings. Submittals made by Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action. C. Contractor not relieved of responsibility when Shop Drawings approved: Approval, or other appropriate action with regard to Shop Drawings, A/E shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for any errors or omissions in such Shop Drawings, nor from responsibility for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Unless specified in the Contract Documents, review by A/E shall not constitute an approval of the safety precautions employed by Contractor during construction, or constitute an approval of Contractor's means or methods of construction. If Contractor fails to obtain approval before installation and the item or work is subsequently rejected, Contractor shall be responsible for all costs ofcorrection. D. Variations between Shop Drawings and Contract Documents: If Shop Drawings show variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall describe such variations in writing, separate from the Shop Drawings, at the time it submits the Shop Drawings containing such variations. If A/E approves any such variation, an appropriate Change Order will be issued. If the variation is minor and does not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or ContractTime, a Change Order need not be issued; however, the modification shall be recorded upon the Project Record. E. Contractor to submit electronic files of Shop Drawings: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, Contractor shall submit to Owner for approval electronic files of all Shop Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, a reviewed electronic file shall be returned to Contractor. 4.4 ORGANIZATION OF SPECIFICATIONS Specification organization by trade: Specifications are prepared in sections which conform generally to trade practices.These sections are for Owner and Contractor convenience and shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among the Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of the Work to be performed by any trade. 00 72 00-PAGE 17 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS 4.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS A. The City/Owner not Contractor, owns Copyright of Drawings and Specifications: The Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by A/E are instruments of A/E's contracted service to the City through which the Work to be executed by Contractor is described. Neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by A/E, and A/E shall be deemed the author of them and will, along with any rights of Owner, retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of these documents, except Contractor's set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to A/E, on request, upon completion of the Work. B. Drawings and Specifications to be used only for this Proiect: The Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by the A/E, and copies thereof furnished to Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by Contractor or any Subcontractor on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of Owner and A/E. Contractor and Subcontractors are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by A/E appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work. C. Shop Drawing license granted to Owner: Contractor and all Subcontractors grant a non- exclusive license to Owner, without additional cost or royalty, to use for its own purposes (including reproduction) all Shop Drawings, together with the information and diagrams contained therein, prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor. In providing Shop Drawings, Contractor and all Subcontractors warrant that they have authority to grant to Owner a license to use the Shop Drawings, and that such license is not in violation of any copyright or other intellectual property right. Contractor agrees to defend and indemnify Owner pursuant to the indemnity provisions in Section 5.03 and 5.22 from any violations of copyright or other intellectual property rights arising out of Owner's use of the Shop Drawings hereunder, or to secure for Owner, at Contractor's own cost, licenses in conformity with this section. D. Shop Drawings to be used only for this Project: The Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, or its or their equipment or material suppliers, and copies thereof furnished to Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project.They are not to be used by Contractor or any Subcontractor of any tier, or material or equipment supplier, on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of Owner. The Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Shop Drawings and other 00 72 00-PAGE 18 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS submittals appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. PART 5—PERFORMANCE 5.1 CONTRACTOR CONTROL AND SUPERVISION A. Contractor responsible for Means and Methods of construction: Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using its best skill and attention, and shall perform the Work in a skillful manner. Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. Contractor shall disclose its means and methods of construction when requested by Owner. B. Competent Superintendent required: Performance of the Work shall be directly supervised by a competent superintendent who has authority to act for Contractor.The superintendent must be satisfactory to the Owner and shall not be changed without the prior written consent of Owner. Owner may require Contractor to remove the superintendent from the Work or Project site, if Owner reasonably deems the superintendent incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable, provided Owner has first notified Contractor in writing and allowed a reasonable period for transition. C. Contractor responsible for acts and omissions of self and agents: Contractor shall be responsible to Owner for acts and omissions of Contractor, Subcontractors, and their employees and agents. D. Contractor to employ competent and disciplined workforce: Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among all of the Contractor's employees and other persons performing the Work. Contractor shall not permit employment of persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. Contractor's employees shall at all times conduct business in a manner which assures fair, equal, and nondiscriminatory treatment of all persons. Owner may, by written notice, request Contractor to remove from the Work or Project site any employee Owner reasonably deems incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable. E. Contractor to keep project documents on site: Contractor shall keep on the Project site a copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, reviewed Shop Drawings, and permits and permit drawings. F. Contractor to comply with ethical standards: Contractor shall ensure that its owner(s) and employees, and those of its Subcontractors, comply with the Ethics in Public Service 00 72 00-PAGE 19 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS Act RCW 42.52, which, among other things, prohibits state employees from having an economic interest in any public works contract that was made by, or supervised by, that employee. Contractor shall remove, at its sole cost and expense, any of its, or its Subcontractors' employees, if they are in violation of this act. 6.2 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES A. Permits: Owner will obtain and pay for the Land Use Permit, General Building Permit, Civil Construction Permit and Signage permit. All other permits and fees required to execute the work shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. Prior to Final Acceptance, the approved, signed permits shall be delivered to Owner. B. Contractor to comply with all applicable laws: Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by all federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. 6.3 PATENTS AND ROYALTIES Payment, indemnification, and notice: Contractor is responsible for, and shall pay, all royalties and license fees. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold Owner harmless from any costs, expenses, and liabilities arising out of the infringement by Contractor of any patent, copyright, or other intellectual property right used in the Work; however, provided that Contractor gives prompt notice, Contractor shall not be responsible for such defense or indemnity when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. If Contractor has reason to believe that use of the required design, process, or product constitutes an infringement of a patent or copyright, it shall promptly notify Owner of such potential infringement 6.4 PREVAILING WAGES A. Contractor to pay Prevailing Wages: Contractor shall pay the prevailing rate of wages to all workers, laborers, or mechanics employed in the performance of any part of the Work in accordance with RCW 39.12 and the rules and regulations of the Washington Department of Labor and Industries or the federal Davis-Bacon Act Prevailing Wage Rates, as amended (40 U.S.C. 3141— 3148); whichever is the greater. The schedule of prevailing wage rates for the locality or localities of the Work, is determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries. The State of Washington prevailing wage rates applicable for this public works project, which is in King County, may be found at the following website address of the Department of Labor and Industries: http://www.Ini.wa.gov/TradesLicensing/PrevWage/WageRates. Pursuant to WAC 296-127-011, the applicable effective date for prevailing wage rates paid for the duration of this contract shall be the date final bid proposals for the services 00 72 00-PAGE 20 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS were due to be submitted. Upon request, the City will provide a copy of the applicable prevailing wages for this project. Alternatively, the rates may be viewed at the City of Renton City Hall by making an appointment with the contact person identified herein or prior to contract award with the contact person identified in the solicitation for bids. B. Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages: Before payment is made by the Owner to the Contractor for any work performed by the Contractor and subcontractors whose work is included in the application for payment, the Contractor shall submit, or shall have previously submitted to the Owner for the Project, a Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages, approved by the Department of Labor and Industries, certifying the rate of hourly wage paid and to be paid each classification of laborers, workers, or mechanics employed upon the Work by Contractor and Subcontractors. Such rates of hourly wage shall not be less than the prevailing wage rate. C. Affidavit of Wages Paid: Prior to release of retainage, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner an Affidavit of Wages Paid, approved by the Department of Labor and Industries, for the Contractor and every subcontractor, of any tier, that performed work on the Project. D. Disputes: Disputes regarding prevailing wage rates shall be referred for arbitration to the Director of the Department of Labor and Industries. The arbitration decision shall be final and conclusive and binding on all parties involved in the dispute as provided for by RCW 39.12.060. E. Statement with pay application; Post Statements of Intent at lob site: Each Application for Payment submitted by Contractor shall state that prevailing wages have been paid in accordance with the pre-filed statement(s) of intent, as approved. Copies of the approved intent statement(s) shall be posted on the job site with the address and telephone number of the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries where a complaint or inquiry concerning prevailing wages may be made. F. Contractor to pay for Statements of Intent and Affidavits: In compliance with chapter 296-127 WAC, Contractor shall pay to the Department of Labor and Industries the currently established fee(s) for each statement of intent and/or affidavit of wages paid submitted to the Department of Labor and Industries for certification. G. Certified Payrolls: Consistent with WAC 296-127-320, the Contractor and any subcontractor shall submit a certified copy of payroll records if requested. 6.6 HOURS OF LABOR A. Overtime: Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of RCW 49.28 and they 00 72 00-PAGE 21 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS are incorporated herein by reference. Pursuant to that statute, no laborer, worker, or mechanic employed by Contractor, any Subcontractor, or any other person performing or contracting to do the whole or any part of the Work, shall be permitted or required to work more than eight hours in any one calendar day, provided, that in cases of extraordinary emergency, such as danger to life or property, the hours of work may be extended, but in such cases the rate of pay for time employed in excess of eight hours of each calendar day shall be not less than one and one-half times the rate allowed for this same amount of time during eight hours of service. B. 4-10 Agreements: Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, RCW 49.28 permits a contractor or subcontractor in any public works contract subject to those provisions, to enter into an agreement with its employees in which the employees work up to ten hours in a calendar day. No such agreement may provide that the employees work ten- hour days for more than four calendar days a week. Any such agreement is subject to approval by the employees. The overtime provisions of RCW 49.28 shall not apply to the hours, up to forty hours per week, worked pursuant to any such agreement. 6.6 NONDISCRIMINATION A. Discrimination prohibited by applicable laws: The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall comply with all applicable federal and state non-discrimination laws, regulations, and policies and the City of Renton Summary of Fair Practices Policy Adopted by Resolution 4085. No person shall, on the grounds of age, race, creed, color, sex, sexual orientation, religion, national origin, marital status, honorably discharged veteran or military status, or disability (physical, mental, or sensory) be denied the benefits of, or otherwise be subjected to discrimination under any project, program, or activity, funded, in whole or in part, under this Agreement. B. During performance of the Work: 1. Protected Classes: Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability, Vietnam era veteran status, or disabled veteran status, nor commit any other unfair practices as defined in RCW49.60. 2. Advertisements to state nondiscrimination: Contractor shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or for it, state that all qualified applicants will be considered for employment, without regard to race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability. 00 72 00-PAGE 22 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS 3. Contractor to notify unions and others of nondiscrimination: Contractor shall send to each labor union, employment agency, or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the labor union, employment agency, or workers' representative of Contractor's obligations according to the Contract Documents and RCW 49.60. 4. Owner and State access to Contractor records: Contractor shall permit access to its books, records, and accounts, and to its premises by Owner, and by the Washington State Human Rights Commission, for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with this section of the Contract Documents. 5. Pass through provisions to Subcontractors: Contractor shall include the provisions of this section in every Subcontract. 6.7 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A. In performing this contract, the Contractor shall provide for protecting the lives and health of employees and other persons; preventing damage to property, materials, supplies, and equipment; and avoid work interruptions. For these purposes, the Contractor shall: 1. Follow Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA) regional directives and provide a site-specific safety program that will require an accident prevention and hazard analysis plan for the contractor and each subcontractor on the work site. The Contractor shall submit a site-specific safety plan to the Owner's representative prior to the initial scheduled construction meeting. 2. Provide adequate safety devices and measures including, but not limited to, the appropriate safety literature, notice, training, permits, placement and use of barricades, signs, signal lights, ladders, scaffolding, staging, runways, hoist, construction elevators, shoring, temporary lighting, grounded outlets, wiring, hazardous materials, vehicles, construction processes, and equipment required by all applicable state, federal, and local laws and regulations. 3. Comply with the State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA), Clean Air Act, Shoreline Management Act, and other applicable federal, state, and local statutes and regulations dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of public natural resources. 4. Post all permits, notices, and/or approvals in a conspicuous location at the construction site. 00 72 00-PAGE 23 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS B. Provide any additional measures that the Owner determines to be reasonable and necessary for ensuring a safe environment in areas open to the public. Nothing in this part shall be construed as imposing a duty upon the Owner or A/E to prescribe safety conditions relating to employees, public, or agents of the Contractors. C. Contractor safety responsibilities: In carrying out its responsibilities according to the Contract Documents, Contractor shall protect the lives and health of employees performing the Work and other persons who may be affected by the Work; prevent damage to materials, supplies, and equipment whether on site or stored off-site; and prevent damage to other property at the site or adjacent thereto. Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of any public body having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury, or loss; shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection; and shall notify owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them. D. Contractor to maintain safety records: Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of exposure data on all incidents relating to the Work resulting in death, traumatic injury, occupational disease, or damage to property, materials, supplies, or equipment. Contractor shall immediately report any such incident to Owner. Owner shall, at all times, have a right of access to all records of exposure. E. Contractor to provide HazMat training: Contractor shall provide all persons working on the Project site with information and training on hazardous chemicals in their work at the time of their initial assignment, and whenever a new hazard is introduced into their workarea. 1. Information. At a minimum, Contractor shall inform persons working on the Project site of: a. WAC: The requirements of chapter 296-62 WAC, General Occupational Health Standards; b. Presence of hazardous chemicals: Any operations in their work area where hazardous chemicals are present;and C. Hazard communications program: The location and availability of written hazard communication programs, including the required list(s) of hazardous chemicals and material safety data sheets required by chapter 296-62 WAC. 00 72 00-PAGE 24 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS 2. Training. At a minimum, Contractor shall provide training for persons working on the Project site which includes: a. Detecting hazardous chemicals: Methods and observations that may be used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area (such as monitoring conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices, visual appearance or odor of hazardous chemicals when being released,etc.); b. Hazards of chemicals: The physical and health hazards of the chemicals in the work area; G. Protection from hazards: The measures such persons can take to protect themselves from these hazards, including specific procedures Contractor, or its Subcontractors, or others have implemented to protect those on the Project site from exposure to hazardous chemicals, such as appropriate work practices, emergency procedures, and personal protective equipment to be used;and d. Hazard communications program:The details of the hazard communications program developed by Contractor, or its Subcontractors, including an explanation of the labeling system and the material safety data sheet, and how employees can obtain and use the appropriate hazard information. F. Hazardous, toxic or harmful substances: Contractor's responsibility for hazardous, toxic, or harmful substances shall include the following duties: 1. Compliance with Regulations: All work shall comply with the applicable laws, regulations and requirements.The disposal of any hazardous materials encountered shall also comply with the requirements of applicable federal, state and municipal safety and health requirements. Where there is a conflict between applicable regulations, the most stringent shall apply. 2. List of all hazardous chemicals: Contractor shall provide the Owner with a complete list of all hazardous chemicals and other materials intended to be used during the execution of the project, including storage locations. 3. Illegal use of dangerous substances: Contractor shall not keep, use, dispose, transport, generate, or sell on or about the Project site, any substances now or hereafter designated as, or which are subject to regulation as, hazardous, toxic, dangerous, or harmful by any federal, state or local law, regulation, statute or ordinance (hereinafter collectively referred to as "hazardous 00 72 00-PAGE 25 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS substances"), in violation of any such law, regulation, statute, or ordinance, but in no case shall any such hazardous substance be stored more than 90 Days on the Project site. 4. Contractor notifications of discovered hazardous material:The Contractor shall bring to the attention of the Owner any material suspected of being hazardous which is encountered during execution of the Work.The Owner will arrange for tests to determine if the material is hazardous. If the material is found to be hazardous the Owner will initiate the construction modification procedure for its abatement by the Contractor. 5. Contractor notifications of spills, failures, inspections, and fines: Contractor shall promptly notify Owner of all spills or releases of any hazardous substances which are otherwise required to be reported to any regulatory agency and pay the cost of cleanup. Contractor shall promptly notify Owner of all failures to comply with any federal, state, or local law, regulation, or ordinance; all inspections of the Project site by any regulatory entity concerning the same; all regulatory orders or fines; and all responses or interim cleanup actions taken by or proposed to be taken by any government entity or private party on the Project site. G. Public safety and traffic: All Work shall be performed with due regard for the safety of the public. Contractor shall perform the Work so as to cause a minimum of interruption of vehicular traffic or inconvenience to pedestrians. All arrangements to care for such traffic shall be Contractor's responsibilities. All expenses involved in the maintenance of traffic by way of detours shall be borne by Contractor. H. Contractor to act in an emergency: In an emergency affecting the safety of life or the Work or of adjoining property, Contractor is permitted to act, at its discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury, and Contractor shall so act if so authorized or instructed. I. No duty of safety by Owner or A/E: Nothing provided in this section shall be construed as imposing any duty upon Owner or A/E with regard to, or as constituting any express or implied assumption of control or responsibility over, Project site safety, or over any other safety conditions relating to employees or agents of Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, or the public. 5.8 OPERATIONS, MATERIAL HANDLING, AND STORAGEAREAS A. Limited storage areas: Contractor shall confine all operations, including storage of materials, to Owner-approved areas. 00 72 00-PAGE 26 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS B. Temporary buildings and utilities at Contractor expense:Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops, offices) and utilities may be provided by Contractor only with the consent of Owner and without expense to Owner.The temporary buildings and utilities shall be removed by Contractor at its expense upon completion of the Work. C. Roads and vehicle loads: Contractor shall use only established roadways or temporary roadways authorized by Owner. When materials are transported in prosecuting the Work, vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the loading capacity recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or prescribed by federal, state, or local law or regulation. D. Ownership and reporting by Contractor of demolished materials: Ownership and control of all materials or facility components to be demolished or removed from the Project site by Contractor shall immediately vest in Contractor upon severance of the component from the facility or severance of the material from the Project site. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with all laws governing the storage and ultimate disposal. Contractor shall provide Owner with a copy of all manifests and receipts evidencing proper disposal when required by Owner or applicable law. E. Contractor responsible for care of materials and equipment on-site: Contractor shall be responsible for the proper care and protection of its materials and equipment delivered to the Project site. Materials and equipment may be stored on the premises subject to approval of the Owner. When Contractor uses any portion of the Project site as a shop, Contractor shall be responsible for any repairs, patching, or cleaning arising from such use. F. Contractor responsible for loss of materials and equipment: Contractor shall protect and be responsible for any damage or loss to the Work, or to the materials or equipment until the date of Substantial Completion, and shall repair or replace without cost to Owner any damage or loss that may occur, except damages or loss caused by the acts or omissions of Owner. Contractor shall also protect and be responsible for any damage or loss to the Work, or to the materials or equipment, after the date of Substantial Completion, and shall repair or replace without cost to Owner any such damage or loss that might occur, to the extent such damages or loss are caused by the acts or omissions of Contractor, or any Subcontractor. 6.9 UNFORESEEN PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. Notice requirement for concealed or unknown conditions: If Contractor encounters conditions at the site which are subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents, or unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the 00 72 00-PAGE 27 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS character provided for in the Contract Documents, then Contractor shall give written notice to Owner promptly and in no event later than 7 Days after the first observance of the conditions. Conditions shall not be disturbed prior to such notice. B. Adjustment in Contract Time and Contract Sum: If such conditions differ materially and cause a change in Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, the Contractor may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum, or both, provided it makes a request therefore as provided in Part 7. 6.10 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, VEGETATION, UTILITIES AND IMPROVEMENTS A. Contractor to protect and repair property: Contractor shall protect from damage all existing structures, equipment, improvements, utilities, and vegetation: at or near the Project site. Contractor shall repair any damage resulting from failure to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents or failure to exercise reasonable care in performing the Work. If Contractor fails or refuses to repair the damage promptly, Owner may have the necessary work performed and charge the cost to Contractor. 6.11 LAYOUT OF WORK A. Advanced planning of the Work: Contractor shall plan and lay out the Work in advance of operations so as to coordinate all work without delay or revision. B. Layout responsibilities: Contractor shall lay out the Work from Owner-established baselines and bench marks indicated on the Drawings, and shall be responsible for all field measurements about the layout. Contractor shall furnish, at its own expense, all stakes, templates, platforms, equipment, tools, materials, and labor required to lay out any part of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for executing the Work to the lines and grades that may be established. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining or restoring all stakes and other marks established. 6.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Contractor to provide new and equivalent equipment and materials: All equipment, material, and articles incorporated into the Work shall be new and of the most suitable grade for the purpose intended, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. References in the Specifications to equipment, material, articles, or patented processes by trade name, make, or catalog number, shall be regarded as establishing a standard quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. Contractor may, at its option, use any equipment, material, article, or process that, in the judgment of A/E, is equal to that named in the specifications, unless otherwise 00 72 00-PAGE 28 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS specifically provided in the Contract Documents. B. Contractor responsible for fitting parts together: Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching that may be required to make its several parts fit together properly, or receive or be received by work of others set forth in, or reasonably implied by, the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not endanger any work by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the Work and shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor unless approved in advance byOwner. C. Owner may reject defective Work: Should any of the Work be found defective, or in any way not in accordance with the Contract Documents, this work, in whatever stage of completion, may be rejected by Owner. 6.13 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES A. Owner to provide and charge for utilities: Owner shall make all reasonable utilities available to Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the Contract Documents, at no cost to the Contractor. 6.14 TESTS AND INSPECTION A. Contractor to coordinate all testing and inspection of Work: City of Renton (Owner) will employ a Materials Testing and Special Inspections Firm. Contractor will be required to coordinate schedule of testing and inspections. Unless otherwise provided, Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with the Owner's independent testing laboratory or entity, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. Contractor shall give Owner timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made. Contractor shall maintain complete inspection records and make them available to Owner upon request. B. Owner may conduct tests and inspections: Owner may, at any reasonable time, conduct such inspections and tests as it deems necessary to ensure that the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner shall promptly notify Contractor if an inspection or test reveals that the Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless the subject items are expressly accepted by Owner, such Owner inspection and tests are for the sole benefit of Owner and do not: 1. Constitute or imply acceptance; 2. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 00 72 00-PAGE 29 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS 3. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for risk of loss or damage to the Work, materials, or equipment; 4. Relieve Contractor of its responsibility to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or 5. Impair Owner's right to reject defective or nonconforming items, or to avail itself of any other remedy to which it may be entitled. C. Inspections or inspectors do not modify Contract Documents: Neither observations by an inspector retained by Owner, the presence or absence of such inspector on the site, nor inspections, tests, or approvals by others, shall relieve Contractor from any requirement of the Contract Documents, nor is any such inspector authorized to change any term or condition of the Contract Documents. D. Contractor responsibilities on inspections: Contractor shall promptly furnish, without additional charge, all facilities, labor, material and equipment reasonably needed for performing such safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be required by Owner. Owner may charge Contractor any additional cost of inspection or testing when Work is not ready at the time specified by Contractor for inspection or testing, or when prior rejection makes re-inspection or retest necessary. Owner shall perform its inspections and tests in a manner that will cause no undue delay in the Work. 5.15 CORRECTION OF NONCONFORMING WORK A. Work covered by Contractor without inspection: If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the requirements in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by Owner, be uncovered for Owner's observation and be replaced at the Contractor's expense and without change in the Contract Time. B. Payment provisions for uncovering covered Work: If, at any time prior to Final Completion, Owner desires to examine the Work, or any portion of it, which has been covered, Owner may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum for the costs of uncovering and replacement, and, if completion of the Work is thereby delayed, an adjustment in the Contract Time, provided it makes such a request as provided in Part 7. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay the costs of examination and reconstruction. C. Contractor to correct and pay for non-conforming Work: Contractor shall promptly 00 72 00-PAGE 30 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS correct Work found by Owner not to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed. Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such nonconforming Work, including additional testing and inspections. D. Contractor's compliance with warranty provisions: If, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or within one year after the date for commencement of any system warranties established under Section 6.08, or within the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from Owner to do so. Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. This period of one year shall be extended, with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion, by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. Contractor's duty to correct with respect to Work repaired or replaced shall run for one year from the date of repair or replacement. Obligations under this paragraph shall survive Final Acceptance. E. Contractor to remove non-conforming Work: Contractor shall remove from the Project site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by Contractor nor accepted byOwner. F. Owner may charge Contractor for non-conforming Work: If Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time after written notice to do so, Owner may replace, correct, or remove the nonconforming Work and charge the cost thereof to the Contractor. G. Contractor to pay for damaged Work during correction: Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged Work, whether completed or partially completed, caused by Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. H. No Period of limitation on other requirements: Nothing contained in this section shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which Contractor might have according to the Contract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year as described in Section 5.16D relates only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the Contractor's obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, including the time within which such proceedings may be commenced. I. Owner may accept non-conforming Work and charge Contractor: If Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract 00 72 00-PAGE 31 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS Documents, Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum may be reduced as appropriate and equitable. 6.16 CLEAN UP Contractor to keep site clean and leave it clean: Contractor shall at all times keep the Project site, including hauling routes, infrastructures, utilities, and storage areas, free from accumulations of waste materials. Before completing the Work, Contractor shall remove from the premises its rubbish, tools, scaffolding, equipment, and materials. Upon completing the Work, Contractor shall leave the Project site in a clean, neat, and orderly condition satisfactory to Owner. If Contractor fails to clean up as provided herein, and after reasonable notice from Owner, Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to Contractor. 6.17 ACCESS TO WORK Owner and A/E access to Work site: Contractor shall provide Owner and A/E access to the Work in progress wherever located. 6.18 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS A. Subcontractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall include the language of this paragraph in each of its first-tier subcontracts, and shall require each of its subcontractors to include the same language of this section in each of their subcontracts, adjusting only as necessary the terms used for the contracting parties. Upon request of the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly provide documentation to the Owner demonstrating that the subcontractor meets the subcontractor responsibility criteria below. The requirements of this paragraph apply to all subcontractors regardless of tier. At the time of subcontract execution, the Contractor shall verify that each of its first-tier subcontractors meets the following bidder responsibility criteria: 1. Have a current certificate of registration as a contractor in compliance with chapter 18.27 RCW, which must have been in effect at the time of subcontract bid submittal; 2. Have a current Washington Unified Business Identifier(UBI)number; 3. If applicable, have: a. Industrial Insurance (workers' compensation) coverage for the subcontractor's employees working in Washington, as required in Title 51 RCW; 00 72 00-PAGE 32 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS b. A Washington Employment Security Department number, as required in Title 50 RCW; C. A Washington Department of Revenue state excise tax registration number, as required in Title 82 RCW; d. An electrical contractor license, if required by Chapter 19.28 RCW; 4. Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065 (3). 5. Within the three-year period immediately preceding the date of the bid solicitation, not have been determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the department of labor and industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction to have willfully violated, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any provision of chapter 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW. B. Provide names of Subcontractors and use qualified firms: Before submitting the first Application for Payment, Contractor shall furnish in writing to Owner the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of all Subcontractors, as well as suppliers providing materials in excess of$2,500. Contractor shall utilize Subcontractors and suppliers which are experienced and qualified, and meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, if any. Contractor shall not utilize any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Owner has a reasonable objection, and shall obtain Owner's written consent before making any substitutions oradditions. C. Subcontracts in writing and pass through provision: All Subcontracts must be in writing. By appropriate written agreement, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, so far as applicable to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which Contractor assumes toward Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents. Each Subcontract shall preserve and protect the rights of Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights. Where appropriate, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. However, nothing in this paragraph shall be construed to alter the contractual relations between Contractor and its Subcontractors with respect to insurance or bonds. D. Coordination of Subcontractors; Contractor responsible for Work: Contractor shall schedule, supervise, and coordinate the operations of all Subcontractors. No Subcontracting of any of the Work shall relieve Contractor from its responsibility for the 00 72 00-PAGE 33 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or any other obligations of the Contract Documents. E. Automatic assignment of subcontracts: Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is hereby assigned by Contractor to Owner provided that: 1. Effective only after termination and Owner approval: The assignment is effective only after termination by Owner for cause pursuant to Section 9.01 and only for those Subcontracts which Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in writing;and 2. Owner assumes Contractor's responsibilities: After the assignment is effective, Owner will assume all future duties and obligations toward the Subcontractor which Contractor assumed in the Subcontract. 3. Impact of bond:The assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under any bond provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. 6.19 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION A. Contractor warranty of Work: In addition to any special warranties provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, Contractor warrants that all Work conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents and is free of any defect in equipment, material, or design furnished, or workmanship performed by Contractor. B. Contractor responsibilities: With respect to all warranties, express or implied, for Work performed or materials furnished according to the Contract Documents, Contractor shall: 1. Obtain warranties: Obtain all warranties that would be given in normal commercial practice; 2. Warranties for benefit of Owner: Require all warranties to be executed, in writing, for the benefit of Owner; 3. Enforcement of warranties: Enforce all warranties for the benefit of Owner, if directed by Owner; and 4. Contractor responsibility for subcontractor warranties: Be responsible to enforce any subcontractor's, manufacturer's, or supplier's warranties should they extend beyond the period specified in the Contract Documents. 00 72 00-PAGE 34 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS C. Warranties beyond Final Acceptance: The obligations under this section shall survive Final Acceptance. 5.20 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless Renton, its elected officials, officers, agents, employees and volunteers, from and against any and all claims, losses or liability, or any portion of the same, including but not limited to reasonable attorneys' fees, legal expenses and litigation costs, arising from injury or death to persons, including injuries, sickness, disease or death of Contractor's own employees, agents and volunteers, or damage to property caused by Contractor's negligent act or omission, except for those acts caused by or resulting from a negligent act or omission by Renton and its officers, agents, employees and volunteers. Including Patent infringement: The use of any design, process, or equipment which constitutes an infringement of any United States patent presently issued, or violates any other proprietary interest, including copyright, trademark, and trade secret. Should a court of competent jurisdiction determine that this agreement is subject to RCW 4.24.115, (Validity of agreement to indemnify against liability for negligence relative to construction, alteration, improvement, etc., of structure or improvement attached to real estate...) then, in the event of liability for damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or damages to property caused by or resulting from the concurrent negligence of the contractor and Renton, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers, Contractor's liability shall be only to the extent of Contractor's negligence. It is further specifically and expressly understood that the indemnification provided in this Agreement constitute Contractor's waiver of immunity under the Industrial Insurance Act, RCW Title 51, solely for the purposes of this indemnification. The Parties have mutually negotiated and agreed to this waiver. The provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement. PART 6— PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 6.1 CONTRACT SUM Owner shall pay Contract Sum: Owner shall pay Contractor the Contract Sum plus state sales tax for performance of the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 6.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Contractor to submit Schedule of Values: Before submitting its first Application for Payment, Contractor shall submit to Owner for approval a breakdown allocating the total Contract Sum to each principal category of work, in such detail as requested by Owner ("Schedule of Values"). The approved Schedule of Values shall include appropriate amounts for demobilization, record 00 72 00-PAGE 35 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS drawings, O&M manuals, and any other requirements for Project closeout, and shall be used by Owner as the basis for progress payments. Payment for Work shall be made only for and in accordance with those items included in the Schedule of Values. 6.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Monthly Application for Payment with substantiation: At monthly intervals, unless determined otherwise by Owner, Contractor shall submit to Owner an itemized Application for Payment for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the approved Schedule of Values. Each application shall be supported by such substantiating data as Owner may require. B. Contractor certifies Subcontractors paid: By submitting an Application for Payment, Contractor is certifying that all Subcontractors have been paid, less earned retainage in accordance with RCW 60.28.011, as their interests appeared in the last preceding certificate of payment. By submitting an Application for Payment, Contractor is recertifying that the representations set forth in Section 1.03, are true and correct, to the best of Contractor's knowledge, as of the date of the Application for Payment. C. Reconciliation of Work with Progress Schedule: At the time, it submits an Application for Payment, Contractor shall analyze and reconcile, to the satisfaction of Owner, the actual progress of the Work with the Progress Schedule. D. Payment for material delivered to site or stored off-site: If authorized by Owner, the Application for Payment may include request for payment for material delivered to the Project site and suitably stored, or for completed preparatory work. Payment may similarly be requested for material stored off the Project site, provided Contractor complies with or furnishes satisfactory evidence of the following: 1. Suitable facility or location:The material will be placed in a facility or location that is structurally sound, dry, lighted and suitable for the materials to be stored; 2. Facility or location within 10 miles of Project: The facility or location is located within a 10-mile radius of the Project. Other locations may be utilized, if approved in writing, by Owner; 3. Facility or location exclusive to Project's materials: Only materials for the Project are stored within the facility or location (or a secure portion of a facility or location set aside for the Project); 4. Insurance provided on materials in facility or location: Contractor furnishes Owner a certificate of insurance extending Contractor's insurance coverage for 00 72 00-PAGE 36 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS damage, fire, and theft to cover the full value of all materials stored, or in transit; 5. Facility or location locked and secure: The facility or location (or secure portion thereof) is continuously under lock and key, and only Contractor's authorized personnel shall have access; 6. Owner right of access to facility or location: Owner shall have the right of access in company of Contractor; 7. Contractor assumes total responsibility for stored materials: Contractor and its surety assume total responsibility for the stored materials;and 8. Contractor provides documentation and Notice when materials moved to site: Contractor furnishes to Owner certified lists of materials stored, bills of lading, invoices, and other information as may be required, and shall also furnish Notice to Owner when materials are moved from storage to the Project site. 6.4 PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Owner to pay within 30 Days: Owner shall make progress payments, in such amounts as Owner determines are properly due, within 30 Days after receipt of a properly executed Application for Payment. Owner shall notify Contractor in accordance with chapter 39.76 RCW if the Application for Payment does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Withholding retainage; Options for retainage: Owner shall retain 5% of the amount of each progress payment until 45 Days after Final Acceptance and receipt of all documents required by law or the Contract Documents, including, at Owner's request, consent of surety to release of the retainage. In accordance with chapter 60.28 RCW, Contractor may request that monies reserved be retained in a fund by Owner, deposited by Owner in a bank or savings and loan, or placed in escrow with a bank or trust company to be converted into bonds and securities to be held in escrow with interest to be paid to Contractor. Owner may permit Contractor to provide an appropriate bond in lieu of the retained funds. C. Title passes to Owner upon payment: Title to all Work and materials covered by a progress payment shall pass to Owner at the time of such payment free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests, and encumbrances. Passage of title shall not, however, relieve Contractor from any of its duties and responsibilities for the Work or materials, or waive any rights of Owner to insist on full compliance by Contractor with the Contract Documents. D. Interest on unpaid balances: Payments due and unpaid in accordance with the Contract 00 72 00-PAGE 37 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS Documents shall bear interest as specified in chapter 39.76 RCW. 6.6 PAYMENTS WITHHELD A. Owner's right to withhold payment: Owner may withhold or, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, nullify the whole or part of any payment to such extent as may be necessary to protect Owner from loss or damage for reasons including but not limitedto: 1. Non-compliant Work: Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Remaining Work to cost more than unpaid balance: Reasonable evidence that the Work required by the Contract Documents cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; 3. Owner correction or completion Work: Work by Owner to correct defective Work or complete the Work in accordance with Section 5.16; 4. Contractor's failure to perform: Contractor's failure to perform in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 5. Contractor's negligent acts or omissions: Cost or liability that may occur to Owner as the result of Contractor's fault or negligent acts or omissions. B. Owner to notify Contractor of withholding for unsatisfactory performance: In any case where part or all of a payment is going to be withheld for unsatisfactory performance, Owner shall notify Contractor in accordance with chapter 39.76 RCW. 6.6 RETAINAGE AND BOND CLAIM RIGHTS Chapters 39.08 RCW and 60.28 RCW incorporated by reference: Chapters 39.08 RCW and 60.28 RCW, concerning the rights and responsibilities of Contractor and Owner with regard to the performance and payment bonds and retainage, are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference as though fully set forth herein. 6.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Substantial Completion defined: Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work (or portion thereof designated and approved by Owner) when the construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so Owner has full and unrestricted use and benefit of the facilities (or portion thereof designated and approved by Owner) for the use 00 72 00-PAGE 38 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS for which it is intended. All Work other than incidental corrective or punch list work shall be completed. Substantial Completion shall not have been achieved if all systems and parts are not functional, if utilities are not connected and operating normally, if all required occupancy permits have not been issued, or if the Work is not accessible by normal vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes. The date Substantial Completion is achieved shall be established in writing by Owner. Contractor may request an early date of Substantial Completion which must be approved by Change Order. Owner's occupancy of the Work or designated portion thereof does not necessarily indicate that Substantial Completion has beenachieved. 6.8 PRIOR OCCUPANCY A. Prior Occupancy defined; Restrictions: Owner may, upon written notice thereof to Contractor, take possession of or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work ("Prior Occupancy") at any time prior to Substantial Completion. Unless otherwise agreed in writing, Prior Occupancy shall not: be deemed an acceptance of any portion of the Work; accelerate the time for any payment to Contractor; prejudice any rights of Owner provided by any insurance, bond, guaranty, or the Contract Documents; relieve Contractor of the risk of loss or any of the obligations established by the Contract Documents; establish a date for termination or partial termination of the assessment of liquidated damages; or constitute a waiver of claims. B. Damage; Duty to repair and warranties: Notwithstanding anything in the preceding paragraph, Owner shall be responsible for loss of or damage to the Work resulting from Prior Occupancy. Contractor's one-year duty to repair any system warranties shall begin on building systems activated and used by Owner as agreed in writing by Owner and Contractor. 6.9 FINAL COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND PAYMENT A. Final Completion defined: Final Completion shall be achieved when the Work is fully and finally complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. The date Final Completion is achieved shall be established by Owner in writing, but in no case, shall constitute Final Acceptance which is a subsequent, separate, and distinct action. B. Final Acceptance defined: Final Acceptance shall be achieved when the Contractor has completed the requirements of the Contract Documents. The date Final Acceptance is achieved shall be established by Owner in writing. Prior to Final Acceptance, Contractor shall, in addition to all other requirements in the Contract Documents, submit to Owner a written notice of any outstanding disputes or claims between Contractor and any of its Subcontractors, including the amounts and other details thereof. Neither Final Acceptance, nor final payment, shall release Contractor or its sureties from any obligations of these Contract Documents or the payment and performance bonds, or 00 72 00-PAGE 39 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS constitute a waiver of any claims by Owner arising from Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Final payment waives Claim rights: Acceptance of final payment by Contractor, or any Subcontractor, shall constitute a waiver and release to Owner of all claims by Contractor, or any such Subcontractor, for an increase in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, and for every act or omission of Owner relating to or arising out of the Work, except for those Claims made in accordance with the procedures, including the time limits, set forth in Part 8. PART 7—CHANGES 7.1 CHANGE IN THE WORK A. Changes in Work, Contract Sum, and Contract Time by Change Order: Owner may, at any time and without notice to Contractor's surety, order additions, deletions, revisions, or other changes in the Work. These changes in the Work shall be incorporated into the Contract Documents through the execution of Change Orders. If any change in the Work ordered by Owner causes an increase or decrease in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, an equitable adjustment shall be made as provided in Section 7.02 or 7.03, respectively, and such adjustment(s) shall be incorporated into a Change Order. B. Owner may request COP from Contractor: If Owner desires to order a change in the Work, it may request a written Change Order Proposal (COP) from Contractor. Contractor shall submit a Change Order Proposal within 14 Days of the request from Owner, or within such other period as mutually agreed. Contractor's Change Order Proposal shall be full compensation for implementing the proposed change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, and including compensation for all delays in connection with such change in the Work and for any expense or inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity occasioned by the change in the Work. C. COP negotiations: Upon receipt of the Change Order Proposal, or a request for equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both, as provided in Sections 7.02 and 7.03, Owner may accept or reject the proposal, request further documentation, or negotiate acceptable terms with Contractor. Pending agreement on the terms of the Change Order, Owner may direct Contractor to proceed immediately with the Change Order Work. Contractor shall not proceed with any change in the Work until it has obtained Owner's approval. All Work done pursuant to any Owner-directed change in the Work shall be executed in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. Change Order as full payment and final settlement: If Owner and Contractor reach 00 72 00-PAGE 40 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS agreement on the terms of any change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, such agreement shall be incorporated in a Change Order. The Change Order shall constitute full payment and final settlement of all claims for time and for direct, indirect, and consequential costs, including costs of delays, inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity, related to any Work either covered or affected by the Change Order, or related to the events giving rise to the request for equitable adjustment. E. Failure to agree upon terms of Change Order; Final offer and Claims: If Owner and Contractor are unable to reach agreement on the terms of any change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, Contractor may at any time in writing, request a final offer from Owner. Owner shall provide Contractor with its written response within 30 Days of Contractor's request. Owner may also provide Contractor with a final offer at any time. If Contractor rejects Owner's final offer, or the parties are otherwise unable to reach agreement, Contractor's only remedy shall be to file a Claim as provided in Part 8. F. Field Authorizations:The Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with a change in the work through a written Field Authorization (also referred to as a Field Order) when the time required to price and execute a Change Order would impact the Project. The Field Authorization shall describe and include the following: 1. The scope of work 2. An agreed upon maximum not-to-exceed amount 3. Any estimated change to the Contract Time 4. The method of final cost determination in accordance with the requirements of Part 7 of the General Conditions 5. The supporting cost data to be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Part 7 of the General Conditions Upon satisfactory submittal by the Contractor and approval by the Owner of supporting cost data, a Change Order will be executed. The Owner will not make payment to the Contractor for Field Authorization work until that work has been incorporated into an executed Change Order. 00 72 00-PAGE 41 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS 7.2 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT SUM A. General Application 1. Contract Sum changes only by Change Order: The Contract Sum shall only be changed by a Change Order. Contractor shall include any request for a change in the Contract Sum in its Change Order Proposal. 2. Owner fault or negligence as basis for change in Contract Sum: If the cost of Contractor's performance is changed due to the fault or negligence of Owner, or anyone for whose acts Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum in accordance with the following procedure. No change in the Contract Sum shall be allowed to the extent: Contractor's changed cost of performance is due to the fault or negligence of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible; the change is concurrently caused by Contractor and Owner; or the change is caused by an act of Force Majeure as defined in Section 3.05. (a) Notice and record keeping for equitable adjustment: A request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum shall be based on written notice delivered to Owner within 7 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request. For purposes of this part, "occurrence" means when Contractor knew, or in its diligent prosecution of the Work should have known, of the event giving rise to the request. If Contractor believes it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum, Contractor shall immediately notify Owner and begin to keep and maintain complete, accurate, and specific daily records. Contractor shall give Owner access to any such records and, if requested shall promptly furnish copies of such records to Owner. (b) Content of notice for equitable adjustment; Failure to comply: Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum for any occurrence of events or costs that occurred more than 7 Days before Contractor's written notice to Owner. The written notice shall set forth, at a minimum, a description of: the event giving rise to the request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum; the nature of the impacts to Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier, if any; and to the extent possible the amount of the adjustment in Contract Sum requested. Failure to properly give such written notice shall, to the extent Owner's interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor's right to an equitable adjustment. 00 72 00-PAGE 42 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS (c) Contractor to provide supplemental information: Within 30 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request, unless Owner agrees in writing to allow an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data, Contractor shall supplement the written notice provided in accordance with subparagraph a. above with additional supporting data. Such additional data shall include, at a minimum: the amount of compensation requested, itemized in accordance with the procedure set forth herein; specific facts, circumstances, and analysis that confirms not only that Contractor suffered the damages claimed, but that the damages claimed were actually a result of the act, event, or condition complained of and that the Contract Documents provide entitlement to an equitable adjustment to Contractor for such act, event, or condition; and documentation sufficiently detailed to permit an informed analysis of the request by Owner. When the request for compensation relates to a delay, or other change in Contract Time, Contractor shall demonstrate the impact on the critical path, in accordance with Section 7.03C. Failure to provide such additional information and documentation within the time allowed or within the format required shall, to the extent Owner's interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor's right to an equitable adjustment. (d) Contractor to proceed with Work as directed: Pending final resolution of any request made in accordance with this paragraph, unless otherwise agreed in writing, Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Work. (e) Contractor to combine requests for same event together: Any requests by Contractor for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum and in the Contract Time that arise out of the same event(s) shall be submitted together. 3. Methods for calculating Change Order amount:The value of any Work covered by a Change Order, or of any request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum, shall be determined by one of the following methods: a. Fixed Price: On the basis of a fixed price as determined in paragraph 7.02B. b. Unit Prices: By application of unit prices to the quantities of the items involved as determined in paragraph 7.02C. c. Time and Materials: On the basis of time and material as determined in paragraph 7.02D. 4. Fixed price method is default; Owner may direct otherwise: When Owner has requested Contractor to submit a Change Order Proposal, Owner may direct 00 72 00-PAGE 43 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET Section 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS Contractor as to which method in subparagraph 3 above to use when submitting its proposal. Otherwise, Contractor shall determine the value of the Work, or of a request for an equitable adjustment, on the basis of the fixed price method. B. Change Order Pricine— Fixed Price Procedures: When the fixed price method is used to determine the value of any Work covered by a Change Order, or of a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum, the following procedures shall apply: 1. Breakdown and itemization of details on COP: Contractor's Change Order Proposal, or request for adjustment in the Contract Sum, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of the costs, including labor, material, subcontractor costs, and overhead and profit. The costs shall be itemized in the manner set forth below, and shall be submitted on breakdown sheets in a form approved by Owner. 2. Use of industry standards in calculating costs: All costs shall be calculated based upon appropriate industry standard methods of calculating labor, material quantities, and equipment costs such as R.S. Means or other standards acceptable to the Owner and Contractor. 3. Costs contingent on Owner's actions: If any of Contractor's pricing assumptions are contingent upon anticipated actions of Owner, Contractor shall clearly state them in the proposal or request for an equitable adjustment. 4. Markups on additive and deductive Work:The cost of any additive or deductive changes in the Work shall be calculated as set forth below, except that overhead and profit shall not be included on deductive changes in the Work. Where a change in the Work involves additive and deductive work by the same Contractor or Subcontractor, small tools, overhead, profit, bond and insurance markups will apply to the net difference. 5. Breakdown not required if change less than $1,000: If the total cost of the change in the Work or request for equitable adjustment does not exceed $1,000, Contractor shall not be required to submit a breakdown if the description of the change in the Work or request for equitable adjustment is sufficiently definitive for Owner to determine fairvalue. 6. Breakdown required if change between $1,000 and $2,500: If the total cost of the change in the Work or request for equitable adjustment is between $1,000 and $2,500, Contractor may submit a breakdown in the following level of detail if 00 72 00-PAGE 44 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS the description of the change in the Work or if the request for equitable adjustment is sufficiently definitive to permit the Owner to determine fairvalue: a. lump sum labor; b. lump sum material; c. lump sum equipment usage; d. overhead and profit as set forth below;and e. insurance and bond costs as set forth below. 7. Components of increased cost: Any request for adjustment of Contract Sum based upon the fixed price method shall include only the following items: a. Craft labor costs: These are the labor costs determined by multiplying the estimated or actual additional number of craft hours needed to perform the change in the Work by the hourly labor costs. Craft hours should cover direct labor, as well as indirect labor due to trade inefficiencies.The hourly costs shall be based on the following: (1) Basic wages and benefits: Hourly rates and benefits as stated on the Department of Labor and Industries approved "statement of intent to pay prevailing wages" or a higher amount if approved by the Owner. Direct supervision shall be a reasonable percentage not to exceed 15% of the cost of direct labor. No supervision markup shall be allowed for a working supervisor's hours. (2) Worker's insurance: Direct contributions to the City of Renton for industrial insurance; medical aid; and supplemental pension, by the class and rates established by the Department of Labor and Industries. (3) Federal insurance: Direct contributions required by the Federal Insurance Compensation Act; Federal Unemployment Tax Act; and the State Unemployment Compensation Act. (4) Travel allowance: Travel allowance and/or subsistence, if applicable, not exceeding those allowances established by regional labor union agreements, which are itemized and identified separately. (5) Safety: Cost incurred due to the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act, which shall be a reasonable percentage not to exceed 2% 00 72 00-PAGE 45 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS of the sum of the amounts calculated in (1), (2), and (3)above. b. Material costs:This is an itemization of the quantity and cost of materials needed to perform the change in the Work. Material costs shall be developed first from actual known costs, second from supplier quotations or if these are not available, from standard industry pricing guides. Material costs shall consider all available discounts. Freight costs, express charges, or special delivery charges, shall be itemized. C. Equipment costs: This is an itemization of the type of equipment and the estimated or actual length of time the construction equipment appropriate for the Work is or will be used on the change in the Work. Costs will be allowed for construction equipment only if used solely for the changed Work, or for additional rental costs actually incurred by the Contractor. Equipment charges shall be computed on the basis of actual invoice costs or if owned, from the current edition of one of the following sources: (1) The Equipment Watch Fleet Manager Estimator Package (digital). The maximum rate for standby equipment shall not exceed that shown in the Associated General Contractors Washington State Department of Transportation (AGC WSDOT) Equipment Rental Agreement, current edition on the Contract execution date. (2) The National Electrical Contractors Association for equipment used on electrical work. (3) The Mechanical Contractors Association of America for equipment used on mechanical work. The Equipment Watch Rental Rate Blue Book shall be used as a basis for establishing rental rates of equipment not listed in the above sources.The maximum rate for standby equipment shall not exceed that shown in the AGC WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement, current edition on the Contract execution date. d. Allowance for small tools, expendables & consumable supplies: Small tools consist of tools which cost $250 or less and are normally furnished by the performing contractor. The maximum rate for small tools shall not exceed the following: (1) 3%for Contractor: For Contractor, 3% of direct labor costs. (2) 5%for Subcontractors: For Subcontractors, 5% of direct labor costs. Expendables and consumables supplies directly associated with the change in Work must be itemized. 00 72 00-PAGE 46 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS e. Subcontractor costs: This is defined as payments Contractor makes to Subcontractors for changed Work performed by Subcontractors of any tier. The Subcontractors' cost of Work shall be calculated and itemized in the same manner as prescribed herein for Contractor. f. Allowance for overhead: This is defined as costs of any kind attributable to direct and indirect delay, acceleration, or impact, added to the total cost to Owner of any change in the Contract Sum. If the Contractor is compensated under Section 7.03D, the amount of such compensation shall be reduced by the amount Contractor is otherwise entitled to under this subsection (f).This allowance shall compensate Contractor for all non-craft labor, temporary construction facilities, field engineering, schedule updating, as-built drawings, home office cost, B&O taxes, office engineering, estimating costs, additional overhead because of extended time, and any other cost incidental to the change in the Work. It shall be strictly limited in all cases to a reasonable amount, mutually acceptable, or if none can be agreed upon to an amount not to exceed the rates below: (1). Projects less than $3 million: For projects where the Contract Award Amount is under$3 million, the following shall apply: (a) Contractor markup on Contractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work actually performed by Contractor's own forces, 16% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (b) Subcontractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor (including lower tier subcontractors), for any Work actually performed by its own forces, 16% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (c) Contractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For Contractor, for any work performed by its Subcontractor(s) 6% of the first $50,000 of the amount due each Subcontractor, and 4% of the remaining amount if any. (d) Subcontractor markup for lower tier Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor, for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s) of any lower tier, 4% of the first $50,000 of the amount due the sub- Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any. (e) Basis of cost applicable for markup: The cost to which overhead is to be applied shall be developed in accordance with Section 7.02B 7a. —e. (2). Projects more than $3 million: For projects where the Contract Award Amount is equal to or exceeds $3 million, the following shall apply: 00 72 00-PAGE 47 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS (a) Contractor markup on Contractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work actually performed by Contractor's own forces, 12% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (b) Subcontractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor (including lower tier subcontractors), for any Work actually performed by its own forces, 12% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (c) Contractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s), 4% of the first $50,000 of the amount due each Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any. (d) Subcontractor markup for lower tier Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor, for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s) of any lower tier, 4% of the first $50,000 of the amount due the sub- Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any. (e) Basis of cost applicable for markup: The cost to which overhead is to be applied shall be developed in accordance with Section 7.02B 7a. —e. g. Allowance for profit: Allowance for profit is an amount to be added to the cost of any change in contract sum, but not to the cost of change in Contract Time for which contractor has been compensated pursuant to the conditions set forth in Section 7.03. It shall be limited to a reasonable amount, mutually acceptable, or if none can be agreed upon, to an amount not to exceed the rates below: (1) Contractor/Subcontractor markup for self-performed Work: For Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier for work performed by their forces, 6% of the cost developed in accordance with Section 7.02B 7a. — e. (2) Contractor/Subcontractor markup for Work performed at lower tier: For Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier for work performed by a subcontractor of a lower tier, 4% of the subcontract cost developed in accordance with Section 7.02B 7a. —h. h. Insurance and bond premiums: Cost of change in insurance or bond premium: This is defined as: (1) Contractor's liability insurance: The cost of any changes in Contractor's liability insurance arising directly from execution of the Change Order; 00 72 00-PAGE 48 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS and (2) Payment and Performance Bond: The cost of the additional premium for Contractor's bond arising directly from the changed Work. The cost of any change in insurance or bond premium shall be added after overhead and allowance for profit are calculated in accordance with subparagraph f. and gabove. C. Change Order Pricine— Unit Prices 1. Content of Owner authorization: Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform Work on a unit-price basis, Owner's authorization shall clearlystate: a. Scope: Scope of work to be performed; b. Reimbursement basis: Type of reimbursement including pre-agreed rates for material quantities; and C. Reimbursement limit: Cost limit of reimbursement. 2. Contractor responsibilities: Contractor shall: a. Cooperate with Owner and assist in monitoring the Work being performed. As requested by Owner, Contractor shall identify workers assigned to the Change Order Work and areas in which they are working; b. Leave access as appropriate for quantity measurement;and C. Not exceed any cost limit(s) without Owner's prior written approval. 3. Cost breakdown consistent with Fixed Price requirements: Contractor shall submit costs in accordance with paragraph 7.02B and satisfy the following requirements: a. Unit prices must include overhead, profit, bond and insurance premiums: Unit prices shall include reimbursement for all direct and indirect costs of the Work, including overhead, profit, bond, and insurance costs;and b. Owner verification of quantities: Quantities must be supported by field measurement statements signed by Owner. 00 72 00-PAGE 49 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS D. Change Order Pricing—Time-and-Material Prices 1. Content of Owner authorization: Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform Work on a time-and-material basis, Owner's authorization shall clearly state: a. Scope: Scope of Work to be performed; b. Reimbursement basis: Type of reimbursement including pre-agreed rates, if any, for material quantities or labor;and C. Reimbursement limit: Cost limit of reimbursement. 2. Contractor responsibilities: Contractor shall: a. Identify workers assigned: Cooperate with Owner and assist in monitoring the Work being performed. As requested by Owner, identify workers assigned to the Change Order Work and areas in which they are working; b. Provide daily timesheets: Identify on daily time sheets all labor performed in accordance with this authorization. Submit copies of daily time sheets within 2 working days for Owner's review. C. Allow Owner to measure quantities: Leave access as appropriate for quantity measurement; d. Perform Work efficiently: Perform all Work in accordance with this section as efficiently as possible;and e. Not exceed Owner's cost limit: Not exceed any cost limit(s) without Owner's prior written approval. 3. Cost breakdown consistent with Fixed Price requirements: Contractor shall submit costs in accordance with paragraph 7.02B and additional verification supported by: a. Timesheets: Labor detailed on daily time sheets;and b. Invoices: Invoices for material. 00 72 00-PAGE 50 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS 7.3 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACTTIME A. COP requests for Contract Time:The Contract Time shall only be changed by a Change Order. Contractor shall include any request for a change in the Contract Time in its Change Order Proposal. B. Time extension permitted if not Contractor's fault: If the time of Contractor's performance is changed due to an act of Force Majeure, or due to the fault or negligence of Owner or anyone for whose acts Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time in accordance with the following procedure. No adjustment in the Contract Time shall be allowed to the extent Contractor's changed time of performance is due to the fault or negligence of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible. 1. Notice and record keeping for Contract Time request: A request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered within 7 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request. If Contractor believes it is entitled to adjustment of Contract Time, Contractor shall immediately notify Owner and begin to keep and maintain complete, accurate, and specific daily records. Contractor shall give Owner access to any such record and if requested, shall promptly furnish copies of such record to Owner. 2. Timing and content of Contractor's Notice: Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time for any events that occurred more than 7 Days before Contractor's written notice to Owner. The written notice shall set forth, at a minimum, a description of: the event giving rise to the request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time; the nature of the impacts to Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier, if any; and to the extent possible the amount of the adjustment in Contract Time requested. Failure to properly give such written notice shall, to the extent Owner's interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor's right to an equitable adjustment. 3. Contractor to provide supplemental information: Within 30 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request, unless Owner agrees in writing to allow an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data, Contractor shall supplement the written notice provided in accordance with subparagraph 7.0313.2 with additional supporting data. Such additional data shall include, at a minimum: the amount of delay claimed, itemized in accordance with the procedure set forth herein; specific facts, circumstances, and analysis that confirms not only that Contractor suffered the delay claimed, but that the delay claimed was actually a result of the act, event, or condition complained of, and that the Contract Documents provide entitlement to an equitable adjustment in Contract Time for such act, event, or condition; and supporting documentation 00 72 00-PAGE 51 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS sufficiently detailed to permit an informed analysis of the request by Owner. Failure to provide such additional information and documentation within the time allowed or within the format required shall, to the extent Owner's interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor's right to an equitable adjustment. 4. Contractor to proceed with Work as directed: Pending final resolution of any request in accordance with this paragraph, unless otherwise agreed in writing, Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Work. C. Contractor to demonstrate impact on critical path of schedule: Any change in the Contract Time covered by a Change Order, or based on a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time, shall be limited to the change in the critical path of Contractor's schedule attributable to the change of Work or event(s) giving rise to the request for equitable adjustment. Any Change Order Proposal or request for an adjustment in the Contract Time shall demonstrate the impact on the critical path of the schedule. Contractor shall be responsible for showing clearly on the Progress Schedule that the change or event: had a specific impact on the critical path, and except in case of concurrent delay, was the sole cause of such impact; and could not have been avoided by resequencing of the Work or other reasonable alternatives. D. Cost of change in Contract Time: Contractor may request compensation for the cost of a change in Contract Time in accordance with this paragraph, 7.03D, subject to the followingconditions: 1. Must be solely fault of Owner or A/E. The change in Contract Time shall solely be caused by the fault or negligence of Owner orA/E; 2. Procedures: Contractor shall follow the procedure set forth in paragraph 7.0313; 3. Demonstrate impact on critical path: Contractor shall establish the extent of the change in Contract Time in accordance with paragraph 7.03C;and 4. Limitations on daily costs: The daily cost of any change in Contract Time shall be limited to the items below, less the amount of any change in the Contract Sum the Contractor may otherwise be entitled to pursuant to Section 7.02B 7f for any change in the Work that contributed to this change in Contract Time: a. Non-productive supervision or labor: cost of nonproductive field supervision or labor extended because of delay; b. Weekly meetings and indirect activities: cost of weekly meetings or similar indirect activities extended because of the delay; 00 72 00-PAGE 52 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS C. Temporary facilities or equipment rental: cost of temporary facilities or equipment rental extended because of the delay; d. Insurance premiums: cost of insurance extended because of the delay; e. Overhead: general and administrative overhead in an amount to be agreed upon, but not to exceed 3% of the Contract Award Amount divided by the originally specified Contract Time for each Day of the delay. PART 8—CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION 8.1 CLAIMS PROCEDURE A. Claim is Contractor's remedy: If the parties fail to reach agreement on the terms of any Change Order for Owner-directed Work as provided in Section 7.01, or on the resolution of any request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum as provided in Section 7.02 or the Contract Time as provided in Section 7.03, Contractor's only remedy shall be to file a Claim with Owner as provided in this section. B. Claim filing deadline for Contractor: Contractor shall file its Claim within 120 Days from Owner's final offer made in accordance with paragraph 7.01E, or by the date of Final Acceptance, whichever occurs first. C. Claim must cover all costs and be documented: The Claim shall be deemed to cover all changes in cost and time (including direct, indirect, impact, and consequential) to which Contractor may be entitled. It shall be fully substantiated and documented. At a minimum, the Claim shall contain the following information: 1. Factual statement of Claim: A detailed factual statement of the Claim for additional compensation and time, if any, providing all necessary dates, locations, and items of Work affected by the Claim; 2. Dates: The date on which facts arose which gave rise to the Claim; 3. Owner and A/E employee's knowledgeable about Claim:The name of each employee of Owner or A/E knowledgeable about the Claim; 4. Support from Contract Documents: The specific provisions of the Contract Documents which support the Claim; 00 72 00-PAGE 53 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS 5. Identification of other supporting information: The identification of any documents and the substance of any oral communications that support the Claim; 6. Copies of supporting documentation: Copies of any identified documents, other than the Contract Documents, that support the Claim; 7. Details on Claim for Contract Time: If an adjustment in the Contract Time is sought: the specific days and dates for which it is sought; the specific reasons Contractor believes an extension in the Contract Time should be granted; and Contractor's analysis of its Progress Schedule to demonstrate the reason for the extension in Contract Time; 8. Details on Claim for adjustment of Contract Sum: If an adjustment in the Contract Sum is sought, the exact amount sought and a breakdown of that amount into the categories set forth in, and in the detail as required by Section 7.02; and 9. Statement certifying Claim: A statement certifying, under penalty of perjury, that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting cost and pricing data are true and accurate to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief, that the Claim is fully supported by the accompanying data, and that the amount requested accurately reflects the adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time for which Contractor believes Owner is liable. D. Owner's response to Claim filed: After Contractor has submitted a fully documented Claim that complies with all applicable provisions of Parts 7 and 8, Owner shall respond, in writing, to Contractor as follows: 1. Response time for Claim less than $50,000: If the Claim amount is less than $50,000, with a decision within 60 Days from the date the Claim is received;or 2. Response time for Claim of$50,000 or more: If the Claim amount is $50,000 or more, with a decision within 60 Days from the date the Claim is received, or with notice to Contractor of the date by which it will render its decision. Owner will then respond with a written decision in such additional time. E. Owner's review of Claim and finality of decision: To assist in the review of Contractor's Claim, Owner may visit the Project site, or request additional information, in order to fully evaluate the issues raised by the Claim. Contractor shall proceed with performance of the Work pending final resolution of any Claim. Owner's written decision as set forth above shall be final and conclusive as to all matters set forth in the Claim, unless 00 72 00-PAGE 54 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS Contractor follows the procedure set forth in Section 8.02. F. Waiver of Contractor rights for failure to comply with this Section: Any Claim of the Contractor against the Owner for damages, additional compensation, or additional time, shall be conclusively deemed to have been waived by the Contractor unless made in accordance with the requirements of this Section. 8.2 ARBITRATION A. Timing of Contractor's demand for arbitration: If Contractor disagrees with Owner's decision rendered in accordance with paragraph 8.01D, Contractor shall provide Owner with a written demand for arbitration. No demand for arbitration of any such Claim shall be made later than 30 Days after the date of Owner's decision on such Claim; failure to demand arbitration within said 30 Day period shall result in Owner's decision being final and binding upon Contractor and its Subcontractors. B. Filing of Notice for arbitration: Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed with the American Arbitration Association (AAA), with a copy provided to Owner. The parties shall negotiate or mediate under the Voluntary Construction Mediation Rules of the AAA, or mutually acceptable service, before seeking arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of AAA asfollows: 1. Claims less than $30,000: Disputes involving $30,000 or less shall be conducted in accordance with the Northwest Region Expedited Commercial Arbitration Rules;or 2. Claims greater than $30,000: Disputes over$30,000 shall be conducted in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the AAA, unless the parties agree to use the expedited rules. C. Arbitration is forum for resolving Claims: All Claims arising out of the Work shall be resolved by arbitration. The judgment upon the arbitration award may be entered, or review of the award may occur, in the superior court having jurisdiction thereof. No independent legal action relating to or arising from the Work shall be maintained. D. Settlement outside of arbitration to be documented in Change Order: If the parties resolve the Claim prior to arbitration judgment, the terms of the resolution shall be incorporated in a Change Order. The Change Order shall constitute full payment and final settlement of the Claim, including all claims for time and for direct, indirect, or consequential costs, including costs of delays, inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency orproductivity. 00 72 00-PAGE 55 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS 8.3 CLAIMS AUDITS A. Owner may audit Claims: All Claims filed against Owner shall be subject to audit at any time following the filing of the Claim. Failure of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, to maintain and retain sufficient records to allow Owner to verify all or a portion of the Claim or to permit Owner access to the books and records of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, shall constitute a waiver of the Claim and shall bar any recovery. B. Contractor to make documents available: In support of Owner audit of any Claim, Contractor shall, upon request, promptly make available to Owner the following documents: 1. Daily time sheets and supervisor's daily reports; 2. Collective bargaining agreements; 3. Insurance, welfare, and benefits records; 4. Payroll registers; 5. Earnings records; 6. Payroll tax forms; 7. Material invoices, requisitions, and delivery confirmations; 8. Material cost distribution worksheet; 9. Equipment records (list of company equipment, rates,etc.); 10. Vendors', rental agencies', Subcontractors', and agents' invoices; 11. Contracts between Contractor and each of its Subcontractors, and all lower-tier Subcontractor contracts and supplier contracts; 12. Subcontractors' and agents' payment certificates; 13. Cancelled checks (payroll and vendors); 14. Job cost report, including monthlytotals; 00 72 00-PAGE 56 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS 15. Job payroll ledger; 16. Planned resource loading schedules and summaries; 17. General ledger; 18. Cash disbursements journal; 19. Financial statements for all years reflecting the operations on the Work. In addition, the Owner may require, if it deems it appropriate, additional financial statements for 3 years preceding execution of the Work; 20. Depreciation records on all company equipment whether these records are maintained by the company involved, its accountant, or others; 21. If a source other than depreciation records is used to develop costs for Contractor's internal purposes in establishing the actual cost of owning and operating equipment, all such other source documents; 22. All non-privileged documents which relate to each and every Claim together with all documents which support the amount of any adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract Time sought by each Claim; 23. Work sheets or software used to prepare the Claim establishing the cost components for items of the Claim including but not limited to labor, benefits and insurance, materials, equipment, Subcontractors, all documents which establish the time periods, individuals involved, the hours for the individuals, and the rates for the individuals;and 24. Work sheets, software, and all other documents used by Contractor to prepare its bid. C. Contractor to provide facilities for audit and shall cooperate: The audit may be performed by employees of Owner or a representative of Owner. Contractor, and its Subcontractors, shall provide adequate facilities acceptable to Owner, for the audit during normal business hours. Contractor, and all Subcontractors, shall make a good faith effort to cooperate with Owner's auditors. 00 72 00-PAGE 57 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 9—TERMINATION OF THE WORK 9.1 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE A. 7 Day Notice to Terminate for Cause: Owner may, upon 7 Days written notice to Contractor and to its surety, terminate (without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the Work, or any part of it, for cause upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events: 1. Contractor fails to prosecute Work: Contractor fails to prosecute the Work or any portion thereof with sufficient diligence to ensure Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time; 2. Contractor bankrupt: Contractor is adjudged bankrupt, makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency; 3. Contractor fails to correct Work: Contractor fails in a material way to replace or correct Work not in conformance with the Contract Documents; 4. Contractor fails to supply workers or materials: Contractor repeatedly fails to supply skilled workers or proper materials or equipment; 5. Contractor failure to pay Subcontractors or labor: Contractor repeatedly fails to make prompt payment due to Subcontractors or for labor; 6. Contractor violates laws: Contractor materially disregards or fails to comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction;or 7. Contractor in material breach of Contract: Contractor is otherwise in material breach of any provision of the Contract Documents. B. Owner's actions upon termination: Upon termination, Owner may at itsoption: 1. Take possession of Project site:Take possession of the Project site and take possession of or use all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by Contractor to maintain the orderly progress of, and to finish, the Work; 2. Accept assignment of Subcontracts: Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant 00 72 00-PAGE 58 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS to Section 5.20; and 3. Finish the Work: Finish the Work by whatever other reasonable method it deems expedient. C. Surety's role: Owner's rights and duties upon termination are subject to the prior rights and duties of the surety, if any, obligated under any bond provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. Contractor's required actions: When Owner terminates the Work in accordance with this section, Contractor shall take the actions set forth in paragraph 9.02B, and shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is accepted. E. Contractor to pay for unfinished Work: If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the cost of finishing the Work, including compensation for A/E's services and expenses made necessary thereby and any other extra costs or damages incurred by Owner in completing the Work, or as a result of Contractor's actions, such excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. These obligations for payment shall survive termination. F. Contractor and Surety still responsible for Work performed: Termination of the Work in accordance with this section shall not relieve Contractor or its surety of any responsibilities for Work performed. G. Conversion of"Termination for Cause" to "Termination for Convenience": If Owner terminates Contractor for cause and it is later determined that none of the circumstances set forth in paragraph 9.01A exist, then such termination shall be deemed a termination for convenience pursuant to Section 9.02. 9.2 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE A. Owner Notice of Termination for Convenience: Owner may, upon written notice, terminate (without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the Work, or any part of it, for the convenience of Owner. B. Contractor response to termination Notice: Unless Owner directs otherwise, after receipt of a written notice of termination for either cause or convenience, Contractor shall promptly: 1. Cease Work: Stop performing Work on the date and as specified in the notice of termination; 2. No further orders or Subcontracts: Place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, equipment, services or facilities, except as may be necessary for 00 72 00-PAGE 59 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS completion of such portion of the Work as is not terminated; 3. Cancel orders and Subcontracts: Cancel all orders and subcontracts, upon terms acceptable to Owner, to the extent that they relate to the performance of Work terminated; 4. Assign orders and Subcontracts to Owner: Assign to Owner all of the right, title, and interest of Contractor in all orders and subcontracts; 5. Take action to protect the Work: Take such action as may be necessary or as directed by Owner to preserve and protect the Work, Project site, and any other property related to this Project in the possession of Contractor in which Owner has an interest;and 6. Continue performance not terminated: Continue performance only to the extent not terminated C. Terms of adjustment in Contract Sum if Contract terminated: If Owner terminates the Work or any portion thereof for convenience, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable adjustment for its reasonable direct costs incurred prior to the effective date of the termination, plus reasonable allowance for overhead and profit on Work performed prior to termination, plus the reasonable administrative costs of the termination, but shall not be entitled to any other costs or damages, whatsoever, provided however, the total sum payable upon termination shall not exceed the Contract Sum reduced by prior payments. Contractor shall be required to make its request in accordance with the provisions of Part7. D. Owner to determine whether to adjust Contract Time: If Owner terminates the Work or any portion thereof for convenience, the Contract Time shall be adjusted as determined by Owner. PART 10—MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 10.1 GOVERNING LAW Applicable law and venue: The Contract Documents and the rights of the parties herein shall be governed by the laws of the State of Washington and the City of Renton. Venue shall be in King county. 10.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS Bound to successors; Assignment of Contract: Owner and Contractor respectively bind 00 72 00-PAGE 60 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party shall assign the Work without written consent of the other, except that Contractor may assign the Work for security purposes, to a bank or lending institution authorized to do business in the City of Renton. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations set forth in the Contract Documents. 10.3 MEANING OF WORDS Meaning of words used in Specifications: Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. Reference to standard specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to the code of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall be to the latest standard specification, manual, or code in effect on the date for submission of bids, except as may be otherwise specifically stated. Wherever in these Drawings and Specifications an article, device, or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular manner, such reference shall apply to as many such articles as are shown on the drawings, or required to complete the installation. 10.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES No waiver of rights: No action or failure to act by Owner or A/E shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract Documents, nor shall action or failure to act constitute approval or an acquiescence in a breach therein, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 10.6 CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION Contractor must be registered or licensed: Pursuant to RCW 39.06, Contractor shall be registered or licensed as required by the laws of the City of Renton, including but not limited to RCW 18.27. 10.6 TIME COMPUTATIONS Computing time: When computing any period of time, the day of the event from which the period of time begins shall not be counted. The last day is counted unless it falls on a weekend or legal holiday, in which event the period runs until the end of the next day that is not a weekend or holiday. When the period of time allowed is less than 7 days, intermediate Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays are excluded from the computation. 00 72 00-PAGE 61 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS 10.7 RECORDS RETENTION / PUBLIC RECORDS REQUESTS A. Six-year records retention period: The wage, payroll, and cost records of Contractor, and its Subcontractors, and all records subject to audit in accordance with Section 8.03, shall be retained for a period of not less than 6 years after the date of Final Acceptance. B. Record Keeping and Reporting: Contractor shall maintain accounts and records, which properly reflect all direct and indirect costs expended and Services provided in the performance of this Agreement. The Contractor agrees to provide access to and copies of any records related to this Agreement as required by the City to audit expenditures and charges and/or to comply with the Washington State Public Records Act (Chapter 42.56 RCW). C. Public Records Compliance. To the full extent the City determines necessary to comply with the Washington State Public Records Act, Contractor shall make a due diligent search of all records in its possession, including, but not limited to, e-mail, correspondence, notes, saved telephone messages, recordings, photos, or drawings and provide them to the City for production. In the event Contractor believes said records need to be protected from disclosure, it shall, at Contractor's own expense, seek judicial protection. Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the City for all costs, including attorneys' fees, attendant to any claim or litigation related to a Public Records Act request for which Contractor has responsive records and for which Contractor has withheld records or information contained therein, or not provided them to the City in a timely manner. Contractor shall produce for distribution any and all records responsive to the Public Records Act request in a timely manner, unless those records are protected by court order. 10.8 THIRD-PARTY AGREEMENTS No third-party relationships created:The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind between: A/E and Contractor; Owner and any Subcontractor; or any persons other than Owner and Contractor. 10.9 ANTITRUST ASSIGNMENT Contractor assigns overcharge amounts to Owner: Owner and Contractor recognize that in actual economic practice, overcharges resulting from antitrust violations are in fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore, Contractor hereby assigns to Owner any and all claims for such overcharges as to goods, materials, and equipment purchased in connection with the Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, except as to overcharges which result from antitrust violations commencing after the Contract Sum is established and which are not passed on to Owner under a Change Order. Contractor shall put a similar clause in its Subcontracts, and require a similar clause in its sub- Subcontracts, such that all claims for such overcharges on the Work are passed to Owner by Contractor. 00 72 00-PAGE 62 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 72 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GENERAL CONDITIONS 10.10 HEADINGS AND CAPTIONS Headings for convenience only: All headings and captions used in these General Conditions are only for convenience of reference, and shall not be used in any way in connection with the meaning, effect, interpretation, construction, or enforcement of the General Conditions, and do not define the limit or describe the scope or intent of any provision of these General Conditions. 10.11 DIVERSE BUSINESS PARTICIPATION The City of Renton encourages participation in all of its contracts by Diverse Businesses as found in RCW Chapters 39, 43, and WAC 326. The voluntary Diverse Business goal of 26%, which is an aggregate of: 10% Minority Business Enterprises (MBE), 6% Women Business Enterprises (WBE), 5%Veteran-owned Business, and 5% Washington Small Businesses self- identified in the Washington Electronic Business Solution (WEBS): http://www.des.wa.gov/services/ContractingPurchasing/Business/Pages/WEBSRegistration.asp X. Contractors are encouraged to meet or exceed the project goals in the advertisement by any level of participation, regardless of category. END OF SECTION 00 72 00-PAGE 63 OF 63 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 73 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1.1 NON-DISCRIMINATION LAWS A. Comply with all applicable federal, state and local nondiscrimination laws and/or policies, including but not limited to the Americans with Disabilities Act; Civil Rights Act; and the Age Discrimination Act. 1.2 WAGES AND JOB SAFETY A. Comply with all applicable laws, regulations and policies of the United States, State of Washington, and City of Renton which affect wages and job safety. State Prevailing Wage Laws (RCW 39.12) or federal Davis-Bacon Act, as amended, (40 U.S.C. 3141-3148); whichever is greater, are applicable, to comply with such laws, to pay the prevailing rate of wage to all workers, laborers, mechanics employed in the performance of any part of this contract. B. File a Statement of Intent to pay prevailing wage with the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries as required by RCW 39.12.040. Comply with the provisions of the rules and regulations of the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries. 1.3 DISBARMENT AND CERTIFICATION A. Do not enter into any agreements or arrangements related to this Agreement with any party that is on the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries "Debarred Contractor List" and/or debarred on the federal System for Award Management (SAM) Federal Contractor Registration. 1.4 RECORD MAINTENANCE A. Maintain all books, records, documents, data, and other evidence relating to this Agreement and performance of services, as described herein. Retain such records for a period of six (6) years from the date of Final Acceptance. 1.5 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY A. In accordance to 41 C.F.R. Part 60. B. Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Requirements 1. Comply with the requirements of the EPA's Utilization of Small, Minority, and Women's Business Enterprises in this work. 2. Minority and Women's Business Participation —solicit and recruit, to the maximum extent possible, certified minority owned (MBE) and women owned (WBE) businesses. Meeting the goals is voluntary, achievement of these goals is 007300-PAGE 1OF3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 73 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS encouraged and all Bidders/Contractors or organizations submitting qualifications shall take the following affirmative steps in procurement of goods and services: a. Included qualified minority and women's businesses on solicitation lists. b. Assure qualified minority and women's businesses are solicited whenever they are potential sources for services or supplies. c. Divide the total requirements, when economically feasible, into smaller tasks or quantities, to permit maximum participation by qualified minority and women's businesses. d. Establish delivery scheduled, where work requirements permit, which will encourage participation of qualified minority and women's businesses. e. Use the services and assistance of the State Office of Minority and Women's Business Enterprises (OMWBE) and the Office of Minority Business Enterprises of the U.S. Department of Commerce, as appropriate. 3. MBE/WBE Goals: a. Purchased Goods—8% MBE 4% WBE b. Purchased Services— 10% MBE 4% WBE c. Professional Services— 10% MBE 4% WBE 4. MBE/WBE Reporting. In accordance with the deviation from 40 C.F.R. 33.502, signed November 8, 2013. 1.6 CONTRACT ANTI-KICKBACK A. Comply with the Copeland "Anti-Kickback" Act (40 U.S.C. 3145), prohibits from inducing, by any means, any person employed in the construction, completion, or repair of public work, to give up any part of the compensation to which he or she is entitled. 1.7 CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT(40 U.S.C. 3701-3708) A. Employment of mechanics and laborers must be in compliance with 40 U.S.C. 3702, each contractor must be required to compute the wages of every mechanic and laborer on the basis of a standard work week of 40 hours. Work in excess of the standard work week is permissible provided that the worker is compensated at a rate of not less than one and a half times the basic rate of pay for all hours in excess of 40 hours in the work week. B. In accordance to 40 U.S.C. 3704, no laborer or mechanic must be required to work in surroundings or under conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous. 1.8 CLEAN AIR ACT AND FEDERAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ACT A. Comply with all applicable standards, orders, or regulations issued pursuant to the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7401-7671 q.) and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act (33 U.S.C. 1251-1387), as amended. 007300-PAGE 2 OF3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 73 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1.9 HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL ARTIFACTS A. In the event that historical or cultural artifacts are discovered at the Project site during construction, construction shall immediately stop and notify the local historical preservation officer and the state historical perseveration officer and the Washington State Department of Archaeology and Historic Preservation. END OF SECTION 007300-PAGE 3 OF 3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 80 00 27 AUGUST 2019 FORMS SECTION 00 80 00 FORMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 FORMS The following forms are included: A. Bid Bond Form B. Conract Bond to the City of Renton C. Sample Agreement Form D. Certification for Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes E. Non-Collusion, Anti-trust and Minimum Wage Form PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) 00 80 00-PAGE 1 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 80 00 27 AUGUST 2019 FORMS . BID BOND FORM Herewith find deposit in the form of a certified check, cashier's check, cash, or bid bond in the amount of$ , which amount is not less than five percent (5%) of the total bid. Sign here: Know All Men by These Presents: That we, , as Principal, and as Surety, are held and firmly bound until the City of Renton, as Obligee, in the penal sum of Dollars, for the payment of which the Principal and the Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,jointly and severally, by these presents. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Obligee shall make any award to the Principal for according to the terms of the proposal or bid made by the Principal therefor, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of said proposal or bid and award and shall give bond for the faithful performance thereof, with Surety or Sureties approved by the Obligee; or if the Principal shall, in case of failure to do so, pay and forfeit to the Obligee the penal amount of the deposit specified in the call for bids, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect and the Surety shall forthwith pay and forfeit to the Obligee, as penalty and liquidated damages, the amount of this bond. SIGNED, SEALED AND DATED THIS DAY OF , 20_ 00 80 00-PAGE 2 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 80 00 27 AUGUST 2019 FORMS Principal Surety Received return of deposit in the sum of$ 00 80 00-PAGE 3 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 80 00 27 AUGUST 2019 FORMS CONTRACT BOND TO THE CITY OF RENTON KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned as principal, and corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of as a surety corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become surety upon bonds of contractors with municipal corporations, as surety are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the City of Renton in the penal sum $ for the payment of which sum on demand we bind ourselves and our successors, heirs, administrators or person representatives, as the case may be. This obligation is entered into in pursuant of the statutes of the State of Washington, the Ordinance of the City of Renton. Dated at Washington, this day of , 20 Nevertheless, the conditions of the above obligation are such that: WHEREAS, under and pursuant to Contract No. providing for construction of Sunset Neighborhood Park, Phase II ; the principal has accepted, or is about to accept, the contract, the undertake to perform the work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth; NOW, THEREFORE, this Performance and Payment Bond shall be satisfied and released only upon the condition that Principal: • Faithfully performs all provisions of the Contract and changes authorized by Owner in the manner and within the time specified as may be extended under the Contract; • Pays all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, lower tier subcontractors, material persons, 00 80 00-PAGE 4 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 80 00 27 AUGUST 2019 FORMS and all other persons or agents who supply labor, equipment, or materials to the Project; • Indemnifies and holds Owner, its officers, and agents harmless from and against all claims, liabilities, causes of action, damages, and costs for such payments for labor, equipment, and materials by satisfying all claims and demands incurred under the Contract, and reimbursing and paying Owner all expenses that Owner may incur in making good any default by Principal; and • Indemnifies and holds Owner harmless from all claims, liabilities, causes of action, damages and costs, including property damages and personal injuries, resulting from any defect appearing or developing in the material provided or workmanship performed under the Contract. • Pays all taxes incurred on said contract under title 50 and 51 Revised Code of Washington (RCW) and all taxes imposed on the Principle under Title 82 RCW. The indemnities to Owner shall also inure to the benefit of the Consulting Engineers and other design professionals retained by Owner in connection with the Project. No change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to be performed under the Contract shall in any way affect Surety's obligation on the Performance Bond. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract or the Work. This Contract Bond shall be governed and construed by the laws of the State of Washington, and venue shall be in King County, Washington. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this instrument in two (2) identical counterparts this day of 120 Principal Surety Signature Signature Title Title Name and address of local office of agent and/or Surety Company: 00 80 00-PAGE 5 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 80 00 27 AUGUST 2019 FORMS 0. AGREEMENT CONTRACT NO. [Enter Contract#] THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this [Enter Date] day of [Enter Month], [Enter Year] by and between the CITY OF RENTON, Washington, a municipal corporation of the State of Washington, hereinafter referred to as "City" and [Enter Contractor name], hereinafter referred to as "Contractor." Now, therefore the parties agree as follows: 1. Agreement. This agreement incorporates the following documents as if fully set forth herein: the 2016 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, as prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the Washington State Chapter of the American Public Works Association, including all published amendments issued by those organizations ("Standard Specifications"); the City's Contract Bid Documents for the Project, including but not limited to Addenda, Proposal Form, Special Provisions, Contract Plans, and Amendments to the Standard Specifications; Contractor's Proposal and all documents submitted therewith in response to the City's Call for Bids Documents; and any additional documents referenced as comprising the Contract and Contract Documents in Section 1-04.2 of the Standard Specifications, as revised by the Amendments and Special Provisions included with the City's Call for Bids and Contract Documents. 2. Project. Contractor shall complete all work and furnish all labor, tools, materials, and equipment for the project entitled [Enter Project name], [Enter Project number], including all changes to the Work and force account work, in accordance with the Contract Documents, as described in Section 1-04.2 of the Special Provisions. 3. Payments. City shall pay Contractor at the unit and lump sum prices, and by force account as specified in the Proposal according to the Contract Documents as to time, manner, and condition of payment in a contract amount not to exceed $ , unless modified by an approved change order or addendum. The payments to Contractor include the costs for all labor, tools, materials and equipment for the Work. 4. Completion Dote. Contract time shall commence upon City's Notice to Proceed to Contractor. The Work under this Agreement shall be completed within the time specified in the Contract Bid Documents. If the Physical Work under this Agreement is not completed within the time specified, Contractor shall pay liquidated damages and all engineering inspection and supervision costs to City as specified in the Contract Bid Documents. 00 80 00-PAGE 6 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 80 00 27 AUGUST 2019 FORMS 5. Attorney's Fees. In the event litigation is commenced to enforce this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover its costs, including reasonable attorney's and expert witness fees. 6. Disclaimer. No liability of Contractor shall attach to City by reason of entering into this Agreement, except as expressly provided in this Agreement. 7. Counterports. This Agreement is executed in two (2) identical counterparts, by the parties, each of which shall for all purposes be deemed an original. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the City has caused these presents to be signed by its Mayor and attested by its City Clerk and the Contractor has hereunto set his hand and seal the day and year first above-written. CONTRACTOR: CITY OF RENTON: President/Partner/Owner Denis Law, Mayor ATTEST Secretary Jason Seth, City Clerk FIRM INFORMATION d/b/a [Enter Firm name] CHECK ONE: ❑ Limited Liability Company ❑ Partnership ❑ Corporation STATE OF INCORPORATION: [Enter state of incorporation] 00 80 00—PAGE 7 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 80 00 27 AUGUST 2019 FORMS CONTRACTOR CONTACT INFORMATION: CITY CONTACT INFORMATION: [Address Line 1] City of Renton [Address Line 2] 1055 South Grady Way [City, State and Zip] Renton, WA 98057 [Enter Phone Number] [Enter Phone Number] [Enter Fax Number or Email Address] [Enter Fax Number or Email Address] Attention: If business is a CORPORATION,the name of the corporation should be listed in full and both the President and Secretary must sign the contract.OR,if one signature is permitted by corporation by-laws,a copy of the by-laws shall be furnished to the City and made a part of the contract document. If the business is a PARTNERSHIP,the full name of each partner should be listed followed by d/b/a (doing business as)and firm or trade name. Any one partner may sign the contract. If the business is an limited Liability Company,an authorized managing member or manager must sign followed by his/her title. [Enter Project Name Line 1] [Enter Agreement Name] [Enter Project Name Line 2(if needed)] [Enter Date] 00 80 00—PAGE 8 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 80 00 27 AUGUST 2019 FORMS 0. CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH WAGE PAYMENT STATUTES The bidder hereby certifies that, within the three-year period immediately preceding the bid solicitation date, the bidder is not a "willful"violator, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, of any provision of chapters 49.46,49.48, or 49.52 RCW, as determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the Department of Labor and Industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction. I certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of Washington that the foregoing is true and correct. Bidder's Business Name Signature of Authorized Official* Printed Name Title Date City State Check One: Sole Proprietorship ❑ Partnership ❑ Joint Venture ❑ Corporation ❑ LLC ❑ State of Incorporation, or if not a corporation, State where business entity was formed: If a co-partnership, give firm name under which business is transacted: *If a corporation,proposal must be executed in the corporate name by the president or vice-president(or any other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign). If a co-partnership,proposal must be executed by a partner. 00 80 00—PAGE 9 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 80 00 27 AUGUST 2019 FORMS NON-COLLUSION,ANTI-TRUST,AND MINIMUM WAGE FORM NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT Being duly sworn, deposes and says, that he is the identical person who submitted the forgoing proposal or bid, and that such bid is genuine and not sham or collusive or made in the interest or on behalf of any person not therein named, and further, that the deponent has not directly induced or solicited any other Bidder on the foregoing work or equipment to put in a sham bid, or any other person or corporation to refrain from bidding, and that deponent has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure to himself or to any other person any advantage over the other Bidder or Bidders. AND CERTIFICATION RE: ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER Vendor and purchaser recognize that in actual economic practice overcharges resulting from anti-trust violations are in fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore, vendor hereby assigns to purchaser any and all claims for such overcharges as to goods and materials purchased in connection with this order or contract, except as to overcharges resulting from anti-trust violations commencing after the date of the bid, quotation, or other event establishing the price under this order or contract. In addition, vendor warrants and represents that such of his suppliers and subcontractors shall assign any and all such claims to purchaser, subject to the aforementioned exception. AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT FORM I, the undersigned, having been duly sworn, deposed, say and certify that in connection with the performance of the work of this project, I will pay each classification of laborer, workman, or mechanic employed in the performance of such work; not less than the prevailing rate of wage or not less than the minimum rate of wages as specified in the principal contract: that I have read the above and foregoing statement and certificate, know the contents thereof and the substance as set forth therein is true to my knowledge and belief. 00 80 00-PAGE 10 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 00 80 00 27 AUGUST 2019 FORMS FOR: NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT, ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT Name of Project Name of Bidder's Firm Signature of Authorized Representative of Bidder Subscribed and sworn to before me on this day of , 20_ Notary Public in and for the State of Washington Residing at: END OF SECTION 00 80 00-PAGE 11 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 010100 27 AUGUST 2019 SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01 01 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Description of the Work. 2. Special work requirements. 3. Coordination. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. This Section applies to all Technical Specification Sections, and supplements the General Conditions. B. Description of the Work: Work includes earthwork, utility installation, picnic pavilion and pergola construction, lighting, concrete flatwork, site furnishings, playground equipment, fitness equipment, signs, poured-in-place playground safety surfacing, decorative water mist feature with pump room equipment, soil preparation, planting, irrigation, and any existing site restoration for the construction of Sunset Neighborhood Park, Phase 2, for the City of Renton, Washington, all as shown and described in the Contract Documents prepared by HBB Landscape Architecture, dated 27 August 2019. Provide for traffic control, project and public safety, temporary erosion and sediment control. 1.03 TIME OF COMPLETION & LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. Time is of the essence for commencement and completion of the Work. Overall time limits for the Project are as follows: 1. Project Time Requirements a. Start: Upon Notice to Proceed (NTP). b. Substantial Completion shall be achieved by no later than Sunday, 31 May 2020. c. Final Completion in accordance with the General Conditions. d. Final Completion shall be achieved by no later than Tuesday, 30 June 2020. 010100-PAGE 1 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 010100 27 AUGUST 2019 SUMMARY OF WORK B. Liquidated Damages: Assessed in accordance with the terms of the General Conditions, and in the following amount per calendar day: a. Project: $250.00 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S WORK & RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor is required to coordinate all related requirements and work specified throughout the Contract Documents. B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's work and responsibilities also include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Providing and paying for labor, materials, equipment, tools, machines, facilities, and services necessary for proper execution and completion of work. 2. Paying taxes. 3. Giving required notices. 4. Maintaining required egress, emergency vehicle access and other requirements in accordance with governing codes, ordinances and city policies throughout the work. 5. Maintaining site in secure condition at all times to prevent unauthorized access. 6. Contractor is responsible for securing and paying for permits, including but not limited to grading, building, plumbing, mechanical and electrical. C. Summary of References: Work of the Contract can be summarized by references to the Contract, General Conditions, Special Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections, Drawings, addenda and modifications to the contract documents issued subsequent to the initial printing of the project manual and including but not necessarily limited to printed material referenced by any of these. It is recognized that work of the contract is also unavoidably affected or influenced by governing regulations, natural phenomenon including weather conditions and other forces outside the contract documents. 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. General: The Contractor shall limit use of the premises to the work or project boundary indicated for use. B. Use of the Site: Confine operations at the site to the areas permitted under the Contract. Portions of the site beyond areas on which work is indicated are not to 010100-PAGE 2 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 010100 27 AUGUST 2019 SUMMARY OF WORK be disturbed. Conform to site rules and regulations affecting the work while engaged in project construction. 1. Do not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. 2. Confine stockpiling of materials and location of storage structures to the staging areas within the work area. If additional storage is necessary, obtain and pay for such storage off-site. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, keep roadways, building entryways, pathways and sidewalks clear and available to Owner and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of roadways and to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. b. Maintain site fencing. Protect existing conditions and areas to remain. 4. Lock automotive type vehicles, such as passenger cars and trucks and other mechanized or motorized construction equipment, when parked and unattended, so as to prevent unauthorized use. Do not leave vehicles or equipment unattended with the motor running or the ignition key in place. 5. Smoking or open fires will not be permitted on the premises. 6. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of tools, equipment, materials, and products under this Contract, stored on the site. 7. Assume full responsibility for site security and safety. 8. Include barriers, directional signs, no trespassing signs, fencing and security as needed to prevent unauthorized trespassing into construction areas. 9. The construction limits or work zones indicated on the drawings indicate the area to which operation in connection with this project shall be confined for the indicated construction period. 10. Keep work and storage areas in a neat, clean and orderly condition at all times. Should it be necessary at any time to move materials or sheds, Contractor shall move same at his expense. 11. Contractor is responsible for damage to existing property adjacent to the project site and damage must be repaired as work proceeds. Restore/return existing property to its original condition as it was prior to start of project work. 12. Provide traffic control measures as required by local ordinances. 1.06 SITE ACCESS & STAGING A. Construction Site Access: Construction site access to the project site will be coordinated with the Owner and generally, the primary project site access will be via the south and/or west side of the park on Sunset Lane NE, via Harrington Ave NE, off of NE Sunset Boulevard. 010100-PAGE 3 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 010100 27 AUGUST 2019 SUMMARY OF WORK B. Construction site staging:The Owner will provide a site location for the Contractor to use as a staging/layout area for storage and the set-up of material and equipment that will be used in the work during the construction of the project. 1. The Contractor shall name the Owner and Property Owner as an additionally insured and provide a copy of the insurance certificate indemnifying the Owner and Property Owner from injuries or harm to persons as a result of the use of the property. Additionally, the Contractor will hold the Owner and Property Owner harmless for any theft or equipment damage. 2. The Contractor will be responsible for any fuel, oil contamination, or other hazardous material that comes into contract with the property. Preventive measures will be taken. Any spills shall be promptly cleaned up. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for dust control. 4. The Contractor shall place and maintain a temporary perimeter chain link fence around the portion of the site being use and protect all existing conditions to remain. 5. The Contractor will restore the used area of the property from ruts, damaged filed grass or bare dirt, and repair any damage to existing conditions. C. Site Access and Staging Submittal: incorporated into the submittal for Owner review and approval per Specification 0150 00, section 1.19. 1.07 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Existing Utilities 1. Utilities of record are shown on the Drawings insofar as is possible to do so. These, however, are shown for convenience only and the Owner or Consultants assume no responsibility for improper locations or failure to show utility locations on the Drawings. 2. Exercise reasonable care to prevent damage to existing utilities. At Contractor's expense, immediately repair, restor, or relocate. Contractor shall not leave siteuntil repairs have been accomplished. 3. See Drawings and Specifications for particular provisions. B. Objections to Application of Products: All Contractors and Subcontractors performing work on this project shall thoroughly familiarize themselves with specified products and installation procedures and submit to Owner any objections (in writing) no later than ten (10) days prior to Bid Date. Submittal of Bid constitutes acceptance of products and procedures specified. 010100-PAGE 40F7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 010100 27 AUGUST 2019 SUMMARY OF WORK C. Conflicts and Omissions in Drawings and Specifications: Bring immediately to Owner's attention any conflicts and omissions between the Drawings and Specifications and between Drawings and Specifications and actual site conditions. D. Subcontractor Instructions: Require subcontractors to become familiar with requirements of Division 0, Division 1 and work of Sections related to their own work. Instruct them that these conditions and requirements apply to their work in each Section of the technical specifications. E. Field Verification: It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify all field measurements and site conditions. No allowance will be made for any items incorrectly fabricated or installed due to failure to perform such verification prior to ordering materials/products or commencing the work. If the Contractor discovers discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual field measurements, notify the Owner, and allow reasonable time for review of the problem, and response to resolve the problem. PART 2 PRODUCTS— (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT SIGN A. Contractor shall provide and install two project signs, as detailed in this project manual, at two locations to be determined by the Owner, for the duration of the project. 3.02 EROSION CONTROL A. Erosion control measures shall be installed by the Contractor and accepted by the Owner prior to any other work on-site. 3.03 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION A. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating and scheduling work of the Subcontractors to expedite progress of the project. General Contractor assumes all responsibility if his Subcontractors do not perform. When emergencies occur, the Contractor will take whatever measures are necessary to correct problems at no expense to the Owner and before leaving the site. 010100-PAGE 5 OF7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 010100 27 AUGUST 2019 SUMMARY OF WORK B. Coordinate all uses of premises with the Owner. Use of streets and public rights of way must be in accordance with City regulations and ordinances. Obtain Right of Way use permits as the City may require for any in-street or street frontage work or work that may otherwise block or limit use of the streets. 3.04 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work hours are permitted between: a. 7:00 a.m. —8:00 p.m. Monday through Friday, b. 9:00 a.m. —8:00 p.m. Saturday (if approved by the Owner), c. 8:30 a.m. —3:30 p.m. Haul Activities, and d. no work shall be permitted on Holidays and Sundays. B. Noise Control: Comply with all applicable state and local laws, ordinances, and regulations relative to noise control. 1. The Contractor shall give the owner a minimum of seven (7) day's notice prior to commencing any activity or operation of machinery from which the noise may be disturbing to occupants of nearby buildings. Any consequences resulting from failure to give such notice shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall comply with any directives the Owner may issue for the purpose of excluding or mitigating any annoyance or disruption due to noise to occupants of the buildings, or the public in general, by the operations under this contract. 2. Use electrically driven equipment rather than pneumatically driven equipment where noise is a concern. 3. Air Compressors: Equip air compressors with silencing packages. Electric- driven compressors are preferred. 4. Outdoor Vehicle and Internal Combustion Engine Noise: The noise level of each piece of equipment shall not be greater than 85 dB(A) at a distance of 50 feet as measured under noisier operating conditions. Provide rubber-tired equipment whenever possible instead of metal-tracked equipment. Mufflers for stationary engines shall provide hospital-area silencing quality 5. Maintain the level of construction noise inside adjacent buildings from exceeding a dB(A) 60 curve (with windows closed) 6. Erect temporary noise barriers around noisy equipment where operation cannot be avoided. 7. Verify and ensure that equipment mufflers and noise shrouds are intact and operational. 8. Shut off all equipment that is not in use. 010100-PAGE 6 OF7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 010100 27 AUGUST 2019 SUMMARY OF WORK C. Dust Control: Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. 1. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and surrounding environment. Cover stockpiled material with tarps, wet down, and take other measures as appropriate. 3.05 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Utilities of record require field verification and identification. Where unknown utility lines are encountered, protect from damage and do not assume abandoned before identification is made by utility company. Notify Owner of unauthorized cutting or other damage to utility lines resulting from construction activity and promptly take such measures as directed to make reparation. B. Surveys and reports of existing topographical and subsurface conditions, including locate ons of utilities, are provided without warranty as to their accuracy or completeness and are intended as general reference to probable conditions. C. Where existing conditions differ from that indicated by Contract Documents: 1. Document and notify Owner immediately of differing conditions. 2. Coordinate and distribute corrections prior to preparing Shop Drawings and before beginning work dependent upon accurate knowledge of conditions. END OF SECTION 010100-PAGE 7 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0112 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DELEGATED DESIGN SECTION 0112 00 DELEGATED DESIGN PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Section Includes: Requirements in this section apply to delegated design ("design-build") building systems and fabricated assemblies identified in individual specification sections B. The general provisions of the Contract, including General, Modified, and Supplemental Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Requirements in this section apply to delegated design ("design-build") building systems and fabricated assemblies identified in individual specification sections: 1. Play Equipment 2. Mist Water System and Components 3. Site Furnishings 4. Exercise Equipment 1.03 INTENT A. The intent of Delegated Design Submittals required by this section is to account for professional engineering responsibility for design, review and acceptance of components of Work forming a part of permanent Work in accordance with Building Code, and that has been assigned to a design entity other than Consultant including, but not limited to: 1. Design requiring structural analysis of load bearing components and connections. 2. Design requiring compliance with life or health safety regulation. C. Performance and Design Criteria: Provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by Contract Documents. D. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to the Owner. E. Delegated design will be required for elements designed by a specialty professional, which may include: 1. Elements that require specialized fabrication equipment or a proprietary fabrication process not usually available at job site 2. Elements normally fabricated off-site 0112 00-PAGE 1 OF 2 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0112 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DELEGATED DESIGN 3. Elements requiring engineering, not normally a part of scope of services performed by architectural; structural; mechanical; electrical; or other disciplines of Consultant. 1.04 STATUS OF BID DOCUMENTS A. Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and do not purport to identify nor solve problems of thermal or structural movement, anchorage or moisture resistance of any manufactured assemblies. B. Requirements shown by details are intended to establish basic dimension of unit, sight lines and profiles of members. C. Coordinate shop drawings and installation to resolve conflicts. D. Allow for installation tolerances, expansion and contraction of adjacent materials, and design. E. Assemblies shall be free from rattles, and noise due to thermal and structural movement and wind pressure. F. Attachment considerations are to take into account site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening, or fracturing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 0112 00-PAGE 2 OF 2 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0120 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 0120 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time. C. Modification procedures. D. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. See General Conditions all requirements pertaining to retainage. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Format: On 8-1/2" X 11" paper. B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. C. Submit printed schedule on form acceptable to the Owner. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. D. Submit for Owner approval, electronic format of Schedule of Values, a minimum of 15 days before first Application for Payment submittal. Approved Schedule of Values will be used by the Owner as the basis for progress payments. E. Format: Schedule of Values shall breakdown the total Contract Sum to each category of work utilizing the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. 1. Site mobilization shall not exceed 5% of Contract Sum. 2. Construction closeout shall not be less than 3% of Contract Sum. 3. For each line item exceeding 5% of Contract Sum, show breakdown by major products and operations. 4. Cross reference Schedule of Values amounts to the Construction Progress Schedule scheduled tasks with specified in Section 0132 16. 5. Round figures to nearest dollar amount. 6. Make sum of total scheduled costs equal to Contract Sum. 7. Major cost items, which are not directly a cost of actual work-in-place, such as distinct temporary facilities, may be either shown as items in schedule of values or included in General Conditions, mobilization and/or demobilization at Contractor's option. F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Order Proposals (COP) and Field Authorizations (FA), with each Application for Payment. 0120 00-PAGE 1 O F 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0120 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement, if not stipulated, at monthly intervals. B. Prior to first Application for Payment, submit approved Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages forms for Contractor and all subcontractors. Without exception, processing of an Application for Payment will not begin until approved copies are on file with Owner for each classification of laborers, workers, or mechanics employed by Contractor or subcontractors included in that Application. 1. Submit a list of all subcontractors and suppliers. 2. Submit instructions to Owner for the disposition of retainage funds. a. In accordance with chapter 60.28 of the Revised Code of Washington (RCW), Owner shall reserve a contract retainage not to exceed Five percent of the moneys earned by Contractor as trust fund for the protection and payment of: 1) The claims of any person and Owner arising in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2) The state with respect to taxes imposed pursuant to Title 82 RCW which may be due from such Contractor. b. The funds held in retainage shall be held until forty-five (45) days following Final Acceptance subject to the provisions of chapters 39.12 and 60.28 RCW. c. Contractor's written instructions should be addressed to the Owner with a copy to the Architect. d. At the option of Contractor, the moneys reserved by Owner shall be either: 1) Retained in a fund by Owner. 2) Bonded for all or any portion of the contract retainage in a form acceptable to Owner; or 3) Deposited in an interest-bearing account in a bank, mutual savings bank, or savings and loan association. 4) Placed in escrow with a bank or trust company by Owner. (a) Escrow Agent: If the retained funds are to be placed in escrow, Contractor will select the escrow agent, subject to approval by Owner. The selected agent must be a bank or trust company in the State of Washington. (b) Pursuant to electing the escrow option, an escrow agreement shall be executed by Contractor, Owner, and bank. Three copies of the agreement should be completed and executed by Contractor and returned to Owner for joint execution, who in turn will forward all copies to the bank for receipt and acceptance. The bank will retain one copy and return one copy each to Contractor and Owner. A completed and signed escrow agreement must be on file with Owner for payment before Contractor's first application is processed. (c) Escrow Payments: As each progress estimate is presented for payment, Contractor shall make a vouchered request for the retained funds that are to be placed in escrow. Upon receiving a retainage invoice, Owner will issue a check payable to Contractor and the bank jointly. Such checks will be mailed to the bank and Contractor will receive copies of check transmittal letters. 0120 00-PAGE 2 O F 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0120 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES (d) Escrow Investments: The bank shall invest the retained funds in bonds and other securities selected by Contractor from the following list approved by Owner: (1) Bills, certificates, notes or bonds of the United States. (2) Other obligations of the United States or its agencies. (3) Obligations of any corporation wholly owned by the government of the United States. (4) Indebtedness of the Federal National Mortgage Association. (5) Time deposits in commercial banks, mutual savings banks, and savings and loan associations in the State of Washington. (e) Deposits in savings accounts in commercial banks, mutual savings banks, and savings and loan associations in the State of Washington. (f) The investments selected must mature on or prior to the date set for completion of the contract, including extensions thereof or forty-five (45) days following the Final Acceptance of the improvement or work. Interest on such investments shall be paid to Contractor as it accrues. (g) Escrow Costs and Fees: All escrow costs and fees shall be paid by Contractor, in accordance with the Escrow Agreement. (h) Release of Escrow Investments to Contractor: Upon Final Acceptance and the expiration of forty-five (45) days following the date of Acceptance, and contingent upon Contractor's compliance with provisions of the public works statutes, Owner will issue written instructions to the bank to release to Contractor the investment held in escrow. If there should be either unpaid taxes or other unsatisfied claims against the retained percentage, the provisions of the Escrow Agreement will govern. C. Submit draft Application for Payment to Owner for approval 10 days prior to submittal of actual Application for Payment. D. Present required information in digital form. E. Form: As approved by the Owner F. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. G. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed. H. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. I. Submit one signed digital image of each Application for Payment. J. Include the following with the application: 1. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 0132 16. 2. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors. 3. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products if any. 4. Statements of Intents to Pay Prevailing Wages as documented by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries for each contractor or subcontractor included on the Pay 0120 00-PAGE 3 O F 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0120 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Application. 5. List with Contractor, sub-contractors, and all sub-sub-contractors invoice amounts, UBI number, and Affidavit of Intent's number. K. When Owner requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Owner will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on Owner's standard form. B. For other required changes, Owner will issue a Field Authorization (FA) signed by the Owner, A/E and Contractor instructing Contractor to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe the required changes, will identify an initial estimate of the probable cost of any changes, and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change. C. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Owner will issue a request for Change Order Proposal (COP) that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 14 days. D. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Owner, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation. E. Computation of Change in Contract Sum: Will be as specified in the Agreement and the General Conditions. 1. For change requested by Owner for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will be based on Contractor's price quotation. 2. For change requested by Contractor, the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Owner. 4. For change ordered by Owner without a quotation from Contractor, the amount will be determined by Owner based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work. F. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. Provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 0120 00-PAGE 4 O F 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0120 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. f. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. 2. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. G. Execution of Change Orders: Owner will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. H. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price. I. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. J. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. Closeout procedures specified in Section 0170 00. 2. Contractor's Certification of Payment of Debts Claims. 3. Contractor's Certificate of Release of Liens. 4. Owner's approval of Closeout submittals specified in Section 0178 00. 5. Completion of punchlist with Owner's approval. 6. Completion of all Change Orders. 7. Submittal of Affidavit of wages paid for Contractor and subcontractors. 8. L&I release. 9. Sign-off of all required permits. 10. Posting of Certificate of Occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION 0120 00-PAGE 5 O F 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0130 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS SECTION 0130 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Administration and supervisory personnel. B. Communication procedures. C. Project meetings. D. Preconstruction meeting. E. Site mobilization meeting. F. Progress meetings. G. Coordination procedures. H. Submittal Types. I. Submittals for review and information. J. Number of copies of submittals. K. Submittal procedures. L. Daily Progress reports. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 010100 - Summary of Work: Work sequence and Owner occupancy. C. Section 0132 16- Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of schedules. D. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements: Procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. E. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. F. Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Personnel list: For principal staff assignments. Include areas of responsibility, addresses, and phone numbers for 24-hour-contact. Include back-up personnel. B. Coordination drawings. 0130 00-PAGE 1 O F 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0130 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS C. Superintendent Daily Reports: Submit at weekly intervals. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. Provide designated Project Manager, Superintendent and other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 3.02 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES A. General 1. Address all Project correspondence through Owner. Do not contact Owner sub consultants directly, unless directed otherwise. Contractor's subcontractors will not directly contact the Owner, Architect, or Architect's sub consultants. 2. Owner will issue all instructions, whether verbal or written. No other instructions will be recognized. Owner will confirm verbal instructions in writing to Contractor. a. Exception: Minor clarifications may be confirmed in site reports or meeting minutes. 3. Format: Number correspondence sequentially beginning with Serial Letter No. 1. Include project title and number on all correspondence. B. Requests for Information 1. When field conditions or Contract Documents require clarification or verification by the Architect or Architect's sub consultants, submit a written Request for Information (RFI) to the Owner. 2. Format: Number RFI's sequentially using a consistent form approved by Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name and number. b. RFI number (three digits, beginning with 001). c. Date of request. d. Date of required response. e. Subject title. f. Initiator of request. g. Contract Document reference (drawing and/or specification). h. Location on site. i. Description of issue. j. Contractor's proposed solution, if known. k. Cost impacts, if known. I. Space adequate for Architect's review acknowledgement and reply. 3. Provide only one question per RFI. 4. Route RFI's in same manner as Project correspondence. 5. Allow 10 working days for Owner to issue response. 6. Owner reserves the right to void any RFI whose resolution is already contained within the Contract Documents. 0130 00-PAGE 2 O F 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0130 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 3.03 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Preconstruction Meeting 1. Owner will schedule a meeting to take place before or on the date for Notice to Proceed. 2. Attendance Required: a. Owner. b. Architect and selected consultants. c. Contractor, including Project Manager, Superintendent, QAM, and major site related subcontractors. d. City Parks, Facilities, and Development Services staff. 3. Agenda: a. Distribution of Contract Documents. b. Designation of project personnel. c. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, and substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, Record drawings and Contract closeout. d. Scheduling, early occupancy. e. Working hours. f. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. g. Construction related air quality control procedures. h. Safety. i. Security. j. Site access, traffic control, parking availability. 4. Owner will record minutes and provide copies to Architect and Contractor for their distribution to all parties affected by decisions or actions resulting from the meeting. B. Progress Meetings 1. Attend progress meetings at bi-monthly intervals or as required by the Owner. Coordinate meeting schedule with preparation of applications for payment. 2. Owner will prepare agenda and preside at meetings. 3. Attendance Required: a. Owner. b. Architect and required sub consultants. c. Contractor, including Project Manager, Superintendent. d. Others as appropriate, such as but not limited to; Major Subcontractors, Suppliers, Manufacturers Representatives, and Consultants. 4. Agenda: a. Safety Report detailing protection of construction and personnel. b. Review minutes of previous meetings for any discrepancies and correct or approve. c. Review of Work progress since previous meeting. d. Look Ahead Schedule: Provide three (3) week look ahead simplified bar chart schedule coordinated and interfaced with project CPM schedule. e. Coordination issues, field observations, problems, and decisions. f. Identification of problems that impede, will impede, or present the potential for 0130 00-PAGE 3 O F 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0130 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS impeding planned progress. Identify corrective measures to regain projected schedules. g. Review required performance results. h. Review Non-conforming work and status of correction. i. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. j. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. k. Review Requests for Information status. I. Review issuance of Supplemental Instructions. m. Review Contract Modifications status, including any effect on coordination and progress schedule. n. Maintenance of quality and work standards. o. Other business relating to Work. 5. Owner will record minutes and provide copies to Engineer and Contractor for their distribution to all parties affected by decisions or actions resulting from the meeting. 3.04 COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordinate construction operations to ensure orderly and efficient installation of each part of the Work, with due consideration of those features of the Work dependent on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. Ensure full accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. Make adequate accommodations for items scheduled for installation by others. B. When necessary to assure coordination, provide memoranda for distribution to each party involved, describing special coordination procedures. Include such items as required notices, reports, and meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their work is required. C. Coordination Meetings: Superintendent will conduct coordination meetings at appropriate intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress and pre-installation meetings. 1. Required Attendees: a. Superintendent b. Subcontractors c. Suppliers d. Other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities. 2. Agenda: a. Scheduling. b. Interface requirements. c. Off-site fabrication. d. Access requirements. e. Site utilization. f. Temporary facilities and controls. 0130 00-PAGE 4 O F 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0130 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS g. Quality standards. 3.05 SUBMITTAL TYPES A. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard published data. Product data includes, as applicable, manufacturer's catalog cuts, written recommendations, specifications, and installation instructions; factory installed wiring diagrams; printed performance curves; operational range diagrams; compliance with recognized standards; testing agency labels, and other standard information. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. B. Shop Drawings: Project-specific information as depicted through fabrication and installation drawings, dimensions (field and factory), roughing-in and setting diagrams, design calculations, coordination requirements, and other project-specific information. C. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's accurately printed or actual samples showing full range of available features, options, colors, textures, and patterns. D. Samples for Verification: Project-specific samples of actual products, illustrating functional and aesthetic characteristics and including all integral parts and attachment devices. Provide actual finishes in selected colors, textures, and patterns. E. Schedules: A form of shop drawing, typically presented in tabular form and summarizing key features of the Work. Not to be confused with construction progress schedule. H. Qualification Data: Written information demonstrating the capabilities and experience of a firm or person. I. Certificates: Written statements certifying compliance with requirements. Submit product, installer, manufacturer, and material certificates on manufacturer's letterhead. Submit welding certificates on AWS or WABO forms or as required by authorities having jurisdiction. J. Test Reports: Reports written by a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results of materials or products for compliance with requirements. K. Inspection Reports: Reports written by a qualified inspection agency, indicating and interpreting inspection results of materials, products, or assemblies for compliance with requirements. L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code(s) in effect for Project. M. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. N. Project Record Documents, Operation & Maintenance Data, and Warranties and Bonds: Combination of submittal types, submitted at project closeout. O. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit directly to Owner. P. Others as indicated. 0130 00-PAGE 5 O F 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0130 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR OWNER'S REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. 5. Schedules. 6. Qualification Data. 7. Division 1 submittals (plans, construction progress schedules, lists, reports, closeout submittals, etc.) specified in individual Division 1 sections. B. Submit to Owner for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 0178 00 -CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Permits. 6. Other types as indicated. B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Submittals may be submitted electronically in a format or system acceptable to the Owner. Access to the document shall not require special programming, software, or other proprietary systems. Shop Drawings may be submitted electronically but will also require submission of one full-size printed copy. At the completion of the project, the contractor shall provide a complied digital record on a storage device acceptable to the Owner. Additionally, they shall provide and one physical copy of all project submittals, organized by specification sections and contained in 3-ring binders with tabs, titles, and edge identification. B. Superintendents Daily Report 1. For each Project calendar day beginning with the date of Notice to Proceed, prepare a report concerning events at the Project site as follows: 0130 00-PAGE 6 O F 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0130 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS a. List of subcontractors on site. b. Number of personnel on site, and general responsibilities. c. Equipment on site. d. Material deliveries. e. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. f. Accidents. g. Meetings and significant decisions. h. Unusual events, as described under Special Reports below. i. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. j. Emergency procedures. k. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. I. Supplemental Instructions received and implemented. m. Change Orders received and implemented. n. Field Authorizations received, and documentation of activities covered under same. o. Services connected and disconnected. p. Equipment or system tests and startups. Electronically transmit the daily reports to the Owner on every, other week basis. 2. Special Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not directly related to the Work, prepare and submit a special report directly to the Owner within one day of the occurrence. List chain of events, persons participating, and response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. END OF SECTION 0130 00-PAGE 7 O F 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0132 16 27 AUGUST 2019 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE SECTION 0132 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions for Washington State Facility Construction, Supplemental Conditions for Washington State Facilities Construction, and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 01 01 00—Summary: For work sequence, Owner occupancy, and Owner-furnished items. C. Section 0120 00— Payment Procedures: For schedule of values. D. Section 0130 00—Administrative Requirements: For superintendent's daily progress reports. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Comply with AGC (CPSM) -Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual; Associated General Contractors of America; 2004. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Construction Progress Schedule: Indicate complete construction sequence, from Notice to Proceed through Final Completion. 1. Submit within 7 days of Notice to Proceed. 2. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. 3. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONTENT A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. 1. Break down work so that no activity is longer than 21 days, unless specifically allowed by Owner. 2. List submittals, materials and installation as separate line items. 3. List all permit submittals showing submittal and anticipated issuance dates 3. List all Owner supplied material delivery dates on schedule 4. List all Work by Owner completion dates on schedule 0132 16-PAGE 1 OF 3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0132 16 27 AUGUST 2019 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE B. Identify each activity by specification section number. C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month. D. Indicate procurement activities for long-lead and major items, including submittal, approval, and fabrication activities. E. Coordinate content with schedule of values. F. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used. G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification, and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using the current approved schedule to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 3.2 BAR CHARTS A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B. Identify the first work day of each week. 3.3 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Owner at each submittal. B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule. C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 5 days. 3.4 UPDATING SCHEDULE A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity. C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work. D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes. E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes. G. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on the schedule. Report corrective action taken or proposed and its effect. 3.5 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to General Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors, suppliers, and Architect/Engineer and to the Owner. 0132 16-PAGE 2 OF 3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0132 16 27 AUGUST 2019 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules. END OF SECTION 0132 16-PAGE 3 OF 3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0140 00 27 AUGUST 2019 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Administrative and procedural requirements for Quality assurance and Quality control. B. Mock-ups. C. Control of installation. D. Tolerances. E. Testing and inspection agencies and services. F. Control of installation. G. Tolerances. H. Manufacturers' field services. I. Defect Assessment. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 0140 00—Quality Requirements. C. Section 0142 16 & 00 72 00— Definitions. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS. A. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. B. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Quality Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and to ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work used to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work comply with requirements. Services do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00—ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS, for submittal procedures. B. Project Quality Plan (PQP): Submit within 14 days of the Notice to Proceed a written plan detailing the organization and procedures proposed to achieve quality assurance and quality control so that materials, products, workmanship, on-site and off-site fabrication, 014000-PAGE 1OF6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0140 00 27 AUGUST 2019 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS construction, and operations are in compliance with the Contract Documents and within generally accepted quality standards for similar work. Demonstrate a thorough knowledge of Contract requirements. The PQP is intended to function as a "living document," anticipating requirements and documenting results. At minimum, the PQP will include the following: 1. Qualification Data: For Contractor-provided testing agencies, to demonstrate their capabilities and experience, include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent agency inspection report performed by a recognized authority. 2. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: For all required tests and inspections. Prepare in tabular form and include the following: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Description of test or inspection. c. Identification of applicable standards. d. Identification of test and inspection methods. e. Number/frequency of tests and inspections required. f. Time schedule (or time span) for tests and inspections. g. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. h. Requirements for obtaining samples. i. Unique characteristics of each quality control service. 3. Test and Inspection Log: For use in Part 3 of this Section. C. Superintendent Daily Reports: Submit at bi-monthly intervals. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases,jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments,judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Delegated Design: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor, provide products and systems complying with indicated performance and design criteria, or where not indicated, with performance and design criteria of authorities having jurisdiction. In addition to shop drawings, product data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include the list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional legally qualified to practice in the State of Washington and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. B. Basic Quality Assurance Qualifications: Wherever the Specifications refer to installers, manufacturers, fabricators, specialists, or factory-authorized service representatives, provide entities with the following qualifications: 014000-PAGE 2 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0140 00 27 AUGUST 2019 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 2. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 3. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 4. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities be performed by recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. a. Requirements for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. 5. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. 1.07 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent Testing Agency to perform construction materials testing and inspections services as indicated under the Structural General Notes in the drawings. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Preconstruction Testing: Where approval of materials, products, or equipment depends on existing test results or preconstruction testing not specifically assigned to the Owner's Testing Agency, Contractor shall provide evidence of test results or, if necessary, shall arrange and pay for testing agency services. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL-recognized, NVLAP-accredited, or independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548, and with additional qualifications specified in individual sections and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step-in sequence. 014000-PAGE 3 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0140 00 27 AUGUST 2019 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 MOCK-UPS A. Before installing portions of the Work where mock-ups are required, construct mock-ups in location and size indicated for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. The purpose of mock-up is to demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. B. Provide supervisory personnel who will oversee mock-up construction. Provide workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. C. Assemble and erect Mock-ups with specified materials, components, attachments, anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. D. Obtain Owner's approval of mock-ups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 1. Owner will issue written comments within seven (7) working days of initial review and each subsequent follow up review of each mock-up. 2. Make corrections as necessary until Owner's approval is issued. E. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. F. Mock-ups will be removed at completion of construction unless specified to remain. Where allowed to remain, protect from all damage. G. Where possible salvage and recycle the demolished mock-up materials. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.Tolerances will not be cumulative. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.04 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare and maintain a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date of test or inspection. 2. Description of Work tested or inspected. 014000-PAGE 40F6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0140 00 27 AUGUST 2019 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 3. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. 4. Test or inspection results. 5. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Owner. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post additions and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Owner's reference during normal working hours and prior to each Application for Payment. 3.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Owner and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Owner and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Owner. 6. Attend preconstruction meetings. 7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work. 2. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 3. City of Renton will employ the services of an independent Materials Testing and Special Inspections Firm with qualified testing laboratory. a. The Owner will pay for any additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Owner that are beyond specified requirements. b. Contractor will pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by the Contractor that are beyond specified requirements. C. Retesting required because of nonconformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same firm and shall be paid for by the Contractor. 014000-PAGE 5 OF6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0140 00 27 AUGUST 2019 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 4. Contractor is responsible for calling and coordinating with the Owner's testing and inspections firm to schedule tests and inspections. 3.06 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.07 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to contract document requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Owner, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Owner will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. C. Maintain a Log of Non-conforming work, tracking items from instance of identification to resolution. 3.08 SUPERINDENDENT DAILY REPORTS A. Write daily reports for each calendar day, beginning with date of Notice to Proceed, on form(s) approved by Owner. Daily Reports will be factual records containing numerical data of the Work and quality assurance and control activities. Identify deficiencies in daily reports and in Non-Conforming Work Log as they occur and as they are resolved. Do not address production issues unless they impact quality assurance or quality control. B. Superintendent shall sign and date all reports. Verification shall include a statement that all materials and products incorporated into the Work are in compliance with the terms of the Contract except as noted. C. Submit copies of daily reports at each Progress Meeting. END OF SECTION 014000-PAGE 6 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SEST SECTION 0142 16 27 AUGUST 2019 DEFINITIONS SECTION 0142 16 DEFINITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This section supplements the definitions contained in the General Conditions. In case of conflict, the General Conditions will take precedence. B. Other definitions are included in individual specification sections. 1.03 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT A. Specifications Format:These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute's 2016 MasterFormat. B. Specification Content: 1. Language: This specification uses certain conventions in the use of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows: a. Wording of the contract documents is abbreviated or streamlined and frequently includes incomplete sentences. 1) Abbreviated word and terms shall be interpolated as sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable to the context indicated. b. These specifications are written in imperative mood. This imperative phraseology is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. c. The terms "Shall", "Shall be", "Will", and "Will be" and similar words and phrases are defined to have compulsory meaning. 2. Assignment of Specialists: a. The specification requires that certain specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in the operations to be performed. The specialist must be engaged for those activities, and their assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. However, the responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements remains with the Contractor. b. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. c. Use of titles such as "carpentry" in not intended to imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter". It also does not imply that requirements specified apply 0142 16—PAGE 1 OF 3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SEST SECTION 0142 16 27 AUGUST 2019 DEFINITIONS exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. d. The term "Installer" shall be used to refer to all specialists. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. Terminology- Certain terms used more generally throughout the contract documents are defined as follows: 1. Addenda: Additions made to the contract documents during the bidding period. Used to revise, delete, or add to any of the bidding requirements or contract documents. 2. Approve: Where used in conjunction with the Owner's response or submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports, and claims by the Contractor, the meaning will be held to the limitations of the Owner's responsibilities and duties as specified in Section 00 7200, General Conditions of the Contract. 3. Confirm: Confirm or verify dimension or condition and notify Owner of findings prior to proceeding with the work. 4. Construction Documents: All of the written and graphic documents prepared and assembled by the Owner for communicating the design and administering the construction contract. They include the following categories: bidding requirements, contract forms, and conditions of the contract, specifications, drawings, addenda and contract modifications. This term is interchangeable with "contract documents". 5. Contract Modifications-After agreement has been signed, any additions, deletions, or modifications to the work are accomplished by supplemental instructions or change order. 6. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed", "requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved", "permitted", "required", and "accepted" mean "directed by the Owner ", "requested by the Owner ", etc. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. 7. Furnish:To supply and deliver to project site, unload, and inspect for damage. 8. Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, anchor, finish, cure, protect, clean, start up, protect, and similar operations and make ready for use. 9. Installer: The person or entity engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or sub-subcontractor for the performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including installations, erections, applications, and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that installers be recognized experts in the work they are engaged to perform. 10. Product: Material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the work result. Not materials or equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, or erection and not incorporated into the work result. Products may be new, never before used, or re-used materials or equipment. 11. Project Manual:The book-sized (8 1/2 by 11-inch format and bound) volume that includes the procurement requirements (if any), the contracting requirements, and the specifications. 12. Project Site: The space available to the Contractor for the performance of the work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the project. The extent of the project site is shown on the drawings and may or may not be identical with the 0142 16-PAGE 2 OF 3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SEST SECTION 0142 16 27 AUGUST 2019 DEFINITIONS description of the land upon which the project is built. 13. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. 14. Record Drawings: Drawings prepared by the Contractor to indicate construction changes, including nature and location of concealed work. 15. Shop Drawings: Drawings, schedules, and other information prepared by the Contractor to describe fabrication and installation of elements of the work. 16. Supply: Same as Furnish. 17. Testing Agency: An independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the work, both at the project site or elsewhere, and to report and, if required, to interpret the results of those inspections or tests. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION 0142 16-PAGE 3 OF 3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0150 00 27 AUGUST 2019 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 0150 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telecommunications services. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: barriers, enclosures, fencing, etc. E. Security requirements. F. Vehicular access and parking. G. Waste removal facilities and services. H. Field offices. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, consultants, occupants of the project, testing agencies and authorities having jurisdiction. B. All costs associated with preparing utilities for use is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. C. Usage costs for temporary site utilities will be provided the Contractor. 1.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to project site at time of project mobilization. 1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities for use during construction operations. Do not use public facilities. 1.06 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction and staging/storage areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide for protection of existing trees to remain. 0150 00-PAGE 1 O F 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0150 00 27 AUGUST 2019 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS C. Protect stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.07 FENCING A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. No orange roll-up type fencing is allowed. B. Provide 6 foot (1.8 m) high fence around each construction site; equip the fencing with vehicular and pedestrian gates. The gates shall have locks. 1. Install fencing around entire Park site. 2. Install fencing between Phases I and II as designated for both portions of project when under construction. 3. Install fencing around existing Phase I benches and concrete plant containers in the plaza area. 4. Install fencing around existing Phase 1 park sign and planting at the south entry. 5. Provide fence as needed to maintain safe access for visitors. 1.08 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide, operate, and maintain a complete plant for fabricating, handling, conveying, installing and erecting all Work required under the Contract. Maintain plant and equipment in safe and efficient operating condition. Contractor shall be responsible for damages due to defective plant and equipment and uses made thereof. B. Furnish, install, and maintain for the duration of construction all required barricades, canopies, warning signs, steps, bridges, platforms and other temporary construction necessary for proper completion of the work. Maintain in compliance with all pertinent safety and other regulations. 1.09 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1.10 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Comply with regulations relating to use of park sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles. B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering pedestrian walkways, parking areas, park roads, and city streets. D. Comply with City traffic and parking regulations. E. Delivery and Storage: Conduct operations in such a manner as to avoid unnecessary interference to existing pedestrian and vehicle traffic. Do not park vehicles in traffic lanes. Provide flag persons, and traffic control signs and devices as required. Notify Owner in advance of any unusually long or large deliveries. Storage of materials adjacent to the Project site outside of the construction fence is not permitted unless authorized by the Owner. 1.11 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly 0150 00-PAGE 2 O F 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0150 00 27 AUGUST 2019 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site on a regular basis as needed. C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.12 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide project identification sign per Section 0158 13. 1.13 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL-rated, with extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposure. 1.14 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. D. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1.15 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to: 1. Building code requirements 2. Health and safety regulations 3. Utility company regulations 4. Police, Fire department and rescue squad rules 5. Environmental protection regulations B. Standards: 1. General: Comply with the following: a. NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations". b. ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition". 2. Recommendations: Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services" prepared jointly by AGC and ASC for industry recommendations. 3. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electrical service. Install service in compliance with NEC (NFPA 70). C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 0150 00-PAGE 3 O F 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0150 00 27 AUGUST 2019 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.16 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions of Use: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. 2. Take necessary fire prevention measures. 3. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with Owner's operations. 4. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. 1.17 SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Facilities Site Plan: Prepare a temporary facilities site plan for Owner's review and approval showing temporary facilities, construction site access, utility connections, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. Temporary Facilities Site Plan must be approved prior to the start of construction. B. Temporary Utilities Schedule: Prepare a schedule for Owner's review and approval indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility provision. Temporary Utilities Schedule must be approved prior to the start of construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION 0150 00-PAGE 4 O F 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0157 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS SECTION 0157 00 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General Description of the Work: Maintain environmental controls by the Contractor until the acceptance of the Work. The work also includes compliance with all controls or ordinances with respect to site waste water, dust, and traffic. 1.02 SITE MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall keep the work site and staging areas clean and free from rubbish and debris. Materials and equipment shall be removed from the site when they are no longer necessary. B. Upon completion of the work and before final completion, the work site shall be cleared of equipment, unused materials and rubbish to present a clean and neat appearance in conformance with the present condition of the site. C. Clean-up: Park and walkways shall be cleaned prior to Substantial Completion and Final Completion. 1. Waste material of any kind shall not be permitted to remain on the site of the work, the staging area, the park, or adjacent roads. Immediately upon such materials becoming unfit for use in the work, they shall be collected, removed from the site, and recycled or disposed of by the Contractor. 2. In the event that waste or recyclable material, refuse, debris, and/or rubbish are not removed from the work by the Contractor, the City reserves the right to have the waste, recyclable material, refuse, debris and/or rubbish removed. The expense of the removal and disposal will be charged to the Contractor. D. Environmental Contaminant Prevention: 1. Construction materials shall be handled with care to prevent entry of contaminants into surface waters, groundwater, storm drains, air, or soils. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cleanup costs, fines and/or penalties incurred as a result of improper handling of materials used to perform the work. 015700-PAGE 1OF2 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0157 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing dirt and dust from escaping from trucks and equipment entering or departing the project site by covering dusty loads, washing truck tires before leaving the site, and/or other reasonable methods. 3. When working dump trucks and/or other equipment are on paved streets and roadways, the Contractor will be required to clean said streets if required by the City at the conclusion of each day's operations. 4. In the event that the above requirements are violated and no action is taken by the Contractor after notification of infraction by the City, the City reserves the right to have the streets in question cleaned by others and the expense of the operation will be charged to the Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 015700-PAGE 2 OF 2 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0158 13 27 AUGUST 2019 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE SECTION 0158 13 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project identification sign. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design sign and structure to withstand 50 miles/hr (80 km/hr) wind velocity. B. Sign Painter: Experienced as a professional sign painter for minimum three years. C. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00—Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing: New, wood, structurally adequate. B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick, standard large size to minimize joints. C. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats; sign background of white color. D. Lettering: Exterior quality paint, contrasting colors. 2.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN A. (2)Two painted signs, 4'x8', bottom 6 feet (2 m) above ground. Locations to be directed by Owner. B. Content: 1. Project title, logo and name of Owner as indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Name of Landscape Architect. 3. Name of Prime Contractor. 4. Contract Value. 5. Project Schedule. 6. Grant Funding Source. C. Graphic Design, Colors, Style of Lettering: See Appendix. 0158 13-PAGE 1 OF 2 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0158 13 27 AUGUST 2019 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Receive approval from Owner of signage design prior to installation at site. B. Install project identification sign within 30 days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed. C. Erect at designated locations, as directed by Owner. D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely. 3.02 REMOVAL A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore the area. END OF SECTION 0158 13-PAGE 2 OF 2 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0170 00 27 AUGUST 2019 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 0170 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances. C. Pre-installation meetings. D. Cutting and patching. E. Surveying for laying out the work. F. Cleaning and protection. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 0150 00—Temporary Facilities and Controls:Temporary exterior enclosures. C. Section 0174 19—Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Additional procedures for trash/waste removal, recycling, salvage, and reuse. D. Section 0178 00—Closeout Submittals: O & M, Record Drawings and other documents due at completion. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 241 -Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Land Surveyor(if used) B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit digital record survey for the project record in AutoCAD format. Note final location of building, site improvements, benchmarks, and utilities. C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 0170 00-PAGE 1 OF 9 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0170 00 27 AUGUST 2019 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. 6. Include in request: a. Identification of Project. b. Location and description of affected work. c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Description of proposed work and products to be used. e. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor. f. Written permission of affected separate Contractor. g. Date and time work will be executed. D. Project Record Documents: Per Section 0178 00 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in State of Washington and acceptable to Owner. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in Washington. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property. B. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. C. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substructure surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 0170 00-PAGE 2 OF 9 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0170 00 27 AUGUST 2019 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS B. Verify that existing substructure is capable of structural support or attachment of the work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or mis-fabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Demolition: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during demolition. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of demolition means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a pre-installation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Owner four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Owner of any discrepancies discovered. C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. D. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings. E. Promptly report to Owner the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. F. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Owner. 0170 00-PAGE 3 OF 9 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0170 00 27 AUGUST 2019 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS G. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. H. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents. I. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. J. Periodically verify layouts by same means. K. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. C. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill: 1. To complete the work. 2. To uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work. 3. To remove and replace defective or non-conforming work. 4. To remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 5. To provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical, and other services. 6. To execute patching to complement adjacent work. 0170 00-PAGE 4 OF 9 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0170 00 27 AUGUST 2019 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 7. To fit materials and products to integrate with other work. D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Cutting: 1. Cut work by methods that will not damage work to be retained and work adjoining. Review proposed procedure(s) with original installer where possible and comply with its recommendations. 2. Where cutting is required, cut work with sawing, drilling, coring and grinding tools. Pneumatic hammering and chopping tools not allowed without prior approval. J. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. Patch with seams which are durable and invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances of the work. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and, where necessary, extend finish restoration onto retained work adjoining in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching. 3. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work. 4. Match color, texture, and appearance. 5. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. 3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. 0170 00-PAGE 5 OF 9 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0170 00 27 AUGUST 2019 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect cast concrete to remain exposed in the finished building, finished floors, stairs, roofing and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. H. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.09 CLOSE-OUT COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow Coordination Drawings routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. 3.10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Substantial Completion is defined in the General Conditions B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request, provide detailed work plan to complete each item and anticipated dates of completion. 1. Submit Contractor's Punch List. For each item, include the dollar value of Work remaining, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Submit substantial completion checklist. 3. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 0170 00-PAGE 6 OF 9 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0170 00 27 AUGUST 2019 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit initial Operation and Maintenance Manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 7. Participate in commissioning in accordance with Commissioning Requirements within technical specifications. 8. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 10. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 11. Complete final cleaning requirements. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Owner& Owner's Representative will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. During inspection, Owner & Owner's Representative will verify submitted Contractor's Punch List and will add or deduct items as necessary to form the Owner's Substantial Completion Punch List. The Owner's Substantial Completion Punch List will subsequently be provided to the Contractor for resolution. Owner will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on the Contractor's Punch List or the Owner's Substantial Completion Punch List that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: If, following Owner's & Owner's Representative inspection, Certificate of Substantial Completion is not granted, request re-inspection when the Work identified as incomplete is completed or corrected. Unless waived by Owner, a deductive Change Order for A/E costs will be executed for all Substantial Completion re-inspections. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. D. Checklist: In order to certify, Substantial Completion, all elements on the Substantial Completion Checklist (attached to this section) MUST be complete. 3.11 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 2. Submit copy of Owner's Substantial Completion Punch List, with signed and dated certification by the Contractor stating that every item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 0170 00-PAGE 7 OF 9 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0170 00 27 AUGUST 2019 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, final Operation and Maintenance Manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, accessory keys, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. Except where impractical, provide parts and materials in original unopened packaging. Permanently label all accessory keys. 6. Complete any deferred testing as defined in Division 1 Section "Commissioning Requirements." 7. Submit pest-control final inspection report and certification. 8. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 9. Submit Application for Final Payment and required support documentation and certifications according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will certify Application for Final Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Unless waived by Owner, a deductive Change Order for A/E costs will be executed for Final Completion re-inspections greater than one in number. C. Checklist: In order to certify, Final Completion, all elements on the Final Completion Checklist (attached to this section) MUST be complete. 3.12 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (CONTRACTOR'S PUNCH LIST) A. General: The Contractor shall prepare a single list of items to be completed and corrected. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use layout provided in electronic format by Engineer. Submit three copies of list. 3.13 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances. D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. E. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. 0170 00-PAGE 8 OF 9 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0170 00 27 AUGUST 2019 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS F. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. END OF SECTION 0170 00—PAGE 9 OF 9 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0174 19 27 AUGUST 2019 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL SECTION 0174 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible. B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. D. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration: 1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers. 2. Corrugated cardboard. 3. Wood pallets. 4. Treated wood. 5. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping, reinforcing bars, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze. 6. Glass. 7. Plastic sheeting. E. Contractor shall develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to implement these requirements. F. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1. Burning on the project site. 2. Burying on the project site. 3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4. Other illegal dumping or burying. G. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, State, and King County requirements, Ordinance 18166 codified in King County Code Chapter 10.30, Construction and Demolition Waste, and City of Renton requirements pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 0130 00—Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. 0174 19-PAGE 1 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0174 19 27 AUGUST 2019 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL C. Section 0150 00—Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. E. Section 0170 00— Execution and Closeout Requirements: Trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, adhesives, glues, or the like. B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, repair and demolition operations. C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitability, corrosively, toxicity or reactivity. D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitability, corrosively, toxicity, or reactivity. E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water. M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material. 0174 19-PAGE 2 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0174 19 27 AUGUST 2019 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Include the following information: 1. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project construction cycle, including types and quantities. 2. Landfill Options:The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s) where trash/waste will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project trash/waste in the landfill(s). 3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse, salvage, or recycling. 4. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention, reduction, recycling, salvage, reuse, and disposal. 5. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted from landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by designated facilities; include separation procedures for recyclables, storage, and packaging. 6. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be recycled; i.e. whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler. B. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report. 1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit Report will delay payment. 2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner. 3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills. c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 4. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), date removed from the project site, and receiving party. c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration. 5. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters). c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity. 0174 19-PAGE 3 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0174 19 27 AUGUST 2019 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 6. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate to disposal method. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 0130 00 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. B. See Section 0150 00 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. C. See Section 0170 00 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. 3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Owner, and Architect. C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings. 1. Pre-construction meeting. 2. Regularjob-site meetings. E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. 1. Provide containers as required. 2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations. G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse. I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site. 0174 19-PAGE 4 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0174 19 27 AUGUST 2019 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL END OF SECTION 0174 19-PAGE 5 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0178 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS SECTION 0178 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 0130 00 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. C. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. Substantial Completion and Final Completions Checklists. D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Owner with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit PDF preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents at least 10 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Owner/Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Owner/Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. Provide original hardcopy in binder and digital copy as PDF, provide tabs for all future items. 017800-PAGE 1 OF7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0178 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one full-size set of full-size hard copy black and white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Identification: In red ink and block letters, label each Record Drawing, including cover sheets, "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location on title block. Show all addenda changes on the applicable drawing sheet or specification section. 2. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 3. Content:Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. C. Changes made by Change Order. d. Changes made by Supplemental Instruction. e. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. f. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. g. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 4. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross- reference on the Contract Drawings. 5. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other reproducible colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 6. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 7. Note alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, Supplemental Instruction numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 017800-PAGE 2 OF7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0178 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification. 2. Consult Owner for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting. Include title blocks matching original drawings and assign appropriate sheet numbers. C. Binding: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets and create organized, tabbed PDFs at full scale. Include identification on cover sheets and tabs. 3.02 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. General: Annotate by striking out products/manufacturers not included in the work to provide a record of selections made. 1. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable. B. Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications. Include addenda and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Create a PDF copy with each section tabbed. 3.03 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Where the actual product or installation varies substantially from that indicated in previously submitted and approved Product Data, submit Record Product Data marked to indicate actual condition. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. 4. Where Record Product Data is required as part of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. 3.04 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Provide full size PDFs in an organized and tabbed file for miscellaneous records and identify each. 017800-PAGE 3 OF7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0178 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 3.05 O&M MANUALS, GENERAL A. Provide PDF files that are organized by section and file and fully tabbed and labeled. Provide files in original size, oriented and rotated in the document to read from top to bottom or screen. Scan or save files at a resolution suitable to clearly read all information at original size. Do not use overly large file sizes. Where the operation and maintenance documents include information furnished by multiple sources, assemble and coordinate information into a comprehensive whole. Eliminate all redundant, inapplicable, or unnecessary information so that submitted documentation reflects only actual installation. The Contractor is responsible for final assembly of manuals. B. Identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." C. Directory: Provide a separate directory PDF file summarizing the contents of all O&M Manuals. Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each O&M Manual. 2. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to O&M Manuals that contain information about each system, and separate references to Specification Sections in which each system or subsystem is addressed. 3. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. E. Title Page: Tab and label the title page. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other O&M Manuals. F. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. 017800-PAGE 4 OF7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0178 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS G. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Files: File type and format as approved by Owner. Documents shall be PDFs in 8-1/2-by-11-inch format. a. If two or more files are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other files if necessary, to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each file with Project title or name, and the subject matter of the file's contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. Use a layout supplied by Owner and in an electronic format approved by Owner. 2. Dividers: Reinforced heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software media for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Scan at original size at resolution suitable to read all documentation on the drawing sheet. Do not use higher than necessary resolution resulting in overly large files. 3.07 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE COMPONENT OF O&M MANUALS A. Content: Organize digital PDF manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 017800-PAGE 5 OF7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0178 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 3.08 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE COMPONENT OF O&M MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 3.09 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 279 mm) three D side ring binders with durable plastic no-print-transfer-type covers. F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal. G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item. 017800-PAGE 6 OF7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 0178 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible Principal. END OF SECTION 017800-PAGE 7 OF7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 02 4100 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE DEMOLITION SECTION 02 4100 SITE DEMOLITION PART GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all materials, equipment, labor, and related items necessary to complete the work shown on the Contract Drawings and/or Contract Specifications. The items of work to be performed shall include but are not limited to all items shown on Contract Drawings. In summary these include: 1. Selective site clearing &grubbing. 2. Protecting existing pedestrian lights and junction boxes. See Contract Drawings for lights and junction boxes that must be reset. 3. Protecting existing irrigation point-of-connection, water meters, and water line. 4. Protecting existing 6" Gas line. 5. Protecting existing regional stormwater facility including rain gardens and underground infiltration mineral aggregate. 6. Protecting existing concrete pathways, site furnishings, built structures, and landscape areas constructed in Phase 1 within the park. 7. Protecting existing electrical stub-outs. 8. Protecting existing concrete curbs and paving surrounding the park property. 9. Protecting existing Filtera unit. 10. Removing, salvaging, protecting, and reinstalling City of Renton traffic signs. 11. Partially demolishing pervious concrete areas and trash receptacle pad at Glenwood entry plaza. 12. Partially demolish concrete curb and pervious concrete in pathway intersection that is east of the playground. 13. Partially demolish the existing concrete curb 14. Partially removing existing irrigation system, salvaging, and stockpiling materials if material is in excellent, working condition. 1.02 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A. Related work in other sections of these Contract Specifications includes but is not limited to: 1. Section 0157 13 Temporary Sediment and Erosion Control 2. Section 0174 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 3. Section 12 93 00 Site Furnishings 4. Section 3110 00 Site Preparation 5. Section 3123 16 Excavation 6. Section 32 90 00 Planting 02 4100—PAGE 1 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 02 4100 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE DEMOLITION 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For the handling and disposal of Hazardous and/or Dangerous Waste materials the following requirements shall apply: 1. The Contractor's disposal company and transporter shall have their TSD State and Federal Waste Generation ID's and shall be currently certified to handle the specified waste substances. 2. The Contractor or disposal sub-contractor shall be capable of both recycling of usable materials and recovery/disposal of Hazardous/Dangerous Waste substances. 1.04 PROTECTION A. Provide protective cover and barriers as necessary to prevent damage and straining to all existing site improvements to remain during construction. B. Contact respective utility maintenance agencies to verify location of active utilities prior to excavation. Keep active utilities intact and in continuous operation. Protect active utility pipes and electrical systems encountered, as well as notify persons owning same. C. Protect neighboring property, occupants of said property, customers, visitors, passers-by from injury and discomfort caused by dust or debris. D. Protect recently constructed work for the Sunset Lane project and for Phase 1 of Sunset Neighborhood Park. Plans are available from the City of Renton. E. Maintain street and site drains, catch basins, and sewers open for free drainage. 1.05 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF SALVAGED MATERIAL A. Store and handle salvaged material with sufficient care to prevent scratches and other damage to finishes and materials. B. Store salvaged material to prevent corrosion, deterioration, and damage. C. Bent, dented, scratched, chipped, or otherwise damaged items are not acceptable for reinstallation and must be replaced by items and components in new condition. 1.07 OBJECTIONABLE NOISES A. Limit use of air hammers and all other noise producing equipment as much as possible especially during library hours. The library may have variable hours during different seasons of the year. Contact the library for hours during life of the construction project. 024100—PAGE 2 OF5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 02 4100 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE DEMOLITION B. Conform to local governing noise restrictions and requirements. 1.08 JOB CONDITIONS A. Visit site prior to bidding to determine nature of existing site conditions, materials, and other conditions that may affect work. Drawings of previously existing facilities are available for information only and do not necessarily reflect the actual conditions. The Contractor shall verify locations of existing utilities prior to proceeding with any work. B. Carefully maintain all benchmarks, monuments, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, replace at the Contractor's expense. C. Underground utilities and elements: Locate all underground utilities and elements prior to digging and/or driving stakes. Take care, to neither disturb nor damage any existing above ground or underground utilities or elements noted to be protected. The Contractor shall call Utility Notification Center @ (811) or(800)424-5555 or click www.calibeforeyoudig.org for utility location at or near the Public Rights-of-Way/Property Lines, and can also call Locating, Inc. @ (425) 392-6412,CNI @ (206) 255-8650 or Applied Professional Services @ (425) 313-1034 for location of utilities within the site. (Note:these firms will charge for services rendered).The Contractor shall pay for all fees and costs associated with utility disconnect, capping of lines and meter removals required within the Public Rights-of-Way. D. The Contractor shall meet with the Owner's Representative to verify location of utilities with the Contractor's location services. Verify that all appropriate services have been disconnected. E. Utility Shutoffs: Coordinate all work with other Division 01 requirements. Do not shut off or cap utilities without prior notice. Keep streets, sidewalks and site clean and free from debris at all times. Keep both street and site drainage systems open for free passage of runoff at all times. Provide siltation control and catch basin protection as required by Best Managements Practices and Drainage Codes as required and/or directed by the Owner's Representative. 1.09 PERMITS, CODES, AND REGULATIONS A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits and fees as required by Local Authority and prevailing ordinances and/or codes. B. Keep fully informed and shall comply with all existing laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations, which in any way affect the conduct of the work. C. Comply with environmental agencies, building codes and other local requirements that are more stringent than included in Contract Specifications. 024100-PAGE 3 OF5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 02 4100 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE DEMOLITION 1.10 CONDUCT OF WORK A. The Contractor shall confine operations to the working areas allotted by the Owner for operations, including material and equipment storage. B. The Contractor shall progressively clean the work site of debris and rubbish as the work proceeds. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. As required to complete the work as shown on the Contract Drawings and/or as specified in the Contract Specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. All vegetation and root layers shall be cleared and grubbed to a soil depth of 4 inches and disposed of. This soil layer shall not be acceptable for reuse. 3.02 DEMOLISH CONCRETE PAVING A. Identify the areas as shown on Contract Drawings of existing Concrete Paving that is designated to be removed for approval of the Owner's Representative prior to commencing this work. When markings are approved, provide a clean, sawn edge through thematerial to be removed to protect adjacent paving to remain. Use care to protect edge to remain as saw-cut edge will remain as a finished edge against new Concrete work. Completely remove Concrete paving, including base rock, to a total depth of 6". 3.03 REMOVE AND SALVAGE IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT A. Identify areas as shown on Contract Drawings of existing irrigation system to be removed for approval of the Owner's Representative prior to commencing this work. When markings are approved, remove, salvage and stockpile all irrigation heads, remove lateral pipe, mainline, and control wires that are in good condition and without damage. Use care to not damage equipment and piping to remain in place at connection points. 024100-PAGE 40F5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 02 4100 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE DEMOLITION 3.04 REPAIR AND REPLACE A. Repair to minor damages to existing work that was to be protected will only be allowed as reviewed and approved by the Owner's Representative. B. Repair work must be provided in first quality, workmanlike condition and/or per manufacturer's written instruction. C. Remove all damaged components as determined by the Owner's Representative. D. Irreparable damage to existing built work of the Park shall be replaced in-kind in a workmanlike manner per original contract drawings for that work. E. Replacement work of and repair work to existing built work that was to be protected, is at no cost to the Owner. 3.05 CLEAN-UP F. All work areas shall be kept clean during progress of work and until completion. Dispose of all surplus materials, waste materials, and rubbish off-site in accordance with all governmental laws, regulations, and ordinances. G. Provide certification from disposal site operator stating the disposal site complies with all governmental regulations. The Contractor, in a manner consistent with all government regulations, shall dispose of the refuse resulting from demolition. In no case shall refuse material be left on the project site, or be buried in embankments or trenches on the project site. All effort shall be made to recycle materials whenever possible. Maintain hauling routes clean and free of any debris resulting from work of this Section H. No on-site burning will be permitted. END OF SECTION 024100-PAGE 5 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 10 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 117, Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. b. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete. C. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Defective Areas: See definition in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Exposed Concrete: See definition in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318 to provide concrete finishes specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. When high-range water reducer(superplasticizer) is used in concrete mix, form design shall account for increased hydrostatic pressures. C. Joints in forms shall be watertight. D. Limit panel deflection to 1/360th of each component span to achieve tolerances specified. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Form release agent. 031000-PAGE 1OF3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 10 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. General: 1. Materials: a. Plywood, hard plastic finished plywood, overlaid waterproof particle board, or steel in "new and undamaged" condition, of sufficient strength and surface smoothness to produce specified finish. 2.02 B. WHERE STEEL FORMS ARE USED, TREAT STEEL SURFACES TO PREVENT RUSTING USING PRODUCTS APPROVED FOR USE ON STEEL FORMS.ACCESSORIES A. Form Release Agent: 1. Material: a. Shall not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces. b. Shall not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces when applied to forms. C. Ready-to-use water based material formulated to reduce or eliminate surface imperfections. d. Contain no mineral oil or organic solvents. 2. Manufacturers and Products: Not for surfaces exposed to potable water. a. BASF, Shakopee, MN; MBT MasterFinish RL 211. b. Cresset Chemical Company; Crete-Lease 20-VOC-Xtra. B. Rustication Grooves and Beveled Edge Corner Strips: Nonabsorbent material, compatible with form surface, fully sealed on all sides prohibiting loss of paste or water between the two surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FORM SURFACE PREPARATION A. Prior to coating surface, thoroughly clean form surfaces that will be in contact with concrete or that have been in contact with previously cast concrete, dirt, and other surface contaminants. B. Exposed Wood Forms in Contact with Concrete: Apply form release agent as recommended by manufacturer. 03 10 00-PAGE 2 OF 3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 10 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES C. Steel Forms: Apply form release agent as soon as they are cleaned to prevent discoloration of concrete from rust. 3.02 ERECTION A. General: In accordance with ACI 301, unless otherwise specified. B. Curb, and Sidewalk Forms: 1. Provide standard steel or wood forms. 2. Set forms to true lines and grades, and securely stake in position. C. Form Tolerances: Provide forms in accordance with ACI 117 and ACI 318, and the following tolerances for finishes specified. 3.03 FORM REMOVAL A. Nonsupporting forms, sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of Work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours from time of concrete placement if: 1. Concrete is sufficiently hard so as not to sustain damage by form removal operations. 2. Curing and protection operations are maintained. END OF SECTION 03 1000-PAGE 3 OF 3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 15 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE JOINTS AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 03 15 00 CONCRETE JOINTS AND ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36/A36M, Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A615/A615M, Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Construction Joints: Layout and location. Include joints locations shown on Drawings, additional required joint locations and any proposed alternate locations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESSORIES A. Steel Reinforcement: As specified in Section 03 2100, Steel Reinforcement. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION (EXPANSION) JOINT MATERIAL A. Pre-formed expansion joint material shall be rubber compound conforming to ASTM D1752, Type 1, and be full depth of the joint, 3/8-inch-thick. A.P.S. Fiber Board or Engineer-approved equal. B. Pre-formed expansion joint material for driveways, sidewalks, etc. shall be asphalt impregnated fiber, conforming to ASTM D994, full depth of joint, 3/8- inch-thick. A.P.S. Fiber Board or Engineer-approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Commence concrete placement after joint preparation is complete. 03 15 00- PAGE 1 OF 2 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 15 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE JOINTS AND ACCESSORIES B. Time Between Concrete Pours: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Construction Joints: Prior to placement of abutting concrete, clean contact surface. 1. Remove laitance and spillage from steel reinforcement and dowels. 2. Roughen surface to minimum of 1/4-inch amplitude: a. Sandblast after concrete has fully cured. b. Water blast after concrete has partially cured. C. Green cut fresh concrete with high-pressure water and hand tools. d. Finish per plans. END OF SECTION 03 1500- PAGE 20F2 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 2100 27 AUGUST 2019 STEEL REINFORCEMENT SECTION 03 2100 STEEL REINFORCEMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. b. SP-66, Detailing Manual. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): a. Placing Reinforcing Bars. b. Manual of Standard Practice. 4. International Code Council (ICC): Evaluation Services Report. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings prepared in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and ACI SP-66: a. Bending lists. b. Placing drawings. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Lab test reports for steel reinforcement showing stress-strain curves and ultimate strengths. 2. Test results of field testing. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Unload, store, and handle bars in accordance with CRSI publication "Placing Reinforcing Bars." 03 2100—PAGE 1 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 2100 27 AUGUST 2019 STEEL REINFORCEMENT PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: 1. Includes stirrups, ties, and spirals. 2. ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Tie Wire: 1. Black, soft-annealed 16-gauge wire. 2. Nylon-, epoxy-, or plastic-coated wire. B. Bar Supports and Spacers: 1. Use precast concrete bar supports and side form spacers, unless noted otherwise. Do not use other types of supports or spacers. 2. Bar supports shall have sufficient strength and stiffness to carry loads without failure, displacement, or significant deformation. Space bar supports so minimum concrete cover is maintained for reinforcing between supports. 3. Use only precast concrete bar supports where concrete surfaces are exposed to weather, earth, water, chloride intrusion, or corrosive chemicals. Bar supports shall be nonconductive and have geometry and bond characteristics that deter movement of moisture from the surface to the reinforcement. 4. Precast concrete supports shall have same minimum strength and shall be made from same materials as that of the concrete in which they are to be embedded. Precast concrete supports shall be cast and properly cured for at least 7 days before use and shall have a wire or other device cast into each block for the purpose of attaching them securely to steel reinforcement. 5. Design and fabricate special bar supports for top reinforcing bars in slabs where standard bar supports do not possess necessary geometry, strength, or stiffness. 6. Precast Concrete Supports: a. Total bond precast, high-performance concrete bar supports as supplied by: 1) Con Sys Inc., Pinawa, MB, Canada. 2) Dayton Superior, Miamisburg, OH, Dobies. 032100—PAGE20F4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 2100 27 AUGUST 2019 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 2.03 FABRICATION A. Follow CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. B. Bend bars cold. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Notify Owner's Representative when reinforcing is ready for inspection and allow sufficient time for inspection prior to placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcing bars of loose mill scale, oil, earth, and other contaminants. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Bundle or space bars, instead of field bending where construction access through reinforcing is necessary. B. Spacing and Positioning: Conform to ACI 318. C. Location Tolerances: In accordance with CRSI publication, "Placing Reinforcing Bars". D. Splicing: 1. Follow ACI 318. 2. Use lap splices, unless otherwise shown or permitted in writing by Owner's Representative. 3. Stagger splices in adjacent bars where indicated. E. Tying Reinforcing Bars: 1. Tie every other intersection on mats made up of Nos. 3, 4, 5, and 6 bars to hold them firmly at required spacing. 2. Bend tie wire away from concrete surface to provide clearance of 1 inch from surface of concrete to tie wire. F. Reinforcement Around Openings: On each side and above and below pipe or opening, place an equivalent area of steel bars to replace steel bars cut for opening. Extend steel reinforcing a standard lap length beyond opening at each end. 03 2100-PAGE 3 OF4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 2100 27 AUGUST 2019 STEEL REINFORCEMENT G. Straightening and Rebending: Field bending of steel reinforcement bars is not permitted. H. Unless permitted by Owner's Representative, do not cut reinforcing bars in field. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner-Furnished Quality Assurance, in accordance with IBC Chapter 17 requirements, is provided in the Statement of Special Inspections Plan on Drawings. Contractor responsibilities and related information are included in Section 0145 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing. B. Contractor-Furnished Quality Control: Inspection and testing as required in Section 0145 16.13, Contractor Quality Control. END OF SECTION 03 2100-PAGE 40F4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 117, Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. b. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete. C. 305.1, Specification for Hot Weather Concreting. d. 306.1, Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. e. CP-1, Technical Workbook for ACI Certification of Concrete Field Testing Technician —Grade 1. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C31/C31M, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. b. C33/C33M, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. C. C39/C39M, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. d. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. e. C109/C109M, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube Specimens). f. C143/C143M, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic- Cement Concrete. g. C150/C150M, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. h. C157/C157M, Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar and Concrete. i. C227, Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method). j. C231/C231M, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. k. C260/C260M, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. I. C494/C494M, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. M. C595/C595M, Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 03 30 00-PAGE 1 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE n. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. o. C881/C881M, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. p. C989, Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars. q. C1012/C1012M, Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution. r. C1017/C1017M, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. S. C1074, Standard Practice for Estimating Concrete Strength by the Maturity Method. t. C1077, Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation. U. C1218/C1218M, Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. V. C1260, Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method). W. C1293, Standard Test Method for Determination of Length Change of Concrete Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction. X. C1567, Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method). Y. C1582/C1582M, Standard Specification for Admixtures to Inhibit Chloride-Induced Corrosion of Reinforcing Steel in Concrete. Z. C1602/C1602M, Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. aa. E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Special Inspection, or Testing Materials Used in Construction. bb. E1155, Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness Numbers. 3. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA). 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Contractor's Licensed Design Engineer: Individual representing Contractor who is licensed to practice engineering as defined by statutory requirements of professional licensing laws in state or jurisdiction in which Project is to be constructed. 03 30 00-PAGE 2 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE B. Defective Area: Surface defects that include honeycomb, rock pockets, indentations, and surface voids greater than 3/16-inch deep, surface voids greater than 3/4 inch in diameter, cracks in liquid containment structures and below grade habitable spaces that are 0.005-inch wide and wider, and cracks in other structures that are 0.010-inch wide and wider, spalls, chips, embedded debris, sand streaks, mortar leakage from form joints, deviations in formed surface that exceed specified tolerances and include but are not limited to fins, form pop-outs, and other projections. At exposed concrete, defective areas also include texture irregularities, stains, and other color variations that cannot be removed by cleaning. C. Exposed Concrete: Concrete surface that can be seen inside or outside of structure regardless of whether concrete is above water, dry at all times, or can be seen when structure is drained. D. Hot Weather: As defined in ACI 305.1. E. New Concrete: Less than 60 days old. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Mix Designs: a. Contain proportions of materials and admixtures to be used on Project, signed by mix designer. b. Documentation of average strength for each proposed mix design in accordance with ACI 301. C. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, for the following: 1) Portland cement. 2) Fly ash. 3) Slag cement. 4) Aggregates, including specified class designation for coarse aggregate. 5) Admixtures. 6) Concrete producer has verified compatibility of constituent materials in design mix. d. Test Reports: 1) Supplementary Cementitious Materials: Chemical analysis report and report of other specified test analyses. 03 30 00-PAGE 3 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE 2) Water-Soluble Chloride-Ion Content in Hardened Concrete: Unless otherwise permitted, in accordance with ASTM C1218/C1218M at an age between 28 days and 42 days. e. Aggregates: 1) Coarse Aggregate Gradation: List gradings and percent passing through each sieve. 2) Fine Aggregate Gradation: List gradings and percent passing through each sieve. 3) Percent of fine aggregate weight to total aggregate weight. 4) Deleterious substances in fine aggregate per ASTM C33/C33M, Table 2. 5) Deleterious substances in coarse aggregate per ASTM C33/C33M, Table 4. 6) Test Reports: a) Alkali Aggregate Reactivity: Aggregate shall be classified as nonpotentially reactive in accordance with Article Concrete Mix Design. Include documentation of test results per applicable standards. f. Admixtures: Manufacturer's catalog cut sheets and product data sheets for each admixture used in proposed mix designs. 2. Product Data: Specified ancillary materials. 3. Detailed plan for hot weather placements including curing and protection for concrete placed in ambient temperatures over 80 degrees F. Plan shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Procedures for measuring and recording temperatures of reinforcement and other embedded items prior to concrete placement. b. Use of retarding admixture. C. Methods for controlling temperature of reinforcement and other embedded items and concrete materials before and during placement. d. Types of shading and wind protection to be provided. e. Curing methods, including use of evaporation retardant. f. Procedures for measuring and recording concrete temperatures. g. Procedures for preventing drying during dry, windy conditions. 4. Concrete repair techniques. 5. Mock-Up Panels: a. Construct all mock-up panels using the processes, technique, methods, and materials proposed for use on permanent work, 03 30 00-PAGE 4 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE including curing procedures and finishes. Include all joints, patterns, finishes, and color in mock-up panels. b. Contractor shall provide up to additional 2 mock-up panels for review and approval should the first panel or subsequent mock- up panels be declined. The accepted mock-up panel shall serve as a minimum standard of acceptance for the final work. C. Create mock-up panels a minimum of 7 days in advance of concrete delivery and concrete work. d. Mock-up panels required for: 1) Color concrete pattern and joints for the Decorative Mist Feature. 2) Concrete finish and score pattern mock-up for picnic plaza, gazebo slab, and ADA ramp paving. 3) Light sandblast finish for wall and curb surfaces indicated in plans. Half of mock-up surface will have anti-graffiti coating in order to compare before application and after application conditions side-by-side. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance to specified standards: repair materials. 2. Statement of Qualification: a. Batch Plant: Certification as specified herein. b. Mix designer. C. Installer. d. Testing agency. 3. Field test reports. 4. Color concrete additives cutsheet and sample chips. 5. Concrete Delivery Tickets: a. For each batch of concrete before unloading at Site. b. In accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, including requirements 14.2.1. through 14.2.10. C. Indicate amount of mixing water withheld and maximum amount that may be permitted to be added at Site. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Concrete construction shall conform to requirements of ACI 117 and ACI 301, except as modified herein. B. Qualifications: 03 30 00-PAGE 5 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE 1. Batch Plant: NRMCA Program for Certification of Ready-Mixed Concrete Production Facilities or approved equivalent program. 2. Mix Designer: Person responsible for developing concrete mixture proportions certified as NRMCA Concrete Technologist Level 2 or DOT certified mix designer in jurisdiction of the Work. Requirement may be waived if individual is Contractor's Licensed Design Engineer. 3. Testing Agency: Unless otherwise permitted, an independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated. a. Where field testing is required of Contractor, personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. b. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician -Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician -Grade II. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cementitious Materials: 1. Cement: a. Portland Cement: Unless otherwise specified, conform to requirements of ASTM C150/C150M. b. Blended Hydraulic Cement: 1) Unless otherwise specified, conform to requirements of ASTM C595/C595M. 2) Portland cement used in blended hydraulic cement, conform to requirements of ASTM C150/C150M. C. Furnish from one source. 2. Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM): a. Fly Ash (Pozzolan): Class F fly ash in accordance with ASTM C618, except as modified herein: 1) ASTM C618, Table 1, Loss on Ignition: Unless permitted otherwise, maximum 3 percent. b. Slag Cement: In accordance with ASTM C989, Grade 100 or Grade 120. 03 30 00-PAGE 6 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE B. Aggregates: Furnish from one source for each aggregate type used in a mix design. 1. Normal-Weight Aggregates: a. In accordance with ASTM C33/C33M, except as modified herein. 1) Class Designation: 4S unless otherwise specified. b. Free of materials and aggregate types causing popouts, discoloration, staining, or other defects on surface of concrete. C. Alkali Silica Reactivity: See Article Concrete Mix Design. 2. Fine Aggregates: a. Clean, sharp, natural sand. b. ASTM C33/C33M. C. Limit deleterious substances in accordance with ASTM C33/C33M, Table 2 and as follows: 1) Limit material finer than 75-µm (No. 200) sieve to 5 percent mass of total sample. 2) Limit coal and lignite to 0.5 percent. 3. Coarse Aggregate: a. Natural gravels, combination of gravels and crushed gravels, crushed stone, or combination of these materials containing no more than 15 percent flat or elongated particles (long dimension more than five times the short dimension). b. Limit deleterious substances in accordance with ASTM C33/C33M, Table 4 for specified class designation. C. Admixtures: Unless otherwise permitted, furnish from one manufacturer. 1. Characteristics: a. Compatible with other constituents in mix. b. Contain at most, only trace amount chlorides in solution. C. Furnish type of admixture as recommended by manufacturer for anticipated temperature ranges. 2. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A or Type D. a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) BASF Admixtures Inc., Shakopee, MN; Pozzolith Series or PolyHeed Series. 2) Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucon Series. 3) W. R. Grace & Co., Cambridge, MA; Daracem Series or Mira Series. 3. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type B. 4. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F or Type G. 03 30 00-PAGE 7 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE 6. Do not use calcium chloride as an admixture. 7. Admixtures with no standard, ASTM or other, designation may be used where permitted. D. Water and Ice: Mixing water for concrete and water used to make ice shall be potable water, unless alternative sources of water are permitted. 1. Water from alternative sources shall comply with requirements of ASTM C1602/C1602M, and concentration of chemicals in combined mixing water shall be less than: a. Chloride Content: 1,000 ppm. b. Sulfate Content as SO4: 3,000 ppm. C. Alkalis as (Na20 + 0.658 K20): 600 ppm. d. Total Solids by Mass: Less than 50,000 ppm. 2.02 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Bonding Agent: 1. Unless otherwise specified, in accordance with the following: a. ASTM C881/C881M,Type V. b. Two-component, moisture insensitive, 100 percent solids epoxy. C. Consult manufacturer for surface finish, pot life, set time, vertical or horizontal application, and forming restrictions. d. Manufacturers and Products: 1) BASF Building Systems Inc., Shakopee, MN; Concresive Standard LVI. 2) Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Euco# 352 Epoxy System LV. 3) Prime Resins, Conyers, GA; Prime Bond 3000 to 3900 Series. 4) Sika Chemical Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod. B. Anti-Graffiti Coating: 1. Must be an environmental ly-friendlyformulation with zero VOC emission and for use on unpainted concrete. 2. Must provide a clear, protective, UV resistant coating where graffiti tagging can be removed without affecting the appearance of the concrete underneath. 3. Must provide a minimum 10-year unlimited warranty. 4. Must not yellow, flake, or create white-chaulking underneath. 5. Must provide a matte finish. Gloss finish is not acceptable. 03 30 00-PAGE 8 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE 6. Basis of Design Product: Permashield Premium Graffiti Control System produced by Monopole, Inc. 4661 Alger Street, Los Angeles, CA 900391; Telephone: 818-500-8585; Email: info@ monopoleinc.com; Website: www.monopoleinc.com. C. Repair Material: 1. Contain only trace amounts of chlorides and other chemicals that can potentially cause steel to oxidize. 2. Where repairs of exposed concrete are required, prepare mockup using proposed repair materials and methods, for confirmation of appearance compatibility prior to use. 3. Obtain Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance that products selected are appropriate for specific applications. 4. Repair mortar shall be site mixed. 5. Prepare concrete substrate and mix, place, and cure repair material in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. BASF Building Systems Inc., Shakopee, MN; EMACO S-Series products. b. Sika Chemical Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; SikaTop-Series. 2.03 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. General: 1. See Supplement at the end of this section for mix design requirements for each class of concrete used on Project. 2. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, selecting and proportioning ingredients in accordance with requirements of ACI 301, unless otherwise specified. 3. Selection of constituent materials and products in mix design are optional, unless specified otherwise. 4. Unless otherwise permitted, use water-reducing admixture or water-reducing admixture and high-range, water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, in concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 5. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range, water-reducing admixture to achieve fresh properties that facilitate handling, placing, and consolidating of concrete, and specified hardened properties. 03 30 00-PAGE 9 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE 6. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when anticipated high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions can adversely affect fresh properties of concrete. 7. Unless otherwise specified, desired fresh properties of concrete shall be determined by Contractor, and coordinated with concrete producer. Fresh properties of concrete shall remain stable to satisfaction of Contractor, for duration of placement and consolidation, and shall remain in conformance with requirements of Contract Documents. 8. Contractor is encouraged to consider using environmentally sustainable concrete mix design technologies such as use of supplementary cementitious materials and aggregate packing. B. Potential alkali-aggregate reactivity of concrete: 1. Do not use aggregates known to be susceptible to alkali-carbonate reaction (ACR). 2. Aggregates shall have been tested to determine potential alkali- aggregate reactivity in concrete in accordance with ASTM C1260 or ASTM C1567. a. Aggregates that indicate expansion greater than 0.10 percent at 16 days after casting shall not be used unless they have been shown to be nondeleteriously reactive in accordance with ASTM C227 or ASTM C1293, with less than 0.04 percent expansion at 1 year for cement-aggregate combinations or less than 0.04 percent expansion at 2 years for combinations with pozzolan or slag. b. Alkali content of cement used in proposed concrete mixture shall not be greater than alkali content of cement used in test for potential alkali-aggregate reactivity. C. Use low-alkali cement or incorporate pozzolans into concrete mixture as necessary to satisfy testing for potential alkali reactivity. C. Proportions: 1. Design mix to meet aesthetic, durability, and strength requirements. 2. Where fly ash is included in mix, minimum fly ash content shall be a minimum of 15 percent of weight of total cementitious materials. D. Slump Range at Site: 1. Prior to submitting mix design, consult with concrete producer and select a target slump value at point of delivery, for each application of 03 30 00-PAGE 10 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE each design mix. Unless otherwise permitted, target slump value will then be enforced for duration of Project. Unless otherwise permitted, target slump value is 4 inches at point of delivery, for concrete without high-range, water reducing admixture. 2. Design mixes that include a high-range, water-reducing admixture shall have a minimum slump of 2 inches prior to addition of admixture. Unless otherwise permitted, slump shall be 8 inches maximum at point of delivery, for concrete with a high-range, water-reducing admixture. 3. Slump tolerance shall meet requirements of ACI 117. E. Combined Aggregate: 1. Combined Gradation Limits: Fine aggregate shall be in range of 36 percent to 40 percent of total aggregate weight. 2.04 CONCRETE MIXING A. General: In accordance with ACI 301, except as modified herein. B. Truck Mixers: 1. For every truck, test slump of samples taken per ASTM C94/C94M, paragraph 12.5.1. 2. Where specified slump is more than 4 inches, and if slump tests differ by more than 2 inches, discontinue use of truck mixer, unless causing condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is verified by additional slump tests. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Source Quality Control Inspection: Owners Representative shall have access to and have right to inspect batch plants, cement mills, and supply facilities of suppliers, manufacturers, and Subcontractors, providing products included in this section. 2.06 INTEGRAL COLOR A. Provide equipment and materials to produce integral color, pour-in-place concrete where indicated on plans (decorative mist feature). B. Dry Powder Iron Oxide Pigments Compliance: ASTM C 979. C. Material: Natural and synthetic, milled, blended iron oxide in mix-ready dry powder form that will produce an uniform and consistent color; manufactured 03 30 00-PAGE 11 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE by Davis Colors, Phone 800-356-4848, Email info@daviscolors.com, Website: www.daviscolors.com. D. Colors: 1. Harvest Gold 2. Graphite E. Permanent, inert, stable to atmospheric conditions, sun fast, weather resistant, alkali resistant, water insoluble, lime proof, and nonbleeding. Free of deleterious fillers and extenders. Particle Size: 95 to 99 percent minus 325 mesh. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACING CONCRETE A. Preparation: Meet requirements ACI 301, except as modified herein. B. Inspection: Notify Owners Representative and Special Inspector at least 1 full working day in advance before starting to place concrete. C. Placement into Formwork: 1. Reinforcement: Secure in position before placing concrete. 2. Place concrete as soon as possible after leaving mixer, without segregation or loss of ingredients, without splashing forms or steel above, and in layers not over 1.5 feet deep, except for slabs which shall be placed full depth. Place and consolidate successive layers prior to initial set of first layer to prevent cold joints. 3. Placement frequency shall be such that lift lines will not be visible in exposed concrete finishes. 4. Use placement devices, for example chutes, pouring spouts, and pumps as required to prevent segregation. 5. Do not use aluminum conveying devices. 6. Provide sufficient illumination in the interior of forms so concrete deposition is visible, permitting confirmation of consolidation quality. 7. Trowel and round off top exposed edges of walls with 1/4-inch radius steel edging tool. 8. Cure concrete as specified in Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing. D. Conveyor Belts and Chutes: 03 30 00-PAGE 12 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE 1. Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates, and other points of concrete discharge throughout conveying, hoisting, and placing system for concrete to pass without becoming segregated. 2. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. 3. Minimum Slopes of Chutes: Angled to allow concrete to readily flow without segregation. 4. Conveyor Belts: a. Approved by Owners Representative. b. Wipe clean with device that does not allow mortar to adhere to belt. C. Cover conveyor belts and chutes. E. Retempering: Not permitted for concrete where cement has partially hydrated. F. Pumping of Concrete: 1. Provide standby pump, conveyor system, crane and concrete bucket, or other system onsite during pumping, for adequate redundancy to ensure completion of concrete placement without cold joints in case of primary placing equipment breakdown. 2. Minimum Pump Hose (Conduit) Diameter: 4 inches. 3. Replace pumping equipment and hoses (conduits) that are not functioning properly. G. Maximum Size of Concrete Placements: 1. Limit size of each placement to allow for strength gain and volume change as a result of shrinkage. 2. Construction Joints: a. Unless otherwise shown or permitted, locate construction joints as follows: 1) Locate construction joints as shown on Drawings or where approved in joint location submittal required in Section 03 15 00, Concrete Joints and Accessories. H. Minimum Time between Adjacent Placements: 1. Construction or Control Joints: 7 days unless otherwise specified. I. Consolidation and Visual Observation: 1. Consolidation Equipment and Methods: ACI 301. 03 30 00-PAGE 13 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE 2. Provide at least one standby vibrator in operable condition at Site prior to placing concrete. 3. Vibrate concrete in vicinity of joints to obtain impervious concrete. J. Hot Weather: 1. Prepare ingredients, mix, place, cure, and protect in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 305.1, and as follows: a. Maintain concrete temperature below 95 degrees F at time of placement or furnish test data or other proof that admixtures and mix ingredients do not produce flash set plastic shrinkage, or cracking as a result of heat of hydration. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain fresh concrete temperatures as specified or less. b. Provide for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ice, wet cover, or other means as necessary to maintain concrete at or below specified temperature. 2. Concrete Curing: As specified in Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing. 3.02 CONCRETE BONDING A. Construction Joints in New Concrete Members: Prepare surface of construction joint as specified in Section 03 15 00, Concrete Joints and Accessories. 3.03 REPAIRING CONCRETE A. General: 1. Repair defective areas of concrete. 2. Repair concrete surfaces using specified materials. Select system, submit for review, and obtain approval from Owner's Representative prior to use. 3. Develop repair techniques with material manufacturer on surface that will not be visible in final construction prior to starting actual repair work and show how finish color will blend with adjacent surfaces. Obtain approval from Owner's Representative. 4. Obtain quantities of repair material and manufacturer's detailed instructions for use to provide repair with finish to match adjacent surface or apply sufficient repair material adjacent to repair to blend finish appearance. 03 30 00-PAGE 14 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE 5. Repair of concrete shall provide structurally sound surface finish, uniform in appearance or upgrade finish by other means until acceptable to Owners Representative. B. Exposed Metal Objects: 1. Remove metal objects not intended to be exposed in as-built condition of structure including wire, nails, and bolts, by chipping back concrete to depth of 1 inch and then cutting or removing metal object. 2. Repair area of chipped-out concrete as specified for defective areas. C. Penetrations: Where shown install in accordance with requirements of Drawings. 3.04 CONCRETE WALL FINISHES A. Type W-1 (Wall Finish with Light Sandblast and Anti-Graffiti Coating): 1. Patch tie holes. 2. Knock off projections. 3. Repair defective areas. 4. Apply Light Sandblast Finish. 5. Apply Anti-Graffiti Coating. 3.05 LIGHT SANDBLAST A. Perform sand blasting at least 72 hours after placement of concrete. Coordinate with formwork construction, concrete placement schedule, and formwork removal to ensure that surfaces to be blast finished are blasted at the same age for uniform results. B. Determine type of nozzle, nozzle pressure, and blasting techniques required to match the control samples. C. Abrasive blast corners carefully, using back-up boards, to maintain uniform corner line. D. Perform sandblast finishing in as continuous an operation as possible, utilizing the same work crew to maintain continuity of finish on each wall surface. E. Use an abrasive grit of proper type and gradation to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surface to match the submitted control samples as follows: 03 30 00-PAGE 15 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE 1. Light Sand Blast Finish: Expose fine aggregate with occasional exposure of coarse aggregate; maximum 1/16 inch reveal. 3.06 ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING A. Prepare concrete wall surface and apply sealer coat, base coats, and top coats according to the most recent written instructions provided by approved product manufacturer. 3.07 CONCRETE SLAB FINISHES A. General: 1. Use manual screeds, vibrating screeds, or roller compacting screeds to place concrete level and smooth. 2. Do not use "jitterbugs" or other special tools designed for purpose of forcing coarse aggregate away from surface and allowing layer of mortar, which will be weak and cause surface cracks or delamination, to accumulate. 3. Finish slab in accordance with specified slab finish. 4. Do not dust surfaces with dry materials nor add water to surfaces. 5. Cure concrete as specified in Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing. B. Type S-1 (Steel Troweled Finish): 1. Finish by screeding and floating with straightedges to bring surfaces to required finish elevation. 2. Wood float to true, even plane with no coarse aggregate visible. 3. Use sufficient pressure on wood floats to bring moisture to surface. 4. After surface moisture has disappeared, hand steel trowel concrete to produce smooth, smooth dense surface, free from trowel marks. 5. Provide light steel-troweled finish (two trowelings) at air-entrained slabs. Provide hard steel-troweled finish (ringing sound from the trowel) for nonair-entrained slabs. 6. Do not use dry cement or additional water during troweling, nor will excessive troweling be permitted. 7. Power Finishing: a. Approved power machine may be used in lieu of or in addition to hand finishing in accordance with directions of machine manufacturer. b. Do not use power machine when concrete has not attained necessary set to allow finishing without introducing high and low spots in slab. C. Do first steel troweling for slab S-1 finish by hand. 03 30 00-PAGE 16 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE C. Type S-2 (Wood Float Finish): 1. Finish slab to receive fill and mortar setting bed by screeding with straightedges to bring surface to required finish plane. 2. Wood float finish to compact and seal surface. 3. Remove laitance and leave surface clean. 4. Coordinate with other finish procedures. D. Medium Broom Finish: 1. After completion of floating and troweling, when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete medium broom surface finishing. 2. Draw a fiber or wire broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to the line of traffic or as noted on the Drawings. E. Concrete Curbs: 1. Float top surface of curb smooth and finish all discontinuous edges with steel edger. 2. After concrete has taken its initial set, remove front form and give exposed vertical surface an ordinary wall finish, Type W-1. 3.08 CONCRETE SLAB TOLERANCES 1. Slab Flatness and Levelness: a. Floor finish tolerances shall meet requirements specified herein, and as measured in accordance with ASTM E1155. b. Levelness tolerance, FL, shall not apply to slabs placed on unshored form surfaces or shored form surfaces after removal of shores. C. Levelness tolerances, FL, shall not apply to cambered or inclined surfaces, and shall be measured within 24 hours after slab concrete placement. Slab Type S-A Minimum Overall F Numbers Minimum Local F Numbers Flatness, FF Levelness, FL Flatness, FF Levelness,11 FL 35 25 1 24 17 B. Slab Elevation and Thickness: 03 30 00-PAGE 17 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE 1. Finish Slab Elevation: Slope slabs to floor drains and gutter. Slabs shall adequately drain regardless of tolerances. 2. Thickness: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch plus from thickness shown. Where thickness tolerance will not affect slope, drainage, or slab elevation, thickness tolerance may exceed 1/2 inch plus. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test specimens onsite for first 24 hours, and for additional time as may be required before transporting to test lab. 2. Unless otherwise specified, sample concrete for testing for making test specimens, from point of delivery. 3. When concrete is pumped, sample and test air content at point of delivery and at point of placement. a. For Each Concrete Mixture: Provided results of air content tests for first load of the day are within specified limits, testing need only be performed at point of delivery for subsequent loads of that concrete mixture except that testing should be performed at point of placement every 4 hours. 4. Evaluation will be in accordance with ACI 301 and Specifications. 5. Test specimens shall be made, cured, and tested in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M and ASTM C39/C39M. 6. Frequency of testing may be changed at discretion of Owner's Representative. 7. Pumped Concrete: Take concrete samples for slump, ASTM C143/C143M, and test specimens, ASTM C31/C31M and ASTM C39/C39M. 8. If measured air content at delivery is greater than specified limit, check test of air content will be performed immediately on a new sample from delivery unit. If check test fails, concrete has failed to meet requirements of Contract Documents. If measured air content is less than lower specified limit, adjustments will be permitted in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, unless otherwise specified. If check test of adjusted mixture fails, concrete has failed to meet requirements of Contract Documents. Concrete that has failed to meet requirements of Contract Documents shall be rejected. 03 30 00-PAGE 18 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE B. Concrete Strength Test: 1. Unless otherwise specified, one specimen at age of 7 days for information, and two 6-inch diameter or when permitted three 4-inch diameter test specimens at age of 28 days for acceptance. 2. If result of 7-day concrete strength test is less than 50 percent of specified 28-day strength, extend period of moist curing specified in Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing, by 7 additional days. 3. Provide a minimum of one spare test specimen per sample. Test spare cylinder as directed by Owner's Representative. C. High-Range, Water-Reducer(Superplasticizer) Admixture Segregation Test: Test each truck prior to use on Project. 1. Segregation Test Objective: Concrete with 4-inch to 8-inch slump shall stay together when slumped. Segregation is assumed to cause mortar to flow out of mix even though aggregate may stay piled enough to meet slump test. 2. Test Procedure: Make slump test and check for excessive slump and observe to see if mortar or moisture flows from slumped concrete. 3. Reject concrete if mortar or moisture separates and flows out of mix. D. Tolerances: 1. Slab Finish Tolerances and Slope Tolerances: a. Slab Flatness and Levelness: Make measurements within 24 hours of concrete placement. 1) Flatness measurements are not applicable to unshored form surfaces or shored form surfaces after removal of shores. 2) Levelness measurements are not applicable to cambered or sloped surfaces. b. Slab flatness and levelness shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E1155. 03 30 00—PAGE 19 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE 3.10 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Provide representative at Site for installation assistance, inspection, and certification of proper installation for concrete ingredients, mix design, mixing, and placement. 1. Concrete Producer Representative: a. Assist with concrete mix design, performance, placement, weather problems, and problems as may occur with concrete mix throughout Project, including instructions for redosing. b. Establish control limits on concrete mix designs. C. Provide equipment for control of concrete redosing for air entrainment or high-range, water-reducing admixture, superplasticizers, at Site to maintain proper slump and air content if needed. 2. Admixture Manufacturer's Representative: Available for consultations as required to ensure proper installation and performance of specified products. 3. Bonding Agent Manufacturer's Representative: Available for consultations as required to ensure proper installation and performance of specified products. 3.11 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. After curing as specified in Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing, and after applying final floor finish, cover slabs with plywood or particle board or plastic sheeting or other material to keep floor clean and protect it from material and damage as a result of other construction work. B. Repair areas damaged by construction, using specified repair materials and approved repair methods. 3.12 SCHEDULE OF CONCRETE FINISHES A. Form Tolerances: As specified in Section 03 10 00, Concrete Forming and Accessories. 03 30 00-PAGE 20 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE B. Provide concrete finishes as scheduled: Required Type of Form Area Finish Tolerances Exterior Slabs Top of footing S-2 S-A Interior Slabs Building S-1 S-A 3.13 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Requirements of concrete mix designs in Section 03 30 05 are a part of this Specification and supplement requirements of Part 1 through Part 3 of this section: 1. Concrete Mix Design, Class 4500F2S1P1C1. 2. Concrete Mix Design, Class 4500F3S1P1C2. END OF SECTION 03 30 00-PAGE 21 OF 21 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 05 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE MIXES SECTION 03 30 05 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE MIXES CONCRETE MIX DESIGN, CLASS 4500F2S1P1C1 A. Mix Locations: Where specified in Contract Documents. B. Exposure Categories and Classifications: F2S1P1C1. C. Mix Properties: 1. Limit water to cementitious materials ratio (W/Cm) in mix design to maximum value of 0.45. 2. Minimum concrete compressive strength (f'c) shall be 4,000 psi at 28 days and 4,500 psi at 56 days. a. Designed to conform to shrinkage limits. b. Air-entraining admixtures are prohibited in concrete mixtures and total air content shall not be greater than 3 percent, for the following: 1) Slabs to receive a hard-troweled finish. 2) Slabs to receive a dry shake floor hardener. C. Unless otherwise specified, provide air content based on nominal maximum size of aggregate as follows: Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size Air Content in. * N* 3/8 7.5 1/2 7.0 3/4 6.0 1 6.0 1-1/2 5.5 2§ 5.0 3§ 4.5 *See ASTM C33/C33M for tolerance on oversize for various nominal maximum size designations. *Tolerance of air content is +1-1/2 percent. 03 30 05-PAGE 1 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 05 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE MIXES Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size Air Content in. * N* §Air contents apply to total mixture. When testing concretes, however, aggregate particles larger than 1-1/2 inches are to be removed by sieving and air content will be measured on sieved fraction (tolerance on air content as delivered applies to this value). Air content of total mixture is computed from value measured on sieved fraction passing 1-1/2-inch sieve in accordance with ASTM C231/C231M. 3. Provide cementitious materials in accordance with one of the following: a. ASTM C150/C150M Type II; inclusion of supplementary cementitious materials in design mix is optional. b. ASTM C150/C150M types other than Type II, plus supplementary cementitious materials in accordance with one of the following: 1) Tricalcium Aluminate Content of Total Cementitious Materials: Maximum 8 percent by weight. 2) Provide documentation of test results in accordance with ASTM C1012/C1012M, for combinations of cementitious materials providing sulfate resistance with expansion less than 0.10 percent at 6 months. 3) ASTM C595/C595M Type I or Type IS (less than 70), tested to comply with moderate sulfate resistance option (MS). 4. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent, unless otherwise specified. a. Limits are stated in terms of chloride ions in percent by weight of cement. b. Unless otherwise permitted, provide documentation from concrete tested in accordance with ASTM C1218/C1218M at an age between 28 days and 42 days. D. Refer to PART 1 through PART 3 of Specification 03 30 00 for additional requirements. 03 30 05-PAGE 2 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 05 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE MIXES CONCRETE MIX DESIGN, CLASS 4500F3S1P1C2 A. Mix Locations: Concrete curbs. B. Exposure Categories and Classifications: F3S1P1C2. C. Mix Properties: 1. Limit water to cementitious materials ratio (W/Cm) in mix design to maximum value of 0.42. 2. Minimum concrete compressive strength (f'c) shall be 3,500 psi at 28 days and 4,500 psi at 56 days. 3. Air-entraining admixtures are prohibited in concrete mixtures and total air content shall not be greater than 3 percent, for the following: a. Slabs to receive hard-troweled finish. b. Slabs to receive dry shake floor hardener. 4. Unless otherwise specified, provide air content based on nominal maximum size of aggregate as follows: Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size Air Content in.$ N* 3/8 7.5 1/2 7.0 3/4 6.0 1 6.0 1-1/2 5.5 2§ 5.0 3§ 4.5 03 3 0 05-PAG E 3 0 F 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 05 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE MIXES Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size Air Content in.$ N* *See ASTM C33/C33M for tolerance on oversize for various nominal maximum size designations. *Tolerance of air content is +1-1/2 percent. §Air contents apply to total mixture. When testing concretes, however, aggregate particles larger than 1-1/2 inches are to be removed by sieving and air content will be measured on the sieved fraction (tolerance on air content as delivered applies to this value). Air content of total mixture is computed from value measured on the sieved fraction passing the 1-1/2-inch sieve in accordance with ASTM C231/C231M. 5. Limit supplementary cementitious materials measured as a percent of weight of total cementitious materials in a mix design, as follows: a. Fly Ash and other Pozzolans: 25 percent. b. Slag Cement: 50 percent. C. Combined Fly Ash and other Pozzolans and Slag Cement: 50 percent, with fly ash and other pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent. d. Total cementitious materials include ASTM C150/C150M and ASTM C595/C595M cement. 1) Fly ash and other pozzolans in Type IP, blended cement, ASTM C595/C595M. 2) Slag used in the manufacture of an IS blended cement, ASTM C595/C595M. 6. Provide cementitious materials in accordance with one of the following: a. ASTM C150/C150M Type II. b. ASTM C150/C150M types other than Type II, plus supplementary cementitious materials in accordance with one of the following: 1) Tricalcium Aluminate Content of Total Cementitious Materials: Maximum 8 percent by weight. 2) Provide documentation of test results in accordance with ASTM C1012/C1012M, for combinations of cementitious materials providing sulfate resistance with expansion less than 0.10 percent at 6 months. 03 3005-PAGE 40F5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 30 05 27 AUGUST 2019 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE MIXES C. ASTM C595/C595M Type I or Type IS (less than 70), tested to comply with moderate sulfate resistance option (MS). 1) Provide documentation of test results in accordance with ASTM C1012/C1012M, for combinations of cementitious materials providing sulfate resistance with expansion less than 0.10 percent at 6 months. 7. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent, unless otherwise specified. a. Limits are stated in terms of chloride ions in percent by weight of cement. b. Unless otherwise permitted, provide documentation from concrete tested in accordance with ASTM C1218/C1218M at an age between 28 days and 42 days. D. Refer to PART 1 through PART 3 of Specification 03 30 00 for additional requirements. END OF SECTION 03 3005-PAGE 5 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 39 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE CURING SECTION 03 39 00 CONCRETE CURING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. b. C1315, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Manufacturers' data indicating compliance with the requirements specified herein for the following products: Evaporation retardant. 2. Curing methods proposed for each type of element such as slab in each facility. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retardant: 1. Optional: Fluorescent fugitive dye color tint that disappears completely upon drying. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Master Builders Co., Cleveland, OH; Confilm. b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucobar. B. Water: Clean and potable, containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides. 033900-PAGE 1OF2 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 39 00 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE CURING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE CURING A. General: 1. Where surfaces are to receive coatings, painting, cementitious material, or other similar finishes, use only water curing procedures. Refer to Interior Finish Schedule for surfaces to receive coatings. 2. Water curing as described below or special methods using moisture shall be agreed upon by Owner's Representative prior to placing concrete. 3. As required in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete, if result of 7-day concrete strength test is less than 50 percent of specified 28-day strength, extend period of moist curing specified below, by 7 additional days. B. Use one of the following methods as approved by Owner's Representative: 1. Slabs: a. Method 1: Protect surface by water ponding for 7 days. b. Method 2: Cover with burlap or cotton mats and keep continuously wet for 7 days. C. Method 3: Cover with 1-inch layer of wet sand, earth, or sawdust, and keep continuously wet for 7 days. d. Method 4: Continuously sprinkle exposed surface for 7 days. 3.02 EVAPORATION RETARDANT APPLICATION A. Use on flatwork when environmental conditions are anticipated to cause rapid drying of the concrete surface. B. Spray onto surface of fresh flatwork concrete immediately after screeding to react with surface moisture. C. Reapply as needed to ensure a continuous moist surface until final finishing is completed. END OF SECTION 03 39 00-PAGE 2 OF 2 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 62 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GROUT SECTION 03 62 00 GROUT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C1107/C1107M, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). b. D4263, Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product data of grouts. 2. Proposed method for keeping existing concrete surfaces wet prior to placing nonshrink grout. 3. Curing method for grout. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Mixing of grout. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance for the following: a. Grout free from chlorides and other corrosion-causing chemicals. b. Nonshrink grout properties of Category II, verifying expansion at 3 days or 14 days will not exceed the 28-day expansion and nonshrink properties are not based on gas or gypsum expansion. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 4. Test Reports: Test report for 24-hour evaluation of nonshrink grout. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. For grout suppliers not listed herein, provide completed 24-hour Evaluation of Nonshrink Grout Test Form, attached at the end of this section. Provide Independent testing laboratory test results for testing conducted within last 18 months. 03 62 00-PAGE 1 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 62 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GROUT PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NONSHRINK GROUT SCHEDULE A. Furnish nonshrink grout (Category I and II) for applications as indicated in the following schedule: Temperature Range Max. Placing Time 40 deg F to Greater Than Application 100 deg F 20 Min. 20 Min. Fco—iumnbaseplates single-story I or II II 2.02 NONSHRINK GROUT A. Category I: 1. Nonmetallic and nongas-liberating. 2. Prepackaged natural aggregate grout requiring only the addition of water. 3. Test in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M: a. Grout shall have flowable consistency. b. Flowable for 15 minutes. 4. Grout shall not bleed at maximum allowed water. 5. Minimum strength of flowable grout, 3,000 psi at 3 days, 5,000 psi at 7 days, and 7,000 psi at 28 days. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. BASF Building System, Inc., Shakopee, MN; MasterFlow 100. b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; NS Grout. C. Dayton Superior Corp., Miamisburg, OH; 1107 Advantage Grout. d. US MIX Co., Denver, CO; US Spec MP Grout. e. Five Star Products Inc., Fairfield, CT; Five Star Grout. B. Category II: 1. Nonmetallic, nongas-liberating. 2. Prepackaged natural aggregate grout requiring only the addition of water. 03 62 00-PAGE 2 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 62 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GROUT 3. Aggregate shall show no segregation or settlement at fluid consistency at specified times or temperatures. 4. Test in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M: a. Fluid consistency 20 seconds to 30 seconds in accordance with ASTM C939. b. Temperatures of 40 degrees F, 80 degrees F, and 100 degrees F. 5. 1 hour after mixing, pass fluid grout through flow cone with continuous flow. 6. Minimum strength of fluid grout, 3,500 psi at 1 day, 4,500 psi at 3 days, and 7,500 psi at 28 days. 7. Maintain fluid consistency when mixed in 1-yard to 9-yard loads in ready-mix truck. 8. Manufacturers and Products: a. BASF Building Systems, Inc., Shakopee, MN; MasterFlow 928. b. Five Star Products Inc., Fairfield, CT; Five Star Fluid Grout 100. C. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Hi Flow Grout. d. Dayton Superior Corp., Miamisburg, OH; Sure Grip High Performance Grout. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GROUT A. General: Mix, place, and cure grout in accordance with grout manufacturer's representative's training instructions. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Evaluation and Acceptance of Nonshrink Grout: 1. Consistency: As specified in Article Nonshrink Grout. Grout with consistencies outside range requirements shall be rejected. 2. Segregation: As specified in Article Nonshrink Grout. Grout when aggregate separates shall be rejected. 3. All grout, already placed, which fails to meet the requirements of these specifications, is subject to removal and replacement at no additional cost to the Owner. 03 62 00—PAGE 3 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 62 00 27 AUGUST 2019 GROUT 3.03 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplement listed below, following "End of Section," is part of this Specification. 1. 24-hour Evaluation of Nonshrink Grout Test Form and Grout Testing Procedures. END OF SECTION 03 62 00-PAGE 4 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 62 00.1 27 AUGUST 2019 GROUT SUPPLEMENT 1 SECTION 03 62 00.1 GROUT SUPPLEMENT 1 (Test Lab Name) (Address) (Phone No.) 24-HOUR EVALUATION OF NONSHRINK GROUT TEST FORM OBJECTIVE: Define standard set of test procedures for an independent testing laboratory to perform and complete within a 24-hour period. SCOPE: Utilize test procedures providing 24-hour results to duplicate field grouting demands. Intent of evaluation is to establish grout manufacturer's qualifications. PRIOR TO TEST: Obtain three bags of each type of grout. 1. From intended grout supplier for Project. 2. Three bags of grout shall be of same lot number. ANSWER THE FOLLOWING QUESTIONS FOR GROUT BEING TESTED FROM LITERATURE, DATA, AND PRINTING ON BAG: A. Product data and warranty information contained in company literature and data? Yes No B. Literature and bag information meet specified requirements? Yes No C. Manufacturer guarantees grout as specified in Article Guarantee?Yes No D. Guarantee extends beyond grout replacement value and allows participation with Contractor in replacing and repairing defective areas? Yes No E. Water demands and limits printed on bag? Yes No F. Mixing information printed on the bag? Yes No G. Temperature restrictions printed on bag? Yes No *Rejection of a grout will occur if one or more answers are noted NO. 03 62 00.1-PAGE 1 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 62 00.1 27 AUGUST 2019 GROUT SUPPLEMENT 1 GROUT TESTING PROCEDURES A. Bagged Material: 1. List lot numbers. 2. List expiration date. 3. Weigh bags and record weight. Owner's Representative will disqualify grout if bag weights have misstated measure plus or minus 2 pounds by more than one out of three bags. (Accuracy of weights is required to regulate amount of water used in mixing since this will affect properties.) B. Mixing and Consistency Determination: 1. Mix full bag of grout in 10 gallon pail. 2. Use electric drill with a paddle device to mix grout (jiffy or jiffler type paddle). 3. Use maximum water allowed per water requirements listed in bag instructions. 4. Mix grout to maximum time listed on bag instructions. 5. In accordance with ASTM C939 (flow cone) determine time of mixed grout through the flow cone. seconds. 6. Add water to attain 20 to 30 second flow in accordance with ASTM C939. 7. Record time of grout through cone at new water demand. seconds 8. Record total water needed to attain 20 to 30 second flow. pounds 9. Record percent of water. percent C. When fluid grout is specified and additional water is required beyond grout manufacturer's listed maximum water, ASTM C1107/C1107M will be run at new water per grout ratio to determine whether grout passes using actual water requirements to be fluid. Use new water per grout ratio on remaining tests. D. Bleed Test: 1. Fill two gallon cans half full of freshly mixed grout at ambient temperatures for each category and at required consistency for each. 03 62 00.1-PAGE 2 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 62 00.1 27 AUGUST 2019 GROUT SUPPLEMENT 1 2. Place one can of grout in tub of ice water and leave one can at ambient temperature. 3. Cover top of both cans with glass or plastic plate preventing evaporation. 4. Maintain 38 degrees F to 42 degrees F temperature with grout placed in ice and maintain ambient temperature for second container for 1 hour. 5. Visually check for bleeding of water at 15-minute intervals for 2 hours. 6. Perform final observation at 24 hours. If grout bleeds a small amount at temperatures specified, grout will be rejected. E. Extended Flow Time and Segregation Test (for Category II and Category III): 1. Divide the remaining grout into two 3 gallon cans. Place the cans into the 40-degree F and 100-degree F containers and leave for 20, 40, and 60 minutes. Every 20 minutes remove and check for segregation or settlement of aggregate. Use a gloved hand to reach to the bottom of the can, if more than 1/4-inch of aggregate has settled to the bottom or aggregate has segregated into clumps reject the grout. 2. Right after the settlement test mix the grout with the drill mixer for 10 seconds. Take ASTM C939 flow cone test of grout and record flow time. Maintain this process for 1 hour at ambient temperatures of 40 degrees F and 100 degrees F. a. 20 min , sec. @ 40 degrees F. b. 40 min , sec. @ 40 degrees F. C. 60 min , sec. @ 40 degrees F. d. 20 min , sec. @ 100 degrees F. e. 40 min , sec. @ 100 degrees F. f. 60 min , sec. @ 100 degrees F. All Category II and Category III grout that will not go through the flow cone with continuous flow after 60 minutes will be disqualified. Qualified Disqualified 03 62 00.1-PAGE 3 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 03 62 00.1 27 AUGUST 2019 GROUT SUPPLEMENT 1 F. 24-hour Strength Test: 1. Using grout left in mixing cans in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M for mixing and consistency determination test and for extended time flow test, make minimum of nine cube samples. 2. Store cubes at 70 degrees F for 24 hours. 3. Record average compressive strength of nine cubes at 24 hours. Grout will be disqualified if 24-hour compressive strengths are less than 2,500 psi for grouts claiming fluid placement capabilities. Grouts that have not been disqualified after these tests are qualified for use on the Project for the application indicated in Nonshrink Grout Schedule. Signature of Independent Testing Laboratory Date Test Conducted END OF SECTION 03 62 00.1-PAGE 4 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 05 23 27 AUGUST 2019 WELDING SECTION 05 05 23 WELDING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. BPVC SEC IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. 2. American Society of Nondestructive Testing (ASNT): SNT-TC-1A, Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): A370, Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products. 4. American Welding Society (AWS): a. A2.4, Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. b. A3.0, Standard Welding Terms and Definitions. C. D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code -Steel. d. D1.8/D1.8M, Structural Welding Code - Seismic Supplement. e. QC1, Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. CJP: Complete Joint Penetration. B. CWI: Certified Welding Inspector. 1. Contractor's Welding Inspection: Contractor's CWI acts for, and on behalf of, the Contractor on all inspection and quality matters within the scope of the Contract Documents. Contractor is required to provide a welding inspector to oversee welding operations and be responsible for visual inspection and necessary correction of all deficiencies in materials and workmanship required to meet referenced welding codes. This type of Quality Control Inspection is not classified as Special Inspection. 2. Verification Inspector: CWI who acts on behalf of the Owner. This type of independent inspection and testing is the prerogative of the Owner, who may perform this function, or waive independent verification inspection if it is not required by the building official and building code. 0505 23- PAGE 1 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 05 23 27 AUGUST 2019 WELDING C. MT: Magnetic Particle Testing. D. NDE: Nondestructive Examination. E. NDT: Nondestructive Testing. F. PJP: Partial Joint Penetration. G. PQR: Procedure Qualification Record. H. PT: Liquid Penetrant Testing. I. Special Inspection: Non-destructive examination, other than Contractor's CWI Visual Inspection. Special inspection includes MT, PT, UT, RT, and Verification Inspection. Special Inspection personnel report to, and are retained by Owner. J. RT: Radiographic Testing. K. UT: Ultrasonic Testing. L. VT: Visual Testing. M. WPQ: Welder/Welding Operator Performance Qualification. N. WPS: Welding Procedure Specification. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop and field WPSs and PQRs. 2. Welding Data (Shop and Field): Submit welding data together with Shop Drawings as a complete package. a. Show on Shop Drawings, or on a weld map, complete information regarding base metal specification designation, location, type, size, and extent of welds with reference called out for WPS and NDE numbers in tails of combined welding and NDE symbols as indicated in AWS A2.4. b. Clearly distinguish between shop and field welds. C. Indicate, by welding symbols or sketches, details of welded joints and preparation of base metal. Provide complete joint welding details showing bevels, groove angles, and root openings for welds. d. Welding and NDE Symbols: In accordance with AWS A2.4. 050523- PAGE 20F5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 05 23 27 AUGUST 2019 WELDING e. Welding Terms and Definitions: In accordance with AWS A3.0. B. Informational Submittals: 1. W PQs. 2. CWI credentials. 3. Testing agency personnel credentials. 4. CWI visual inspection (VT) reports. 5. Welding Documentation: Submit on forms in referenced welding codes. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. WPSs: In accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M (Annex N Forms) for shop or field welding; or ASME BPVC SEC IX (Forms QW-482 and QW-483) for shop welding only. B. WPQs: In accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M (Annex N Forms); orASME BPVC SEC IX (Form QW-484). C. CWI: Certified in accordance with AWS QC1, and having prior experience with specified welding codes. Alternate welding inspector qualifications require approval by Owners Representative. D. Testing Agency: Personnel performing tests shall be NDT Level II certified in accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Unless otherwise specified, Submittals required in this section shall be submitted and approved prior to commencement of welding operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Fabricator's CWI shall be present whenever shop welding is performed. CWI shall perform inspection, at suitable intervals, prior to assembly, during assembly, during welding, and after welding. CWI shall perform inspections as required in AWS D1.1/D1.1M or referenced welding code and as follows: 1. Verifying conformance of specified job material and proper storage. 2. Monitoring conformance with approved WPS. 3. Monitoring conformance of WPQ. 4. Inspecting weld joint fit-up and performing in-process inspection. 050523- PAGE 30F5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 05 23 27 AUGUST 2019 WELDING 5. Providing 100 percent visual inspection of welds. 6. Supervising nondestructive testing personnel and evaluating test results. 7. Maintaining records and preparing report confirming that the results of inspection and testing comply with the Work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Welding and Fabrication by Welding: Conform to governing welding codes referenced in attached Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table. B. All welded stainless steel members to be passivated after welding to restore corrosion resistant properties 3.02 NONDESTRUCTIVE WELD TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Weld Inspection Criteria: 1. Selection of welds to be tested, unless 100 percent NDT is specified herein, shall be as agreed upon between Owner's Representative and Contractor. 2. Unless otherwise specified, perform NDT of welds at a frequency as shown below and in the attached Table in accordance with referenced welding codes as follows. Perform UT on CJP groove welds that cannot be readily radiographed. In case there is a conflict, higher frequency level of NDT shall apply. a. CJP Groove, Butt Welds: 10 percent random RT. b. All Other CJP Groove Welds: 10 percent random UT. C. Fillet Welds and PJP Groove Welds: 10 percent random PT or MT. d. All Welds: 100 percent VT. 3. Weld Acceptance: a. VT: 1) All Other Structural Steel: AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.9, Visual Inspection, Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections. b. UT: Perform on CJP groove welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.13.3, Class R Indications. C. RT: Perform on CJP butt joint welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.12.1. d. PT or MT: 05 05 23- PAGE 4 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 05 23 27 AUGUST 2019 WELDING 1) Perform on fillet and PJP groove welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.10. 2) Acceptance shall be in accordance with VT standards specified above. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor's CWI shall be present whenever field welding is performed. CWI shall perform inspection, at suitable intervals, prior to assembly, during assembly, during welding, and after welding. CWI shall perform inspections as required in AWS D1.1/D1.1M or referenced welding code and as follows: 1. Verify conformance of specified job material and proper storage. 2. Monitor conformance with approved WPS. 3. Monitor conformance of WPQ. 4. Inspect weld joint fit-up and perform in-process inspection. 5. Provide 100 percent visual inspection of all welds. 6. Supervise nondestructive testing personnel and evaluating test results. 7. Maintain records and prepare report confirming results of inspection and testing comply with the Work. 3.04 WELD DEFECT REPAIR A. Repair and retest rejectable weld defects until sound weld metal has been deposited in accordance with appropriate welding codes. 3.05 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplement listed below, following "End of Section," is a part of this specification. 1. Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table. END OF SECTION 050523- PAGE 50F5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 05 23.1 27 AUGUST 2019 WELDING SUPPLEMENT 1 SECTION 05 05 23.1 WELDING SUPPLEMENT 1 Welding and Nondestructive Testing Governing Submit Welding Onsite Written NDT Specification Codes or Submit Submit CWI Procedure NDT Section Standards WPS WPQ Req'd Specifications Requirements 05 12 00 AWS D1.1/D1. Yes Yes Yes Yes 10%UT or RT of all Structural Steel 1M, groove-and-butt Framing Structural joint welds; 10% Welding Code MT of all fillet -Steel welds;also see Section 05 12 00 054100 AWS D1.1/D1. Yes Yes Yes Yes 100%VT;also see Structural Metal 1M, Section 05 4100 Stud Framing Structural Welding Code -Steel or AWS D1.3/1.3 M,Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel 05 50 00 AWS D1.1/D1. Yes Yes Yes Yes 100%VT;also see Metal 1M, Section 05 50 00 Fabrications Structural Welding Code—Steel END OF SECTION 05 05 23.1—PAGE 1 OF 1 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Galvanizers Association (AGA): Quality Assurance Manual. 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. 201, Certification Program for Structural Steel Fabricators. b. 206, Certification Program for Structural Steel Erectors— Standard for Structural Steel Erectors. C. 303, Code of Standard Practices for Steel Buildings and Bridges. d. 325, Steel Construction Manual. e. 326, Detailing for Steel Construction. f. 341, Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. g. 360, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. h. 420, Certification Standard for Shop Application of Complex Protective Coating Systems. 3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code—Steel. b. D1.8/D1.8M, Structural Welding Code—Seismic Supplement. 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A6/A6M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling. b. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. C. A325, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. d. A490, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. e. A563, Standard Specification for Carbons and Alloy Steel Nuts. f. A992/A992M, Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. g. A1085/A1085M, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded Carbon Steel Hollow Structural Sections (HSS). h. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 6. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC): Specification for Structural Joints using High-Strength Bolts. 05 12 00-PAGE 1 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Provide Shop Drawing details showing: a. Members, including piece numbers, sizes, grades, dimensions, cambers, and connection details. b. Anchor bolt layouts. C. Hardened washer details. d. Connection material specifications. e. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts. f. Joint details for complete penetration welds. g. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 2. Product specifications, including primer and other coatings. 3. Designation of the members and connections that are part of the seismic force resisting system (SFRS). 4. Locations of Class A, or higher, faying surfaces. 5. Weld access hole dimensions, surface profile, and finish requirements. 6. Location of demand critical shop welds. 7. Locations and dimensions of protected zones. 8. Welding requirements as specified in AISC 341 Appendix W, Section W2.2. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Name and address of manufacturer(s). 2. Mill Certificates of tests made in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M. 3. Manufacturers' testing procedures and standards. 4. Preparation and installation or application instructions, as appropriate. 5. Proposed method to resolve misalignment between anchor bolts and bolt holes in steel members. 6. High-Strength Bolts: a. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance that products meet specified chemical and mechanical requirements. b. Manufacturer's inspection test report results for production lot(s) furnished to include: 1) Tensile strength. 2) Yield strength. 3) Reduction of area. 4) Elongation and hardness. 05 12 00-PAGE 2 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING C. Certified Mill Test Reports for Bolts and Nuts: 1) Name and address of manufacturer. 2) Bolts correctly marked. 3) Marked bolts and nuts used in required mill tests and manufacturer's inspection tests. 7. Welding Procedures, Qualifications, and Inspection Reports: As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 8. Nondestructive Testing (NDT) report. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Welding qualifications as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. B. Certifications: Mill identification marks, heat number, size of section, and length in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Load structural members in such a manner that they will be transported and unloaded without damage to coatings and without being excessively stressed, deformed, or otherwise damaged. B. Storage: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Store in a dry area and keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. a. Do not store materials in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials as directed. 2. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. a. Fasteners may be repackaged provided testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and sealing of containers. b. Clean and lubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 05 12 00—PAGE 3 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING C. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. C. Handle materials to avoid distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than the following: 1. W-Shapes: 60 percent. 2. Channels, Angles, S-Shapes: 60 percent. 3. Plate and Bar: 25 percent. 4. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 25 percent. 5. All Other Steel Materials: 25 percent. B. Rolled Plates, Shapes except W-Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M, unless indicated otherwise. C. W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. D. Square and Rectangular Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B (Fy equals 46 ksi). 2.02 FASTENERS A. Anchor Bolts: As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. B. Post-Installed Anchors: As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. C. High-Strength Bolts: 1. ASTM A325, Type 1, plain uncoated. 2. Bolt Length and Thread Length: As required for connection type shown, with hardened washers as required. D. Nuts: ASTM A563, type to match bolt type and finish. 05 12 00—PAGE 4 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING E. Hardened Steel Flat and Beveled Washers: ASTM F436, type to match bolt finish. F. Stud Shear Connectors: As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. 2.03 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Surface Preparation and Primer: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Structural Steel Coating. B. Grout: As specified in Section 03 62 00, Grout. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate as shown and in accordance with AISC 360 and AISC 303. 2. Columns: Full-length members without splices, unless shown otherwise or approved by Owners Representative. 3. Mark and match mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete assembly, including bolting and welding of units, before start of finishing operations. 5. Fabricate to agree with field measurements. 6. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 7. Fillet re-entrant cuts and corners to radius of not less than 1/2 inch. 8. Sheared and flame-cut edges shall be free from rough corners and projections. B. Connections: 1. Shop Connections: Weld or bolt as shown on Drawings. 2. Meet requirements of AISC 325 for bolted double-angle shear connections, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Meet OSHA requirements for one independent bolt at beams framing in to column web connections. 4. Provide oversized holes for anchor bolts in column baseplate in accordance with AISC 325, unless indicated otherwise. C. Welded Construction: 1. As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 2. Groove and Butt Joint Welds: Complete penetration, unless otherwise indicated. 05 12 00-PAGE 5 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING D. Interface with Other Work: 1. Holes: a. As necessary or as indicated for securing other Work to structural steel framing, and for passage of other Work through steel framing members shall be approved by Owner's Representative. b. No flame-cut holes are permitted without prior approval of Owner's Representative. 2. Weld threaded nuts to framing members, and other specialty items to receive other Work. E. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS): Fabricate in accordance with AISC 303, Section 10. 2.05 FINISHES A. Shop Paint Primer: 1. Surface Preparation and painting as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 2. Do not shop prime the following surfaces, unless indicated otherwise: a. Within 2 inches of field-welded connections. b. Steel members to be completely encased in reinforced concrete or coated with cementitious fireproofing. C. Faying surfaces of slip critical bolted connections and bolted connections in Seismic Force Resisting Systems. B. Bolted Joints as Part of Seismic Force Resisting System (SFRS): 1. Coated Faying Surfaces: Faying surfaces of bolted connections that are part of Seismic Force Resisting System specified or shown with a paint primer shall be coated with a coating that is qualified as a Class A or Class B coating in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts. Protect against overspray by use of masking. Remove inadvertent overspray from the faying surfaces. 2. Exclude threads from shear plane, unless approved by Owner's Representative. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Welding: 1. Contractor's Certified Welding Inspector(CWI): Inspect and test fabrication welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 05 12 00—PAGE 6 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 2. Visually inspect fabrication welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 6 and Table 6.1, Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria. 3. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to perform the inspection and testing of fabrication welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 4. Repair and retest defective welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. General: 1. Meet requirements of AISC 360 and AISC 303, with exceptions as specified. 2. Install Contractor-designed temporary construction bracing to provide necessary support until components are in place and construction is complete. 3. Provide additional field connection material as required by AISC 303. 4. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on Shop Drawings. 5. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS): Erect in accordance with AISC 303, Section 10. B. Field Assembly: 1. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. 2. Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations shown. 3. Align and adjust various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. 4. Level and plumb individual members of structure within tolerances shown in AISC 303. 5. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be completed and in service. 6. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for minor discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 05 12 00—PAGE 7 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING C. Setting Baseplates: 1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. 2. Clean bottom surface of baseplates. 3. Set loose and attached baseplates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, leveling nuts, or other adjustable devices. Use leveling plates where indicated. 4. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to placing grout. Weld plate washer to baseplate where indicated. 5. Grout Under Baseplate: As specified in Section 03 62 00, Grout, prior to placing loads on structure. D. Anchor Bolts: 1. Coordinate installation of anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to in-place work. 2. Provide templates and other devices for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. 3. Projection of anchor bolts beyond face of concrete and threaded length shall be adequate to allow for full engagement of threads of hold-down nuts, adjustment of leveling nuts, washer thicknesses, and construction tolerances, unless indicated otherwise. 4. Placement Tolerances: a. As required by AISC 303, unless indicated otherwise. b. Embedded anchor bolts shall not vary from dimensions shown on Drawings by more than the following: 1) Center-to-Center of Any Two Bolts Within an Anchor Group: 1/8 inch. 2) Center-to-Center of Adjacent Anchor Bolt Groups: 1/4 inch. 3) Variation from Perpendicular to Theoretical Bearing Surface: 1:50. E. Connections: 1. High-Strength Bolted: a. Tighten in accordance with RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts. b. Pretension all bolts unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 05 12 00-PAGE 8 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING C. Hardened Washers: 1) Provide at locations required by Washer Requirements section of RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts, to include pretensioned and slip critical connections using slotted or oversized holes or ASTM A490 bolts. 2) Use beveled style and extra thickness where required by RCSC Specification. 3) Use square or rectangular beveled washers at inner flange surfaces of American Standard beams and channels. 4) Do not substitute DTIs for hardened flat washers required at slotted and oversize holes. d. For snug-tightened connections (N, X), tighten to snug tight condition. Use hardened washer over slotted or oversize holes in outer plies. 2. Welded: a. As specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. b. Groove and Butt Joint Welds: Complete penetration, unless otherwise indicated. 3.02 MISFITS A. At Bolted Connections: 1. Immediately notify Owner's Representative for approval of one of the following methods of correction: a. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts and use oversized bolts. b. Plug weld misaligned holes and redrill holes to admit standard size bolts. C. Drill additional holes in connection, conforming to AISC for bolt spacing and end and edge distances, and add additional bolts. d. Reject member containing misfit, incorrect sized, or misaligned holes and fabricate new member to ensure proper fit. 2. Do not enlarge incorrectly sized or misaligned holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins. B. At Anchor Bolts: 1. Resolve misalignments between anchor bolts and bolt holes in steel members in accordance with approved Shop Drawing. 2. Do not flame cut to enlarge holes without prior approval of Owner's Representative. 05 12 00-PAGE 9 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING C. Gas Cutting: 1. Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in structural framing. 2. Secondary members not under stress and concealed in finished structure may be corrected by gas cutting torches, if approved by Owners Representative. 3. Finish flame-cut sections equivalent to sheared and punched appearance. 3.03 REPAIR AND CLEANING A. Clean shop primer from field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas immediately after erection. B. Remove and grind smooth tack welds, fit-up-lugs, and weld runoff tabs. C. Remove weld back-up bars and grind smooth where indicated on Drawings. D. Apply touchup paint primer by brush or spray of same thickness and material as that used in shop application and as specified in Section 09 90 00, Structural Steel Coating. 3.04 FIELD FINISH A. Field finish in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner-Furnished Quality Assurance, in accordance with IBC Chapter 17 requirements, is provided in Statement of Special Inspections Plan on Drawings. Contractor responsibilities and related information are included in Section 0145 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing. B. Contractor-Furnished Quality Control: Inspect and test as required in Section 0145 16.13, Contractor Quality Control. C. High-Strength Bolted Connections: 1. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to perform the following inspection and testing in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts: a. Marking identification and conformance to ASTM standards. b. Alignment of bolt holes. 05 12 00-PAGE 10 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING C. Placement, type, and thickness of hardened washers. d. Tightening of bolts. 2. Preinstallation Test: a. Conduct test in accordance with Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts prior to using bolt tension measuring device. b. Select representative sample of not less than three bolts of each diameter, length, and grade. C. Include DTIs and flat hardened washers as required to match actual connection assembly. 3. Nondestructive Testing (NDT): Inspect bolted connections and perform corrections as required to meet code acceptance criteria per RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts. 4. Defective Connections: Correct and reinspect defective and improperly tightened high-strength bolted connections. Retest pretensioned bolts as necessary to demonstrate compliance of completed work. D. Welding: 1. Contractor's Certified Welding Inspector(CWI): Inspect and test field welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 2. Visually inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 6 and Table 6.1, Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria. 3. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to perform inspection and testing of field welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. 4. Repair and retest defective welds as specified in Section 05 05 23, Welding. E. Special inspection will be provided by Owner as indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION 05 12 00-PAGE 11 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 50 00 27 AUGUST 2019 METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code -Steel. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. C. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. d. A325, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. e. A500/A500M, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. f. A501, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. g. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. h. A992/A992M, Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. i. C881/C881M, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. j. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. k. F468, Standard Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use. I. F844, Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use. M. F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. 4. International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES): a. AC70, Acceptance Criteria for Fasteners Power-driven into Concrete, Steel and Masonry Elements. 05 50 00-PAGE 1 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 50 00 27 AUGUST 2019 METAL FABRICATIONS b. AC193, Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements. C. AC308, Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Anchor Bolt: Cast-in-place anchor; concrete or masonry. B. Concrete Anchor: Post-installed concrete anchors listed in this specification. C. Exterior Area: Location not protected from weather by building or other enclosed structure. D. Interior Dry Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is not subject to liquid spills or washdown, nor where wall or roof slab is common to a water-holding or earth-retaining structure. E. Interior Wet Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is sloped to floor drains or gutters and is subject to liquid spills or washdown, or where wall, floor, or roof slab is common to a water-holding or earth-retaining structure. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Metal fabrications, including welding and fastener information. b. Specific instructions for concrete anchor installation, including drilled hole size, preparation, placement, procedures, and instructions for safe handling of anchoring systems. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Concrete and Masonry Post-Installed Anchors: a. Manufacturer's product description and printed installation instructions. b. Current ICC-ES Report for each type of post-installed anchor to be used. C. Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification. 05 50 00-PAGE 2 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 50 00 27 AUGUST 2019 METAL FABRICATIONS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Adhesive Anchor Installer: Trained to install adhesive anchors in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Insofar as practical, factory assemble specified items. Assemblies, because of necessity, have to be shipped unassembled shall be packaged and tagged in manner that will protect materials from damage and will facilitate identification and field assembly. B. Protect painted coatings from damage as a result of metal banding and rough handling. Use padded slings and straps. C. Store fabricated items in dry area, not in direct contact with ground. D. Store adhesives anchors at service temperature ranges recommended by manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated, meet the following requirements: Item ASTM Reference Steel Wide Flange Shapes A992/992M Other Steel Shapes and Plates A36/A36M Hollow Structural Sections (HSS) A500/A500M, Grade B Steel Bolts and Nuts: Carbon Steel A307 bolts, with A563 nuts High-Strength A325,Type 1 bolts, with A563 nuts Anchor Bolts and Rods F1554, Grade 36, with weldability supplement S1. Threaded Rods A36/A36M Flat Washers (Unhardened) F844 05 50 00—PAGE 3 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 50 00 27 AUGUST 2019 METAL FABRICATIONS Item ASTM Reference Flat and Beveled Washers F436 (Hardened) Welded Anchor Studs A108, Grades C 1010 through C 1020 B. Bolts, Washers, and Nuts: Use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, zinc- plated steel, and aluminum material types as indicated in Fastener Schedule at end of this section. 2.02 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Cast-In-Place Anchor Bolts: 1. Headed type, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2. Material type and protective coating as shown in Fastener Schedule at end of this section. 2.03 POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHORS A. General: 1. AISI Type 316 stainless, hot-dip galvanized, or zinc-plated steel, as shown in Fastener Schedule at end of this section. 2. Current ICC-ES Report indicating acceptance per IBC 2006 and IBC 2009 for anchors at structural applications in cracked concrete. 3. Anchors shall be suitable for long-term loads, as well as for wind and seismic loads. B. Adhesive Anchors (Epoxy Anchors): 1. Threaded Rod: a. ASTM F593 stainless steel threaded rod, diameter as shown on Drawings. b. Length as required, to provide minimum depth of embedment. C. Clean and free of grease, oil, or other deleterious material. d. For hollow-unit masonry, provide galvanized or stainless steel wire cloth screen tube to fit threaded rod. 2. Adhesive: a. Two-component, insensitive to moisture, designed to be used in adverse freeze/thaw environments. 05 50 00-PAGE 4 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 50 00 27 AUGUST 2019 METAL FABRICATIONS b. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for intended use and anticipated environmental conditions. C. Mixed Adhesive: Nonsag light paste consistency with ability to remain in 1-inch diameter overhead drilled hole without runout. d. Meet requirements of ASTM C881/C881M. 3. Packaging and Storage: a. Disposable, self-contained cartridge system capable of dispensing both components in proper mixing ratio and fitting into manually or pneumatically operated caulking gun. b. Store adhesive cartridges on pallets or shelving in covered storage area. C. Container Markings: Include manufacturer's name, product name, batch number, product expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and appropriate ANSI handling precautions. d. Dispose of when: 1) Shelf life has expired. 2) Stored other than in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Hilti, Inc.,Tulsa, OK; HIT Doweling Anchor System, HIT RE 500 SD (ESR-2322). b. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; SET-XP Epoxy Adhesive Anchors(ESR-2508). C. Powers Fasteners, Brewster NY, PE1000+ Adhesive anchoring system (ESR-2583). C. Adhesive Threaded Inserts: 1. Stainless steel, internally threaded inserts. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIS-RN Insert with HIT-HY 150 adhesive. 2.04 STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS A. Headed anchor studs (HAS), or threaded anchor studs (TAS), or stud shear connectors, as indicated on Drawings. 1. Carbon Steel: ASTM A108, Standard Quality Grades 1010 through 1020, inclusive either semikilled or killed aluminum or silicon dioxidation, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM F593, AISI Type 316, Condition CW, where indicated. 05 50 00-PAGE 5 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 50 00 27 AUGUST 2019 METAL FABRICATIONS B. Manufacturers: 1. Nelson Stud Welding, FabriSteel Co., Elyria, OH. 2. Stud Welding Associates, Inc., Elyria, OH. 2.05 PIPE SLEEVES A. As specified in Section 33 05 01, Conveyance Piping—General. 2.06 FLOOR PLATE A. Material: 1. Galvanized Steel: Carbon steel, ASTM A786/A786M, commercial grade, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. B. Minimum Thickness: 1. Steel: 1/4 inch, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. C. Surface shall be raised-lug pattern or diamond tread, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. D. Slip Resistant Surface: 1. Provide where indicated on Drawings. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. IKG/Borden, Clark, NJ; MEBAC 2. b. W.S. Molnar Co., Detroit, MI; SLIPNOT Grade 2—Medium. 2.07 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Finish exposed surfaces smooth, sharp, and to well-defined lines. 2. Furnish necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets so work can be assembled in neat, substantial manner. 3. Conceal fastenings where practical; where exposed, flush countersink. 4. Drill metalwork and countersink holes as required for attaching hardware or other materials. 5. Grind cut edges smooth and straight. Round sharp edges to small uniform radius. Grind burrs,jagged edges, and surface defects smooth. 6. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to Site. 05 50 00—PAGE 6 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 50 00 27 AUGUST 2019 METAL FABRICATIONS B. Materials: Use steel shapes, unless otherwise noted. C. Welding: 1. Weld connections and grind exposed welds smooth. When required to be watertight, make welds continuous. 2. Welded fabrications shall be free from twisting or distortion caused by improper welding techniques. 3. Steel: Meet fabrication requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 5. 4. Welded Anchor Studs: Prepare surface to be welded and weld with stud welding gun in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 7, and manufacturer's instructions. 5. Complete welding before passivating and/or applying finish. 6. All welded stainless steel members to be passivated after welding to restore corrosion resistant properties before applying finish treatment. D. Painting: 1. Shop prime with rust-inhibitive primer as specified in Section 09 90 00, Structural Steel Coating, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Coat surfaces of galvanized steel and aluminum fabricated items to be in direct contact with concrete, grout, masonry, or dissimilar metals, as specified in Section 09 90 00, Structural Steel Coating, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Do not apply protective coating to galvanized steel anchor bolts or galvanized steel welded anchor studs, unless indicated otherwise. E. Fitting: Where movement of fabrications is required or shown, cut, fit, and align items for smooth operation. Make corners square and opposite sides parallel. F. Accessories: Furnish as required for a complete installation. Fasten by welding or with stainless steel bolts or screws. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Visually inspect all fabrication welds and correct deficiencies. 1. Steel: AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 6 and Table 6.1, Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria. 05 50 00—PAGE 7 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 50 00 27 AUGUST 2019 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: 1. Install metal fabrications plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. 2. Install rigid, substantial, and neat in appearance. 3. Install manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Obtain Owners Representatives approval prior to field cutting steel members or making adjustments not scheduled. 3.02 CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHOR BOLTS A. Locate and hold anchor bolts in place with templates at time concrete is placed. B. Use anchor bolt sleeves for location adjustment and provide two nuts and one washer per bolt of same material as bolt. C. Minimum Bolt Size: 1/2-inch diameter by 12 inches long, unless otherwise shown. 3.03 CONCRETE POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS A. Begin installation only after concrete to receive anchors has attained design strength. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide minimum embedment, edge distance, and spacing as follows, unless indicated otherwise by anchor manufacturer's instructions or shown otherwise on Drawings: Minimum Minimum Edge Anchor Embedment Distance Minimum Spacing Type (Bolt Diameters) (Bolt Diameters) (Bolt Diameters) A dhesive 9 9 13.5 05 50 00-PAGE 8 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 50 00 27 AUGUST 2019 METAL FABRICATIONS D. Use only drill type and bit type and diameter recommended by anchor manufacturer. Clean hole of debris and dust with brush and compressed air per manufacturer's printed installation instructions. E. When embedded steel or rebar is encountered in drill path, slant drill to clear obstruction. If drill must be slanted more than 10 degrees to clear obstruction, notify Owner's Representative for direction on how to proceed. F. Adhesive Anchors: 1. Do not install adhesive anchors when temperature of concrete is below 40 degrees F or above 100 degrees F, unless cold temperature adhesives, compliant with ACI 308 are used. Refer to the respective ICC-ES report and manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 2. Remove water from hole with oil-free compressed air. Damp or water filled holes may be allowed only if approved in manufacturer's printed installation instructions and ICC-ES report. 3. For hollow-unit masonry, install screen tube in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 4. Do not disturb anchor during recommended curing time. 5. Do not exceed maximum torque as specified in manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 3.04 PAINTING A. Field Painting of Shop Primed Surfaces: Prepare surfaces and field finish in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Structural Steel Coating. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner-Furnished Quality Assurance: 1. In accordance with IBC Chapter 17 requirements, is provided in the Statement of Special Inspections Plan on Drawings. 2. Contractor responsibilities and related information on special inspection, observation, and testing are included in Section 0145 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing. 05 50 00-PAGE 9 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 50 00 27 AUGUST 2019 METAL FABRICATIONS B. Contractor-Furnished Quality Control: 1. Inspection and testing required in Section 0145 16.13, Contractor Quality Control. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance for test results, or calculations, or drawings that ensure material and equipment design and design criteria meet project document requirements and Section 0188 15, Anchorage and Bracing. C. Stud Shear Connectors: 1. At start of each production period, conduct the following test to determine proper generator, control unit, and stud welding gun settings, in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Chapter 7: a. Weld two test studs and visually inspect for full 360-degree flash. b. Bend test studs 30 degrees from vertical for headed anchor studs (HAS). Torque test threaded anchor studs (TAS) studs per AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 7.6.6.2. c. Test studs will be acceptable if there is no failure of welds. d. If weld fails, repeat test until two consecutive test studs test to be satisfactory. 2. During production, if visual inspection reveals weld does not exhibit full 360-degree flash or that stud has been repaired by welding, conduct the following test in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Chapter 7: a. Bend HAS studs or stud shear connectors approximately 15 degrees from vertical, away from missing portion of flash. For TAS studs, torque test per AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 7.6.6.2. b. Studs meeting this test without exhibiting cracks in weld will be considered acceptable and left in bent position. c. Replace studs failing test. 3. Special inspection shall be provided by Owner where indicated on Drawings. 05 50 00-PAGE 10 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 50 00 27 AUGUST 2019 METAL FABRICATIONS 3.06 FASTENER SCHEDULE A. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, provide fasteners as follows: Service Use and Location Product Remarks 1. Anchor Bolts Cast Into Concrete for Structural Steel, Metal Fabrications and Castings Exterior and Interior Hot-dip galvanized Wet Areas steel headed anchor bolts 2. Connections for Structural Steel Framing Exterior and Interior High-strength steel Use hot-dipped Wet and Dry Areas bolted connections galvanized high- strength bolted connections for galvanized steel framing members. 3. Connections for Steel Fabrications and Wood Components Exterior and Interior Hot-dip galvanized Wet and Dry Areas carbon steel bolted connections 4. All Others Exterior and Interior Stainless steel Wet and Dry Areas fasteners B. Antiseizing Lubricant: Use on stainless steel threads. C. Do not use adhesive anchors to support fire-resistive construction or where ambient temperature will exceed 120 degrees F. END OF SECTION 05 50 00-PAGE 11 OF 11 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 73 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS SECTION 05 73 00 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Steel and iron, and stainless steel decorative metal railings B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-In-Place Concrete". 2. Section 09 9113 "Painting" for painting of decorative metal railings. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied. Comply with paint and coating manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete. Deliver such items to Project site in time installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, include preparation requirements and application instructions. 05 73 00 - PAGE 1 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 73 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS B. Welders' Certificates. Show certification of welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Drawings shall indicate all sizes, connections, fastenings, and accessories. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols and indicate new weld lengths. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable temporary protective covering before shipping. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrication by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 Ibf (0.22kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 square foot (0.093 sq.m). b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior railings by preventing buckling, opening of 05 73 00 - PAGE 2 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 73 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg. F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg. F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.02 MATERIALS GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide formed-steel brackets with predrilled holes for bolted anchorage. 2.03 STAINLESS STEEL A. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M: Grade TP 316. B. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 316. 2.04 STEEL AND IRON A. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. As indicated on drawings. 2.05 FASTENERS A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Uncoated and Galvanized-Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrode posited zinc coating. 2. Stainless Steel Components: Type 316 stainless steel fasteners. Flathead, countersunk, tamperproof sex bolts. B. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener system with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193 05 73 00 - PAGE 3 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 73 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 9113 "Painting". B. Bituminous Paint or Nylon Washers: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M, or 0.010 thick nylon washersTo isolate stainless steel components from carbon steel components. C. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications. 2.07 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, detail, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinate installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations. F. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connection unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. I. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 05 73 00 - PAGE 4 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 73 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS J. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. K. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. 2.08 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. All welded stainless-steel members to be passivated after welding to restore corrosion resistant properties prior to applying finish treatments. C. Dull Satin Finish: ASTM A 480/A 480 M, No. 6. 2.09 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. For nongalvanized-steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous metal fitting, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, but galvanize anchors to be embedded into exterior concrete. B. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. C. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Stainless steel components are not to be painted. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel" for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete. 1. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 09 9113 "Painting". D. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 09 9113 "Painting". 1. Color: Tnemec "Briquet" 49GR 05 73 00 - PAGE 5 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 73 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark location if not already done. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railing. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated of finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/161" inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed % inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m). C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.03 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railings components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 05 73 00 - PAGE 6 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 05 73 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of post. 3.04 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Secure railing to concrete retaining wall with drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and wiping dry. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and pain exposed areas with same material used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 mil (0.05 mm) dry film thickness. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing fabricator. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installations and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 05 73 00 - PAGE 7 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 06 10 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Forest and Paper Association (AF&PA): 2, National Design Specification for Wood Construction. 2. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC): 112, Standard for Tongue-and-Groove Heavy Timber Roof Decking. 3. American Lumber Standards Committee's Board of Review (ALSC). 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. b. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. C. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot- Dip Process. d. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. e. F1667, Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples. 5. International Code Council (ICQ a. ESR-1539, Power-Driven Staples and Nails. b. International Building Code (IBC). 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 7. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB): 1003, Grading Rules. 8. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 723, Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 9. U.S. Department of Commerce—Voluntary Product Standard (DOC): a. PS 1, Structural Plywood. b. PS 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard. 10. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA): G5, Western Lumber Grading Rules. 06 10 00- PAGE 1 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 06 10 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Indicate component materials and dimensions, and include construction and application details for the following: a. Sheathing. b. Metal framing anchors. C. Construction panel thickness where not shown. B. Informational Submittals: 1. ICC Evaluation Service Reports, including the following as a minimum: a. Connections and Fasteners. b. Nails. 2. Material Certificates: Showing species and grade selected for dimension lumber for each use. a. Material certificates for dimensional lumber in compliance with allowable unit stresses. Show species and grade selected for each use as well as design values approved by the ALSC's Board of Review. 3. Material test reports from testing laboratory showing and interpreting test results in accordance with test methods UL 723, NFPA 255, and ASTM E84, relative to fire-retardant treated wood products. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Upon delivery to Site, immediately place materials in area protected from weather. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp areas. B. Protect sheet materials from breaking corners and damaging surfaces while unloading. C. Store materials a minimum of 6 inches above ground on framework or blocking and cover with waterproof covering, providing for adequate air circulation and ventilation. Store sheet materials flat, not on edge. D. Protect fire-retardant materials against high humidity and moisture during storage and erection. E. Store materials for which maximum moisture content is specified in areas where humidity can be controlled. 06 1000- PAGE 20F7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 06 10 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: 1. In accordance with DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules and wood species certified by ALSC. 2. Design values for wood members equal to those published in supplement to AF&PA 2. 3. Stamp or brand each unexposed piece of lumber with grade, species, and moisture content at time of mill surfacing. 4. Furnish exposed lumber pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece. If completely exposed, and permitted by local building jurisdiction, omit grade stamps entirely. B. Lumber sizes shown on Drawings are nominal, unless shown otherwise. Provide actual sizes as required by DOC PS 20 for use. C. Dressed lumber S4S, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. D. Moisture content of lumber not to exceed 19 percent, unless otherwise specified and marked "DRY". E. Each plywood panel identified with designated grade trademark of APA. F. Exposed Exterior and Interior Framing Indicated to Receive Stained or Natural Finish: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot holes, shake, torn grain, and wane. 2.02 LUMBER A. Framing lumber shall be Douglas Fir-Larch, No. 1 or better unless indicated otherwise below: Usage Minimum Grade Blocking and nailers Douglas Fir-Larch No. 1 or Better, Hemlock, Southern Pine Stud grade, nondense B. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, grade stamp to be sanded off after structural inspections are completed 06 1000- PAGE 3 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 06 10 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2.03 WOOD DECKING A. Commercial softwood species, commercial decking grade, 2 inches to 4 inches thick by 4 inches to 12 inches wide, 15 percent maximum moisture content, MC-15 or KD on grade stamp, single tongue-and-groove edges for 2 inches thick, and double tongue-and-groove for greater than 2 inches thick. 1. Wood decking shall be Douglas Fir-Larch, No. 1 or better unless indicated otherwise. 2. Surface and Edge Pattern: Smooth surface, Vee grooved. 2.04 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Plywood: 1. General: a. Where construction panels are shown on Drawings for the following concealed types of applications, provide APA Performance-Rated Panels complying with requirements designated under each application for grade designation, span rating, exposure durability classification, edge detail, and thickness. b. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with DOC PS 1 for plywood construction panels and for products not manufactured under DOC PS 1 provisions, in accordance with APA PRP-108 and APA Form B445. C. Trademark: Each construction panel factory-marked with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. 2. Wall Sheathing: APA rated Plywood sheathing. a. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR. b. Span Rating: 12/0, 16/0, 20/0 for stud spacing of 16 inches or less, 32/16 for stud spacing of 24 inches or less. 3. Roof Sheathing: APA rated Plywood Structural I sheathing. a. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR. b. Span Rating: 32/16. B. Plywood Backing Panel: Mounting electrical, telephone, and like equipment; provide fire-retardant treated plywood panel with grade designation, APA C-D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness shown on Drawings, or, if not shown on Drawings, not less than 24/32 inch. 06 1000- PAGE 40F7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 06 10 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2.05 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATED WOOD A. Pressure treat lumber and plywood with fire-retardant chemicals in accordance with applicable AWPA U1 and AWPA M4 standard for species, product, preservative and end use to ensure flame-spread rating not higher than 25 with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when tested for 30 minutes duration under UL 723 and ASTM E84. B. Treated lumber and plywood labeled and tested by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. shall show performance rating. 2.06 HARDWARE A. Conform to ASTM F1667. B. Nails: 1. Conform to ASTM F1667. 2. Steel common nails or alternatives listed in rough carpentry section of General Structural Notes found on Drawings. 3. Use hot-dipped zinc-coated nails wherever exposed. 4. Use deformed shank nails for fastening underlayment. C. Power Driven Fasteners: Conform to ICC ESR-1539. D. Bolts and Screws: Conform to ASTM A307, galvanized where exposed. E. Structural Framing Connectors: 1. Manufacturers: a. Simpson Strong-Tie Co, Inc. Pleasanton, CA; hot-dip galvanized. b. United Steel Products Company; hot-dip galvanized. F. Ply Clips: Extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy. G. Bar or Strap Anchors: ASTM A653/A653M, zinc-coated steel, 18 gauge minimum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify surfaces to receive rough carpentry materials are prepared to exact grades and dimensions. 06 1000- PAGE 50F7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 06 10 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3.02 GENERAL A. Lay out, cut, fit, and install rough carpentry items. Anchor sufficiently to ensure rigidity and permanence. B. Install items accurate to dimension, true to line, level, and square unless shown otherwise on Drawings. Provide for installation and support of other Work. C. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. D. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. E. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. F. Holes shall be 1/16 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter, except holes for cast-in-place anchor bolts shall be 3/16 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter.Tight holes requiring forcible driving of bolts shall be enlarged by reaming. G. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Roof Sheathing: 1. Install plywood panels with face grain perpendicular to supports, using panel continuous over two or more spans, with end joints staggered between panels and locate over supports. 2. Allow minimum space of 1/16 inch between end joints and 1/8 inch at edge joints for expansion and contraction of panels. 3. Support edge joints by use of ply clips, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 4. Unless noted otherwise on Drawings, minimum nailing shall be 6 inches on center along panel edges and 12 inches on center at intermediate supports. 5. Unless noted otherwise on Drawings, use 8d common nails for panels 3/4-inch thick and less, and 10d nails for greater thickness. See rough carpentry section of General Structural Notes found on Drawings for alternate fastener and spacing options. 06 1000- PAGE 60F7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 06 10 00 27 AUGUST 2019 ROUGH CARPENTRY B. Wall Sheathing: 1. Allow minimum 1/16 inch space at end joints and 1/8 inch at edge joints, doubling these spacings in wet or humid conditions. 2. Unless noted otherwise on Drawings, minimum nailing shall be 6 inches on center along panel edges and 12 inches on center at intermediate supports. 3. Unless noted otherwise on Drawings, use 6d common nails for panels and 1/2-inch thick and less, and 8d nails for greater thickness. See rough carpentry section of General Structural Notes found on Drawings for alternate fastener and spacing options. 4. Place an air infiltration barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lap edges, and ends. 3.04 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATED WOOD A. Provide fire-retardant treated lumber and plywood for backing panels at electrical, telephones, and like equipment, and where indicated on Drawings. B. Use FR-S rated wood on interior only. END OF SECTION 06 1000- PAGE 7 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 4113 27 AUGUST 2019 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS SECTION 07 4113 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes batten-seam metal roof panels, sheet metal trim and flashing, and gutters. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry". 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. ASCE 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures. 2. ASTM A653: Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. 3. ASTM A792: Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip Process. 4. ASTM D523: Specular Gloss. 5. ASTM E1592: Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Differences. 6. SMANCNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 7. UL 580: Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory. 07 4113 - PAGE I OF 12 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 4113 27 AUGUST 2019 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. 2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Metal Panels: 12 inches (305 mm) long by actual panel width. Include clips, fasteners, closures, and other metal panel accessories. D. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. E. Warranty Documentation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation. E. Do not allow panels to contact treated lumber. 07 4113 - PAGE 2 OF 12 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 4113 27 AUGUST 2019 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard 25-year performance warranty, stating the following: 1. Architectural fluorocarbon finish: a. Will be free of fading or color change in excess of 5 Hunter delta-E units as determined by ASTM D2244-02. b. Will not chalk in excess of numerical rating of 8 when measured in accordance with standard procedures specified in ASTM D4214-98 method D659. C. Will not peel, crack, chip, or delaminate. 2. Metal substrate will not rupture, fail structurally, or perforate. B. Installer's Warranty: Warrant panels, flashing, sealants, fasteners and accessories against defective materials and/of workmanship, covering repairs required to maintain roof panels watertight and weatherproof with normal usage for two years following Project Substantial Completion Date. 1. Furnish written warranty, signed by installer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 07 4113 - PAGE 3 OF 12 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 4113 27 AUGUST 2019 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span. B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.02 cfm per linear foot of joint when tested according to ASTM E 283 at static test pressure differential of 20.0 psf. C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at static test pressure differential of 25.0 psf. D. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class UL 90. 1. Panel system shall be ASTM E1592 tested under the supervision of an ANSI or ISO/IEC accredited laboratory and the laboratory shall issue the test report. 2. UL Construction #397, minimum 24-gauge panels, when installed over minimum 5/8" nominal plywood decking, with roof panel fastener clips spaced at 24" on center maximum. E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.02 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panel assembly designed to be installed by covering vertical side edges of adjacent panels with battens and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips. Include battens and accessories required for weathertight installation. B. Narrow-Profile, Snap-on-Batten-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and flat pan between ribs; designed for independent installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels, engaging the opposite edge of adjacent panels, and installing 3/8- to 1/2- inch- (10-to 13-mm-) wide, snap-on battens over panel joints. 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: AEP Span, Performed Metal Standing Seam Roofing, Select Seam Narrow Batten. 07 4113 - PAGE 4 OF 12 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 4113 27 AUGUST 2019 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS a. Or Approved Equal. 2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: 24-gauge aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. a. Nominal Thickness: Thickness and yield strength as required for performance indicated; with aluminum-zinc alloy coating conforming to ASTM A792, Class AZ50. b. Panel Width and Pattern: 1) 12-inch panel width, with stucco embossed. C. Panel Finish: Provide primer and top finish cost on exposed faces; provide primer and backer coat on concealed faces of panels. 1) DuraTech Dimensional Prints: Polyvinylidine Fluoride, full 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000, consisting of a backed-on corrosion resistant primer and a baked-on finish coat with a dry film thickness of 1.10 to 1.40 mil and specular gloss of 25 to 35 when tested in accordance with ASTM D523 at 60 degrees. d. Color: "Natural Rust" 3. Batten Material: Same material, finish, and color as roof panels. a. Batten Height: 1-inch b. Batten Width: 3/8 inch 4. Clips: a. UL-90 assembly rated clip; 24 gauge coated with minimum AZ-50 Zinc- Aluminum coating per ASTM A792. b. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer for performance indicated. Fasteners shall not protrude through or dimple exposed face of substrate. 2.03 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts. B. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645; cold-formed, metallic- coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating 07 4113 - PAGE 5 OF 12 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 4113 27 AUGUST 2019 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system. B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin- foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels. D. Gutters: Formed from same material as roof panels, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced a maximum of 36 inches (914 mm) o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at outlets. Finish gutters to match adjacent structural steel members (Tnemec "Briquet" 49 GR). E. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners. F. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish. 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. 07 4113 - PAGE 6 OF 12 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 4113 27 AUGUST 2019 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 2.05 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory- formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown. C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements. D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 07 4113 - PAGE 7 OF 12 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 4113 27 AUGUST 2019 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal roof panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.06 FINISHES A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 07 4113 - PAGE 8 OF 12 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 4113 27 AUGUST 2019 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 3.02 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.03 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, and with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm). 1. Apply over the entire roof surface. B. Slip Sheet: Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels. C. Flashings: Install flashings to cover underlayment and according to Drawings and manufacturer's recommended details. 3.04 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels. 2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed. 3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds. 6. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe-and conduit-penetrating panels. B. Fasteners: 1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. C. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions. 07 4113 - PAGE 9 OF 12 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 4113 27 AUGUST 2019 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. E. Batten-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each batten-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 1. Install clips to supports with self-drilling fasteners. 2. Apply battens to metal roof panel seams, fully engaged to provide weathertight joints. 3. Watertight Installation: a. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer as needed to make panels watertight. b. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. F. Clipless Metal Panel Installation: Fasten metal panels to supports with screw fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. G. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. H. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level. Install work with laps,joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather 07 4113 - PAGE 10 OF 12 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 4113 27 AUGUST 2019 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). I. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 36 inches (914 mm) o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. J. Roof Curbs: Install curbs at locations indicated on Drawings. Install flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels. K. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer. 3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect completed metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing. B. Remove and replace metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. 07 4113 - PAGE 11 OF 12 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 4113 27 AUGUST 2019 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS B. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07 4113 - PAGE 12 OF 12 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 46 46 27 AUGUST 2019 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING SECTION 07 46 46 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes rainscreen cement panel system and accessories. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05 12 00—Structural Steel Framing 1.04 COORDINATION A. This is a potential long-lead item. Contractor to verify delivery schedule prior to submitting Schedule of Values. B. Coordinate siding installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawing of panel installation, material, panel layout, and accessories for review. B. Submit 8" x 10" panel sample in proposed colors for approval. C. Submit manufacturer's data sheets including care and recommended maintenance procedures for incorporation into maintenance manuals. D. Submit copies of manufacturer's warranties. 07 46 46 - PAGE 1 O F 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 46 46 27 AUGUST 2019 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with labels intact until time of use. B. Store materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. 1.07 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. All penetrations through the panel for the work of other trades shall be made watertight. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Structural failures including cracking and deforming. 2) Deterioration of materials beyond normal weathering. b. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain products, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer. 2.02 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING A. General: Basis of Design material is Swisspearl Cement Composite, "Linearis", cement, silicon-calcium strengthened with a combination of polyvinyl fibers without asbestos, fiberglass or formaldehyde. B. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/16 inch (8 mm). C. Horizontal Pattern: Boards 5.79 inches (147 mm) wide. 1. Texture: Smooth. 074646 - PAGE 20F5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 46 46 27 AUGUST 2019 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING D. Must be installed by a certified Dealer/Installer. E. Fastening: Galvanized/stainless, size and type as recommended by the panel manufacturer for applicable substrate. F. Factory-applied surface treatment to provide complete water repellent properties on all six sides. Only use coatings that do not contain any solvents. G. Tested to IBC Class 1, NFPA Class A. H. Color: 1. "Topaz 7073" 2. Less than 2 Delta E unit color change ASTM G155-00 after 2,000 hours exposure. I. At least 40-year documented panel life expectancy. J. Efflorescence is not acceptable. K. Homogenous smooth semi-matte surface finish. L. Tested UV-resistance = Delta E-value < 3 after 2,000 hours (Xenon Arc Light acc. Weather Test according to ASTM G 155-00 [ATI Report]). Product must have the 2,000- hour Xenon-Arc test in accordance with ASTM G 155-00 with a color resistance E-value of 2-3 on the CIELAB scale. M. Temperature resistance guaranteed up to +80° C and down to -40° C (176° F to -40° F). N. Tensile bending strength corresponds to highest class 5 according to EN 12467. O. Water absorption capacity between 8 M.-% and 12 M.% ° P. High quality reinforcement fibers, the panel must be comprised of <6% of cellulose fibers. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration. 1. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding unless otherwise indicated. 07 46 46 - PAGE 3 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 46 46 27 AUGUST 2019 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING B. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following fiber-cement decorative accessories as indicated: 1. Moldings and trim. C. Flashing: Provide sheet metal flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" where indicated. D. Fasteners: 1. For fastening fiber cement, use stainless-steel fasteners. E. Sealant 1. Use sealant recommended by siding manufacturer for intended application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fiber-cement siding and related accessories. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify site dimensions prior to commencement of work. B. Verify that flashings are in place, wall are prepared and covered with either building paper or membrane, C. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Do not install damaged components. C. Secure panels with fasteners and equipment as recommended by the manufacturer. 07 46 46 - PAGE 4 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 46 46 27 AUGUST 2019 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING D. Install panels with joints in line with structure behind, leave a minimum 5/16" joint between panels. E. Keep a minimum distance to corners and edges as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Install panels true to line and level with clean cut edges and joints. G. Any penetrations of the panel system must be properly sealed with a sealant in accordance with manufacturer's installation guide. H. Finished installation shall be properly secured, free of rattles, distortions, efflorescence, damage, or chipped components. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 07 46 46 - PAGE 5 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 54 23 27 AUGUST 2019 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Accessories, components, and counterflashings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00— Rough Carpentry 2. Section 07 4113— Batten-Seam Metal Roof Panels for sheet metal flashing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials 1. ASTM C79—Specification for Gypsum Sheathing Board. 2. ASTM C1289 — Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. 3. ASTM D471—Standard Test Method for Rubbery Property— Effect of Liquids. 4. ASTM D751—Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics. 5. ASMT D1876 — Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T-Peel Test). 6. ASTM D2137 — Standard Test Methods for Rubbery Property — Brittleness Point of Flexible Polymers and Coated Fabrics. 7. ASTM E84—Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 8. ASTM E96—Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 9. ASTM E108—Standard Test Methods for Fire Test of Roof Coverings. B. 2015 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0130 00—Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. 07 54 23 - PAGE 1 O F 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 54 23 27 AUGUST 2019 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING B. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint and termination detail conditions, conditions of interface with other materials, fasteners, seaming materials, flashing material, insulation and certifications. C. Submit draft of proposed special custom roofing warranties for Architect/Owner review and comment. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special precautions required for seaming membrane. E. Section 0170 00— Execution and Closeout Requirements. F. Manual for Materials and Finishes: Include Preventative Maintenance Guidelines. G. Certified statement from Firestone Building Products stating that the existing roof warranty has not be affected by Work performed under this section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: System, assembly, and components, under single roofing manufacturer responsibility, for complete and watertight system. B. Perform Work in accordance with manufacturer's directions, instructions, and recommendations. C. Installer Qualifications: Approved by warrantor of existing roofing system to work on the existing roofing. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. 075423 - PAGE 20F7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 54 23 27 AUGUST 2019 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Roofing System: TPO roofing. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during reroofing, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing roofing system warranty issued by Firestone Building Products. 1. Notify warrantor before proceeding with the Work. 2. Notify warrantor of existing roofing system on completion of Work, and obtain documentation verifying that existing roofing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. a. Submit documentation at Project closeout. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. Insulated Roofing System Over Plywood/T&G Deck: 1. TPO membrane roofing, mechanically fastened. 2. Rigid insulation board, mechanically fastened. 3. Vapor barrier sheeting, taped and sealed. 4. Plywood sheathing/T&G decking 07 54 23 - PAGE 3 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 54 23 27 AUGUST 2019 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 2.02 MANUFACTURER OF EXISTING SYSTEM A. Firestone Building Products; "UltraPly TPO Membrane" 2.03 ROOFING MATERIALS A. Membrane: Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO); reinforced 60 mil thick, 10 or 12 feet wide, gray color, conforming to the following criteria: Properties Test Results Breaking Strength, min, Ibf ASTM D751 250 min, 360 typ Elongation at Break of ASTM D751 25%typ Fabric Puncture Resistance FTM 101 C, Method 2031 300 Ibf min, 350 Ibf typ Tear Strength (8"x8") ASTM D751 55 Ibf min, 130 Ibf typ sample Water Absorption ASTM D471 3.0 max, 2.0 typ Moisture Vapor Perms ASTM E96 0.10 max, 0.05 typ Field Seam Strength ASTM D1876 25 Ibf/in min, 60 Ibf/in typ Brittleness Point ASTM D2137 -40' F min, -50' F typ B. TPO Membrane Flashing: Same material and thickness as roof membrane. Include manufacturer's standard prefabricated membrane configurations for flashing pipe penetrations, inside and outside corners, and other such conditions. Match color of roofing membrane. C. TPO Membrane Clad Metal Flashing: Manufacturer's minimum 35 mil non-reinforced TPO membrane laminated to 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal. Match color of roofing. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of 07 54 23 - PAGE 4 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 54 23 27 AUGUST 2019 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Fasteners: 1. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by system manufacturer, length required for thickness of material and substrate thickness; "blowout" or dimpling of exposed underside of T&G not acceptable. 2. Membrane Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer C. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. 07 54 23 - PAGE 5 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 54 23 27 AUGUST 2019 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. 3.03 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install roofing system components according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.04 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion. B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements. 07 54 23 - PAGE 6 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 07 54 23 27 AUGUST 2019 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 3.06 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07 54 23 - PAGE 7 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 09 9113 27 AUGUST 2019 PAINTING SECTION 09 9113 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following substrates: 1. Wood. 2. Structural Steel. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for painting of structural components. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this Section: 1. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 2. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 3. Research Council of Structural Connections (RCSC: Specifications for Structural Joints using High-strength Bolts. 4. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): a. PA2, Procedure for Determining Conformance to Dry Coating Thickness Requirements. b. PA 10, Guide to Safety and Health Requirements for Industrial Painting Projects. C. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning. d. SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning. e. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning. 09 9113 - PAGE I OF 14 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 09 9113 27 AUGUST 2019 PAINTING f. SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning. g. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. h. SP 7, Joint Surface Preparation Standard Brush-off Blast Cleaning. i. SP 10, Near-white Blast Cleaning. j. SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. k. SP 16, Brush-off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steel, and Non-ferrous Metals. I. Guide 15, Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble Salts on Steel and Other Nonporous Substrates. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Terms that may be use in this section: 1. Coverage: Total minimum dry film thickness in mils or square feet per gallon. 2. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 3. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 4. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 5. Gloss Level4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 6. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 7. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 8. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 9. MDFT: Minimum Dry Film Thickness, mils. 10. MDFTPC: Minimum Dry Film Thickness per Coat, mils. 11. Mil:Thousandth of an inch. 12. PDS: Product Data Sheet. 13. PSDS: Paint System Data Sheet. 14. SFPG: Square Feet per Gallon. 15. SFPGPC: Square Feet per Gallon per Coat. 16. SP: Surface Preparation. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 09 9113 - PAGE 2 OF 14 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 09 9113 27 AUGUST 2019 PAINTING 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has minimum 5 years' experience and has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this project with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds. 2. Perform surface preparation and painting in accordance with recommendations of the following: a. Paint manufacturer's instructions. b. SSPC PA 10. C. Federal, state, and local agencies having jurisdiction. C. Visual Standards: Each distinct area of the finished Work shall be free of variations in color and sheen, runs, sags, holidays, blistering, checking, cracking, scratches and other signs of poor workmanship. 09 9113 - PAGE 3 OF 14 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 09 9113 27 AUGUST 2019 PAINTING 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply paint in temperatures o moisture conditions outside of manufacturer's recommended maximum or minimum allowable. B. Do not perform final abrasive blast cleaning whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point of ambient air. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Nationally recognized manufacturers of paints and protective coatings who are regularly engaged in the production of such materials for essentially identical service conditions. B. Minimum of 5 years' verifiable experience in manufacture of specified product. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore. 2. Carboline. 3. International (including Devoe) 4. PPG Architectural Coatings. 5. Sherwin Williams, 6. Tnemec. 2.02 ABRASIVE MATERIALS A. Select abrasive type and size to produce surface profile that meets coating manufacturer's recommendations for specific primer and coating system to be applied. 09 9113 - PAGE 4 OF 14 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 09 9113 27 AUGUST 2019 PAINTING 2.03 PAINT, GENERAL A. Only materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, etc.) listing in the latest edition of the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual, Approved Product List (APL) are acceptable for use on this project. B. Other materials such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners, solvents, etc. shall be the highest quality product of an MPI listed manufacturer and shall be compatible with paint materials being used as required. C. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. D. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. E. Products: Product Definition Zinc Rich Primer — Moisture cured urethane or converted epoxy zinc rich primer, Ferrous Metal Tnemec Series 94H2O Hydro-Zinc, or approved equal. High Build Epoxy High solids, two component polyamide or polyamidoamine cured epoxy, Tnemec Series 27 F.C.Typoxy, or approve equal. Finish Modified Polycarbamide, semi-gloss finish, Tnemec Series 750 UVX, or approved equal. Organic Zinc Rich Epoxy or moisture cured urethane with 85-percent zinc content Primer in the dry film. Meeting the requirements of RCSC Specification for Structural Joints using High Strength Bolts, Class A or Class B, as required. Varnish Water-based clear varnish, gloss level 4, Sherwin Williams Minwax Helmsman Spar Water Based Urethane Satin, or approved equal (MPI #195) 09 9113 - PAGE 5 OF 14 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 09 9113 27 AUGUST 2019 PAINTING 2.04 MIXING A. Multiple-Component Coatings: 1. Prepare using each component as packaged by paint manufacturer. 2. No partial batches will be permitted. 3. Do not use multiple-component coatings that have been mixed beyond their pot life. 4. Furnish small quantity kits for touchup painting and for painting other small areas. 5. Mix only components specified and furnished by paint manufacturer. 6. Do no intermix additional components for reasons of color or otherwise, even within the same generic type of coating. B. Colors: Formulate paints with colorants free of lead, lead components. 2.05 SHOP FINISHES A. Shop Blast Cleaning: Reference Paragraph, Shop Coating Requirements. B. Surface Preparation: Provide Owner's Representative minimum 7 days' advance notice to start of shop surface preparation work and coating application work. C. Shop Coating Requirements: 1. Where manufacturer's standard coating is not suitable for intended service condition, Owner's Representative may approve use of a tie-coat to be used between manufacturer's standard coating and specified field finish. In such cases, tie-coat shall be surface tolerant epoxy as recommended by manufacturer of specified field finish coat. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 09 9113 - PAGE 6 OF 14 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 09 9113 27 AUGUST 2019 PAINTING 1. Wood: 15 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Surface Preparation Verification: Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with these specifications and printed directions and recommendation of paint manufacturer whose product is to be applied. The more stringent requirements shall apply. E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.02 PROTECTION OF ITEMS NOT BE PAINTED A. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not specified elsewhere to be painted. B. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. C. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process. D. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering. E. Protect surfaces adjacent to or downwind of Work area from overspray. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection. 09 9113 - PAGE 7 OF 14 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 09 9113 27 AUGUST 2019 PAINTING C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Field Abrasive Blasting: 1. Perform blasting for items and equipment where specified and as required to restore damaged surfaces previously shop or field blasted and primed or coated. 2. Refer to coating systems for degree of abrasive blasting required, 3. Where the specified degree of surface preparation differs from manufacturer's recommendations, the more stringent shall apply. E. Surface Contamination Testing: 1. A surface contamination analysis test shall be performed every 500 square feet by means of a Chlor Test CSN Salts or approved equivalent. 2. Surface with chloride level exceeding 3 µg/square centimeter for submerged surfaces and 5 µg/square centimeter for exposed surfaces shall be treated with a liquid soluble salt remover equivalent to CHLOR*RID (CHLOR*RID International, Chandler, AZ). 3. Follow manufacturer's recommendation and procedures for the use of this product to remove the surface contamination. F. Metal Surface Preparation: 1. Where indicated, meet requirements of SSPC Specifications summarized below: a. SP 1,Solvent Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, soil, drawings and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants by cleaning with solvent. b. SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning: Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter. Using power-assisted hand tools. C. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, using power-assisted hand tools. d. SP 5, White Metal Blasting: Removal of visible oil grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter by blast cleaning. e. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except for random staining limited to no more than 33 percent of 09 9113 - PAGE 8 OF 14 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 09 9113 27 AUGUST 2019 PAINTING each unit area of surface which may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discolorations caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied coatings. f. SP 7, Brush-Off Blast Coating: Removal of visible oil, grease, soil, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coatings. Tightly adherent mill scale, rust, and coating may remain on surface. g. SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except for random staining limited to no more the 5 percent of each unit area of surface which may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discolorations caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied coatings. h. SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal: Removal of visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxide, corrosion products, and other foreign matter using power-assisted hand tools capable of producing suitable surface profile. Slight residues of rust and paint may be left in lower portion of pits if original surface is pitted. i. SP 16, Brush Blasting of Non-Ferrous Metals; A brush-off blast cleaned non-ferrous metal surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, metal oxides (corrosion products), and other foreign matter. Intact, tightly adherent coating is permitted to remain. A coating is considered tightly adherent if it cannot be removed by lifting with a dull putty knife. Bare metal substrates shall have a minimum profile of 19 micrometers (0.75 mil). 2. The words "solvent cleaning", "hand tool cleaning", "wire brushing", and "blast cleaning", or similar works of equal intent in these Specifications or in paint manufacturer's specifications refer to the applicable SSPC Specification. 3. Where OSHA or EPA regulations preclude standard abrasive blast cleaning, wet or vacu-blast methods may be required. Coating manufacturer's recommendations for wet blast additives and first coat application shall apply. 4. Hand tool clean areas that cannot be cleaned by power tool cleaning. 5. Round or chamfer sharp edges and grind smooth burrs, jagged edges, and surface defects. 6. Welds and Adjacent Areas: a. Prepare such that there is: 1) No undercutting or reverse ridges on weld bead. 2) No weld spatter on or adjacent to weld or any areas to be painted. 3) No sharp peaks or ridges along weld bead. b. Grind embedded pieces of electrode or wire flush with adjacent surface of weld bead. 09 9113 - PAGE 9 OF 14 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 09 9113 27 AUGUST 2019 PAINTING 7. Preblast Cleaning Requirements: a. Remove oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants prior to blast cleaning. b. Cleaning Methods: Steam, open flame, hot water, or cold water with appropriate detergent additives followed with clean water rinsing. C. Clean small isolated areas as above or solvent clean with suitable solvent and clean cloth. 8. Blast Cleaning Requirements: a. Type of Equipment and Sped of Travel: Design to obtain specified degree of cleanliness. Minimum surface preparation is as specified herein and takes precedence over coating manufacturer's recommendations. b. Select type and size of abrasive to produce surface profile that meets coating manufacturer's recommendations for particular primer to be used. C. Use only dry blast cleaning methods. d. Do not reuse abrasive, except for design recyclable systems. e. Meet applicable federal, state, and local air pollution and environmental control regulations for blast cleaning, confined space entry (if required), and disposition of spent aggregate and debris. 9. Post-Blast Cleaning and Other Cleaning Requirements: a. Clean surfaces of dust and residual particles from cleaning operations by dry (no oil or water vapor) air blast cleaning of other method prior to painting, Vacuum clean enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem and wipe with a tack cloth. b. Paint surfaces the same day they are blasted. Reblast surfaces that have started to rust before they are painted. G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. H. Wood Substrates for Transparent Finishes: Clean surfaces to remove all foreign materials and substances, Sand surfaces to make smooth and dust off. 3.04 SURFACE CLEANING A. Solvent Cleaning: 09 9113 - PAGE 10 OF 14 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 09 9113 27 AUGUST 2019 PAINTING 1. Consists of removal of foreign matter such as oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and other surface contaminants by using solvent, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam cleaning, or similar materials and methods that involve a solvent or cleaning action. 2. Meet requirements of SSPC SP-1 3.05 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only, except as directed in this specification. 3. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 4. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view to public: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. C. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. 09 9113 - PAGE 11 OF 14 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 09 9113 27 AUGUST 2019 PAINTING g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. F. Film Thickness and Coverage: 1. Number of Coats: a. Minimum required without regard to coating thickness. b. Additional coasts may be required to obtain minimum required paint thickness, depending on method of application, differences in manufacturer's products, and atmospheric conditions. 2. Application Thickness: a. Do not exceed coating manufacturer's recommendations. b. Measure using a wet film thickness gauge to ensure proper coating thickness during application. 3. Give particular attention to edges, angles, flanges, and other similar areas, where insufficient film thicknesses are likely to be present, and ensure proper millage in these areas. 4. Apply additional coats as required to achieve complete hiding of underlying coats. Hiding shall be so complete that additional coats would not increase the hiding. 3.06 PROTECTIVE COATINGS SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, paint surfaces in accordance with the following application schedule. In event of discrepancies or omissions in the following, request clarification from Owner's Representative before starting work in question. B. System No. 5 Exposed Metal — Mildly Corrosive: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 10, Near-White Blast Zinc Rich Primer — 1 coat, 2.5 MDFT Cleaning Ferrous Metal High Build Epoxy 1 Coat, 3 MDFT Finish 1 Coat, 3 MDFT 1. Total minimum thickness: 09 9113 - PAGE 12 OF 14 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 09 9113 27 AUGUST 2019 PAINTING a. Non-stripe coated areas: 8.5 MDFT. b. Stripe coated areas: 11.5 MDFT. 2. Use on the following items or areas: a. All metal surfaces of structural steel components associated with trellis and gazebo structures, including fasteners, but excluding faying surfaces, and decorative metal railings: 1) Stripe coat all fasteners and field welds. Stripe coat shall consist of one coat of high build epoxy, brush applied, 3 MDFT. C. System No. 11 Faying Surfaces of Slip Critical Bolted Connections: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 10, Near-White Blast Organic Zinc Rich 1 coat, 2.5 MDFT Cleaning I Primer 1. Use on faying surfaces of slip critical joints as specified and as shown on drawings. 2. Provide primer in accordance with RCSC Specification for Structural Joints using High-Strength Bolts. D. Wood Decking Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover Per MPI Exterior Surface Varnish, water base 1 coat Preparation manual, Section clear 6.2 Varnish, water base 1 Coat clear Varnish, water base 1 Coat clear 09 9113 - PAGE 13 OF 14 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 09 9113 27 AUGUST 2019 PAINTING 3.07 COLORS A. Finish Colors: 1. Structural Steel:Tnemec "Briquet" 49GR 2. Decorative Guardrails: Tnemec "Briquet" 49GR 3. Wood: Clear B. Proprietary identification of colors is for identification only. Selected manufacturer may supply matches. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.09 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION 09 9113 - PAGE 14 OF 14 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 12 93 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE FURNISHINGS SECTION 12 93 00 SITE FURNISHINGS PART GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all materials, equipment, labor, and related items necessary to install and complete the site furnishing work shown on the Contract Drawings and/or Contract Specifications. The site furnishings to be installed shall include: 1. Radius Benches 2. Plaza Benches 3. Trash Receptacles 4. Picnic Tables 5. Play Area Signs 6. Fitness Area Sign 7. Story Makers Combination Unit 8. Single Bay Swing 9. Abakus 10. Neptun Net Structure 11. Helix Towers 12. Fitness Equipment 13. Splash Pad Bollards B. All related site furnishing items required to complete the work shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified in the Contract Specifications. 1.02 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A. Related work in other sections of these Contract Specifications includes but is not limited to: 1. Section 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 2. Section 32 1123 Aggregate Base Course 3. Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Adhere to manufacturer's instructions for product handling, assembly, installation, and maintenance. B. Manufacturer's original factory finish must be intact for the installation of the furnishing to be considered satisfactory. 12 93 00—PAGE 1 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 12 93 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE FURNISHINGS C. Standard Contract Specifications Reference Standards 1. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), Latest Edition. 2. All standards shall include the latest additions and amendments as of the date of advertisement for bids. 3. Comply with environmental agencies, building codes and other local requirements that are more stringent than the above. D. Before proceeding with any work, the Contractor shall inspect the site, carefully check all grades, and verify all dimensions and conditions affecting the work. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner's Representative of any discrepancy on line and level. E. Site Furnishing work shall be performed by a company with experience in work of similar scope and quality. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. For each product specified and prior to delivery, submit the manufacturer's product data including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Manufacturer's written installation instructions. 4. Samples of all finishes and materials as specified. 5. A copy of Manufacturer's warranty on the product. B. For Site Furnishings modified from standard manufacturer details, provide shop drawings for review and approval prior to fabrication. Shop drawings shall be scaled drawings and shall show all proposed construction including materials, sizes, dimensions, fastenings, connections, and installation hardware. Shop drawings required for: 1. Radius Bench with arms, legs, and modified back at pergola. 2. Splash Pad Bollard. C. List of anticipated submittals: 1. Plaza Bench 2. Trash Receptacle 3. Radius Bench with arms, legs, and modified back at pergolas 4. Splash Pad Bollards 5. Picnic Tables 6. Play Area Signs 7. Fitness Area Sign 8. Playground Equipment: a. Story Makers Combination Unit b. Swing Set c. Abakus 12 93 00-PAGE 2 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 12 93 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE FURNISHINGS d. Neptun Net Structure e. Helix Towers 9. Fitness Equipment: a. Hand Cycle b. Ultra Bar c. Stepper d. Stretch e. Sit-up f. Combi Unit 1 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store site furnishings items in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Handle all site furnishings with sufficient care to prevent scratches and other damage to finishes and materials. C. Deliver products in good condition. D. Store products to prevent corrosion, deterioration, and damage. E. Bent, dented, scratched, chipped, or otherwise damaged items are not acceptable and must be replaced by items and components in new condition. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not install site furnishings during heavy rain, freezing temperature, or snowfall. 1.08 PROTECTION A. Protect new work and work-in-progress from vandalism and damage that might be incurred by construction traffic, equipment, property, and persons. B. Replace damaged products before substantial completion as directed by Owner's Representative. 1.09 PERMITS, CODES, AND REGULATIONS A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits and fees as required by Local Authority and prevailing ordinances and/or codes. B. Keep fully informed and shall comply with all existing laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations, which in any way affect the conduct of the work. C. Comply with environmental agencies, building codes and other local requirements that are more stringent than included in Contract Specifications. 12 93 00-PAGE 3 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 12 93 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE FURNISHINGS 1.10 CONDUCT OF WORK A. The Contractor shall continuously maintain a competent superintendent or foreman during the progress of the work, with the authority to act for the Contractor in all matters pertaining to the work. The Contractor shall give personal attention to the fulfillment of the Contract and shall keep the work under control. Subcontractors shall not be recognized, and all persons engaged in the work will be considered employees of the Contractor. Their work shall be subject to the provisions of the Contract, Contract Drawings, and Contract Specifications. B. The Contractor shall confine operations to the working areas allotted by the Owner for operations, including material and equipment storage. C. The Contractor shall progressively clean the work site of debris and rubbish as the work proceeds. 1.11 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee work of this Contract Specification section for one (1) year against all defects of materials, installation, and workmanship. The guarantee period begins after the date of final acceptance. B. Repair any damage to site furnishings caused by construction activities, settlement and/or defects at no cost to the Owner. C. Provide all manufacturer warranties on site furnishings specified herein and deliver documentation to the city. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. As required to complete the work as shown on the Contract Drawings and/or as specified in the Contract Specifications. 2.02 BASE COURSE AGGREGATE A. Provide thickness as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Base course aggregate shall be as specified in Aggregate Base Course, section 32 1123, as required to construct the project. 12 93 00-PAGE 4 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 12 93 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE FURNISHINGS 2.03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Include concrete footings, thickened concrete, and other items as specified in Section 03 30 00 Cast-In Place Concrete or Section 32 13 13 Concrete Paving as required to construct the project. 2.04 REINFORCING BARS A. All reinforcing steel shall be, unpainted, uncoated, free from rust, dirt and other defects and as specified in Steel Reinforcement, Section 03 2100. 2.05 SURFACE FINISIHES A. Surface finishes for manufactured products shall conform to manufacturer's standard finish specifications. B. Provide no treatments that void the warranty on manufacturer's products. 2.06 HARDWARE A. Where the manufacturer does not provide a specification for anchoring, use only approved metal hardware including bolts, deformed bars for connections, threaded rods, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers. B. All metal hardware shall be Stainless Steel Type 304 unless otherwise noted. C. All bolts shall have standard cut stainless steel washers respective size, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. All stainless steel bolts to have stainless steel washers each end, stainless steel bolts, etc. shall have stainless steel washers and nuts. D. Hardware not noted by size shall be sufficient to draw and hold members securely. 2.07 RADIUS BENCH A. Radius bench to be Maglin Ogden Series bench with HDPC seat and back, steel legs, and arm rests; Surface Mount. 1. Bench Seat: Model # OGM1900-SCR8-FB; HDPC Slats—Sandstone. 2. Bench Legs: Model #OGM1900-MS1, Square Leg, steel. 3. Bench Arm Rest: OGM1900-CA1 Center Arm, steel. 4. Bench Back: customized back mounting as detailed and modified by manufacturer. Shop drawing for back attachment required with Radius Bench submittal. 5. Finish: All steel components shall be protected with E-Coat Rust Proofing/Powder coating per the manufacturer. Color to be "Finetex Slate". 6. Hardware for bench assembly is supplied by the manufacturer. Hardware for surface mounting to be per the Contract Drawings and supplied by the contractor. 12 93 00—PAGE 5 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 12 93 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE FURNISHINGS 7. Provide Radius Bench at radius indicated on plans. B. Radius Bench available from: Maglin Site Furniture 999 18t" St, Suite 3000 Denver, CO 80202 Tel: (800) 716-5506 Email: sales@maglin.com www.maglin.com C. Or approved equal. 2.08 PLAZA BENCH A. Plaza bench to be Maglin MLB870 Series bench with HDPC seat and back, with solid cast aluminum ends for legs and arm rests, and for the center arm; Surface Mount. 1. Bench Seat: Model # MLB870-PC, HDPC Slats—Sandstone. 2. Bench Legs: standard end piece, solid cast aluminum. 3. Bench Arm Rests: standard end piece, solid cast aluminum. 4. Bench Center Arm: standard center piece, solid cast aluminum. 5. All steel components shall be protected with E-Coat Rust Proofing/Powder coating per the manufacturer. Color to be "Finetex Slate". 6. Hardware for surface mounting to be per the Contract Drawings and supplied by the contractor. B. Plaza Bench available from: Maglin Site Furniture 999 18t" St, Suite 3000 Denver, CO 80202 Tel: (800) 716-5506 Email: sales@maglin.com www.maglin.com C. Or approved equal. 2.09 TRASH RECEPTACLE A. Trash Receptacles shall be City of Renton standard Wabash Plastisol Receptacle LR30OR by Wabash Valley Manufacturing, Inc. 32-gallon ribbed receptacle with side opening and dome lid. 1. Receptacle Model #: LR300R, Rib pattern. 2. Lid: Model # DT100, Dome Top Lid. 3. Receptacle Liner: Model # LR310, 32-gallon receptacle liner. 4. Surface mount package, Model # LR105. 5. Finish: All metal components shall receive powder coating per manufacturer's specifications. Color to be black. 12 93 00—PAGE 6 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 12 93 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE FURNISHINGS 6. Hardware for surface mounting to be per the Contract Drawings and supplied by the contractor. B. Trash Receptacles available from: Wabash Valley Manufacturing, Inc. PO Box 5, 505 East Main Street Silver Lake, Indiana 46982 Tel: (260) 352-2102 Fax: (260) 352-2160 Email: wvmsales@wabashvalley.com C. Or approved equal. 2.10 PICNIC TABLES AND UMBRELLAS A. Picnic tables shall be Landscape Forms modified "Mingle 35" table with shade umbrellas and seats. Tables with 2, 3 (ADA), 4, 5 (ADA), and 6 seat styles to be used with and without umbrellas as indicated on contract drawings. 1. Modified Mingle 35 table top: Stainless Steel with perforations. Perforation pattern to match the standard perforation pattern in the Landscape Forms 'Carousel' table top. 2. Seat: backless, perforated metal. See schedule on contract drawings for number of seats. 3. Seat and Frame Structure: Color to be "Bronze". 4. Umbrella: Shade umbrella with perforated panels. See schedule on contract drawings for quantity and location. 5. Umbrella: Color to be "Steel". 6. Mounting: Tables and Umbrellas to be Surface mount. 7. Finish: All powder coated metal finishes should be Landscape Forms Pangard II polyester powder coat. 8. Hardware for surface mounting to be per the Contract Drawings and supplied by the contractor. B. Picnic tables and umbrellas available from: Landscape Forms, Inc. 7800 E. Michigan Ave. Kalamazoo, Michigan 49048 Phone: (800) 521-2546 Fax (269) 381-3455 Website: www.landscapeforms.com E-mail: specify@ landscapeforms.com C. Or approved equal. 2.11 PLAY AREA SIGNS A. Standard Age Appropriate Sign by Kompan (For 2-5 Play Area). 1. Product#: M211P 2. Metal Tubing: 076/0101 stainless steel. 12 93 00-PAGE 7 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 12 93 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE FURNISHINGS 3. Anchoring: in-ground anchoring per manufacturer written instructions for installation in playground safety-surfacing. 4. Manufacturer: Kompan 5. Panels: HDPE 19mm EcoCore 6. Sign forages 2-5 available from: Highwire 2106 North 281" Street Tacoma, WA 98403 206.661.8320 info@highwireus.com B. Standard Age Appropriate Sign by Berliner (For 5-12 Play Area). 1. Product#: US.SPS00100 2. Metal Posts: stainless steel posts. 3. Anchoring: in-ground anchoring per manufacturer written instructions for installation in playground safety-surfacing. 4. Manufacturer: Berliner 5. Panels: HDPE 6. Sign for ages 5-12 available from: Allplay Systems, LLC PO Box 1886 Sequim, WA 98382 Phone: 1(888) 531-4881 Fax: 1 (888) 655-6412 2.12 INTERPRETIVE SIGN A. Owner will provide and install the interpretive sign. B. Contractor shall provide the concrete pad and footing per details in Contract Drawings. 2.13 STORY MAKERS COMBINTAION UNIT A. Custom Kompan Story Makers combination unit. 1. Model #: MSCT23897 2. Panels: HDPE 19mm EcoCoreTM 3. Metal Tubing: hot-dip galvanized tubes in dimensions 0101.6 x 2.9 mm, 042.4 x 3.2 mm and frames/posts are 038 x 2 mm. 4. Nets and Ropes: UV-stabilized PA (polyamide) with inner steel cable reinforcement 5. Anchoring: in-ground anchoring per manufacturer written instructions 6. Manufacturer: Kompan 7. Story Makers combination unit available from: Highwire 2106 North 28th Street Tacoma, WA 98403 206.661.8320 info@highwireus.com 12 93 00-PAGE 8 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 12 93 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE FURNISHINGS 2.14 SINGLE BAY SWING A. Kompan Single Bay Swing with infant seat and regular belt seat. 1. Model #: KSW92001 2. Metal Tubing: 076/0101 hot-dip galvanized tubes 3. Chains: 6mm Hot Dip Galvanized Chains 4. Anchoring: in-ground anchoring per manufacturer written instructions 5. Seat: one infant seat and one regular belt seat. 6. Manufacturer: Kompan 7. Finish: Powder coat metal tubing, color to be red (RAL 2005). 8. Single Bay Swing available from: Highwire 2106 North 28th Street Tacoma, WA 98403 206.661.8320 info@highwireus.com 2.15 ABAKUS A. Berliner Abakus 2.1. 1. Model #: 90.260.801 2. Metal Tubing: Stainless steel tubes, 0 60.3 mm (2 3/8"), connected to Frameworx°- aluminum ball connectors; 0 250 mm (9-13/16"). Aluminum ball connectors to be color Burgundy Red (3004) and Bright Orange (2009). 3. Seats: 19 mm (3/4") HDPE panels with stainless steel ring handle 4. Shock absorber: half EPDM rubber ball 5. Anchoring: in-ground anchoring per manufacturer written instructions 6. Manufacturer: Berliner Seilfabrik 7. Finish: Powder coat metal tubing Aluminum ball connectors: Color to be Burgundy Red (3004) and Orange (2009) 8. Abakus 2.1 available from: Allplay Systems, LLC PO Box 1886 Sequim, WA 98382 Phone: 1(888) 531-4881 Fax: 1 (888) 655-6412 2.16 NEPTUN NET STRUCTURE A. Berliner Neptune XXL Net Structure. 1. Model #: 90.140.224 2. Metal Tubing: Frameworx-steel tubes, 0 60.3 mm (2 3/8"), color to be Red (3020). 12 93 00-PAGE 9 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 12 93 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE FURNISHINGS 3. Rope: U-Rope°-round strand ropes with galvanized and covered wires: external strands with non-abrasive UV-resistant Polyester-yarn (no Polypropylene); rope-diameter 0 16 mm (5/8"), color to be Beige. 4. Nodes: Frameworx-aluminum ball connectors; 0 250 mm (9-13/16") incorporating an ASTEM TT net tensioning system. Color to be Yellow (7028-7s). 5. Spatial netting: Rope crossing points localized with durable, forged aluminum-alloy cloverleaf rings and forged aluminum-alloy ballknots; in situ-replaceable rope strands (no special tools required). Color to be Beige. 6. Planar Nets: Rope 0 16 mm (5/8"): mesh size minimum 250 x 250 mm (9-4/5"); rope crossing points localized by durable, drop forged aluminum ballknots (no plastic). Color to be Beige. 7. Anchoring: in-ground anchoring per manufacturer written instructions 8. Manufacturer: Berliner Seilfabrik 9. Finish: Powder coat metal tubing, color Red (3020). 10. Neptune net structure available from: Allplay Systems, LLC PO Box 1886 Sequim, WA 98382 Phone: 1(888) 531-4881 Fax: 1 (888) 655-6412 2.17 HELIX TOWERS A. Berliner DNA Combi.01 consists of DNA Tower.03 and DNA Tower.04 with two additional components: Banisters and Sliding Pole. Two towers are connected with a net tunnel. 1. Model #: 90.180.518 2. DNA Posts: Bended Terranos Steel pipes, 0 133 mm (5'-1/4"), wall thickness 5mm (3/16") with a round cast aluminum post top. Post color to alternate, starting at the net bridge: Red (3020) and Burgundy Red (3004). 3. Tube framework: Stainless steel tubes, 0 48 mm (157/64"), 4. Nodes: Frameworx-aluminum ball connectors; 0 250 mm (9'-13/16") incorporating an ASTEM TT net tensioning system. Color to be Yellow (7028-7s). 5. Safety Net Frames: Stainless steel tube frames with safety net made of stainless steel rope 0 4 mm (1/6"), mesh size 40 mm x 40 mm (1 6/11" x 16/11"), connected to the structure with two-part cast aluminum connecting clamps. Color to be Yellow (7028-7s). 6. Spatial netting: Rope crossing points localized with durable, forged aluminum-alloy cloverleaf rings,joint-ferrule, connecting-clamps and barrel-ferrule; in situ-replaceable rope strands. Color to be Beige 7. Banister: Collateral straight Frameworx—stainless steel pipes 0 60.3 mm (2 3/8"), connected to the main structure with Frameworx°-aluminum ball connectors; 0 200 mm (7-9/10") 8. Sliding Pole: Stainless steel pipe 0 40 mm (1-1/2"); connected to the main structure at a Frameworx°-aluminum ball connectors; 0 250 mm (9-13/16") 12 93 00-PAGE 10 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 12 93 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE FURNISHINGS 9. Net Tunnel: Net tunnel with in situ-replaceable square rungs; rungs comprised of stainless steel profile AIS1304 (DIN 1.4301) with aluminum end cap; rope-diameter 0 16 mm (5/8"); mesh size minimum 100 mm x 120 mm (4"x5"); rope crossing points localized by durable, drop forged aluminum ballknots. Color to be Yellow (7028-7s). 10. Anchoring: in-ground anchoring per manufacturer written instructions 11. Manufacturer: Berliner Seilfabrik 12. Finish: Powder coat metal tubing. 13. Helix Towers available from: Allplay Systems, LLC PO Box 1886 Sequim, WA 98382 Phone: 1(888) 531-4881 Fax: 1 (888) 655-6412 2.18 FITNESS EQUIPMENT A. Fitness equipment manufactured by Norwell USA to be Hand Cycle, Ultra Bar, Stepper, Stretch, Sit-up, Combination Unit 1 and a sign. The sign to provide overview of all the fitness equipment in fitness area. 1. Model Numbers: a. NWS113— Hand Cycle b. NWS112— Ultra Bar c. NW203—Stepper d. NW401—Stretch e. NW103—Sit-up f. NWC603—Combi Unit 1 g. NW503—Sign 2. Mounting: In-ground mount per manufacturers written instructions for correct footing depths as installed within playground safety surfacing; see drawings for design intent. 3. Finish & Materials: 316 Stainless Steel material with glass-blasted finish surface. 4. Fasteners: Stainless steel with locking features for vandal resistance. 5. Handles and Footrests: EPDM rubber complying to Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbon (PAH) test 6. Identification Bands shall be water and ultraviolet resistant adhesive film. 7. Warranties must be provided on equipment as follows: a. 20-year standard warranty against failure due to manufacturing defects and corrosion on pipes, foundations, and welds. b. 3-year standard warranty against failure due to manufacturing defects on rubber pa rts. 8. Fitness equipment and sign available from: Sterling West Norwell USA Representative 917 West 7th Street Gothenburg, NE 69138 Phone: (308) 537-3470 Toll Free: (877) 537-3470 12 93 00—PAGE 11 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 12 93 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE FURNISHINGS 2.19 SPLASH PAD BOLLARDS A. Basis of Design: Modified "Shear Bollard" by Quick Crete Products Corp. 1. Standard Bollard Model #: QS-SHR-131, 2. Bollard to be precast concrete with 10" Square Top, 7.5" Square Bottom, top is twisted at 21-degree angle along the vertical axis and bollard is at a height of 36". All Edges to be eased; with a manufacturing tolerance of±%". Bollard manufacturer shall include #3 vertical rebar reinforcing with horizontal pencil rod ties. Bollard manufacturer shall provide four anchor bolts: %" diameter x 4%" length anchor bolts. 3. Top Modification: top surface to be modified as detailed in Contract Documents. 4. Finish:Texture shall be Acid Etch, integral color to be "Slate Grey" 5. Anti-Graffiti coating: All sides of the splash pad bollard shall receive Permashield Premium Graffiti Control System application with matte finish (product information and application is in specification 03 30 00, Section 2.02,13 and 3.06). B. Modified Shear Bollards are available from: Quick Crete Products Corp. P.O. Box 639 731 Parkridge Ave. Norco, CA 92860 Tel: (866) 703-3434 Fax: (951) 737-7032 Email: sales@quickcrete.com C. Or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Examination: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. B. Mark alignment and locations of all site furnishings in the field for review and approval by Owner's Representative prior to installation. Incorrectly located work shall be removed and/or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Install rigid, plumb and true to lines and levels shown. Verify that all elements called for in this Section "fit" according to the Contract Drawings and all site features. D. Welded pieces shall be free of burrs, slag, or other waste material prior to galvanizing. All welds to be continuous without gaps. 12 93 00-PAGE 12 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 12 93 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE FURNISHINGS E. Assemble (if required) and install all equipment specified by name and/or manufacturer as per approved manufacturer's written instructions and/or recommendations. 3.02 BASE COURSE AGGREGATE A. Provide thickness as shown on the Contract Drawings and/or as specified in Aggregate Base Course, Section 32 1123. 3.03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Provide and size concrete footing, pads, and foundations for site elements per Contract Drawings, or as specified per manufacturer's written recommendations for equipment. B. Conform to requirements of the Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03 30 00 of these Contract Specifications. Layout and finishes as shown on Contract Drawings. 3.04 RADIUS BENCH A. Surface mount radius bench in locations shown on Contract Drawings. B. Install plumb and level as detailed on Contract Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Assemble bench per manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.05 PLAZA BENCHES A. Surface mount plaza benches in locations shown on Contract Drawings. B. Install plumb and level as detailed in locations shown on Contract Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Assemble benches per manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.06 TRASH RECEPTACLES A. Surface mount trash receptacles in locations shown on Contract Drawings. B. Install plumb and level as detailed in locations as shown in Contract Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Assemble trash receptacles per manufacturer's written recommendations. 12 93 00—PAGE 13 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 12 93 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE FURNISHINGS 3.07 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT AND PLAYGROUND AREA SIGNS A. Install plumb and level and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Assemble play equipment and signs per manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.08 INTERPRETIVE SIGN A. Locate as shown on plans in Contract Drawings. Coordinate with Owner's Representative regarding scheduling of sign manufacture and delivery to the site with park's concrete and installation work. B. Install and mount sign posts into concrete pad, footing and foundation per details in Contract Drawings. 3.09 FITNESS EQUIPMENT AND FITNESS EQUIPMENT SIGN A. Install plumb and level as detailed in locations shown in Contract Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Assemble fitness equipment and sign per manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.10 SPLASH PAD BOLLARDS C. Install plumb and level as detailed in locations shown in Contract Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. D. Provide concrete footing and grouting material as shown in Contract Drawings. Orientation and location of bollard on top of footing and the depth of the footing will be determined in the field by Owner's Representative once grades have been established and the picnic gazebo retaining wall has been constructed. 3.11 ADDITIONAL PRODUCT SUPPLY A. Provide one (1) bottle per finish and color specified of touch-up and repair agent from each manufacturer for each type of site furnishing in a clearly labeled box. Place this box in the storage room of the restroom building. B. Provide 8 extra HDPC bench seat slats and 8 extra HDPC bench back slats for the radius bench with connection hardware in clearly labeled box and place in the storage room. C. Provide additional graffiti coating product and directions for precast concrete items, clearly labeled with written instructions and placed in the storage room. 12 93 00-PAGE 14 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 12 93 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE FURNISHINGS D. Provide 8 additional handle and foot rest replacements for fitness equipment. 3.12 SURFACE INSTALLATIONS: A. Surface installations shall be made only upon approved concrete surfaces. B. Use only approved anchoring devices and hardware. C. Where the manufacturer does not provide a specification for anchoring, use only approved stainless steel wedge anchors as follows: 1. Do not proceed with anchor installation until concrete pavement has had a minimum of 14 days cure time under normal conditions. Where weather conditions are beyond the range of normal, do not proceed with anchor installation without the approval of the Owner's Representative. 2. Size to the largest standard diameter that the manufacturer's pre-made hole will accommodate without force. 3. Size for embedment of 3/4 of the actual depth of concrete to support the installation, in no case less than 2%". Allow for depth of nut plus 3 to 5 threads protrusion into a cap nut. 4. Do not over drill beyond 1/8" the depth necessary to accommodate an anchor. 5. Torque to 80%to 85% of the anchor manufacturers recommended maximum. 6. Provide at least one anchor for every bolt location hole for any site furnishing. 3.13 CLEAN-UP A. Remove all metal, wood, and concrete debris, protective wrappings and coverings, and shipping materials from the project site. B. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by the Owner's Representative. Remove and replace all damaged components as determined by the Owner's Representative. C. Clean site furnishings promptly after installation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Do not use harsh or abrasive cleaning materials or methods that could damage the finishes. D. Fully restore all areas of the site that were impacted by the installation activities. END OF SECTION 12 93 00-PAGE 15 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 13 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE SECTION 13 12 00 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Section includes: Provide and install mist equipment mechanical and electrical package in accordance with the Contract Documents. Furnish all labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, transportation, temporary construction, and special or occasional services as required to make a complete working mist and light feature installation, as shown on the drawings and described in these specifications. The work of this Section shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Mist Display System including pumps, valves, and specialties (nozzles, fittings, etc.) as hereinafter described, listed and shown on the drawings. 2. Mist Feature Electrical Control System including control panel, water level and PLC controller, time switches, relays, motor starters, grounding system, PLC if required, wind sensor, and other circuits and accessories as required, U.L. 508 Listed. 3. Submersible Lighting System accessories and controls. 4. Filtration System, media, accessories, and controls. Drain, water makeup and overflow equipment, and controls. 5. All special tools for proper operation and maintenance of equipment provided under this section. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 03 10 00—Concrete Forming and Accessories C. Section 03 15 00—Concrete Joints and Accessories D. Section 03 30 00—Cast-in-Place Concrete E. Division 26— Electrical 13 12 00-PAGE 1 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 13 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE F. Section 32 12 13—Concrete Paving 1.03 REFERENCES A. This installation shall comply with all applicable and the most stringent provisions of the latest edition of the following codes. 1. BOCA- National Building Code 2. UPC- Uniform Plumbing Code 3. NEC- National Electrical Code B. Materials furnished hereunder shall, where applicable, comply with the latest edition of applicable standard specifications published by the following organizations: 1. ASTM -American Society for Testing and Material 2. ANSI -American National Standards Institute 3. IEEE - Institute of Electrical & Electrical Eng. 4. IPCEA - Insulated Power Cable Engineers Assoc. 5. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Assoc. 6. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineer - ASTM E 2358-04 Standard specification for the Performance of Glass in Permanent Glass Railing Systems, Guards and Balustrades. 7. UL- Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 8. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation 9. ASSE -American Society of Sanitary Engineers 10. AWWA-American Water Works Association 11. CS -Commercial Standards 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit complete shop drawings to the Architect for approval, in quantities required for proper distribution and in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions. 1. Shop drawings shall include or incorporate those final drawings furnished by the Equipment Supplier, as specified herein, together with all 13 12 00—PAGE 2 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 13 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE additional information and drawings required to show the proper installation of mist feature equipment. "Preliminary" or "schematic" drawings provided by the Equipment Supplier shall not be used for installation purposes. Glass light fabrication plans with dimensions, holes and finishes. 2. The Contractor shall deliver drawings for approval, after the signing of the contract, so as not to delay the construction required under other sections. 3. Shop drawing of the equipment space layout showing all mechanical and electrical equipment in addition to all piping and conduit. Include pipe elevations and dimensions between pipe centerlines where relevant. Provide layout drawings of all pipe runs and pool fitting locations. 4. Shop drawings shall include outline dimensions, operating and maintenance clearances required, and sufficient technical data to indicate compliance with the Specification. 5. Shop drawings may not include details reproduced from the Contract Documents except when submitting "as specified" materials and equipment. B. Product Data: 1. Materials list for all materials and equipment furnished. 2. Product data for all materials and equipment furnished. 3. The Contractor shall provide labeled equipment certifying approval, as hereinafter specified, by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) whenever available. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All workmanship and materials shall conform and comply with the requirements of building ordinances, codes, rules and regulations of all departments of Federal, State, county, and Owner having lawful jurisdiction over the work in this section. B. When these specifications and/or drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above mentioned rules and regulations, the provisions of these specifications and/or drawings shall take precedence over the requirements of said rules and regulations. 13 12 00-PAGE 3 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 13 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE C. The Contractor shall furnish, without extra charge, any additional material and/or labor required for compliance with these rules and regulations although not mentioned in these specifications or indicated on the drawings. D. All materials shall be new and shall conform with applicable standards in every case where such standards have been established for the particular material in question. E. All work shall be executed by workmen skilled in the craft to which they are assigned. F. Adequate supervision shall be provided to maintain high quality workmanship. G. Any proposal for substitution of materials or equipment shall be submitted 10 calendar days prior to the final bid date; otherwise, no substitutions will be permitted. Submittal for equivalent items shall, where applicable, include the following data which are not necessarily required for specified items: 1. Performance Characteristics and hydraulic and electrical load data. 2. Materials of construction, fabrication, and manufacture. 3. Certification of Conformance with specific codes, standards, and specifications. 4. Submittal of substituted equipment may be rejected if the component alters the design in a manner that affects other trades or if it impairs accessibility or critical clearances. 5. No substitutions shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Architect/Engineer. Should a substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor shall replace this material or equipment with material or equipment specified, at its own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and Owner. 6. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also submit a bid on the "as specified" materials and equipment. 7. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also provide a written performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials and equipment will produce the specified water effects. 13 12 00-PAGE 4 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 13 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE 1.06 MATERIAL SUPPLIER'S RESPONSIBILITY A. Design Responsibility: 1. The Equipment Supplier shall accept complete design responsibility for the hydraulic and electrical system, provided that all equipment required for the mist feature installation is procured from the specified equipment manufacturer as itemized in its proposals and materials list on the final, approved installation drawings. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for installation of all equipment required for the mist feature installation in accordance with mist feature supplier's drawings and instructions. B. Performance Guarantee: The Equipment Supplier shall guarantee the mist feature to perform to the designed spray patterns and misting volumes (approximate heights), provided that installation of the equipment is in strict accordance with the supplier's recommendations, instructions, details, and approved drawings. C. Warranty: All materials and component parts, excluding lamps, supplied by the manufacturer, shall be guaranteed to be free from defects of materials and/or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of substantial completion or 18 months from shipment, whichever comes first. (Complete warranty form available from material supplier on request.) 1.07 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with all trades and appropriate sections of the construction specifications as necessary to ensure proper provisions for the work of this section. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the Owner's property from injury or loss due to its work. All damage to existing property (building, utilities, pavement, site furnishings, etc.) or plants (trees, shrubs, lawn or ground cover) caused by the Contractor during its operation or as a result of malfunction of installed work during the guarantee period shall be repaired at the Contractors expense. C. The Contractor shall be fully informed regarding any available space limitations and unusual requirements, for the installation of all materials and work furnished under this section. Although the location of equipment may be shown on the drawings in certain positions, the Contractor shall also be guided by the Contract Drawings and conditions at the job, correlating its work with that of the 13 12 00-PAGE 5 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 13 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE other sections and other trades, with discrepancies and interferences being brought to the attention of the Owner's Representative for resolution prior to proceeding with the work. 1.08 CONTRACTOR GUARANTEE AND EQUIPMENT WARRANTY A. In entering into a contract covering this work, the Contractor accepts the Contract Drawings and guarantees that the work will be performed in accordance with the requirements of the specifications and drawings, as may be made in the contract documents. B. The Contractor further guarantees that the workmanship and material will be of the best quality procurable and that only experienced workers, familiar with each particular class of work, will be employed. C. The Contractor further agrees to hold itself responsible for any defects which may develop in any part of the entire system, including equipment as provided for under this specification, due to faulty workmanship, design or material and to replace and make good, without cost to the Owner, any such faulty parts or construction which may develop at any time within one (1) year from the date of the final acceptance. Any repairs or replacements required because of defects, as outlined in this clause, are to be made promptly and approved in writing by the Owner's Representative. D. Contractor shall warrant all material found defective within one (1) year of final acceptance and shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner including labor to remove and re-install any defective materials. E. The warranty shall not extend to damage incurred through incorrect or improper operation and maintenance by the Owner. The Owner shall assume full responsibility for proper operation and maintenance upon final acceptance of installation from Contractor. F. In the case of Manufacturer's guarantees being limited, or expiring within the specified guarantee period, the Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and providing service contracts and additional warranty coverages to extend through the warranty period as may be required by Owner. 1.09 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. The Equipment Supplier shall deliver to the Owner 3 copies of the Operations & Maintenance Manual, together with any additional information or manuals which would assist in the proper operation and maintenance of equipment. 13 12 00-PAGE 6 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 13 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE B. The Operations & Maintenance Manual shall include descriptions of the spring start-up and the winterizing procedures, sequence of operation, and wind speed control settings. The procedures and sequences shall be updated by the equipment supplier and contractor working together such that both are fully coordinated and familiar with the as-installed and as-commissioned systems. C. The Contractor shall, at its expense, arrange and provide for the technical instruction of the Owner's maintenance personnel, by the Material Supplier's personnel, for such time as is reasonably required to acquaint Owner's maintenance personnel with the operation and maintenance of all equipment furnished and installed under this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Prime Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing all specialized mist feature mechanical and electrical materials and tools for the mist feature and shall then furnish electrical mist feature components to the electrical contractor for installation and connection. B. Materials not listed within these specifications or on drawings as furnished by the Equipment Supplier, but required for the complete installation of the mist feature mechanical and/or electrical systems, shall be furnished by the Contractor. C. Materials shown on the Contract Drawings, but not specified herein, shall be provided in accordance with information shown on the drawings and the general provisions of this part of the specification. D. Substitutions in the list of equipment included in this section may be made by the Equipment Supplier only if the equipment is of better quality and more effective than that listed, improves system design and performance or delivery times, and only if the changes are thoroughly documented and approved in writing by the Owner's Representative. 2.02 SPECIALIZED MIST FEATURE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER A. Approved Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, the following is the approved Manufacturer/Equipment Supplier for specialized mist feature system equipment listed in this specification. B. All mist feature equipment specified and supplied to the Contractor shall be supplied by a single mist feature Manufacturer/Equipment Supplier. 13 12 00-PAGE 7 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 13 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE C. The Equipment Supplier must currently be in the business of supplying mist feature equipment for a minimum of 20 years and shall have previously supplied mist feature system design, drawing and equipment, similar in size and complexity to the specified project. D. The specified supplier shall have minimum assets of $750,000. and be able to furnish "CPA" verification of asset strength at the request of the Project Architect. 2.03 MATERIAL MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER'S RESPONSIBILITY A. Warranty: All materials and component parts, excluding lamps supplied by the Equipment Supplier, shall be guaranteed to be free from defects of materials and/or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of official start-up or 18 months, whichever is sooner. B. Design Responsibility: The Equipment Supplier shall accept complete design responsibility for the hydraulic and electrical system, provided that all equipment is supplied by it as indicated. This does not include responsibility for the actual installation of the equipment except where the equipment is installed by the Equipment Supplier. C. Performance Guarantee: The Equipment Supplier shall provide a written performance guarantee certifying that the mist feature system will perform to the designed water heights and patterns and will create the designed water heights and patterns, and will create the designed lighting effects, providing the equipment is supplied by a single Equipment Supplier and the installation is in accordance with the Supplier's recommendations and drawings. 2.04 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE COMPONENTS A. Contractor to provide project specific bill of materials, Mist feature performance criteria and mist feature system visual effects and general design and operation scope for Owner's Representative to review and approve. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install and connect all equipment in accordance with Manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. Provide and clean all piping, valves, and connections recommended by the Manufacturer for proper operation. B. Protect all pipes, equipment, and other parts of the work against injury by exposure to the weather during construction while stored or installed in place. 13 12 00-PAGE 8 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 13 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE C. Make all adjustments required for the proper operation of the mechanical system. Use Manufacturer's factory technicians where adjustments cannot be accomplished by the Contractor's personnel at Contractors' expense. 3.02 ALIGNMENT AND LUBRICATION OF ROTATING EQUIPMENT A. After installation, align all pumps connected to motors by means of flexible couplings, if necessary, to within the tolerance limits recommended by the equipment and coupling manufacturers. B. Before any rotating equipment is put in operation for testing purposes, properly lubricate with lubricants recommended by the Manufacturer. Further lubricate before final acceptance. Provide a complete schedule of lubrication of all rotating equipment within the equipment literature binder. 3.03 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Supply all piping systems with valves arranged to provide necessary isolation and give regulating control throughout the system. B. Butterfly valves used to isolate equipment or accessories shall be lug-type installed in a manner to allow servicing without draining the system. C. Check valves shall close against pressure. D. Do not install valve stems below horizontal line. 3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Provide flanges or unions as indicated and as necessary, to allow removal and reinstallation of any item, or equipment, or accessory without cutting, welding, or soldering. 2. Provide discharge piping of proper size for all air vent, solenoid and relief valves. Extend to nearest drain. 3. Provide a readily accessible 1-1/2" hose angle valve with hose connection and hose, at all low points in the system and immediately downstream of check valves as necessary to allow the system to be completely drained. 4. Cut pipe to measurements established at the site. Work into place without springing or forcing. 5. Protect all openings in piping during construction to prevent entrance of foreign matter. 13 12 00-PAGE 9 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 13 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE 6. Cut pipe and tubing ends square. Remove rough edges and burrs so that a smooth and unobstructed flow will be obtained. 7. Close or short nipples should be used only where shown on the Contract Drawings, or absolutely necessary to satisfy dimensional constraints. 8. Make changes in pipe size using reduced fittings. Use bushings only if shown on the Contract Drawings. 9. Unless otherwise noted, connections to equipment or accessories shall be threaded for sizes 3" and smaller, flanged for sizes 4" and larger. 10. Arrange exposed piping straight, parallel and perpendicular to the walls of the structure unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 11. Wherever two or more pipes are installed in parallel, allow sufficient space for required gluing, welding, soldering, painting, and/or the application of insulation. 3.05 PIPE PROTECTION A. Copper or brass piping, encased in concrete: Exterior shall be wrapped with one layer of pipe wrap at half lap. B. Copper or brass piping, underground: Exterior shall be coated with two coats of coal tar mastic to a total thickness of 8 to 10 mils. Allow 12 hours drying time between applications. Clean and prepare pipe exterior in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Welded steel piping assemblies: Galvanize after fabrication. D. Galvanized steel piping, underground, submerged, or encased in concrete: Exterior shall be coated with two coats of coal tar mastic to a total thickness of 8 to 10 mil. Allow 12 hours drying time between applications. Clean and prepare pipe exterior in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.06 PENETRATIONS A. Core drilling for pipe penetrations shall be accomplished only at locations and in a manner approved by the Owner's Representative. B. Provide a metal or approved plastic sleeve or core-drilled hole for every pipe passing through a concrete wall or floor. C. Provide a water stop or membrane clamp for every pipe or sleeve penetrating an exterior concrete wall or floor or the mist feature wall or floor, whichever is 13 12 00-PAGE 10 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 13 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE appropriate to the waterproofing method and/or as shown on the Contract Drawings. D. Seal sleeves passing through exterior walls with resilient seal and foam sealant, unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings. 3.07 PIPING TESTS A. Provide all temporary piping, pumps, and gauges necessary to conduct the specified tests. B. Conduct all tests before concealment of work and before any coating, wrap, or insulation is applied. C. Replace or repair any part that leaks. Repeat test until criteria are met. D. Do not subject any item to a test pressure greater than the pressure rating of the item. E. Vent air from all piping being tested. Underground piping shall be tested as follows: 1. In accordance with pipe manufacturers' recommendations and procedures, pressurize all underground piping (except for drain system) to 75 psi prior to backfilling (spot backfilling to anchor piping may be done prior to pressurizing). Piping shall remain pressurized until all backfilling, grading, planting, and concrete work in the area of the piping is completed. 2. In accordance with pipe manufacturers' recommendations and procedures, pressurize all underground drain piping beneath the equipment space to 15 psi until all backfilling and concrete work in the area is completed. F. The completed piping system shall be tested as follows: 1. Conduct each test for a minimum continuous duration of 8 hours. Hydrostatically pressure test all storm and sanitary drain piping at 15 psi. 2. Hydrostatically pressure test all other piping and equipment at 75 psi. 3. Strike all solder joints with a soft-face hammer while under pressure. 4. Log pressure readings for all tests required above at the beginning and end of each test and on every working day between. Note the location 13 12 00-PAGE 11 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 13 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE and cause of any failures and method of repair on the daily log. Submit copy of the log to the Architect weekly. 5. Testing of the completed system, as specified above, shall be witnessed by the Architect. 3.08 FLUSHING A. Before the mist feature system is placed in operation, flush all mist feature system piping with water to remove foreign matter and debris in piping. B. Completely drain all piping and equipment. Re-flush as necessary until water runs clean. Fill the system to the required capacity with clean water. C. Circulate the water throughout the system for one (1) hour, using the display pump. Install start-up screens as necessary to prevent equipment clogging and damage. D. Drain, fill, and circulate (repeat previous three steps above) until the water remains clear 3.09 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Furnish and install all required fasteners, rods, hangers, supports, bolts, nuts, washers, and steel plates and shapes. B. Furnish and arrange for the installation of all required inserts and anchor bolts. Provide templates where appropriate. C. Provide additional hangers or supports at all valves, strainers, and elsewhere where required to properly support any additional pipe loadings. D. Provide copper plated hangers where hangers are in direct contact with copper piping. Strap hangers are not permitted in any piping work. E. Basket strainers larger than 3" shall be independently supported. Piping shall not be supported by another pipe or duct. 3.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide a securely attached permanently engraved metal nameplate for each piece of equipment containing all data required to properly identify the equipment (i.e. manufacturer, type, size, capacity, horsepower, etc.). B. Provide a valve tag for each valve to provide information to correlate the valve with the outlet or fitting served. 13 12 00-PAGE 12 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 13 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE C. Provide a half-size copy of the "As-built" Schematic Diagram, permanently encased in plastic, to provide the Owner's operating personnel ready correlation of each valve identified with each outlet or fitting served. D. Install nameplates for gauge/control device panels as shown on the Drawings. Attach using stainless steel machine screws. E. Provide flow direction arrow pipe bands on all system piping. (Seton or equal) 3.11 CONTROLLER AND WIND CONTROL EQUIPMENT PROGRAMMING &ADJUSTMENTS A. Program controllers using factory-trained technicians so that each controller (2 provided) controls 5 mist/light fixtures using an on/off system in the following sequence pattern: 1. Sequence: Controller 1 is on. Controller 2 is off. 2. Sequence: Controller 1 is on. Controller 2 is on. 3. Sequence: Controller 1 is off. Controller 2 is on. 4. Sequence: Controller 1 is off. Controller 2 is off. 5. Sequence: Controller 1 is off. Controller 2 is on. 6. Sequence: Controller 1 is on. Controller 2 is on. 7. Sequence: Controller 1 is on. Controller 2 is off. 8. Sequence: Controller 2 is off. 9. Repeat sequence pattern. The duration of each sequence will be set in the field by the Owner's Representative during field review and testing of the system. Final program settings of the controllers shall be documented as part of the Operations & Maintenance Manual. B. The duration of time delay coordinated with wind speed will be set in the field by the Owner's Representative during field review and testing of the system. Final program settings of the wind control equipment shall be documented as part of the Operations & Maintenance Manual. C. Make temporary and final adjustments for each system and equipment apparatus installed, using factory-trained technicians. Refer to the Drawings and Operations & Maintenance Manuals for system start-up and adjustment details. Contact Manufacturer/Material Supplier for additional assistance as necessary. 13 12 00-PAGE 13 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 13 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE 3.12 CLEANING AND PAINTING A. Clean all exposed equipment and piping to remove rust, scale, concrete, etc. before painting. B. Mask off all bright metal parts and nameplates. C. Paint all exposed equipment and piping (including galvanized) within the pump room and the equipment space within underground vaults as follows: 1. Pretreatment, bare ferrous parts: Sand blast or treat with oil penetrant. 2. Primer: Previously painted or retreated equipment and piping shall receive one coat of rust inhibiting primer. 3. Finish: Apply two coats of white epoxy enamel. D. Thoroughly clean and wipe down all equipment and piping, sweep floor and remove all debris and remaining tools and equipment from pump room, and any other loose or abandoned items which may create an operation or maintenance hazard. 3.13 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS & COMMISSIONING A. At the time of completion, a period of not less than 3 days of 8 hours each shall be allotted by the Contractor for instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel in the use of all systems. Instruction shall include 1. Spring start-up procedures. 2. Autumn close-down procedures. 3. Everyday monitoring, maintenance, and cleaning. 4. Trouble-shooting. B. All Owner personnel shall be instructed at one time, the Contractor making at their expense, all necessary arrangements with manufacturer's and material supplier's technicians to provide instruction, training, product literature, and application guides for the Owner's reference. 3.14 OPERATION PERIOD A. Prior to final acceptance of the installation by the Owner, demonstrate a 30 day, fully automated, uninterrupted daily operation of not less than 8 hours, nor more than 16-hours, for all systems provided under this Section. Should the 13 12 00-PAGE 14 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 13 12 00 27 AUGUST 2019 DECORATIVE MIST FEATURE period for 30-day daily operation fall within a winterization period; the 30-day operation shall be performed after successful system start-up in the spring. B. Supervise the operation of the equipment and be responsible for the proper operation thereof and make no claim against the Owner for any damage to the equipment during such operation. Make such changes, adjustments, or replacement of equipment as may be required to ensure installation complies with the Specifications, and replace any defective or non-conforming parts or materials. C. The costs of labor, electricity, water, and operational tools, equipment and supplies during the 30-day operation period shall be paid by the Contractor. D. Coordinate the 30-day operation period with all trades related to the mist feature work and with appropriate climatic conditions to ensure uninterrupted 30-day operation. END OF SECTION 13 12 00-PAGE 15 OF 15 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 00 00 27 AUGUST 2019 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 26 00 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Section includes the following: 1. Supporting devices for electrical components. 2. Electrical identification. 3. Power Pedestal PP-2. 4. Electrical demolition. 5. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 6. Touchup painting. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09 9100— Painting. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. B. For each type of raceway, wire, splice kits, fittings, etc., indicated. Include clearly marked manufacturers technical data. C. Product Data: For each type of product indicated in the Luminaire Schedule in the Contract Drawings, provide manufacturer information and data, including Pole Base Covers. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. 26 00 00-PAGE 10 F 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 00 00 27 AUGUST 2019 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.06 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain continuously updated redline drawings during progress of the project. Show all changes from the contract documents. Provide detail dimensions for locations of conduit concealed by concrete or earthwork. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed. B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. D. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface. E. Provide temporary power to the construction site. Coordinate requirements with all trades. F. Furnish support structures—scaffolding, rigging, etc. - necessary to complete the project. Remove structures prior to completion of the project. 1.09 WARRANTY 26 00 00-PAGE 2 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 00 00 27 AUGUST 2019 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS A. Contractor shall warrant entire system for a minimum period of two years. This warranty shall include all installed components under Division 26. Note: the warranty period for other systems may be longer; see other sections of these specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRE PRODUCTS A. Furnishing all products as specified within the Luminaire Schedule in the Contract Drawings, including Pole Base Covers. 2.02 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Metal Items for Use Outdoors: 316 stainless steel. B. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16- inch- (14-mm-) diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c., in webs. C. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type. D. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 2.03 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications. B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. 1. Type: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive, vinyl. Legend is overlaminated with a clear, weather-and chemical-resistant coating. 2. Color: Black letters on orange background. 3. Legend: Indicate panel, circuit, and voltage. C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick (25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick). D. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape with the following features: 26 00 00-PAGE 3 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 00 00 27 AUGUST 2019 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick (150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick). 2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line. E. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background. F. Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm), galvanized-steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application. 1/4-inch (6-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. G. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 2.04 POWER PEDESTAL PP-2 A. See Drawings. B. Two door enclosure with separately lockable compartments. C. One compartment with a 100 Al 120/240 V, single-phase, 22,000 AIC, panelboard with 50-amp, 240V main breaker. D. One Compartment with Event Receptacles: 1-50 A 120/240 V. Provisions and spaces for 4- 20 A, 120 V; 1- 30 A 120/240 V future receptacles; E. Vandal resistant design fabricated from 12-gauge pre-galvanized steel sheet with open bottom framed with 2-inch angle. F. Side cable access to receptacles with padlock hasp. G. UL listed assembly. H. Finish and Color: Polyester powder coat with color approved by City of Renton prior to purchase. I. Nominal size 48 inches high by 36 inches wide by 16 inches deep. 260000-PAGE 40F 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 00 00 27 AUGUST 2019 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS J. As manufactured by Skyline Electric & Manufacturing, 3619 7th Avenue South, Seattle, WA. Contact Tom Provo, 206-682-4422. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria is not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom. B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other structural systems and components, unless otherwise indicated. C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.02 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: stainless steel materials. B. Dry Locations: Steel materials. C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system. D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; minimum of 200-lb (90-kg) design load. 3.03 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. 26 00 00-PAGE 5 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 00 00 27 AUGUST 2019 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying. D. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and communication lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches (400 mm), overall, use a single line marker. E. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal- backed butyrate signs for outdoor items. 3.05 DEMOLITION A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and functionality. B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in their entirety. C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing finish. D. Remove demolished material from Project site. E. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relocation. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved. 26 00 00-PAGE 6 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 00 00 27 AUGUST 2019 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following: 1. Raceways. 2. Wire and connectors. 3. Supporting devices for electrical components. 4. Electrical identification. 5. Electrical demolition. 6. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 7. Touchup painting. 3.08 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 Section 09 9100— Painting. 1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location. 2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats. 3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.09 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris. B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 26 00 00-PAGE 7 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 19 27 AUGUST 2019 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splic- es, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 00 00— Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. B. Section 26 05 53— Electrical Identification. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing As- sociation and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having ju- risdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufac- turers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 26 05 19-PAGE 1 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 19 27 AUGUST 2019 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2.02 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Available Manufacturers: 1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Southwire Company. B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings. C. Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5 or 7; solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THW or THHN-THWN; XHHW complying with NEMA WC 5 or 7. 2.03 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Available Manufacturers: 1. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. 2. Hubbell/Anderson. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division. B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS A. Interior dry location Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single con- ductors in raceway. B. Underground or outside Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type XHHW, single con- ductors in raceway for feeders and underground branch circuits; Type THHN- THWN, single conductors in raceway for indoor branch circuits (#10 and smaller). 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed 2605 19-PAGE 2 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 19 27 AUGUST 2019 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. B. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway. C. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed struc- tural members, and follow surface contours where possible. D. Support cables according to Division 26 Section 26 00 00- Basic Electrical Mate- rials and Methods. E. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section 26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods and Section 26 05 53 - Electri- cal Identification. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's pub- lished torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicat- ed, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that pos- sess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than un- spliced conductors. Splices below grade shall utilize epoxy resin encapsulated or gel type splice kits. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters. B. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 2605 19-PAGE 3 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 19 27 AUGUST 2019 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 2605 19-PAGE 4 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 05 26 27 AUGUST 2019 GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 05 19 - Conductors and Cables. B. Section 25 05 43 - Underground Ducts and Handholes. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM B. IEEE C. U L D. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Data: For the following: 1. Ground rods. C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. 26 05 26-PAGE 1 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 05 26 27 AUGUST 2019 GROUNDING AND BONDING 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1. Comply with UL 467. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods: i. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. ii. Chance/Hubbell. iii. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. iv. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical. V. I LSCO. vi. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. vii. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. viii. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. ix. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. X. Thomas & Betts, Electrical. 2.02 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 26 Section 26 05 19 -Conductors and Cables. B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation. C. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable. D. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated. E. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following: 26 05 26-PAGE 2 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 05 26 27 AUGUST 2019 GROUNDING AND BONDING 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. F. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows: 1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in diameter. 2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. 3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick. 4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick. 2.03 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items. B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded types, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions. 2.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel. 1. Size: 3/4 by 120 inches (19 by 3000 mm) in diameter. B. Test Wells: Provide handholes as specified in Division 26 Section 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Handholes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors. B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells. 2605 26-PAGE 3 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 05 26 27 AUGUST 2019 GROUNDING AND BONDING C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps. D. Ground Rod Clamps at Test Wells: Use bolted pressure clamps with at least two bolts. 3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated. B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits. C. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. D. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Provide a grounding electrode in addition to installing a separate equipment grounding conductor with supply branch-circuit conductors. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes. 1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating. B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance. D. Install one test well for each service at the ground rod electrically closest to the service entrance. Set top of well flush with finished grade or floor. 2605 26-PAGE 4 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 05 26 27 AUGUST 2019 GROUNDING AND BONDING 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors. D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated. E. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make bolted- and clamped-type connections between conductors and ground rods. F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. G. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies 26 05 26-PAGE 5 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 05 26 27 AUGUST 2019 GROUNDING AND BONDING recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. H. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall- of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 3. Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. i. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. ii. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 2605 26-PAGE 6 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 33 27 AUGUST 2019 RACEWAYS AND BOXES SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Surface raceways. 4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 43 - Underground Ducts and Handholes for exterior duct- banks, boxes, manholes, and underground utility construction. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 05 43 - Underground Ducts and Handholes 1.03 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged- cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. 2605 33-PAGE 1 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 33 27 AUGUST 2019 RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUITS,TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and la- beled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for in- tended location and application. B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. C. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. D. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. F. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Fittings for EMT: i. Material: Steel. ii. Type: compression. 2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for in- tended location and application. B. RNC: Type EPC-80-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. C. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. D. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer. 2.03 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 26 05 33-PAGE 2 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 33 27 AUGUST 2019 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 2.04 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gas- keted cover. C. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. D. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, with gasketed cover. E. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same ma- terial as recessed box. F. Gangable boxes are prohibited. G. Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Exterior enclosures: NEMA Type 4X. 316 stainless steel or powder coated 304 stainless steel/marine grade aluminum. 2. Interior Panels: NEMA Type 12. 3. Enclosures larger than 12" x 12" x 6"d in any dimension: (a) Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. (b) Key latch to match panelboards. (c) Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. (d) Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicat- ed: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC, RNC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC. 2605 33-PAGE 3 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 33 27 AUGUST 2019 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydrau- lic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250,Type 4X. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the following: (a) Equipment and/or Mechanical rooms. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydrau- lic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, ex- cept use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel in wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size, except when specifically noted otherwise. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless oth- erwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. EMT: Use compression fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. 260533-PAGE 4OF7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 33 27 AUGUST 2019 RACEWAYS AND BOXES B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless other- wise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to construction features and/or building lines. G. Support conduit within 12 inches ((300 mm)) of enclosures to which attached. H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right an- gles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover in all directions. 3. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Port's representative for each specific location. I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Condi- tions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. J. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with lock- nuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. K. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Re- move coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to as- sure a continuous ground path. L. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. 2605 33-PAGE 5 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 33 27 AUGUST 2019 RACEWAYS AND BOXES M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designat- ed as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. N. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fit- tings. O. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environ- mental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground RNC conduit that is located where environmental tempera- ture change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m). 2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits. 3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for con- ditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. P. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. Q. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare surfaces to provide a flat surface for a watertight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. R. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. 2605 33-PAGE 6 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 33 27 AUGUST 2019 RACEWAYS AND BOXES S. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different finishes. T. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 2605 33-PAGE 7 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 43 27 AUGUST 2019 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND HANDHOLES SECTION 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND HANDHOLES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Section includes the requirements for trenching, backfilling and installation of underground conduits, ducts and duct banks, and the design, fabrication, de- livery and installation of handholes. B. Related Documents: The provisions and intent of the Contract, the General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the Work as if specified in this Section. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 2, Section "Earthwork" for general requirements for excavation, backfill and items related to ducts, manholes, and handholes. B. Division 3, Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for cast-in-place concrete require- ments. C. Division 26, Section 26 05 26 -Grounding and Bonding. 1.03 RELATED A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials). C. NFPA 70 (National Fire Protection Association)— National Electrical Code. D. WSDOT/APWA Specifications, Section 6-02.3. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1. Product data for metal accessories handholes, conduit and duct, duct bank materials, and miscellaneous components. 26 05 43-PAGE 1 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 43 27 AUGUST 2019 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND HANDHOLES 2. Shop drawings showing details and design calculations for precast hand- holes, including reinforcing steel. Stamp drawings with seal of registered professional structural engineer. 3. Certificate for concrete and steel used in underground precast concrete utility structures, according to ASTM C 858. 4. Inspection report for factory inspections, according to ASTM C 1037. 5. Record Documents: Show dimensioned locations of underground ducts, and handholes, from nearest building or permanent structure. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products that are Listed and Labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to the Authority Having Ju- risdiction, and marked for intended use for the location and environment in which they are installed. B. Comply with NFPA 70, as adopted and administered by the Authority Having Ju- risdiction. C. ANSI C2 "National Electrical Safety Code" for components and installation. 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. Duct: Electrical conduit and other raceway, either metallic or nonmetallic, used underground, embedded in earth or concrete. B. Ductbank: 2 or more conduits or other raceway installed underground in the same trench or concrete envelope. C. Handhole, Pull-box, or Vault: An underground junction box in a duct or duct bank. Handhole, pull-box, and vault, is used interchangeably. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, and handholes with final arrange- ment of other utilities as determined by field verification. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and ensure that duct runs drain to handholes. 1.08 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with safety and protection requirements of Division 26, Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 260543-PAGE 2 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 43 27 AUGUST 2019 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND HANDHOLES B. Perform work in accordance with the safety requirements of the Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Volume 36, Number 75, Part II, Subpart P, "Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring," and with Section 7 of the Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction as published by the Associa- tion General Contractors of America, Inc. C. Educate supervisors and employees on safety requirements and practices to be followed during the course of the work. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver ducts to site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming. B. Store precast concrete units at site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible. C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Handholes: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Puget Sound Precast 2. Oldcastle 3. Columbia Precast 2.02 CONDUITAND DUCTS A. Nonmetallic conduit: 1. Rigid Plastic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, UL 651A, Schedule 80 PVC, rated for use with 90°C conductors under all installation conditions and labeled for underground use. 2.03 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. PVC Conduit and Tubing Fittings: NEMA TC 3. B. Seal Bushings: O.Z. compound bushing on each conduit entering a building from outside underground and on each conduit passing from one space into another, which is normally at a lower temperature. 26 05 43-PAGE 3 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 43 27 AUGUST 2019 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND HANDHOLES 2.04 DUCT SUPPORTS A. Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide 3 1/2" minimum duct spacings. 2.05 HANDHOLES, VAULTS, & PULL-BOXES A. General: Precast concrete, as indicated on Drawings, with the following standard features: 1. Cover with insert or other device to facilitate lifting. 2. Cover with locking devices similar to REA or FARGO. 3. Drain hole in base, 2-inch minimum diameter. 4. Knockouts in sides of adequate number and spacing to accommodate duct-bank shown. B. Design structure per Washington State Department of transportation (WSDOT) for Type 1 and Type 2 underground pull boxes. C. Covers: 1. Galvanized diamond plate lids. 2. Access lids shall be provided with a permanent non-slip surface having a static coefficient of friction between 0.60 and 1.00 as determined by ASTM Designation. C 1028-89. Access lids on inclines greater than 4% shall have a coefficient of friction between 0.80 and. 1.00. 3. Cast-in legend "ELECTRIC', "TELEPHONE" or "COMMUNICATIONS" as ap- propriate. 4. Machine cover-to-frame bearing surfaces. 5. Covers per City of Renton standards. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Duct Supports: Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide 3 1/2" minimum duct spac- ings and concrete cover depths indicated, while supporting ducts during con- crete pour. 2.07 BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Coordinate trenching and backfill with division 2 sections. 260543-PAGE 40F 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 43 27 AUGUST 2019 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND HANDHOLES B. Select Backfill. Unsaturated excavated earth free of rocks, broken concrete and debris, and compacted in 12" lifts to prevent settlement. Provide 3" sand base below bottom of deepest raceway(s). i. Provide plastic warning tape, 4-mil thickness reading "Caution — Buried Electrical Line Below" in trench at 12" below grade. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine site to receive ducts and handholes for compliance with installation tol- erances and other conditions affecting performance of the underground ducts and handholes. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Existing Utilities: Locate all existing utilities in the area prior to performing any excavation. 3.02 EARTHWORK A. Comply with Division 2 sections. B. Trenching: 1. Comply with OSHA/WISHA safety standards for trenching, including sta- ble slope and shoring requirements. 2. Depth: Refer to Drawings for trench depth requirements. Depths per code and utility company standards; refer to civil documents for final grades. Correct points of over-excavation using mechanically-compacted backfill to form a smooth trench bottom. 3. Width: Excavate to minimum width consistent with stability of sides. 4. Slope: Slope trenches so that conduit and ducts drain toward handholes. 5. Muck Excavation: Where muck or unstable material is encountered, overexcavate and backfill to attain proper grade with coarse sand, gravel, or Controlled Density Fill. 6. Pile backfill material in an orderly manner; a sufficient distance from the trench to avoid overloading trench banks. 260543-PAGE 5 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 43 27 AUGUST 2019 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND HANDHOLES 7. Bedding: The entire bottom of the excavation is to be firm, stable, and at uniform density. C. Excavating for Handholes: Provide 12" minimum clearance between outer sur- faces of unit and embankment or timber used for shoring. 3.03 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS A. Nonmetallic conduit: Use underground only. 1. Underground Ductbanks: For low-voltage applications. Use Schedule 80 Rigid Plastic Conduit as standard. B. Use PVC fittings for PVC conduit and suitable water-tight connections. 3.04 CONDUIT AND DUCT INSTALLATION A. Install conduit and ducts as indicated on Drawings and according to manufactur- er's written instructions. B. Contractor shall provide all shoring and false work as required for construction of duct banks. C. Slope: Pitch ducts minimum of 4 inches per 100 feet to drain toward handholes. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between 2 handholes to drain in both di- rections. D. Curves and Bends: Use manufactured long sweep bends. Do not exceed 20 de- grees for field bends. E. Make joints in ducts and fittings watertight according to manufacturer's instruc- tions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in the same plane. F. Duct Entrances to Handholes: Provide bell ends for conduits entering handholes. Grout end bells into concrete walls from both sides to provide watertight en- trances. G. Separation Between Direct-Buried, Non-Encased Ducts: Provide 3 inches mini- mum separation for like services, and 12 inches minimum between power and signal ducts. 3.05 BACKFILLING A. Backfill only after all necessary inspections and tests have been performed. B. Remove all debris, rocks, broken concrete, and formwork before backfilling trenches. 260543-PAGE 6 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 43 27 AUGUST 2019 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND HANDHOLES C. Deposit backfill in layers with materials described in Article 2.07, "Backfill Mate- rial." Uniformly spread and compact backfill with suitable power tampers to the density of the adjacent soil and in such a manner so as not to disturb the align- ment of the conduit. If settlement occurs, refill, compact and smooth off to con- form to the surface of the ground. D. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation, and reestablish grades. 1. Replace removed sod as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. 2. Restore all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. 3. Restore vegetation and provide necessary topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprigging, or mulching. 4. Replace disturbed paving. 3.06 HANDHOLE INSTALLATION A. Install as indicated on Drawings according to manufacturer's written instructions and ASTM C 891. 1. Install with orientation and depth coordinated with arrangement of con- necting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper en- trances. 2. Support units on a bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from the 1-inch sieve to the No. 4 sieve and compacted to the same density as the adja- cent undisturbed earth. 3. Drainage: Provide one foot minimum of gravel below the drain hole. B. Grounding: 1. Provide opening for ground rod through floor in handholes. 3.07 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide warning and caution signs as required by the Authority Having Jurisdic- tion and these specifications. B. Label raceways entering concealed locations from exposed locations as to the destination via the concealed area. 260543-PAGE 7 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 43 27 AUGUST 2019 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND HANDHOLES 3.08 TESTING AND CLEANING A. Pull brush through full length of ducts. Use round bristle brush with a diameter 1/2-inch greater than internal diameter of duct. Clean internal surfaces of hand- holes. B. Duct Integrity: Swab out ducts with a mandrel 1/4 inch smaller in diameter than internal diameter of ducts. END OF SECTION 260543-PAGE 8 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 53 27 AUGUST 2019 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Section includes the following: 1. Conductor and communication and control cable identification materials. 2. Identification for conductors and cables. 3. Underground-line warning tape. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 7. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Section 09 9100— Painting. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. C. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 26 05 53-PAGE 1 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 53 27 AUGUST 2019 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION-AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide. B. Sleeve-type, permanent, PVC, yellow or white, with legible machine-printed black markings. C. Manufacturer and Products: Raychem; Type D-SCE or ZH-SCE. 2.02 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (0.102 mm) thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line. 2.03 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. 260553-PAGE2OF6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 53 27 AUGUST 2019 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated. C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4- mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm). D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized- steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm). E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION -AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)." 2.04 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Coordinate this Article with Drawings. B. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 2.05 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). 2605 53-PAGE 3 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 53 27 AUGUST 2019 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb (22.6 kg), minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg Q. 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding. B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 Section 09 9100 - Painting. C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless- steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number. B. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install underground-line warning tape for cables in raceway. C. Instruction Signs: 1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. D. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, 260553-PAGE 4OF6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 53 27 AUGUST 2019 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: i. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. ii. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. iii. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: Identification labeling of some items listed below may be required by individual Sections or by NFPA 70. i. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. ii. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. iii. Disconnect switches. iv. Contactors. V. Lighting controls. vi. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. vii. Voice and data cable terminal equipment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 2605 53-PAGE 5 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 FOR BID SECTION 26 05 53 27 AUGUST 2019 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach non-adhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate. F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. G. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit, field applied. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: i. Phase A: Black. ii. Phase B: Red. iii. Phase C: Blue. 3. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. H. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 36 inches. I. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 9 09 9100 - Painting. END OF SECTION 2605 53-PAGE 6 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 27 26 27 AUGUST 2019 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Section includes the following: 1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters. 2. Device Plates. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 05 26—Grounding and Bonding B. Section 26 05 53— Electrical Identification C. Section 26 05 19—Conductors and Cables 1.03 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre-marking wall plates. C. Include sample review below if products may have critical features needing hands-on appraisal. D. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. E. Field quality-control test reports. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 26 27 26-PAGE 1 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 27 26 27 AUGUST 2019 WIRING DEVICES 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Wiring Devices: i. Bryant Electric, Inc./Hubbell Subsidiary. ii. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. iii. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. iv. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. 2.02 RECEPTACLES A. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-596G, and UL 498. B. Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade. C. Provide non-feed-through GFCI receptacles. GFCI protection of downstream devices is not permitted. D. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, feed-through type, Hospital grade, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and UL 943. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an adapter. 2.03 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 26 27 26-PAGE 2 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 27 26 27 AUGUST 2019 WIRING DEVICES 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished and Unfinished Spaces: Stainless steel. 3. Material for Wet Locations: Cast aluminum with 'while in use' lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations." 2.04 FINISHES A. Color: 1. Wiring Devices: As selected by the owner, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with construction lines. B. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates. C. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 26 Section 26 05 53 - Electrical Identification. 1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding. B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section 26 05 19 - Conductors and Cables. C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 2627 26-PAGE 3 OF 4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 26 27 26 27 AUGUST 2019 WIRING DEVICES 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements. 2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 262726-PAGE 40F4 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3110 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE PREPARATION SECTION 3110 00 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and related items required to complete the work shown on the Contract Drawings and/or as specified in the Contract Specifications. The items of work shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Removal and disposal of unwanted vegetation. 2. Removal and disposal of miscellaneous debris, rubbish, and garbage. 3. The installation, maintenance and removal of Temporary Erosion Sedimentation Control (TESCO) facilities. 4. Protect from harm all items to remain. Install and maintain protection fencing. 5. Providing staging and stockpile areas. 1.03 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A. Related work in other sections of these Contract Specifications include but is not limited to: 1. Section 0157 13 Temporary Sediment and Erosion Control 2. Section 02 4100 Demolition 3. Section 12 93 00 Site Furnishings 4. Section 3123 16 Excavation 5. Section 32 90 00 Planting 1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Site Survey documenting previously existing site conditions has been provided in Contract Drawings. B. Geotechnical and Soils Reports are available by request from Owner's Representative. C. Construction documents for the surrounding Sunset Lane project are available by request from Owner's Presentative. 311000-PAGE 1OF6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3110 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE PREPARATION D. It is understood that there will be interfering utilities, service laterals, and other underground pipes, drains or structures encountered that are not shown, or areas shown incorrectly on the plans, or have not been previously discovered in the field. Contractor agrees this is a normal and usual occurrence in the construction of underground improvements. Furthermore, Contractor understands and agrees that work in some cases must be done in close proximity to said utilities and underground pipes, drains and structures not shown or shown incorrectly on the plans, which may require a change in operations and may cause sloughing of the trench, additional traffic control, additional pavement and backfill costs and time. The Contractor agrees that these occurrences are usual and ordinary, and are reflected in the bid and plan of operation. E. Contractor agrees to provide for these conflicts and interferences and agrees to provide for a reasonable amount of time for design changes and/or utility relocations due to said interferences. F. Repair and or replacement of damaged facilities to the Engineer's satisfaction, will be accomplished at the Contractor's expense 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review and acceptance a complete site access, staging, and stockpiling plan using a copy of the basic site layout. Identify all areas to be used for access, staging, and stockpiling throughout the various stages of the construction. B. The Contractor shall submit written certification that disposal site complies with all governmental regulations. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Visit site prior to bidding to determine nature of existing site materials, materials and other conditions that may affect work. B. Contact respective utility maintenance agencies to verify location of active utilities prior to excavation. Keep active utilities intact and in continuous operation. C. Protect neighboring property, occupants of said property, customers,visitors, passers- by from injury and discomfort caused by dust or debris. D. Remove no utilities unless shown on the Contract Drawings or as specified in the Contract Specifications. If unexpected conditions arise, stop work and immediately notify Owner's Representative. Damage caused by Contractor to any existing utilities shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 3110 00-PAGE 2 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3110 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE PREPARATION E. Safety, Monitoring, & Response Products and Equipment: The Contractor shall provide barricades, safety guards, temporary fencing, signage and/or other methods to secure trenches, open excavations, and other unsafe conditions resulting from this construction. Undertake work in full compliance with all applicable regulatory requirements. 1.07 MONUMENTS A. Carefully maintain all benchmarks, monuments and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, replace at the Contractor's expense. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. As required to complete the work as shown on the Contract Drawings and/or as specified in the Contract Specifications. 2.02 TEMPORARY CHAIN LINK FENCE A. Prefabricated portable galvanized chain link fence panels including fabric, posts, top and bottom rails, and driven posts with rolled fabric and wire ties for area of uneven terrain. B. Prefabricated portable fence panels shall be a minimum of six (6) feet high by a maximum twelve (12) feet wide. Post bases shall be minimum sixteen (16) inches by eight (8) inches high concrete pier with sleeve for post, or as approved. Posts shall be minimum one and one half(1-1/2) inch out-side-diameter(OD) Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Fabric shall be minimum eleven (11) gauge galvanized two (2) inch diamond mesh steel wire interwoven. Knuckled or twisted selvage is acceptable. Wire ties shall be minimum nine (9) gauge aluminum wire. C. Provide additional panels or outriggers as necessary to provide a rigid, stable run of fence. D. Gates shall be twenty (20) feet wide, two (2) prefabricated panels with double padlocks to allow Contractor and Owner entry. Hinged sides or each operating panel shall include double bracketing. Owner will provide one (1) lock keyed for personnel for each entry. Contractor shall provide a lock keyed for Owner and Subcontractor entry. E. Provide warning signage every thirty (30) feet of running fence line. Signage shall be a minimum of eighteen (18) inches square, brightly colored with contracting lettering as follows: 3110 00-PAGE 3 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3110 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE PREPARATION WARNING CONSTRUCTION KEEP OUT Or as accepted by the Owner's Representative. F. Barbed and/or razor wire are not allowed. 2.03 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ACCESS A. Construction entrance shall be per City of Renton Standard Plan 215.10. 2.04 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Contractor shall provide a temporary enclosed workspace ("Job Shack" or Trailer) suitable for storage of Project Documentation and use as meeting space, minimum interior space shall be six (6) feet by twenty (20) feet. Furnish the interior with a working surface sufficient to accommodate the Contract Documents, minimum three (3) feet by four (4) feet. Provide a minimum of four(4) chairs and a table of sufficient size to conduct weekly Project Meetings. B. Contractor shall engage the services of a licensed, commercial provider of portable temporary sanitary facilities. Provide sufficient capacity and maintenance for no less than one hundred twenty-five (125) percent of the anticipated peak workforce. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DOCUMENTATION OF UTILITIES AND CONTROLS A. Maintain a separate Contract Drawing, to be stored on-site, for identifying key utilities and controls. Identify and apply color-coded markings identifying shut-offs for domestic water, irrigation water, power, and gas. Identify sanitary sewerage, stormwater discharge, gas, fiber optics, and telephone (all as appropriate) lines, which are to be maintained in service during the work. B. Color-code emergency contact information for each of the above utilities directly on the Contract Drawing. 3.02 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Secure the project site from trespass or unintentional entrance by unauthorized personnel. 311000-PAGE 4OF6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3110 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE PREPARATION B. All disturbed ground stockpiles, staging and on-site transport routes shall be fully enclosed by a perimeter security fence. Areas either under construction or completed but not specifically accepted by the Owner's Representative shall be completed enclosed. C. Temporary chain link fence panels shall be connected mechanically by means of pre- fabricated, bolted bracket manufactured specifically for the purpose. Fencing shall not be wired together. Where long straight runs result in an unstable condition, sufficient out-rigging shall be incorporated to maintain fencing upright. Use only pre- manufactured outriggers or additional fence panels. Out-riggers shall be placed on the interior side of the fence unless accepted by the Owner's Representative. 3.03 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL (TESC) A. See Contract Drawings and TESC Specification herein. 3.04 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ACCESS/SEE CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall submit layout and design of stabilized construction entrances for acceptance by the Owner's Representative. The entrances shall be installed at the beginning of construction and maintained to meet applicable standards for the duration of the project. Additional measures may be required to ensure that all paved areas are kept clean for the duration of the project. 3.05 REMOVAL A. All materials and debris associated with this work shall be removed at the appropriate time. 1. Removal and restoration of Temporary Access Pads shall be undertaken as quickly as possible following the conclusion of transport of bulk materials and demobilization of heavy equipment. 2. Removal of Trailer and Sanitary Facilities shall not be undertaken until the Owner's Representative has established that the project work is acceptable. 3. Removal of temporary siltation control fencing shall in no case be prior to project acceptance. The Owner reserves the right to take ownership and control of temporary siltation control facilities. 4. Prior to project acceptance, the Contractor shall remove accumulated sediment from all manholes, catch basins, and inlets. 3110 00-PAGE 5 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3110 00 27 AUGUST 2019 SITE PREPARATION 3.06 CLEARING AND GRUBBING OF IMPERISHABLE DEBRIS A. Remove all imperishable debris that would be unsuitable for bearing including, but not limited to rocks, concrete pipe, abandoned pipes, and existing construction debris. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect bench marks and existing work from damage or displacement. B. Maintain designated site access for vehicle and pedestrian traffic. 3.08 CLEAN-UP A. All work areas shall be kept clean during progress of work and until completion. Dispose of all surplus, waste materials and rubbish off-site in accordance with all governmental laws, regulations, and ordinances. B. Provide certification from disposal site operator stating the disposal site complies with all governmental regulations. C. All effort shall be made to recycle materials whenever possible. END OF SECTION 311000-PAGE 6 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 13 27 AUGUST 2019 SUBGRADE PREPARATION SECTION 3123 13 SUBGRADE PREPARATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Standard Specifications: When referenced in this section, shall mean the Washington State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, latest 2016 amendment and as amended by this section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Optimum Moisture Content: As defined in Section 3123 23, Fill and Backfill. B. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and scarification and compaction of subgrade. C. Maximum Density: As defined in Section 3123 23, Fill and Backfill. D. Subgrade: Layer of existing soil after completion of clearing, grubbing, scalping of topsoil prior to placement of fill, roadway structure or base for floor slab. E. Proof-Rolling: Testing of subgrade by compactive effort to identify areas that will not support the future loading without excessive settlement. 1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Complete applicable Work specified in Section 3123 16, Excavation, prior to subgrade preparation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Notify Owner's Representative when subgrade is ready for compaction or proof-rolling or whenever compaction or proof-rolling is resumed after a period of extended inactivity. 3123 13-PAGE 1 OF 3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 13 27 AUGUST 2019 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Prepare subgrade when unfrozen and free of ice and snow. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. In accordance with Section 2-06.3 of the Standard Specifications. B. Keep subgrade free of water, debris, and foreign matter during compaction or proof-rolling. C. Bring subgrade to proper grade and cross-section and uniformly compact surface. D. Do not use sections of prepared ground surface as haul roads. Protect prepared subgrade from traffic. E. Maintain prepared ground surface in finished condition until next course is placed. 3.02 COMPACTION A. Under Earthfill: Compact upper 6 inches to minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density in accordance with Section 2-06.3(1) of the Standard Specifications. Planting areas to be compacted to 85 percent of the maximum density. B. Under Pavement Structure, Floor Slabs On Grade, or Granular Fill Under Structures: Compact the upper 6 inches to minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density in accordance with Sections 2-06.3(1) and 5-05.3(6) of the Standard Specifications. 3.03 MOISTURE CONDITIONING A. Dry Subgrade: Add water, then mix to make moisture content uniform throughout. B. Wet Subgrade: Aerate material by blading, discing, harrowing, or other methods, to hasten drying process. 3123 13-PAGE 2 OF 3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 13 27 AUGUST 2019 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 3.04 TESTING A. Proof-roll subgrade with equipment specified in Article Compaction to detect soft or loose subgrade or unsuitable material, as determined by Owner's Representative. 3.05 CORRECTION A. Soft or Loose Subgrade: In accordance with Section 2-06.3(1) of the Standard Specifications. B. Unsuitable Material: 1. Over excavate as specified in Section 3123 16, Excavation, and replace with suitable material from the excavation, as specified in Section 3123 23, Fill and Backfill. 2. In accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)C of the Standard Specifications for unstable base material underneath a structure. END OF SECTION 3123 13-PAGE 3 OF 3 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 16 27 AUGUST 2019 EXCAVATION SECTION 3123 16 EXCAVATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Standard Specifications: When referenced in this section, shall mean the Washington State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, latest 2016 amendment and as amended by this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Excavation Plan, Detailing: a. Methods and sequencing of excavation. b. Proposed locations of stockpiled excavated material. C. Proposed onsite and offsite spoil disposal sites. d. Numbers, types, and sizes of equipment proposed to perform excavations. e. Anticipated difficulties and proposed resolutions. f. Reclamation of onsite spoil disposal areas. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide adequate survey control to avoid unauthorized overexcavation. 1.04 WEATHER LIMITATIONS A. Material excavated when frozen or when air temperature is less than 32 degrees F shall not be used as fill or backfill until material completely thaws. B. Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill until after material drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction. 3123 16-PAGE 1 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 16 27 AUGUST 2019 EXCAVATION 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Excavation Support: Install and maintain shoring as necessary to support sides of excavations and prevent detrimental settlement and lateral movement of existing facilities, adjacent property, and completed Work. 1.06 NOTIFICATIONS A. The Contractor shall contact the Puget Sound Energy inspector for the City of Renton regarding an issues with the gas line on-site. 1. Duane Ainsworth —(253) 261-6456 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. In accordance with Section 2-03.3 of the Standard Specifications for roadway excavation, as defined in referenced section and supplemented by adding the following: 1. Roadway excavation shall include the removal of all materials excavated from within the limits shown on the plans including but not limited to maintenance pathways and walkways. Suitable excavated material shall be used for embankments, while surplus excavated material or unsuitable material shall be disposed of by the Contractor. 2. Any excavation or embankment beyond the limits indicated in the Plans, unless ordered by the Owner's Representative, shall not be paid for. All work and material required to return these areas to their original conditions, as directed by the Owner's Representative, shall be provided by the Contractor at his sole expense. 3. All areas shall be excavated, filled, and/or backfilled as necessary to comply with the grades shown on the Plans. In filled and backfilled areas, fine grading shall begin during the placement and the compaction of the final layer. In cut sections, fine grading shall begin within the final six (6) inches of cut. Final grading shall produce a surface which is smooth and even, without abrupt changes in grade. 4. Following removal of topsoil or excavation to grade and before placement of fills or base course, the subgrade under the pathways shall be proof-rolled to identify any soft or loose areas which may warrant additional compaction or excavation and replacement. 3123 16-PAGE 2 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 16 27 AUGUST 2019 EXCAVATION 5. The Contractor shall provide temporary drainage or protection to keep the subgrade free from standing water. 6. Acceptable excavated native soils shall be used for fill in the area requiring fills. Care shall be taken to place excavated material at the optimum moisture content to achieve the specified compaction. Any native material used for fill shall be free of organics and debris and have a maximum particle size of 6 inches. 7. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to prevent the native materials from becoming saturated with water. The measures may include sloping to drain, covering with plastic, compacting the native materials, and diverting runoff away from the materials. If the Contractor fails to take such preventative measures, any costs or delay related to drying the materials shall be at his own expense. 8. If the native materials become saturated, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to dry the materials, to the optimum moisture content. If sufficient acceptable native soils are not available to complete construction of the roadway embankment, Gravel Borrow shall be used. B. In accordance with Section 7-08.3(1) of the Standard Specifications for pipe trenching. C. Excavate to lines, grades, and dimensions shown and as necessary to accomplish Work. Excavate to within tolerance of plus or minus 0.1 foot, except where dimensions or grades are shown or specified as maximum or minimum. Allow for forms, working space, granular base, topsoil, and similar items, wherever applicable. Trim to neat lines where concrete is to be deposited against earth. D. Do not overexcavate without written authorization of Owner's Representative. 3.02 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION A. Excavation is unclassified. Complete all excavation regardless of the type, nature, or condition of the materials encountered. 3123 16-PAGE 3 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 16 27 AUGUST 2019 EXCAVATION 3.03 TRENCH WIDTH A. Minimum Width of Trenches: 1. Single Pipes, Conduits, Direct-Buried Cables, and Duct Banks: a. Less than 4-inch Outside Diameter or Width: 18 inches. b. Greater than 4-inch Outside Diameter or Width: 18 inches greater than outside diameter or width of pipe, conduit, direct- buried cable, or duct bank. 2. Multiple Pipes, Conduits, Cables, or Duct Banks in Single Trench: 18 inches greater than aggregate width of pipes, conduits, cables, duct banks, plus space between. 3. Increase trench widths by thicknesses of sheeting. B. Maximum Trench Width: Unlimited, unless otherwise shown or specified, or unless excess width will cause damage to existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work. 3.04 PIPE BEDDING GROOVES FOR NONPERFORATED DRAIN LINES A. Semicircular, trapezoidal, or 90-degree-V. B. Excavated or plowed into trench bottom. Forming groove by compaction will not be acceptable. 3.05 EMBANKMENT AND CUT SLOPES A. Shape, trim, and finish cut slopes to conform with lines, grades, and cross- sections shown, with proper allowance for topsoil or slope protection, where shown. B. Remove stones and rock that exceed 3-inch diameter and that are loose and may roll down slope. Remove exposed roots from cut slopes. C. Round tops of cut slopes in soil to not less than a 6-foot radius, provided such rounding does not extend offsite or outside easements and rights-of-way, or adversely impacts existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work. 3.06 STOCKPILING EXCAVATED MATERIAL A. Stockpile excavated material that is suitable for use as fill or backfill until material is needed. Cover with plastic and/or protect from excess moisture as required to maintain optimum moisture content. 312316-PAGE 40F5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 16 27 AUGUST 2019 EXCAVATION B. Post signs indicating proposed use of material stockpiled. Post signs that are readable from all directions of approach to each stockpile. Signs should be clearly worded and readable by equipment operators from their normal seated position. C. Confine stockpiles to within project site and approved work areas. Do not obstruct roads or streets. D. Do not stockpile excavated material adjacent to trenches and other excavations, unless excavation side slopes and excavation support systems are designed, constructed, and maintained for stockpile loads. E. Do not stockpile excavated materials near or over existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work, if weight of stockpiled material could induce excessive settlement. 3.07 DISPOSAL OF SPOIL A. Dispose of excavated materials, which are unsuitable or exceed quantity needed for fill or backfill, offsite END OF SECTION 3123 16-PAGE 5 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 23 27 AUGUST 2019 FILL AND BACKFILL SECTION 3123 23 FILL AND BACKFILL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Standard Specifications: When referenced in this section, shall mean the Washington State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, latest 2016 amendment and as amended by this section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Maximum Density: 1. Determined in accordance with Section 2-03.3(14)D of the Standard Specifications. Apply corrections for oversize material to either as- compacted field dry density or maximum dry density, as determined by Project Representative. B. Optimum Moisture Content: 1. Determined in accordance with Section 2-03.3(14)D of the Standard Specifications 2. Determine field moisture content on basis of fraction passing 3/4-inch sieve. C. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of required, clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and subgrade preparation. D. Completed Course: A course or layer that is ready for next layer or next phase of Work. E. Lift: Loose (uncompacted) layer of material. F. Geosynthetics: Geotextiles, geogrids, or geomembranes. G. Well-Graded: 1. A mixture of particle sizes with no specific concentration or lack thereof of one or more sizes. 312323-PAGE 1OF7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 23 27 AUGUST 2019 FILL AND BACKFILL 2. Does not define numerical value that must be placed on coefficient of uniformity, coefficient of curvature, or other specific grain size distribution parameters. 3. Used to define material type that, when compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids. H. Influence Area: Area within planes sloped downward and outward at 60-degree angle from horizontal measured from: 1. 1 foot outside outermost edge at base of foundations or slabs. 2. 1 foot outside outermost edge at surface of roadways or shoulder. 3. 0.5 foot outside exterior at spring line of pipes or culverts. I. Borrow Material: Material from required excavations. J. Selected Backfill Material: Materials available onsite that Project Representative determines to be suitable for specific use. K. Imported Material: Materials obtained from sources offsite, suitable for specified use. L. Structural Fill: Fill materials as required under structures, pavements, and other facilities. M. Embankment Material: Fill materials required to raise existing grade in areas other than under structures. N. Standard Specifications: When referenced in this section, shall mean Washington State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, latest 2016 amendment and as amended by this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's data sheets for compaction equipment. 2. Certified test results from independent testing agency. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Notify Project Representative when: 1. Structure is ready for backfilling, and whenever backfilling operations are resumed after a period of inactivity. 3123 23-PAGE 2 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 23 27 AUGUST 2019 FILL AND BACKFILL 2. Soft or loose subgrade materials are encountered wherever embankment or site fill is to be placed. 3. Fill material appears to be deviating from Specifications. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Complete applicable Work specified in Section 3123 16, Excavation, and Section 3123 13, Subgrade Preparation, prior to placing fill or backfill. B. Backfill against concrete structures in accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)E of the Standard Specifications. Obtain Project Representative's acceptance of concrete work and attained strength prior to placing backfill. C. Do not place granular base, subbase, or surfacing until after subgrade has been prepared as specified in Section 3123 13, Subgrade Preparation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EARTHFILL A. Excavated material from required excavations and designated borrow sites, free from rocks larger than 3 inches, from roots and other organic matter, ashes, cinders, trash, debris, and other deleterious materials. B. Provide imported material of equivalent quality in accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)E of the Standard Specifications if required to accomplish Work. 2.02 SUITABLE BASE A. Useable material that is clean sand, gravel, quarry spalls, and riprap, free of deleterious or organic material, including excessive silt or clay, or other unsuitable material that is excavated within the project limits as determined by the ENGINEER. Suitable base material shall be stockpiled on-site in the construction limits or in the CONCTACTOR's staging area for re-use as required. 2.03 CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL OR CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL A. In accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)E of the Standard Specifications.SAND A. Free from clay, organic matter, or other deleterious material. B. Gradation in accordance with Section 9-03.13 of the Standard Specifications. 3123 23-PAGE 3 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 23 27 AUGUST 2019 FILL AND BACKFILL 2.05 GRANULAR DRAIN MATERIAL A. In accordance with Section 9-03.12(4) of the Standard Specifications. 2.06 WATER FOR MOISTURE CONDITIONING A. Free of hazardous or toxic contaminates, or contaminants deleterious to proper compaction. 2.07 BASE COURSE ROCK A. As specified in Section 32 1123, Aggregate Base Courses. 2.08 FOUNDATION STABILIZATION ROCK A. Crushed rock or pit run rock. B. Uniformly graded from coarse to fine. C. Free from excessive dirt and other organic material. D. Maximum 2-1/2-inch particle size. 2.09 MINERAL AGGREGRATE TYPE 26 A. Mineral aggregate type 26 shall conform to the following grading: Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/4" 100 No. 4 28-56 No. 8 20-50 No. 50 3-12 No. 200 0-1 B. L.A. abrasion 35 percent max. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Keep placement surfaces free of water, debris, and foreign material during placement and compaction of fill and backfill materials. B. Place and spread fill and backfill materials in horizontal lifts of uniform thickness, in a manner that avoids segregation, and compact each lift to specified densities prior to placing succeeding lifts. Slope lifts only where 312323—PAGE 40F7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 23 27 AUGUST 2019 FILL AND BACKFILL necessary to conform to final grades or as necessary to keep placement surfaces drained of water. C. During filling and backfilling, keep level of fill and backfill around each structure even. D. Do not place fill or backfill, if fill or backfill material is frozen, or if surface upon which fill or backfill is to be placed is frozen. E. If pipe, conduit, duct bank, or cable is to be laid within fill or backfill: 1. Fill or backfill to an elevation 2 feet above top of item to be laid. 2. Excavate trench for installation of item. 3. Install bedding, if applicable, as specified in Section 3123 23.15, Trench Backfill. 4. Install item. 5. Backfill envelope zone and remaining trench, as specified in Section 3123 23.15, Trench Backfill, before resuming filling or backfilling specified in this section. F. Tolerances: 1. Final Lines and Grades: Within a tolerance of 0.1 foot unless dimensions or grades are shown or specified otherwise. 2. Grade to establish and maintain slopes and drainage as shown. Reverse slopes are not permitted. G. Settlement: Correct and repair any subsequent damage to structures, pavements, curbs, slabs, piping, and other facilities, caused by settlement of fill or backfill material. 3.02 BACKFILL UNDER AND AROUND STRUCTURES A. Within area of influenced, in accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)E of the Standard Specifications. B. Levelling Course: Minimum 4 inches of Crushed Surfacing Top Course material in accordance with Section 9-03.9(3) should be placed beneath structural slabs, foundations, pervious pavement, and sidewalks and compacted in accordance with Section 2-03.3(14)C Method C of the Standard Specifications. 3123 23—PAGE 5 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 23 27 AUGUST 2019 FILL AND BACKFILL 3.03 FILL A. Outside Influence Areas beneath Structures, Pavements, Curbs, Slabs, Piping, and Other Facilities: in accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)E of the Standard Specifications. 1. Dress completed embankment with allowance for topsoil, crest surfacing, and slope protection, where applicable. 3.04 SAND BLANKET OVER VAPOR RETARDER A. Place sand in manner that avoids damage to underlying vapor retarder. B. Moisten sand and thoroughly compact it with a vibratory plate compactor. 3.05 GRANULAR BASE, SUBBASE, AND SURFACING A. Place and Compact in accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)E of the Standard Specifications or as shown on the Contract Drawings. 3.06 REPLACING OVEREXCAVATED MATERIAL A. Replace excavation carried below grade lines shown or established by Project Representative as follows: 1. Beneath Footings: Granular fill in accordance with Section 2-09.3(3)B of the Standard Specifications. 2. Beneath Fill or Backfill: Same material as specified for overlying fill or backfill. 3. Beneath Slabs-On-Grade: Granular fill in accordance with Section 2-09.3(3)B of the Standard Specifications. 4. Trenches: a. Unauthorized Overexcavation: Either trench stabilization material or granular pipe base material, as specified in Section 3123 23.15, Trench Backfill. b. Authorized Overexcavation: Trench stabilization material, as specified in Section 3123 23.15,Trench Backfill. 5. Permanent Cut Slopes (Where Overlying Area is Not to Receive Fill or Backfill): a. Flat to Moderate Steep Slopes (3:1, Horizontal Run: Vertical Rise or Flatter): Earthfill. 3123 23-PAGE 6 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 23 27 AUGUST 2019 FILL AND BACKFILL b. Steep Slopes (Steeper than 3:1): 1) Correct overexcavation by transitioning between overcut areas and designed slope adjoining areas, provided such cutting does not extend offsite or outside easements and right-of-ways, or adversely impacts existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work. 2) Backfilling overexcavated areas is prohibited, unless in Project Representative's opinion, backfill will remain stable, and overexcavated material is replaced as compacted earthfill. END OF SECTION 3123 23-PAGE 7 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 23.15 27 AUGUST 2019 TRENCH BACKFILL SECTION 3123 23.15 TRENCH BACKFILL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Public Works Association (APWA): Uniform Color Code. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C33/C33M, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. C. C117, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75 Micrometer(No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. d. C136, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. e. C150/C150M, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. f. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. g. C1012/C1012M, Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution. h. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). i. D1140, Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer than No. 200 (75 micrometer) Sieve. j. D1557, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). k. D2487, Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). I. D4253, Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table. M. D4254, Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density. n. D4318, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. o. D4832, Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Z535.1, Safety Colors. 3123 23.15-PAGE 1 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 23.15 27 AUGUST 2019 TRENCH BACKFILL 4. Standard Specifications: When referenced in this section, shall mean the Washington State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, latest 2016 amendment and as amended by this section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Base Rock: Granular material upon which manhole bases and other structures are placed. B. Bedding Material: Granular material upon which pipes, conduits, cables, or duct banks are placed. C. Imported Material: Material obtained by Contractor from source(s) offsite. D. Lift: Loose (uncompacted) layer of material. E. Pipe Zone: Backfill zone that includes full trench width and extends from prepared trench bottom to an upper limit above top outside surface of pipe, conduit, cable or duct bank. F. Prepared Trench Bottom: Graded trench bottom after excavation and installation of stabilization material, if required, but before installation of bedding material. G. Relative Compaction:The ratio, in percent, of the as-compacted field dry density to the laboratory maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. Corrections for oversize material may be applied to either as- compacted field dry density or maximum dry density, as determined by Owner's Representative. H. Relative Density: As defined by ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254. I. Selected Backfill Material: Material available onsite that Owner's Representative determines to be suitable for a specific use. J. Well-Graded: A mixture of particle sizes that has no specific concentration or lack thereof of one or more sizes producing a material type that, when compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids. Satisfying both of the following requirements, as defined in ASTM D2487: 1. Coefficient of Curvature: Greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3. 3123 23.15-PAGE 2 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 23.15 27 AUGUST 2019 TRENCH BACKFILL 2. Coefficient of Uniformity: Greater than or equal to 4 for materials classified as gravel, and greater than or equal to 6 for materials classified as sand. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for marking tapes. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certified Gradation Analysis: Submit not less than 30 days prior to delivery for imported materials or anticipated use for excavated materials, except for trench stabilization material that will be submitted prior to material delivery to Site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MARKING TAPE A. Nondetectable: 1. Inert polyethylene, impervious to known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents, and solvents likely to be encountered in soil. 2. Thickness: Minimum 5 mils. 3. Width: As recommended by manufacturer for depth of installation. 4. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1-inch high, permanent black lettering imprinted continuously over entire length. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Reef Industries; Terra Tape. b. Mutual Industries; Non-detectable Tape. C. Presco; Non-detectable Tape. B. Detectable: 1. In accordance with Section 9-15.18 of the Standard Specifications. 2. Solid aluminum foil, visible on unprinted side, encased in protective high visibility, inert polyethylene plastic jacket. 3. Foil Thickness: Minimum 0.35 mils. 4. Laminate Thickness: Minimum 5 mils. 5. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1-inch high, permanent black lettering imprinted continuously over entire length. 6. Joining Clips: Tin or nickel-coated furnished by tape manufacturer. 3123 23.15-PAGE 3 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 23.15 27 AUGUST 2019 TRENCH BACKFILL 7. Manufacturers and Products: a. Reef Industries; Terra Tape, Sentry Line Detectable. b. Mutual Industries; Detectable Tape. C. Presco; Detectable Tape. 2.02 TRACER WIRE A. Material: Minimum 12-gauge solid copper or copper jacket with a steel core, with high-density polyethylene (HDPE) or high-molecular weight polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation suitable for direct bury. B. Splices: Use wire nut or lug suitable for direct burial as recommended by tracer wire manufacturer. C. Manufacturers: 1. Copperhead Industries, LLC. 2. Performance Wire & Cable Inc. 3. Pro-line Safety Products Company. 2.03 TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL A. Gravel backfill, in accordance with Section 9-03.12 of the Standard Specifications. 2.04 BEDDING MATERIAL AND PIPE ZONE MATERIAL A. In accordance with Sections 7-08.3(3) and 9-03.12(3) of the Standard Specifications, with the following amendments: 1. Section 7-08.3(3) is supplemented with the following: a. Initial backfilling shall be performed only after inspection and approval of the installed pipe. Backfill shall be accomplished in such a manner that the pipe shall not be damaged by impact or overloading. b. All backfill for pipe trenches shall be mechanically compacted by a power operated mechanical tamper(s) as specified in Sections 7-08.3(3) of the Standard Specifications or other mechanical compaction device approved by the Owner's Representative. C. If there is an excess of acceptable backfill material obtained from trench excavation at one location on the project, it shall be used at other locations on the project as directed by the Owner's Representative. The cost of transporting the excess backfill 3123 23.15-PAGE 4 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 23.15 27 AUGUST 2019 TRENCH BACKFILL material shall be considered incidental to the pipe or structure backfilled. 2. Section 7-08.3(2)E is supplemented as follows: a. Care shall be taken by the Contractor to avoid over pushing the pipe and damaging the pipe or joint system. Any damaged pipe shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 2.05 GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR DRAINS A. In accordance with Section 9-03.12(4) of the Standard Specifications. 2.06 EARTH BACKFILL A. In accordance with Section 9-03.15 of the Standard Specifications. B. Soil, loam, or other excavated material suitable for use as backfill. 2.07 LAWN AREA SOIL AND PLANTING SOIL A. In accordance with Section 32 90 00, Planting. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform gradation analysis in accordance with ASTM C136 for: 1. Earth backfill, including specified class. 2. Trench stabilization material. 3. Bedding and pipe zone material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCH PREPARATION A. Water Control: 1. In accordance with Section 7-08.3(1)A of the Standard Specifications. 2. Promptly remove and dispose of water entering trench as necessary to grade trench bottom and to compact backfill and install manholes, pipe, conduit, direct-buried cable, or duct bank. Do not place concrete, lay pipe, conduit, direct-buried cable, or duct bank in water. 3. Remove water in a manner that minimizes soil erosion from trench sides and bottom. 4. Provide continuous water control until trench backfill is complete. B. Remove foreign material and backfill contaminated with foreign material that falls into trench. 3123 23.15-PAGE 5 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 23.15 27 AUGUST 2019 TRENCH BACKFILL 3.02 TRENCH BOTTOM A. Firm Subgrade: Grade with hand tools, remove loose and disturbed material, and trim off high areas and ridges left by excavating bucket teeth. Allow space for bedding material if shown or specified. B. Soft Subgrade: If subgrade is encountered that may require removal to prevent pipe settlement, notify Owner's Representative in accordance with Sections 7-08.3(1)A and 7-09.3(8) of the Standard Specifications. Owner's Representative will determine depth of overexcavation, if any required. 3.03 TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL INSTALLATION A. In accordance with Section 7-08.3(1)A of the Standard Specifications. B. Rebuild trench bottom with trench stabilization material. C. Place material over full width of trench in 6-inch lifts to required grade, providing allowance for bedding thickness. D. Compact each lift so as to provide a firm, unyielding support for the bedding material prior to placing succeeding lifts. 3.04 BEDDING A. Furnish imported bedding material where, in the opinion of Owner's Representative, excavated material is unsuitable for bedding or insufficient in quantity. B. In accordance with Sections 7-08.3(1)C and 7-09.3(9) of the Standard Specifications. C. Hand grade and compact each lift to provide a firm, unyielding surface. D. Check grade and correct irregularities in bedding material. Loosen top 1 inch to 2 inches of compacted bedding material with a rake or by other means to provide a cushion before laying each section of pipe, conduit, direct-buried cable, or duct bank. E. Install to form continuous and uniform support except at bell holes, if applicable, or minor disturbances resulting from removal of lifting tackle. F. Bell or Coupling Holes: Excavate in bedding at each joint to permit proper assembly and inspection of joint and to provide uniform bearing along barrel of pipe or conduit. 3123 23.15-PAGE 6 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 23.15 27 AUGUST 2019 TRENCH BACKFILL 3.05 BACKFILL PIPE ZONE A. In accordance with Section 7-08.3(1)C of the Standard Specifications. B. Upper limit of pipe zone shall not be less than following: 1. Pipe: 12 inches, unless shown otherwise. 2. Conduit: 3 inches, unless shown otherwise. 3. Direct-Buried Cable: 3 inches, unless shown otherwise. 4. Duct Bank: 3 inches, unless shown otherwise. C. Restrain pipe, conduit, cables, and duct banks as necessary to prevent their movement during backfill operations. D. Thoroughly tamp each lift, including area under haunches, with handheld tamping bars supplemented by "walking in" and slicing material under haunches with a shovel to ensure voids are completely filled before placing each succeeding lift. E. Do not use power-driven impact compactors to compact pipe zone material. After full depth of pipe zone material has been placed as specified, compact material by a minimum of three passes with a vibratory plate compactor or motive sheepsfoot roller only over area between sides of pipe and trench walls. Take care to avoid damaging pipe and pipe coating. 3.06 MARKING TAPE INSTALLATION A. Continuously install marking tape along centerline of buried piping, at depth of 1 foot. Coordinate with piping installation drawings. 1. Detectable Marking Tape: Install with nonmetallic piping and waterlines in accordance with Section 7-09.3(20) of the Standard Specifications. 2. Nondetectable Marking Tape: Install with metallic piping. 3.07 BACKFILL ABOVE PIPE ZONE A. General: 1. In accordance with Section 7-09.3(10), and compacted in accordance with Section 7-09.3(11) of the Standard Specifications. 2. Process excavated material to meet specified gradation requirements. 3. Adjust moisture content as necessary to obtain specified compaction. 3123 23.15-PAGE 7 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 3123 23.15 27 AUGUST 2019 TRENCH BACKFILL 4. Do not allow backfill to free fall into trench or allow heavy, sharp pieces of material to be placed as backfill until after at least 2 feet of backfill has been provided over top of pipe. 5. Do not use power driven impact type compactors for compaction until at least 4 feet of backfill is placed over top of pipe. 6. Backfill to grade with proper allowances for topsoil, crushed rock surfacing, and pavement thicknesses, wherever applicable. 7. Backfill around structures with same class backfill as specified for adjacent trench, unless otherwise shown or specified. 3.08 REPLACEMENT OF TOPSOIL A. Replace topsoil in top 12 inches of backfilled trench. See Section 32 90 00, Planting, for soil. B. Maintain finished grade of topsoil even with adjacent area and grade as necessary to restore drainage. 3.09 MAINTENANCE OF TRENCH BACKFILL A. After each section of trench is backfilled, maintain surface of backfilled trench even with adjacent ground surface until final surface restoration is completed. B. Gravel Surfacing Rock: Add gravel surfacing rock where applicable and as necessary to keep surface of backfilled trench even with adjacent ground surface, and grade and compact as necessary to keep surface of backfilled trenches smooth, free from ruts and potholes, and suitable for normal traffic flow. C. Topsoil: Add topsoil where applicable and as necessary to maintain surface of backfilled trench level with adjacent ground surface. D. Concrete Pavement: Replace settled slabs as specified in Section 32 13 13, Concrete Paving. E. Other Areas: Add excavated material where applicable and keep surface of backfilled trench level with adjacent ground surface. 3.10 SETTLEMENT OF BACKFILL A. Settlement of trench backfill, or of fill, or facilities constructed over trench backfill will be considered a result of defective compaction of trench backfill. END OF SECTION 3123 23.15-PAGE 8 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 1123 27 AUGUST 2019 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES SECTION 32 1123 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. T11, Standard Method of Test for Materials Finer Than 75µm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. b. T27, Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. C. T89, Standard Specification for Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils. d. T90, Standard Specification for Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils. e. T96, Standard Specification for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. f. T99, Standard Specification for the Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 2.5 kg (5.5 pound) Rammer and a 305 mm (12 in) Drop. g. T180, Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-Ib) Rammer and a 457 mm (18-in) Drop. h. T190, Standard Specification for Resistance R-Value and Expansion Pressure of Compacted Soils. i. T265, Standard Method of Test for Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of Soils. j. T310, Standard Specification for In-Place Density and Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C88, Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate. b. D1883, Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory Compacted Soils. 32 1123-PAGE 1 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 1123 27 AUGUST 2019 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES C. D2419, Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate. d. D4791, Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate. 3. Standard Specifications: When referenced in this section, shall mean the Washington State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, latest 2016 amendment and as amended by this section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Completed Course: Compacted, unyielding, free from irregularities, with smooth, tight, even surface, true to grade, line, and cross-section. B. Completed Lift: Compacted with uniform cross-section thickness. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Certified Test Results on Source Materials: Submit copies from commercial testing laboratory 20 days prior to delivery of materials to Project showing materials meeting the physical qualities specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BASE COURSE A. In accordance with Section 9-03.9(1) of the Standard Specifications. 2.02 CRUSHED SURFACING BASE COURSE A. In accordance with Section 9-03.9(3) of the Standard Specifications. 2.03 AGGREGATE BASE FOR PERVIOUS CONCRETE A. Aggregate base for permeable concrete shall be AASHTO Grading No. 57. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests necessary to locate acceptable source of materials meeting specified requirements. 32 1123-PAGE 2 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 1123 27 AUGUST 2019 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES B. Final approval of aggregate material will be based on test results of installed materials. C. Should separation of coarse from fine materials occur during processing or stockpiling, immediately change methods of handling materials to correct uniformity in grading. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. In accordance with Section 4-04.3 of the Standard Specifications. 3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. As specified in Section 3123 13, Subgrade Preparation. B. Obtain Owner's Representative's acceptance of subgrade before placing base course or surfacing material. C. Do not place base course or surfacing materials in snow or on soft, muddy, or frozen subgrade. 3.03 EQUIPMENT A. In accordance with Section 4-04.3(1) of the Standard Specifications. B. Compaction Equipment: Adequate in design and number to provide compaction and to obtain specified density for each layer. 3.04 HAULING AND SPREADING A. In accordance with Sections 4-04.3(4) and 4-04.3(9) of the Standard Specifications. B. Hauling Materials: 1. Do not haul over surfacing in process of construction. 2. Loads: Of uniform capacity. 3. Maintain consistent gradation of material delivered; loads of widely varying gradations will be cause for rejection. 32 1123-PAGE 3 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 1123 27 AUGUST 2019 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES C. Spreading Materials: 1. Distribute material to provide required density, depth, grade, and dimensions with allowance for subsequent lifts. 2. Produce even distribution of material upon roadway or prepared surface without segregation. 3. Should segregation of coarse from fine materials occur during placing, immediately change methods of handling materials to correct uniformity in grading. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION OF COURSES A. Construction of Courses: In accordance with Sections 4-04.3(4) and 4-04.3(5) of the Standard Specifications. B. Add keystone to achieve compaction if shown in Drawings and as required when aggregate does not compact readily due to lack of fines or natural cementing properties, in accordance with Section 4-04.3(6) of the Standard Specifications. 3.06 ROLLING AND COMPACTION A. In accordance with Section 4-04.3(5) of the Standard Specifications. 3.07 SURFACE TOLERANCES A. Blade or otherwise work surfacing as necessary to maintain grade and cross- section at all times, and to keep surface smooth and thoroughly compacted. B. Finished Surface of Untreated Aggregate Base and Leveling Course: Within plus or minus 0.04 foot of grade shown at any individual point. C. Gravel Surfacing: Within 0.04 foot from lower edge of 10-foot straightedge placed on finished surface, parallel to centerline. D. Overall Average: Within plus or minus 0.01 foot from crown and grade specified. 321123-PAGE 40F5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 1123 27 AUGUST 2019 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. In-Place Density Tests: 1. Determine via Nuclear gauge, in accordance with Section 4-04.3(5) of the Standard Specifications. 2. Show proof that areas meet specified requirements before identifying density test locations. 3.09 CLEANING A. Remove excess material from the Work area. Clean stockpile and staging areas of all excess aggregate. END OF SECTION 32 1123—PAGE 5 OF 5 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). a. M6, Standard Specification for Fine Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete. b. M80, Standard Specification for Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete. C. M157, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. d. M213, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). e. M227/M227M, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, Mechanical Properties. 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportion for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete. b. 305R, Hot Weather Concreting. C. 308, Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. d. 318/318R, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. e. 325.9R, Guide for Construction of Concrete Pavements and Concrete Bases. f. 522.1-13, Specification for Pervious Concrete Pavement. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A615/A615M, Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. b. C31/C31M, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. C. C33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates. d. C39/C39M, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. e. C78, Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading). 32 13 13-PAGE 1 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING f. C88, Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate. g. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. h. C143/C143M, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. i. C150, Specification for Portland Cement. j. C172, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. k. C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. I. C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. M. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. n. C494/C494M, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. o. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. P. C803/C803M,Test Method for Penetration Resistance of Hardened Concrete. q. C1330, Specification for Cylindrical Seal Backing for Use With Cold Liquid Applied Sealants. r. C805, Test Method for Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete. S. D920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Seals. t. D994, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). U. D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). V. D2628, Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete. W. D3406, Specification for Joint Sealant, Hot-Applied, Elastomeric- Type, for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements. X. D5249, Specification for Backer Material for Use With Cold-and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants in Portland Cement Concrete and Asphalt Joints. Y. E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. 4. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA). 5. Standard Specifications: When referenced in this section, shall mean the Washington State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, latest 2016 amendment and as amended by this section. 32 13 13-PAGE 2 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide as required in Section 5-05.3(1) of the Standard Specifications for concrete pavement and pervious cement concrete sidewalk. B. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Admixtures. 2. Design Data: a. Concrete mix design signed by concrete mix designer. b. Minimum Information: 1) Name of ready-mix plant. 2) Project. 3) Engineer. 4) Contractor. 5) Mix design number. 6) Specified concrete strength. 7) Water-cement-fly ash ratio. 8) Maximum aggregate size. 9) Cement content. 10) Fly ash content. 11) Water content. 12) Type, name, and amount of admixtures. 13) Unit weight. 14) Slump. 15) Ingredient proportions corrected for average moisture content for particular times of year. 3. Jointing Drawings: See construction Drawing. 4. Gradation for coarse and fine aggregates, and combined gradation. List percent passing each sieve size. 5. Detailed plans for hot weather placements, including curing and protection. 6. Mock-up panel of concrete paving. a. Provide a mock-up of concrete paving showing medium broom finish, score joints, and expansion joints minimum 6 feet by 6 feet square. Provide up to 2 additional mock-up panels at no additional cost, for review in the case that the quality of the first and subsequent mock-panels are rejected. b. Concrete mock-up panel shall be provided for the Owner's Representative's review a minimum of 2 weeks in advance of concrete delivery. 32 13 13-PAGE 3 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING C. Construct mock-up panel using processes, technique, methods, and materials proposed for use on permanent work, including curing procedures,joints, and finishes. d. Mock-up panel(s) shall be produced by the same personnel who will perform the work for the project. The accepted mock-up panel shall serve as a minimum standard of appearance for the final work. e. Upon acceptance, maintain accepted mock-up panel on site in a secure location as the approved minimum standard of acceptance. Accepted mock-up panel shall not be demolished or removed from the site until the work has been completed and approved. f. Remove and replace mock-up panels that are not accepted. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturers' Certificate of Compliance: a. Portland cement. b. Admixtures. C. Fly ash. d. Aggregates. 2. Statements of Qualifications: a. Mix designer. b. Batch plant. C. Testing laboratory. 3. Test Reports: a. Admixtures: Chemical ingredients and percentage of chloride in each admixture and fly ash. b. Fly Ash: Source test analysis and amount used in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, Section 16. C. Mix Design: For each trial, signed by qualified mix designer. d. Laboratory Mixes: Cylinder test results. 4. Concrete Delivery Tickets: a. For each batch of concrete before unloading at Site. b. Minimum Delivery Ticket Information: 1) Name of ready-mix plant. 2) Serial number of ticket. 3) Date and truck number. 4) Name of Contractor. 5) Job name and location. 6) Mix design number. 7) Amount of concrete (cubic yards). 8) Type and amount of admixtures. 32 13 13-PAGE 4 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING 9) Amount of water added at batch plant. 10) Time of loading, arriving at Site, and unloading. 11) Volume of water added by receiver of concrete and their initials. C. Record of drum revolution counter, type, and brand. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide as required in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Hot Weather Concreting: Conform to ACI 305R. C. The following are requirements for pervious concrete walkway. 1. Test Panel. The Contractor shall construct a test panel and perform test as listed in Article Test Panel for Pervious Concrete prior construction of the rest of the pervious concrete sidewalk. 2. The Contractor shall be NRMCA certified for pervious concrete installer. 3. Pervious Concrete Mix: Pervious concrete shall be batched and centrally mixed at a semi-automatic or automatic batching plant with a current (within 2 years) certification from the NRMCA. Pervious concrete shall not be shrink mixed or transit mixed. 4. Acceptance of Pervious Cement Concrete walkway will be based on the following criteria: a. Grade: Pervious concrete sidewalk shall be true to planned grades plus or minus 1/2 inch and shall not deviate from grade more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet. Where abutting existing facilities such as sidewalks, walkway, curbs, driveways or other pavements, the pervious concrete sidewalk will be flush and provide a transition that will not deviate in more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet. b. Line: Pervious concrete sidewalk margins shall be true to planned lines plus or minus 1/2 inch at any point. C. Slope: Pervious concrete sidewalk shall be sloped as shown on the Drawings. Slope shall be consistent to within 1/4 inch in 10 feet. d. Conformance to Job Mix Formula (JMF): The pervious concrete used shall conform to the JMF within the limits as set forth in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete, and as determined from the accepted test panel. e. Thickness (test panel only or when determined by the Owner's Representative):Three (3) core samples of 4 inches in diameter 32 13 13-PAGE 5 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING may be taken from each test panel or lot for acceptance in accordance with ASTM C42. The Contractor shall provide measures to collect slurry and debris during coring operation in order to avoid sealing adjacent pavement. Each core sample shall be equal to the minimum section depth or more as specified in the Drawings (minimum 5 inches). After core's length and diameter is measured, trim cores to uniform depth as specified in Article Void Content of the Mix, Lab Test for Pervious Concrete for determining the weight. Core holes shall be filled by the Contractor with concrete meeting the JMF and shall match adjacent pavement texture and grade. f. Unit Weight (test panel only or when determined by the Owner's Representative):The unit weight of each core sample taken for acceptance will be determined using the method described in Article Void Content of the Mix, Lab Test for Pervious Concrete. The unit weight of the core sample for each lot shall be within eight (8) pounds per cubic foot of the unit weight as accepted in the JMF. g. Infiltration Rate: The infiltration rate of each lot will be tested at four (4) random locations within the lot as described in Article Test Panel for Pervious Concrete. The average of all four(4) tests shall be greater than 100 inches per hour. h. Fresh Density: The fresh density will be measured using the jigging procedure outlined in ASTM C29 at the point of placement shall be within or equal to five (5) pounds per cubic foot of the fresh density indicated by the JMF. i. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance: Each load of pervious concrete transported to the location of placement shall have an original Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance as specified in Section 6-02.3(5)B delivered with the load. Photo copies, carbon copies or facsimiles are not acceptable. j. Appearance: Each lot of finished pervious concrete sidewalk will be inspected for appearance by the Owners Representative. The pervious concrete sidewalk shall have a consistent surface texture, shall have no more than five (5) percent of the surface area within each panel (joint to joint) filled with paste, shall not be raveled, shall be free of ridges or other surface imperfections, and shall be free of cracks. k. Clean:The finished pervious concrete sidewalk will be cleaned by vacuum from dust, fine sediments, debris, and removal of vegetation. 32 13 13-PAGE 6 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING 5. Test: Pressure washing shall be provided and completed by using portable washer equipment working at a minimum of 3,000 psi at 1.0 gpm. The nozzle shall be held a maximum of three (3) inches off the concrete surface. The Contractor shall pressure test three (3) locations per lot or as determined by the Owner's Representative. Any sections of pervious concrete that breaks up, ravels, or does not infiltrate shall be removed and replaced with acceptable pervious concrete to the nearest joints.The Owner's Representative will determine the acceptability of the concrete after pressure washing. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transporting of ready-mix concrete shall be in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Furnish cement for Project from one source. 2. Provide as required in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. In accordance with ASTM C150. 4. Pozzolan: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Aggregates: 1. General: a. As specified in Section 9-03 of the Standard Specifications. b. Aggregate for portland cement concrete mixture shall be 1-1/2-inch maximum size stone meeting requirements of Section 9-03.1 of the Standard Specification. C. Material: Natural aggregates, free from deleterious coatings. d. Aggregates shall not be potentially reactive as defined in ASTM C33. e. Aggregates not in compliance with soundness and durability requirements of ASTM C33 may be used with prior approval of Owner's Representative; provided it can be shown by special testing or record of past performance that these aggregates produce concrete of adequate strength and durability. Aggregate soundness testing for fine and coarse aggregates shall be in accordance with ASTM C33 and ASTM C88. 32 13 13-PAGE 7 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING 2. Fine Aggregates: Grading Class 1 meeting requirements of Section 9-03.1(2) of the Standard Specifications. 3. Coarse Aggregate: Grading meeting requirements of Section 9-03.1(4) of the Standard Specifications. C. Water: ASTM C94/C94M. D. Admixtures: 1. Add admixtures to mix at batch plant. 2. Air Entraining: ASTM C260. 3. Water Reducing: a. ASTM C494/C494M,Type A, normal, or Type D, retarding type, containing no chlorides and compatible with air-entraining admixtures. b. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or antifreeze agents. E. Coarse Aggregate for Pervious Concrete: 1. Aggregate for pervious concrete shall conform to one of the following gradations: % -Total percent passing by weight Aggregate Gradation AASHTO No. 8 size aggregate gradation Sieve Size Min. Max. 1/2" Square 100% --- 3/8" Square 85% 100% U.S. No. 4 10% 30% U.S. No. 8 0% 10% U.S. No. 16 0% 5% U.S. No. 50 ---- ---- U.S. No. 200 0% 0.5% 2. In individual tests, a variation of four (4) percent under the minimum percentages or over the maximum percentages will be allowed on sieves size No. 16 and larger. For sieves smaller than No. 16, the maximum percentage passing shall not exceed the limits shown for any single test. The average of three successive tests shall be within the percentages stated above. Coarse aggregate shall contain no pieces 32 13 13-PAGE 8 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING larger than two (2) times the maximum sieve size for the specified grading measured along the line of greatest dimension. 3. Acceptance of grading and quality of the aggregate will be based on samples taken from stockpiles at the concrete plant. The exact point of acceptance will be determined in the field by the Owner's Representative. 4. When the Owner's Representative accepts, the pervious concrete aggregate may be blended from other sizes if: a. The resulting aggregate meets all requirements for the specified grading; b. Each size used makes up at least five (5) percent of the blend. C. The Contractor supplies the Owner's Representative with the gradation for the proposed sizes, along with their proper proportions before producing the aggregate. If the aggregate comes from commercial sources, the Contractor shall supply this information and have it accepted before proportioning and mixing the concrete. 2.02 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Tie Bars: Grade 40 deformed steel bars conforming to Section 03 2100, Reinforcing Steel. B. Dowels: Conform to requirements of AASHTO M227/M227M, Grade 70. C. Joint Filler: 1. Preformed expansion joint filler conforming to AASHTO M153 or AASHTO M213. 2. Fillers furnished under AASHTO M213 shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D1751. D. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 2, suitable for spray application. E. Curing Membranes: 1. White polyethylene sheeting. 2. Waterproof paper. 3. Cotton orjute mats. F. Evaporation Retardant: Confilm as manufactured by Master Builders Company. 32 13 13-PAGE 9 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Ready-Mix Concrete Batch Plants: Certified by NRMCA. B. Batch Plants: Conform to requirements of Section 5-05.3(3)A of the Standard Specifications. C. Ready-Mix Concrete Trucks: As specified in Section 5-05.3(3)B of the Standard Specifications. D. Hauling Equipment: As specified in Section 5-04.3(3)B of the Standard Specifications. E. Paving Equipment: As specified in Section 5-04.3(3)C of the Standard Specifications. F. Smoothness Testing Equipment: Supply two 12-foot straightedges for determining smoothness. 2.04 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Compressive strength of 4,000 psi minimum and flexural strength of 650 psi minimum, both at 28 days. 1. If the 650 psi flexural strength specification requires a compressive strength in excess of 4,000, the higher compressive value shall be used as a standard minimum for compressive strength cylinder tests taken during construction. 2. The relationship between compressive strength fcand modulus of rupture f, shall be: f = kfT with k derived from the tests results. B. Concrete target strengths shall be in accordance with ACI 318/318R. C. Maximum water-cement ratio or water-cement plus pozzolan ratio, if applicable, shall not exceed 0.48. D. Replacement of cement with pozzolan shall not exceed 20 percent. E. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inch(es) minus. F. Allowable Slump: 3 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 32 13 13—PAGE 10 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING G. Allowable Air Entrainment: 5 percent, plus or minus 1 percent by volume. H. Concrete shall contain water reducer. Amount of admixture added to concrete shall be in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. I. Use of set-retarding admixtures shall be subject to prior approval by Owner's Representative. J. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. K. Concrete temperature as delivered to site ready for placement shall be above 50 degrees F and below 90 degrees F. L. If Contractor proposes to use a current mix design that meets these Specifications, has been used on previous City of Renton project, and less than 1 year has elapsed since it was last used; Contractor shall submit documentation of production of concrete produced from that mix design to Owner's Representative for review. If review verifies concrete produced meets these Specifications and strength requirements, and establishes a correlation between compressive strength and flexural strength, no trial batches for proposed mix design will be required. 2.05 PERVIOUS CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. The Contractor shall propose a mix design for pervious concrete and shall submit the mix design to the Owner's Representative for acceptance prior to constructing the test panels. Pervious concrete shall not be placed in the test panels without a mix design that has been reviewed and accepted by the Owners Representative. B. Mix Design Criteria: 1. The Contractor shall include the following elements and results of the described procedures in the proposed mix design: a. The cementitious content, including pozzolans if used, shall be a minimum of 500 pounds per cubic yard. b. The mix shall incorporate a hydration stabilizing admixture. C. The mix shall be designed to have a total void content greater than 15 percent and less than 30 percent, in place, as constructed. (Void content of the mix will be determined from a minimum three (3) samples of four(4) inch diameter core samples from a finished test panels of the proposed mix design using the following method; see Article Void Content of the Mix, Lab Test for Pervious Concrete.) 32 13 13-PAGE 11 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING d. The water/cement ratio shall be between 0.27 and 0.35. e. Fine aggregate may be added to the mix, but shall not exceed three (3) cubic feet per cubic yard. f. No more than 25 percent of portland cement in the mix, by weight, may be replaced by fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, or a combination of both. C. Job Mix Formula: 1. Once accepted by the Owner's Representative, the mix design shall become the JMF and shall not be modified in any way. The JMF shall be determined from information submitted under Article Submittals of this Section, and from results of test panels testing as described in Article Test Panel for Pervious Concrete. The JMF shall include the following: a. Batch weights of all constituents. b. Portland cement type and brand. C. Pozzolan type and source. d. Admixture type and brand. e. Aggregate source(s) and gradation(s). f. Fresh density of the pervious concrete. g. Unit weight of the hardened pervious concrete. 2. Modifications to the JMF will not be allowed and any modified mix placed in the Work will be rejected. Proposed modifications to the JMF shall be submitted as a new mix design and shall require new test panels to validate the proposed mix design and determine the new JMF. If accepted by the Owner's Representative, the new mix design shall become the JMF. Only one (1)JMF shall be valid at any time. Admixture dosages may be modified as needed to maintain mix properties. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WEATHER LIMITATIONS A. Concrete shall not be placed: 1. Until the air temperature in the shade is 35 degrees F and rising and is forecast to remain above 35 degrees F. 2. On frozen ground. 3. During periods of rain or snow. 32 13 13-PAGE 12 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING B. Concrete placement shall not continue when air temperature drops below 40 degrees F. C. Protect concrete pavement from inclement weather for 7 days after it has been placed, when rain is imminent, and when air temperature drops or is forecast to drop below 35 degrees F. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare base as specified in Section 32 1123, Aggregate Base Courses. B. Dampen base thoroughly prior to concrete placement; standing water will not be permitted. C. Formwork shall be complete prior to placement of concrete. Area in which concrete is to be placed, shall be smooth and free of ruts, projections, debris, spilled concrete, mud, sloughed soil, standing water, organic and other objectionable materials. D. Construction Joints: Inspect prior to placement of concrete. E. Prior to placing paving equipment in position, full width and length of the area on which the tracks of the paving equipment is to operate shall be brought to density and surface tolerances required. F. Protect existing exposed surfaces such as grates, catch basins, air valves, manholes, and cleanout lids from splattered and spilled concrete during concrete placement by use of durable waterproof paper. G. Furnish operable backup vibrator on Site prior to concrete placement. 3.03 SLIP FORM PAVING A. Deliver from hauling vehicles to paving machine hopper. B. Contractor's equipment hauling portland cement concrete or reinforcement will not be permitted on subgrade, but will be allowed on base, with turns or other maneuvering kept to a minimum. Damage to subgrade or base shall be corrected to satisfaction of Owner's Representative. C. Place in final position uniformly in one layer, so a minimum of finishing will be necessary to provide a dense, homogenous pavement conforming to true grade and cross section. 32 13 13-PAGE 13 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING 1. Spreader shall receive portland cement concrete mixture in its hopper and uniformly spread and strike it off at proper thickness for full width of area being paved. 2. Paver shall vibrate, consolidate, and finish slab to proper grade and cross section. D. Paver: 1. Operated with as continuous forward movement as possible. 2. Coordinate mixing, delivering, and spreading portland cement concrete to provide uniform progress. 3. Stopping and starting paver shall be held to a minimum. If, for any reason, it is necessary to stop forward motion of paver, vibratory and tamping elements shall also be stopped immediately. 4. No external force shall be applied to paver, except with approval of Owners Representative. E. While placing portland cement concrete, provision shall be made for constructing joints, placing dowels, tie bars, and other devices as called for by Drawings and as provided in Article Joints. F. Portland cement concrete shall be rejected if it: 1. Is not in place within 1 hour after being mixed. 2. Has begun to take an initial set prior to placement. 3. Has been retempered with water. G. If necessary, supplemental hand spreading and distributing shall be with shovels. Rakes will not be permitted. H. Portland cement concrete shall not be fouled with foreign matter. I. Use vibrators to consolidate portland cement concrete pavement at least 6 feet each side of construction joints and expansion joints. 3.04 STATIONARY SIDE FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Where width of pavement is narrow, tapering, or of irregular pattern not lending itself to being constructed by prescribed machine methods, Contractor shall be permitted to place concrete as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Defects: 32 13 13-PAGE 14 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING 1. Fill areas of minor honeycomb or other minor defect in composition of portland cement concrete along exposed edges of portland cement concrete with a stiff mortar of cement and fine aggregate. Apply to moistened portland cement concrete to satisfaction of Owner's Representative. 2. Area showing serious defects in composition of concrete shall be removed and replaced with pavement of specified quality for full width of strip between longitudinal joints or edges and for a length not less than between the nearest transverse joints. 3.05 JOINTS A. General: 1. Referred to as construction, either of which may be transverse or longitudinal, as called for by Drawings or as approved by Owner's Representative. 2. Joints, and joint filler shall extend to pavement edges or to each other, as the case may be, and shall be constructed perpendicular to surface of pavement. 3. Joints shall not vary from specified or indicated line by more than 1/4 inch. 4. Contractor shall submit jointing plan and details to Project Representative for approval. Take into consideration placement of joints in curb and gutter, at catch basins, and position of manholes and other large structures, as well as other limitations herein mentioned. 5. Place manhole or similar large structure in line of joint, or if impractical, isolate structure from pavement with premolded joint filler, 1/2-inch wide, conforming to AASHTO M213 and ASTM D1751. B. Expansion Joints: 1. Dowels: as shown in the Drawings. 2. Install coated and lubricated bars parallel to slab surface and in true horizontal position perpendicular to joint in both plan and section view, so as to permit joint to expand or contract without bending dowels. 3. Secure dowels tightly in forms with rigid ties, 4. Install steel reinforcement in concrete as shown. C. Construction Joints: 32 13 13-PAGE 15 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING 1. Construct when there is an interruption of longer 45 minutes in portland cement concrete placing operations or where specified. 2. Tool both free edges of joints with 1/8 inch radius rounder to remove laitance and mortar resulting from finishing operations and to provide clean rounded edge.Tooling shall not form ridges on surface of concrete. 3. New portland cement concrete placed contiguous to joint shall conform to proportions and consistency of previously placed concrete. 4. Longitudinal Construction Joint: a. Tied type using No. 5 by 36-inch deformed tie bars at 12-inch centers. b. Tie Bars: 1) Not required at construction joint between portland cement concrete pavement and gutter, except where shown on Drawings and mentioned above. 2) Placement: a) Plastic Portland Cement Concrete: Insert before vibrating and finishing portland cement concrete; or b) Hardened Concrete: (1) Drill hole, insert, and grout tie bars into place. (2) Drill holes large and deep enough to allow tie bars to be inserted with grout. (3) Perform any time after portland cement concrete has attained enough strength to resist any damage caused by drilling. (4) Tie bars shall be grouted a maximum of 3 hours prior to placement of adjacent portland cement concrete. 3) Replace loose tie bars by drilling and grouting as described. D. Scored Joints: 1. Configuration: 1/4-inch wide by 3/4-inch deep at locations indicated on Drawings formed by tooling of concrete while it is still fresh. 2. Do not fill or seal. 3. Layout of joints shall be straight and true and shall not vary from indicated line by more than 1/4 inch. 4. Score joints shall be edged to 1/8 inch radius after finishing. 3.06 SURFACE FINISHING A. Use temporary screeds. Wet screeding and jitterbugging shall not be permitted. 32 13 13-PAGE 16 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING B. Pavement shall have surface tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet in accordance with ACI 325.9R. C. Salting, spreading of cement or cement and sand mixture to speed up hardening shall not be permitted. D. Exposed pavement edges shall be edged to a 1/2-inch radius unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Construction joints shall be edged to 1/8-inch radius after finishing. Edging shall not form ridges on pavement surface. E. Pavement shall be treated and protected by use of evaporation retardant applied in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Flat surfaces shall be treated immediately after screeding and floating or if time period greater than 15 minutes occurs between finishing operations. F. Pavement shall be screeded, floated, and given heavy nylon bristle-broomed skid-resistant surface unless noted otherwise on the Plans. G. Medium Broom Finish: After completion of floating and troweling when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete finishing as follows: 1. Medium broom finish by drawing medium coarse hair broom across concrete surface in direction indicated in Contract Drawings. Apply medium broom finish after the tooled score joints are installed. Broom out smooth trowel edge. 2. Approved mock-up panel shall be the minimum standard of acceptance of all medium broom finish and score joint work. 3.07 CURING OF PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE A. Immediately after the final floating, surface finishing, and edging has been completed, and while portland cement concrete surface is still moist, cover and cure entire exposed surface for at least 72 hours in accordance with one of the following provisions: 1. Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds: Apply compound uniformly to portland cement concrete by pressure spray methods at a rate which will form an impervious membrane, but at least at a rate of 1 gallon per 150 square feet. 2. Other Membranes: a. Apply to damp portland cement concrete as soon as it can be placed without marring surface. 32 13 13-PAGE 17 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING b. Place in contact with surface, extend beyond sides or edges of slabs or forms, and fasten down to hold it in position as a waterproof and moistureproof covering. C. Laps shall be sufficient to maintain tightness equivalent to sheeting. d. Transverse laps for waterproof paper shall be at least 18 inches, and longitudinal seams shall be cemented. e. Cotton orjute mats shall be saturated with water prior to placing and kept fully wetted during curing period. B. Concrete shall be cured by use of curing compound, for minimum of 7 days after concrete placement, in accordance with ACI 308. Curing compounds shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Exposed surfaces shall be sprayed with curing compound immediately after free surface water has disappeared from finished surface. D. Concrete temperature shall be maintained in accordance with ACI 306R. E. Curing compounds shall not come in contact with hardened concrete that is to be concreted against. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Retain independent testing or inspection agency to perform inspection, sampling, and testing. B. Concrete Sampling: In accordance with ASTM C172.Take sample not less than every 5,000 square feet or fraction thereof of concrete placed each day. C. Perform following tests on each sampling: 1. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M. 2. Air Content: ASTM C231. 3. Compressive Strength: ASTM C39/C39M. 4. Flexural Strength: ASTM C78. D. Strength Tests: 1. Make and cure cylinders and beams in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M. 2. Cylinders: Make four, standard 6-inch diameter by 12 inches high. Cure one in field and three in laboratory. 32 13 13-PAGE 18 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING 3. Beams: Make three, standard 6 inches by 6 inches by 21 inches. Cure in field. 4. Compressive:Test one field-cured cylinder at 7 days and two laboratory-cured cylinders at 28 days. Test last cylinder at 56 days if 28-day cylinder is below specified strength. 5. Flexural: Test one beam at 7 days and two beams at 28 days. E. Acceptance of concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 318/318R. 3.09 CLEANING A. Clean concrete splatter from exposed surfaces. B. Thoroughly broom and wash concrete surfaces before opening to traffic. 3.10 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE A. Do not operate construction equipment or allow traffic on newly placed portland cement concrete until the following requirements are met: 1. Joints have been filled as per Article Joints. 2. Concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least 4,000 pounds per square inch. B. Protect new concrete from construction operations, mechanical disturbances, water flow, and soiling until open for traffic. C. Erect and maintain suitable barriers to protect concrete from traffic or other detrimental trespass until pavement is opened to traffic. D. Protect new concrete from dirt, asphalt, and other deleterious substances that may be tracked onto new pavement from construction activities. E. Pavement damaged by traffic or damaged from any other cause, prior to its official acceptance, shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of Owners Representative. 3.11 VOID CONTENT OF THE MIX, LAB TEST FOR PERVIOUS CONCRETE A. Determine the bulk specific gravity(GB) of the core using the method described in ASTM D1188. Core samples shall be trimmed to 4-1/2 inches in depth to provide increased uniformity of test results. Trimming shall be squared and from the bottom of each pavement core samples. 32 13 13-PAGE 19 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING B. Dry the core samples at a temperature not to exceed 65 degrees C (150 degrees F) until a constant mass (±0.1 percent) is obtained and allow to cool to ambient temperature. Remove paraffin coating from core samples. C. Weigh the core and record weight to the nearest 0.1 g. D. Use the pycnometer apparatus as described in ASTM D2041. E. Place core samples in calibrated pycnometer and cover completely with water. If the core sample is too large to be placed into the pycnometer, it may be broken into pieces and placed into the pycnometer together or the pieces may be evaluated separately. F. Place the lid on pycnometer and fasten it on a mechanical agitation device. G. Turn on the agitation device and slowly apply a vacuum to the pycnometer until the vacuum reaches 3.7 ± 0.3 kPa ± 2.5 mm Hg). The vacuum should be reached in less than 2 minutes. H. After the vacuum is achieved, maintain vacuum and agitation for a period of 15 ± 2 minutes. I. Slowly release the vacuum and determine the weight of the sample and pycnometer as described in paragraph 9.5.1 or paragraph 9.5.2 in ASTM 2041. J. Calculate specific gravity (Gmm) as described in paragraph 10.1.1 or paragraph 10.1.2 in ASTM 2041, as appropriate. K. If multiple procedures are run for separate pieces of the core, the weighted average of all of the runs will be the specific gravity (Gmm) of the core as a whole. Gmm = sum(Gmm1 x Wt1+Gmm2 x Wt2+....+Gmmix Wti)/ Wttotal The percentage of air voids will be calculated as: Voids OO G mm DOG B X100% Gmm Where: V= Voids in the Sample (%) Gmm = Specific Gravity of the Core Material Less Air Voids 32 13 13-PAGE 20 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING GB = Bulk Specific Gravity of the Core as determined by ASTM D1188 This Void Content lab test information shall be part of the Mix Design submittal. 3.12 TEST PANEL FOR PERVIOUS CONCRETE A. Test Panel for Pervious Cement Concrete Sidewalk: 1. Production placement of pervious concrete shall not occur until the Contractor has completed a test panels of pervious concrete sidewalk that meets all of the acceptance criteria herein and is accepted by the Owner's Representative. The Contractor should allow time in his schedule for the construction and acceptance of the test panels. 2. The Contractor shall construct test panels of pervious concrete sidewalk with a minimum area of 120 square feet. Test panels may be placed non-contiguously. The width of the test panels shall be equal to the nominal width of the sidewalk to be placed. The test panels shall be equivalent and representative of the production pervious concrete sidewalk in all aspects including subbase depth and preparation. The Owner's Representative shall observe and accept each element of pervious concrete sidewalk construction. Construction and evaluation of the test panels will occur as follows: a. Notify the Owner's Representative at least ten (10) Working Days before installing pervious concrete sidewalk test panels Coordinate the location of the test panels with the Owner's Representative. b. Install the test panels in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. C. Notify the Owner's Representative when each element of the test panels is ready for inspection. d. Remove, replace, and dispose of any unsatisfactory portions of test panels as determined by the Owner's Representative and at no additional cost. e. Failure to install acceptable test panels of pervious concrete will indicate an unqualified installer. f. Production sections of this Work shall not be placed until achieving a complete test panels that fully complies with the Drawings and Specifications and has written acceptance issued by the Owner's Representative. g. Testing: 1) The completed test panels shall be used to validate the pervious concrete mix design and establish the JMF. Unless 32 13 13-PAGE 21 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING others determined by the Owner's Representative, three (3), four(4) inch, cores will be cut in accordance with ASTM C42 and these cores will be used to validate the mix design under the design criteria set forth in Article Pervious Concrete Mix Design, and the acceptance criteria Article Quality Assurance paragraph H. The average unit weight of the cores as determined by ASTM D1188 shall be within eight (8) pounds per cubic foot of the average of the three (3) cores. The average unit weight of the cores shall be the unit weight used for the JMF. Core holes shall be filled by the Contractor with concrete meeting the proposed JMF and shall match adjacent pavement color, texture and grade. The void content between 15 and 30 percent. 2) Three (3) infiltration tests will be conducted in the test panels for acceptance. Each of the infiltration tests shall meet the minimum infiltration rate requirement noted in Article Pervious Concrete Mix Design. 3) Before final acceptance by the Owner's Representative, the Contractor shall pressure wash the pervious concrete sidewalk. Pressure washing shall be provided and completed by using portable washer equipment working at a minimum of 3,000 psi at 1.0 gpm. The nozzle shall be held a maximum of three (3) inches off the concrete surface. The Contractor shall pressure test three (3) locations per lot or as determined by the Owner's Representative. Any sections of pervious concrete that breaks up, ravels, or does not infiltrate shall be removed and replaced with acceptable pervious concrete to the nearest joints. The Owner's Representative will determine the acceptability of the concrete after pressure washing. 4) The completed and accepted test panels shall be maintained and protected throughout the duration of the Work and may not be demolished and disposed of without written permission from the Owner's Representative. If the test panels are incorporated into the Work, it shall remain in place. 3.13 FIELD TEST: INFILTRATION RATE OF THE MIX FOR PERVIOUS CONCRETE: A. Pervious concrete mix shall also have an infiltration rate equal to or greater than 100 inches per hour, in place, as constructed. The locations for conducting the infiltration tests shall be determined by the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule inspections 32 13 13-PAGE 22 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 13 13 27 AUGUST 2019 CONCRETE PAVING with the Owners Representative a minimum of five (5) Working Days in advance. The infiltration rate will be measured in the following manner: 1. The testing procedure shall be as follows: a. Place a premeasured amount of water into the container. Water shall be free of suspended solids.The volume of water shall be determined to 2 significant figures. b. Pour the water onto the surface in one spot. Control the discharge rate by manually adjusting the angle of the spout so that the diameter of the pool of water is between 10 to 30 inches is maintained. Empty the container holding the spout over the spot until the pool of water vanishes. C. A 16-inch to 24-inch inch diameter tube (typically PVC 3-inch to 6-inch in height) and plumper's putty may be used to control the diameter of the pool ("controlled method") as desired by the Owner's Representative. When using the controlled method, the height of the water in the tube should be maintained at approximately 1/4 inch. d. Start the stopwatch when the water initially touches the concrete surface and stop it when the pool disappears from the surface. e. Measure the longest dimension (d1) of the dampened area. Measure the width (d2) of the pool perpendicular to d1. (use inside diameter of tube for controlled method) f. Repeat this procedure at a minimum of 4 separate locations. Infiltration Rate (IR) shall be calculated as follows: 1) IR = (V x 3,326,400)/(p x d1 x d2 x t) inches per hour. a) IR is Infiltration Rate. b) V is the volume of water in gallons (typically 1 gallon or more). c) d1 and d2 are the dimensions that were measured in inches. d) p is approximately 3.14159. e) t is the time in seconds. END OF SECTION 32 13 13-PAGE 23 OF 23 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 18 16.13 27 AUGUST 2019 PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING SECTION 32 18 16.13 PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, equipment and materials to install the Playground Protective Surfacing or as otherwise specified and as required to complete the work shown on the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This specification section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. 1. ASTM F1292—Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surfacing Materials Within the Use Zone of Playground Equipment. 2. ASTM F2223 —Standards on Playground Surfacing. 3. ASTM F1951-08—Accessibility of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment. 4. ASTM F2479—Standard Guide for Specification, Purchase, Installation and Maintenance of Poured-in-Place Playground Surfacing. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Related work in other sections of these Specifications includes but is not limited to: 1. Specification 3100 00—SITE PREPARATION 2. Specification 32 33 00—SITE FURNISHINGS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Before proceeding with any work, the Contractor must inspect the site, carefully check all grades, and verify all dimensions and conditions affecting the work. The Contractor must immediately notify the Owner's Representative of any discrepancy on line and level. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Strictly adhere to the manufacturer's instructions regarding product handling, sub-base preparation, surfacing system application and all other aspects of the surfacing installation. 32 18 16.13-PAGE 1 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 18 16.13 27 AUGUST 2019 PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING C. The contractor who is installing the surfacing must have at least 3 recent (within the last 5 years) installations of Poured-in-Place Playground Surfacing and meet current ASTM F 1292 Test Criteria. The contractor must have personnel, facilities and equipment for the specified work. The contractor must also submit evidence of the recent installations of the surfacing materials. D. Site Inspections will be made by the Owner's Representative. 1. Request Owner's Representative inspection at least 48 hours in advance of the time inspection is required. Inspections for the following is required: a. Substantial Completion of all work(development of physical punch list items). b. Physical Completion of all work (physical punch list items satisfactorily completed). 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. For each product specified, submit the following for approval prior to delivery: 1. Manufacturer's product data including: a. Preparation instructions and recommendations. b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. c. Assembly and installation instructions. d. Maintenance instructions. B. The manufacturer must be experienced in the manufacturing of a poured-in-place safety surfacing system and provide references of five (5) specific installations in the last three (3) years. C. The installer must provide competent workmen skilled in this specific type of poured- in-place safety surfacing system installation. The designated supervisory personnel on the project must be competent in the installation of this material, including mixing of the materials, and spreading and compacting the materials correctly. D. Installation should be in accordance with ASTM F1292 for Impact Attenuation of surface system under and around playground equipment. The poured-in-place system to be installed in compliance with the Critical Fall Height as determined by the Playground Equipment. E. IPEMA Certification specific to poured-in-place safety surfacing. F. IPEMA certification specific to%" layer of 1-3mm EPDM over cushion layer. .5mm TPV or EPDM IPEMA certification not acceptable. 32 18 16.13-PAGE 2 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 18 16.13 27 AUGUST 2019 PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING G. Manufacturer should provide written instructions for recommended maintenance practices. 1. Manufacturer should submit color samples of each color specified and/or shown on drawings for owner's representative verification. Color samples shall be 6" x 6" of%" top wear course layer with binder— per specification. 2. Warranties: Provide the manufacturer's 5 year materials warranty for all protective surfacing systems materials. 1.06 DEFINITIONS 1. EPDM granules: EPDM rubber (ethylene propylene diene monomer(M-class) rubber), a type of synthetic rubber, is an elastomer characterized by a wide range of applications. The M refers to its classification in ASTM standard D-1418; the M class includes rubbers having a saturated chain of the polymethylene type. 2. Critical Fall Height: A critical fall height (CFH) is the maximum height of fall from play equipment to the ground. It is important to note that safety surfaces do not prevent injury but aim to lessen the severity of any injury that may occur on falls from height. 3. Fall Height: Fall height is a measurement defined as the "vertical distance between a designated play surface and the protective surfacing beneath it. 4. TPV:Thermoplastic Vulcanized Elastomer. Developed using resin and synthetic rubber with higher UV stabilization. 5. E.SBR: Styrene-butadiene or styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR) describe families of synthetic rubbers derived from styrene and butadiene 1.07 ASTM TESTING STANDARDS— FLEXGROUND STANDARD MEETS OR EXCEEDS ALL REQUIRED ASTM STANDARDS BELOW. A. ASTM D624 Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers. B. ASTM D2859 Standard Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials C. ASTM E303 Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester D. ASTM F1292 Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment 32 18 16.13-PAGE 3 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 18 16.13 27 AUGUST 2019 PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING E. ASTM F1951 Standard Specification for Determination of Accessibility of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment F. ASTM C1028 Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull Meter Method—This standard replaces ASTM D2047 G. STM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension 1.08 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE A. The poured-in-place safety surfacing manufacturer must provide the following Warranty items: a. The poured-in-place safety surfacing manufacturer shall provide a warranty to the owner that covers defects in materials and workmanship of the rubber for a period of FIVE (5) years from the date of Substantial Completion. b. The manufacturer's warranty shall include general wear and tear. The warranty may specifically exclude vandalism, high heel punctures, acts of war or acts of nature beyond the control of the owner or the manufacturer. c. All poured-in-place warranties shall provide for the repair or replacement of the affected areas and should include all necessary materials, labor, transportation costs, etc. to complete said repairs. B. The manufacturer shall provide instructions to the owner's personnel on proper maintenance and repair of the surfacing. 1.09 GUARANTEE A. Contractor must guarantee that all work performed under this section is free from any defects in materials and workmanship. Upon notice in writing from the owner, within one (1) year of physical completion, the contractor must, at no cost to the owner, make all necessary repairs or replacements of the defective work in question. During this guarantee period, the owner must perform normal maintenance. 1.10 SITE CLIMATE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Install surfacing system when minimum ambient temperature is 45 degrees Fahrenheit and maximum ambient temperature is 105 degrees Fahrenheit. Installation outside of these temperature parameters will void the product wa rra nty. 2. Do not install in steady or heavy rain. 32 18 16.13-PAGE 4 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 18 16.13 27 AUGUST 2019 PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, EQUIPMENT, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store playground protective surfacing items in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Handle with sufficient care to prevent damage. B. Trailer/ Large truck access will be necessary for the installation. In the case that access for trailer/truck is not available the Contractor will be responsible for transporting material to the job site. C. Crew is responsible for protecting the surface only while on site. Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the surfacing overnight during installation, as well as during the surfacing's curing period upon completion of the install. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 POURED-IN-PLACE PROTECTIVE SURFACING A. Poured-In-Place Protective Surfacing to be FLEXGROUND poured-in-place safety surfacing system. Manufactured by FlexGround, LLC and available from Northwest Playground Equipment, Inc., P.O Box 2410, Issaquah, WA 98027, (425) 313-9161, Sales@nwplayground.com, www.nwplayground.com. Or approved equal. B. Poured -In-Place Safety surfacing should be in accordance with the following: 1. A dual durometer poured-in-place system with a wearing layer upper membrane and an underlying impact attenuation cushion layer. The finished surface shall be porous and capable of being installed at varying thickness to comply with the Critical Fall Height requirements of the playground equipment. 2. Surfacing primer shall be a 100% solids urethane primer/sealer and shall be designed with low viscosity and with penetrating abilities. 3. The cushion layer shall be a mixture of black recycled SBR rubber buffings mixed with a 100% solids moisture cured MDI Polyurethane binder or aliphatic (100 pounds of SBR rubber buffings to 12 pounds of binder) installed at the appropriate thickness. Only if recycled SBR rubber buffings are not available, 5/8" chunk rubber with the correct amount of urethane for impact attenuation and longevity may be used. Chunk rubber shall not include SBR derived from rubber tires. Chunk rubber must be high quality preconsumed recycled rubber containing EPDM. The cushion layer should be porous. 4. The wearing surface shall be manufactured from a mixture of a 1 to 3mm virgin peroxide cured Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) rubber granules 32 18 16.13-PAGE 5 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 18 16.13 27 AUGUST 2019 PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING bonded by FLEXGROUND binder, 100% solids moisture cured Polyurethane binder or aliphatic (110 pounds of EPDM to 22 pounds of binder), and applied to a minimum thickness of%" (12.7 mm) over the cushion layer. C. Colors and Color Blends: as shown in Contract Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work of this section will be completed. Do not proceed until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been satisfactorily corrected and thus meet the manufacturer's instructions. Beginning of work constitutes the acceptance of site conditions as satisfactory. 3.02 SITE PREPARATION AND BASE A. The sub-base will have a slope of 2%. B. The base aggregate should consist of a minimum of four inches (4") free-draining stone compacted to 95%. Finish slope of porous aggregate should be 2%from the centerline of the area to the perimeter, and the grade should not vary more than a quarter inch (%") in ten feet (10'). C. The sub base should be installed in two inch (2") lifts to appropriate thickness. D. The sub-base should be compacted using vibrating tamper, to approximately 95% Proctor density. E. The sub-grade should no longer have any vegetation. F. Sublevel grade is to be compacted prior to the ABC aggregate installation. Particular attention should be paid to areas of disturbed earth such as where footers for playground equipment enter the ground. Concrete should be poured to the top of sublevel surface. G. The poured-in-place safety surfacing manufacturer and architect will accept the aggregate base in writing prior to the installation of the poured-in-place system. H. Any alterations must be agreed between all parties. I. For concrete surfaces, shot blast, acid etch or power scarify as required to obtain optimum bond of the cushion layer to the concrete is required. Remove sufficient material to provide a sound surface, free of glaze, efflorescence, or form release agents. Remove grease, oil, and other penetrating contaminants. 32 18 16.13-PAGE 6 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 18 16.13 27 AUGUST 2019 PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING J. For concrete or asphalt surface that is not enclosed (i.e. a curb to curb pour), the concrete shall have keyway cuts 1.5" wide by 1.5" deep so that the system can be bull nosed down into the notch area. 3.03 POURED-IN-PLACE PLAYGROUND SURFACING INSTALLATION A. The poured-in-place safety surfacing installer should strictly adhere to the installation procedures specified. Any variance from these requirements shall only be accepted in writing by the manufacturer's onsite representative and submitted to the owner's representative, verifying that the changes do not in any way affect the warranty. B. Perimeter 1. A urethane primer shall be applied to concrete, asphalt or wood surfaces at a rate of 200-250 square feet per gallon. The entire area does not need to be primed at once, instead, prime about 700 square feet at a time. This procedure shall be continued until all areas are complete. 2. The urethane primer shall be applied to any playground equipment that will be surrounded by the poured-in-place safety surfacing system C. Cushion Layer 1. The components of the poured-in-place safety surfacing shall be mixed on site in a mixer to ensure a comprehensive mix according to manufacturer's instructions. 2. The cushion layer comprised of SBR buffings shall be mixed with the MDI moisture cure polyurethane binder at a rate of 12% of the total weight of the material thoroughly so that the binder is evenly dispersed into the rubber base. The cushion layer comprised of non-tire derived SBR & EPDM Chunk Rubber shall be mixed with the appropriate amount of urethane so that the binder is evenly dispersed into the rubber base. 3. Toluene Diphenel Isocyanate (TDI) shall not be used. 4. The cushion layer mix shall then be spread and troweled to the appropriate depth based on critical fall height requirement and allow to cure for 24 hours. D. Wear Course Layer 1. The wear course layer shall be mixed with 1-3mm EPDM granules and urethane binder at a rate of 20% of the total weight of the materials so the granules are covered thoroughly and evenly. 32 18 16.13-PAGE 7 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 18 16.13 27 AUGUST 2019 PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING 2. The wear course layer mix shall be spread and troweled to a depth of a half inch (%") immediately after the application of primer. 3. Where seams are required due to color change, a step configuration will be constructed to maintain wear surface integrity. Step seam shall overlap a minimum of 4". Butt seams are not acceptable. The surfaces between color changes shall be flush to each other. 4. The finished texture shall be slip resistant, smooth and even. 5. The poured-in-place surface shall be allowed to cure for 24-72 hours or until dry to the touch. 3.04 CLEANUP A. Sweep and/or rake playground protective surfacing materials away from all paved surfaces and remove it from all surrounding turf or planted areas. B. Clean and sweep the installed playground protective surfacing. Remove any excess materials from the job site. C. Contractor shall provide a dumpster for all waste and trash. 3.05 SUBSTANTIAL AND PHYSICAL COMPLETION A. Inspection to determine Substantial and Physical Completion of Playground Protective Surfacing work will be made by the Owner's Representative upon the Contractor's request. B. Upon Physical Completion, the Owner will request third-party Audit by a Certified Playground Safety Inspector(refer to section 1168 13 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT). Do not allow public access to the playground equipment without Owner's approval. END OF SECTION 32 18 16.13-PAGE 8 OF 8 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION SECTION 32 84 00 IRRIGATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Furnish and install an automatically-controlled, underground irrigation system and associated equipment, labor, and materials as indicated. System for Phase 2 shall be connected to Phase 1 system and provide a fully-functional, irrigation system for all planting and lawn areas of the pa rk. B. This Section also includes the Guarantee of the irrigation system during the planting Guarantee Period of one (1) year duration to ensure the health and establishment of plant materials. Refer to Section 32 90 00 Planting. C. This Section includes the maintenance of the irrigation system during the one (1) year Guarantee Period. 1.02 EXISTING PHASE 1 IRRIGATION SYSTEM A. Prior to beginning construction, the Contractor and Owner's Representative shall meet on site to test and document the working order and condition of the existing irrigation system. B. Portions of the existing irrigation system and equipment shall be removed where required by new construction per Contract Drawings. Materials and equipment that are in good working order and without damage maybe be salvaged for reuse in the Phase 2 irrigation system. Return all removed irrigation materials and equipment that is in good working order but not reused in the Phase 2 irrigation system to the Owner. C. Coordinate existing underground sprinkler irrigation from Phase 1 with new irrigation. Repair all damage to existing Phase 1 irrigation system caused by construction, and return existing irrigation system to a fully operational pre-construction condition at no additional cost to Owner. Existing Phase 1 irrigation "As-Built" Drawings are available from Owner. 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install a complete underground sprinkler irrigation system to provide efficient and even irrigation with head-to-head coverage of all planting areas shown on the Contract Drawings. Irrigation system shall have minimum overspray onto signs, paved or non-planted areas and no overspray onto buildings and as specified in the Specifications and be complete and ready for operation. 32 84 00-PAGE 1 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION B. The work included in this Specification (whether mentioned or not) shall consist of all tools, materials, tests, permits and other related items necessary for the installation and operation of the irrigation system. Included shall be all labor necessary for installation, including trenching, plumbing, back-filling, electrical wiring, adjustments, and all other items of labor necessary for a satisfactory operating system. C. Irrigation piping layout is schematic. Locate piping in planting areas unless shown in sleeves between planting areas. Avoid conflicts with plant materials, lighting fixtures, signs, architectural features, above and below ground utilities, and drainage systems. D. Any item of labor, material or equipment not specified or shown in detail, but incidental to or necessary for the complete installation and proper operation of the system, shall be furnished by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. E. All sleeving required for the execution of the work is to be provided as specified. Coordinate locations and installation of pipe sleeving with the general contractor prior to paving operations. 1.04 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A. Related work in other sections of these Specifications includes but is not limited to: 1. Specification 32 90 00— PLANTING. 2. Specification 3123 16— EXCAVATION. 3. Specification 3123 23.00— FILL AND BACKFILL. 4. Specification 3123 23.15 —TRENCH BACKFILL. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS OF INSTALLER A. Contractor must be a bonded irrigation contractor.The sprinkler irrigation system must be installed by an experienced irrigation mechanic, Certified Irrigation Technician, or Journeyman Plumber. B. All electrical service connection work must be completed by a licensed Electrical Contractor. C. All potable water system components shall be installed by a Washington State Licensed Plumber. D. All testing of the backflow prevention equipment including the 'double check valve assembly' shall be done by a Washington State Certified Backflow Assembly Tester(BAT). 1.06 VERIFICATION A. Before proceeding with any work, inspect the site, carefully check all grades and verify all dimensions and conditions affecting the work in order to proceed safely. Changes or alterations to the system to meet actual conditions shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. 32 84 00-PAGE 2 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION B. Report to the Owner's Representative all deviation and/or conflicts between Drawings, Specifications and site conditions. Extra work arising from failure to do so shall be completed at the Contractor's expense. C. Prior to the start of any work, verify available static water pressure (PSI) and gallons per minute (GPM) at point-of-connection to water service. Submit written verification of available PSI to Owner's Representative prior to beginning work. Any replacement, relocation or additional materials required as a failure to check (PSI) shall be completed at the Contractor's expense. 1.07 CHANGE ORDERS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Do no work for extra compensation without prior written approval of the Owner in the form of a Change Order. B. The intent of the Contract Drawings and Specifications is to provide a totally integrated irrigation system. Substitutions will be accepted only if they are proven to be wholly compatible with this system. 1.08 PERMITS, CODES AND REGULATIONS A. Apply for and pay for all necessary permits and fees as required by Local Authority and prevailing ordinances and/or codes. B. Keep fully informed and shall comply with all existing laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations which in any way affect the conduct of the work. 1.09 INTERPRETATION OF THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. Irrigation Drawings are diagrammatic and are not intended to show exact location of such items as piping,valves, controllers, and other equipment. Locate these items as closely as possible or as per related details to curbs, header boards, fences or edges of paving. Locate such items as piping, valves, controllers and other equipment inside park site as shown and noted on the Contract Drawings. B. Pipe lines shown parallel on the Contract Drawings may be placed in a common trench. Sprinkler heads are shown accurately and shall be installed as indicated by center of symbol. C. Trenching that may potentially disturb root systems of existing trees is to be brought to the attention of the Owner's Representative before proceeding. 1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY AND PERSONS A. Take all necessary precautions to protect work in progress, all property, persons, utilities, walks, curbs, pavement and buildings from any damage that might be incurred arising from this 32 84 00-PAGE 3 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION Contract. Repair to the satisfaction of the Owner, at Contractor's expense, any damage to the above and existing landscape. 1.11 CONDUCT OF WORK A. Continuously maintain a competent superintendent or foreman during progress of the work, with the authority to act in all matters pertaining to the work. The Contractor shall give personal attention to the fulfillment of the contact and shall keep the work under control. B. Confine operations to the working areas allotted by the Owner, including material and equipment storage. C. Progressively clean the work site of debris and rubbish as the work proceeds. Keep streets, sidewalks and site clean, free from debris and affected drains open and free flowing at all times. D. Locate and identify all underground utilities (on or near Public Rights-of-Way/ Property Lines) prior to digging and/or driving stakes. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of existing known utilities. Repair to the satisfaction of the Owner any damage to existing utilities. Existing known utilities have been shown on the Architectural/Engineering and/or Survey Drawings and will be made available from the Owner and/or Utility Companies. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to verify utility locations on the ground with a pipe-finder or by other means. Contact Utility Locate at 1- 800-424-5555 in advance of any digging to have existing utilities located and marked on-site. Should ditching or digging intercept and damage any existing or installed utilities, all further work within said area shall stop until the Owner is advised and the Owner can review a repair method and schedule. F. Provide barricades and safety guards, and any other structures or improvements necessary for the complete protection of the public. G. The Contractor shall bear sole responsibility for damage to and/or water leaks on the Owner's property and any property located outside of the project site, which is caused by the Contractor's negligence during construction of the project. The Contractor shall also bear sole responsibility for any pollution of rivers, streams, groundwater or other waters that may occur as a result of construction operations. The Contractor shall replace, repair and pay for all damages caused by his/her negligence to the satisfaction of the Owner prior to final payment. H. During the installation of the new irrigation system, if underground utilities are encountered, including (but not limited to) existing irrigation system(s), notify the Owner's Representative immediately and perform repairs to that system as specified and/or as directed by the Owner's Representative. This shall also apply to the connection of new irrigation systems to existing, older systems. 32 84 00-PAGE 4 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION 1.12 SYSTEM PROTECTION A. As a part of the guarantee under this contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for the deactivating and draining of the system prior to the onset of the freezing season and for reactivating the system at the onset of the spring growing season; each task must be accomplished once during the one (1) year Guarantee Period. B. In the event the system is completed in a season when the system will not be in use, the Contractor will winterize the system upon acceptance and will reactivate the system in the spring. The Contractor shall, upon completion of the winterizing phase, submit a letter to the Owner and the Owner's Representative certifying that the system was winterized and drained, and indicates the date when such action was accomplished.The Contractor shall be liable for any damage resulting from failure to comply.The Contractor shall notify both the Owner and the Owner's Representative 48 hours prior to the work so that the Owner's Representative can be present during the winterizing and reactivating phases of work. 1.13 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee the irrigation system for all workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year, coinciding with planting Guarantee Period. Repair and/or replace defective irrigation equipment as determined by the Owner for the duration of the Guarantee Period. Repairs and/or replacements shall be made in the same manner as specified for the original irrigation system and shall be completed at no cost to the Owner. B. Should any trouble develop within one (1) year which, in the opinion of the Owner, is due to inferior or faulty material and/or workmanship, the trouble shall be corrected, without delay, to the satisfaction of the Owner and at the Contractor's expense. C. Any settling of backfilled trenches shall be repaired by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense, including but not limited to, restoration of pavement, seeded areas, sodded lawn, and/or planted areas. 1.14 MAINTENANCE A. It is expressly understood the Owner will be responsible during the one (1) year Guarantee Period for normal maintenance of the project, as defined in the Operation and Maintenance Manual and Watering Schedule Submittals. B. Irrigation Maintenance by Owner shall coincide with the Final Acceptance of the irrigation system. 32 84 00-PAGE 5 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION 1.15 TESTS A. Pre-test for Pressure Test and Coverage Test prior to the Owner's Representative's review of said tests to confirm that the irrigation system will meet the requirements of the specified tests. B. Once pre-tests are completed and acceptable results are confirmed by the Contractor, tests shall be witnessed by the Owner's Representative.The Contractor shall give at least 48 hours advance notice of tests. C. Should additional test reviews be required due to conditions found to be the Contractors responsibility, reimburse the Owner for billed costs for the participation of the Owner's Representative in repeated test reviews. Billed costs may include time, telephone, travel expenses, and per diem allowances for meals and lodging incurred as a direct consequence of the additional activities. 1.16 SUBMITTALS A. Irrigation Material Documentation 1. Submit 4 sets of samples and/or manufacturer's "Catalog Cuts" of all material as noted in Specifications. Failure to do so may result in non-acceptance of materials already used or hauled to the site. Any removal or delays incurred will be at the expense of the Contractor. 2. All samples submitted for approval must be unaltered and of quantity sufficient to allow for proper inspection and review. B. Manufacturer's Instruction/ Maintenance/Operation Information: 1. The Contractor shall provide 2 sets of the following, in three-ring binders with sections indexed and tabbed. a. List of authorized distributers and service representatives for each item of equipment used, including names, addresses and phone numbers. b. Instruction manuals for all equipment installed. c. Parts list with specifications numbers for each item installed. d. Winterization and start up procedures. e. Controller wire color code chart. 2. Controller Charts: a. The existing Phase 1 Controller Chart will be revised to include Phase 2 irrigation system work. b. The Chart shall be a bond copy print with a different pastel transparent color to show each separate zone. Verify that the zone number as shown on the Controller Chart matches the number on the actual control valve identification tag. c. Provide one controller chart per controller. Controller chart shall fit in behind controller door. d. When completed and approved, hermetically seal (laminate) the chart between two pieces of plastic. e. The charts shall be completed before the project can obtain Physical Completion. 32 84 00-PAGE 6 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION C. Watering Schedule Submittal: Contractor shall cooperate with Landscape Contractor in providing Owner with a written "watering schedule" to ensure adequate watering of all plant materials during the Warranty Period of this Contract. D. As-Built Drawings: See As-Built Drawing Section herein. E. Written documentation of the date the irrigation system was winterized. F. Written documentation of existing static water pressure (PSI) and flow (GPM). G. Spare Parts 1. The Contractor shall provide to the Owners Representative the following items as spare parts at no additional cost. a. 2 sets of Controller cabinet keys. b. 3 sets of Quick Coupler keys with hose swivels. c. 3 of each type and size of head and nozzle used on this project. d. 5 of each type of irrigation head. 2. Spare parts shall be placed in a clearly labeled box within the Restroom's Storage Room. 1.17 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining a current and accurate record of all equipment installed and record any deviations to the plans (all deviations to the plans shall be approved by the Owners Representative). As-Built records shall be updated daily on site and shall be available for review by Owners Representative at any time. All mainline, sleeves, quick coupler valves, automatic control valves, manual gate valves, double check valves electrical splice boxes, controllers, shall be dimensioned on As-Built drawings to two permanent monuments. Upon completion of the system and prior to acceptance, the Contractor shall provide the Owner's Representative with a neat and clean reproducible hard copy set of As-Built drawings. The contractor shall also provide the As-Built drawings as a scanned PDF. Coordinates shall be based upon Washington State grid. B. After acceptance of the As-Built drawings, the Contractor shall place a reduced, non-fading, laminated copy inside the controller cabinet door. 1.18 PIPE SLEEVES A. Provide and install pipe sleeves as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified in these Specifications. Coordinate location and installation of pipe sleeves with general contractor prior to paving operations. 32 84 00-PAGE 7 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment shall be new and of the best quality. All items of equipment or material shall be as specified or approved equal. 2.02 METAL PIPE B. All brass, copper, and galvanized pipe required for the irrigation system and connections to the double check valve assembly and pressure reducing valve shall meet City of Renton standards. 2.03 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC pipe upstream and downstream of the control valves shall be Schedule 40 complying with ASTM D1785. B. PVC pipe sleeving: Schedule 40 and conform to all requirements of ASTM D1785. C. All glued and threaded fittings for lateral lines shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466 Schedule 40 PVC. All fittings shall be of the solvent weld type except where risers, valves, etc. require threaded transition fittings. D. All threaded fittings for mainlines shall conform to requirements of ASTM D2464 Schedule 80 PVC. All glued fittings for mainline shall conform to requirements of ASTM D2466. E. All pipe shall be marked with manufacturer's name, class of pipe and NSF seal. Pipe shall bear no evidence of interior or exterior extrusion marks. Pipe walls shall be uniform, smooth and glossy. Pipe may be pre-belled or with individual solvent-weld couplings. F. All threaded fittings for mainlines shall conform to requirements of ASTM D2464 Schedule 80 PVC. All glued fittings for mainlines shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Schedule 40 PVC. G. PVC Threaded Nipples: Schedule 80, complying with ASTM D1785. H. All pipe must be delivered in at least 20 foot lengths. 32 84 00-PAGE 8 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION I. All PVC pipe and fittings shall conform to the following minimums: 1. Tensile strength 78F 5,000 psi 2. Izod impact strength (notched) 15 ft. lb./in. 3. Modulus of elasticity 300,000 psi 4. Compressive strength 8,500 psi 5. Flexural strength 10,000 psi 2.04 PVC PIPE JOINT COMPOUND AND PRIMER A. Joint compound: Slow drying, heavy-duty PVC solvent cement type. B. Primer: Tinted, compatible with joint compound. 2.05 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER A. Existing Phase 1 Automatic Controller shall be replaced with an expanded Automatic Controller per Contract Drawings. B. Shall be of the type, manufacturer, and size shown on the Contract Drawings or approved equal. C. Controller wiring that is above ground shall be installed in Schedule 80 grey electric conduit. 2.06 POP-UP IRRIGATION HEADS A. Shall be of the type, manufacturer, and size shown on the Contract Drawings or approved equal. 2.07 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES WITH BALL VALVES A. Shall be of the type, manufacturer, and size shown on the Contract Drawings or approved equal; ball valve shall be upstream of the automatic control valve as shown on the Contract Drawings. 2.08 CONTROL WIRE FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVE OPERATIONS A. Control wire must be insulated single strand copper designed for 24 to 50 volts and UL approved as Type U.F. (Underground Feeder). UL and U.F. designations must be clearly marked on insulation jacket of wire. B. Copper conductor must meet or exceed ASTM B-3 requirements. C. Minimum wire size shall be No. 14 AWG. Minimum size of wire is to be determined strictly by the wire sizing chart provided by control valve manufacturer. 32 84 00-PAGE 9 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION D. The control wires shall be color coded as follows: Ground Wire -White Lead (Hot) Wire - Red Spare Wire—Yellow E. Wire Splice Connections: 3M, DBY, Rainbird Penn-Tite, Scotchlok or approved equal. 2.09 QUICK COUPLING VALVES A. Shall be of the type, manufacturer and size shown on the Contract Drawings or approved equal. B. Provide 2 matching valve keys, 2 cap keys and 2 hose swivels to the Owner. 2.10 VALVE BOXES A. Unless otherwise specified, all automatic valves and manual gate valves shall be enclosed in Carson Industries with locking lid or approved equal. B. Manual gate valves and quick coupler valves shall be enclosed in a Carsons industries 910-128, 10-inch round box with green bolt down cover or approved equal. C. Provide two lid keys and two valve keys per Valve Box type to the Owner. D. Size valve boxes as required to provide approximately 3 inches clear between valve box and valve on all sides. Provide and install valve box extensions as required. 2.11 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY A. Double check valve assembly is existing. 2.12 PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVE A. Pressure reducing valve is existing. 2.13 IRRIGATION WATER METER A. Irrigation water meter is existing. 2.14 FLOW SENSOR A. Flow sensor is existing. 32 84 00-PAGE 10 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION 2.15 MASTER CONTROL VALVE A. Master Control Valve is existing. 2.16 MANUAL GATE VALVE B. Shall be of the type, manufacturer and size shown on the Contract Drawings. 2.17 BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Gravel Backfill for Drain (for use under valve boxes only): 1. Three-quarter minus round, water worn, washed gravel. B. Sand (backfill soils around PVC pipe): 1. Fine granular material naturally produced by rock disintegration and free from organic material, loam, clay and other deleterious substances. C. Native Material (backfill soil around PVC pipe): 1. Soil native to project site free of wood and other deleterious materials and rocks over one quarter (1/4) inch diameter. 2.18 POLYETHYLENE SWING RISER A. All polyethylene swing risers used in container irrigation system shall be "Rainbird SPX Swing Pipe" or approved equal. 2.19 OTHER SUPPLIES A. Electrical tape shall be black plastic, three-quarters (3/4) inch wide and a minimum of 0.007 inches thick and the all-weather type. B. All quick coupling valve pipe joints shall be "Triple Swing Joint" or approved equal. C. All electrical wire splices must be made watertight with sealing 3M Direct Burial Splice Kit or approved equal. D. Provide one (1) SHHR (Sentinel Hand Held Remote) with battery. 32 84 00-PAGE 11 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING SYSTEM PROTECTION A. Protect and maintain existing Phase 1 irrigation system that is to remain in place during the entire construction period. All interruptions to existing irrigation water service for Phase 1 planted areas that are to remain must be approved by Owner prior to periodic shutdowns. B. Repair and/or replace any damage to existing Phase 1 system that is to remain in place. All new pipe and fittings are subject to hydrostatic testing per specifications. 3.02 TRENCHING A. Trenches shall allow for 12 inches of cover over lateral lines, and 24 inches of cover for irrigation main lines unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings. Maintain a minimum clearance of 3 inches between irrigation lines within a common trench.Trenches for sleeves shall allow for a minimum of 18 inches of cover unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings. Excavate no wider at any point than is necessary to lay pipe or install equipment. Excavate with vertical sides and provide bracing and shoring as required. B. All trenches must be straight and not have abrupt changes in grade.Trenching that may potentially disturb root systems of existing Phase 1 trees or planting shall be brought to the attention of the Owner's Representative before proceeding with work. C. The trench bottoms and bedding material surrounding all pipes must be free of rocks greater than one inch in diameter and all sharp-edged objects. Bed and surround all pipe with Backfill Material as specified in these Specifications. D. Pulling of pipe is not permitted unless otherwise reviewed by Owner's Representative and approved by the Owner. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. PVC Pipe and Fittings (Includes Pipe Sleeves): 1. Due to the nature of PVC pipe and fittings, the Contractor shall exercise care in handling, loading, unloading and storing to avoid damage. Any pipe that has been dented or damaged shall be discarded until such damage has been cut out and the pipe is rejoined with a coupling. 2. PVC pipe ends shall be cut to 90 degrees to the pipe length and cleaned of all cutting burrs prior to cementing. Use approved reaming tool. Pipe ends shall be wiped clean with a rag lightly wetted with PVC thinner. Cement shall be applied with a light coat on the inside of the fitting and a heavier coat on the outside of the pipe. Pipe shall be inserted into the fitting and given a quarter turn to seat the cement. Excessive use of cement is not permitted. Pipe will 32 84 00-PAGE 12 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION be tested as indicated elsewhere in these specifications. No backfilling will be permitted other than at the centers of pipe lengths until the pressure test is completed. 3. Backfilling shall be completed when pipe is not in an expanded condition due to heat or pressure. Cooling of the pipe can be accomplished by operating the system for a short time before backfill or by backfilling in the early part of the morning before the heat of the day. 4. No PVC pipe may be threaded or connected to a threaded fitting without an adapter. 5. Great care must be taken to insure that the inside of the pipe is absolutely clean. Any pipe ends not being worked on must be protected and not left open. 6. All threaded joints shall have Teflon tape installed per manufacturer recommendations. B. Head Locations 1. Heads immediately adjacent to walks, curbs, pavement, shrub/groundcover planting bed edge, etc. shall have one (1) inch clearance between head and walks, curbs, pavement, shrub/groundcover planting bed edge etc. unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings. C. Control Wire 1. Control wires are to be taped together at 5 foot intervals; then this bundle is to be taped to the bottom of the supply line at 10 foot intervals with at least 3 wraps of electrical tape. 2. All wire splices must be made watertight with sealing 3M Direct Burial Splice Kit and contained in valve boxes. 3. Splices will be permitted only at the valves and never between valves or valve and controller unless in a separate valve box. There must be a separate lead (hot) wire to each automatic valve. One ground wire will be acceptable. 4. Arrange valve stations to operate in sequence shown on "As-Built" Drawings. 5. One or more spare wire(s) shall be provided to all control valves. The spare wire(s) shall be shared by all the valves and shall complete the circuit back to the controller. Wire sizes shall be the same as the sizing chart provided by the control valve manufacturer D. Risers: 1. All sprinklers and quick coupler head risers shall be installed per details shown on Contract Drawings. The pipe risers must have the same inlet size as the sprinkler and quick coupler heads. 2. Minimum riser size shall be the pipe size of the sprinkler head. 3. Risers are to be capped after installation to keep inside of pipe clean. 4. Care must be taken not to over-tighten the threaded pipe into the PVC fittings. E. Automatic Controller: 1. Electrical wiring shall be installed according to local code requirements. The cost of all electrical work necessary to make the automatic controller equipment operate properly at the electrical service stub-out to the controller shall be included in this contract. ELECTRICAL SERVICE FROM AN APPROVED SOURCE TO THE CONTROLLER LOCATION SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 2. Controller location and type of mounting of controller shall be as specified and as shown on the Contract Drawings. Contractor shall coordinate location and installation of the Automatic 32 84 00-PAGE 13 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION Controller with the General Contractor prior to installing the new Phase 2 irrigation system and combining with the existing Phase 1 system that is to remain in place. 3. The Contractor shall use readable handwriting to post the valve schedule in the controller to facilitate the selection of the valves to be operated. 4. The Contractor shall remove the existing Phase 1 Automatic Controller and provide to the Owner. The new, expanded Automatic Controller shall be installed in the Restroom's Storage Room. 5. All of the existing Phase 1 automatic control valves and zones that are to remain will be reconnected to the new Automatic Controller along with the new Phase 2 automatic control valves and zones. F. Double Check Valve Assembly: 1. See irrigation plan for location of the existing Phase 1 Double Check Valve Assembly. G. Manual Gate Valve 1. Install per detail shown on the Contract Drawings. H. Pressure Reducing Valve 1. See irrigation plan for location of the existing Phase 1 pressure reducing valve. I. Irrigation Water Meter(s): 1. Irrigation Water Meter is existing. See Civil Drawings. J. Automatic Control Valves: 1. Install per detail shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Before installation of any automatic valves, the supply line must be thoroughly flushed. 3. All automatic valves shall be enclosed in valve boxes set above finish grade as shown on details. Valve box extension may be required. Locate valve boxes in shrub and groundcover planting beds wherever possible and at points of easy access from paved and/or lawn areas. 4. Locate outside of paved areas and grouped together where possible. Where valves occur adjacent to paved areas, install valves so that valve boxes will not be closer than 12 inches to paving. Valve boxes shall be perpendicular or parallel to pavement and grouped to provide a neat appearance. K. Quick Coupling Valves: 1. Install per detail show on the Contract Drawings. Locate all quick couplers in shrub and/or groundcover planting beds when possible and at points of easy access from paved and/or lawn areas. L. Flow Sensor: 1. See irrigation plan for location of the existing Phase 1 flow sensor. M. Master Control Valve: 1. See irrigation plan for location of the existing Phase 1 master control valve. 32 84 00-PAGE 14 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION N. Pipe Sleeves: 1. All sleeves shall extend a minimum of 12 inches beyond the edges of pavement. 2. Pipe for irrigation mains and laterals may be installed with sleeves but shall not include any pipes with couplers whenever possible. 3. Plug all ends of sleeves and irrigation mains and laterals to prevent soil from entering. O. Backfilling: 1. In refilling trenches, the bedding around the pipe and fittings shall be approved "Backfill Materials" as defined herein and shall be well tamped. If necessary, provide suitable imported backfill. Trenches shall be thoroughly compacted and water-settled.Trenches shall be backfilled uniform with the surrounding grade, raked to a slight mound, then rolled with a 250 pound roller, or compact with a vibrator. 2. All roots, rocks and surplus excavation shall be removed from the site unless otherwise directed. 3. Trenches and pipe sleeves under roads or paved areas shall be backfilled and tamped with a mechanical tamper in successive six inch lifts to at least 95% density as determined by ASTM D1557. Paving shall be replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner. 4. Before backfilling, all underground appurtenances including risers, valves, drain valves, etc., must remain exposed so that they can be viewed during testing. Leave all joints exposed; then complete backfilling after flushing, pressure testing, inspection and preparation of"As- Built Drawings". The location, inspecting and testing provisions of these specifications will be strictly adhered to. If, for any reason, any part of the sprinkler system is backfilled before approved location, testing, or inspection is authorized by Owner's Representative, it must be completely uncovered and exposed until approved for backfilling by the Owner's Representative. 3.04 PRESSURE TESTING A. For PVC components of irrigation system: 1. All PVC system joints, connections, couplings, valves, dripper tubing, and all other junction points shall be left exposed until completion and acceptance of the pressure test. All leaks, however minor, shall be repaired and corrected. 2. Before any testing, all piping for Phase 2 work shall be thoroughly flushed. No Phase 2 automatic control valves shall be connected to the main line prior to testing. All pipe, fittings, gate valves, and automatic control valve stubouts for the new Phase 2 system shall be exposed for inspections during pressure tests. Center load pipe with a small amount of backfill to prevent arching or movement under pressure. 3. Isolate the mainlines for the Phase 2 system. Phase 2 mainlines shall be purged of air and tested with a minimum static water pressure of 150 psi for 60 minutes without the introduction of additional water service or pumping pressure. The maximum allowable pressure loss shall be 5 psi within 30 minutes. Pressure gauge shall be installed on the mainline at a point approved by Owners Representative. 32 84 00-PAGE 15 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION 4. Phase 2 lateral lines shall be tested at static water pressure. All swing joints shall be capped. All pipe, fittings and swing joints shall be left exposed for inspection. Prior to inspection lines shall be filled with water and air removed from the line. Inspection of lateral lines will be visually. C. The Owner's Representative shall be present during all tests. The new Phase 2 portion of the irrigation system shall be pressure tested for acceptance. D. Rejected systems or portions thereof shall be repaired and re-tested as specified. E. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, gauges, pumps, materials, and labor for all testing. 3.05 COVERAGE TESTING A. Before acceptance of the sprinkler system, the Contractor, in the presence of the Owner's Representative, shall perform an irrigation water"Coverage Test" to determine if the water coverage and operation of the combined Phase 1 and Phase 2 irrigation system is complete and satisfactory for the entire park. B. If any part of the Phase 2 system is inadequate, it shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense and the test repeated until accepted. The Contractor must give 48 hours written notice to the Owner's Representative prior to the field review. C. The Contractor shall also adjust and balance sprinkler heads of the new Phase 2 part of the system for optimum and uniform coverage without excessive fogging or overthrow on to signage, pavement(s), structure(s) and building(s); adjust all sprinkler head heights and set all valve boxes to proper grade prior to final review by Owner's Representative. D. After coverage test, the Owner's Representative may request up to 10% of total irrigation heads be adjusted or replaced in the new Phase 2 system at no additional cost. 3.06 COMPLETE SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY TEST (Punch List) A. Upon approved completion of the Coverage Test, trenching and installation of all equipment, the Contractor shall request a Complete System Functionality Test of the entire irrigation system including: backfilling, irrigation heads,valves,valve boxes, controller and all other equipment. B. From this inspection, a punch list shall be prepared by the Owner's Representative and presented to the Contractor for completion.The Owner's Representative shall give a date for completion of the punch list, not to exceed 10 working days. 32 84 00-PAGE 16 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 84 00 27 AUGUST 2019 IRRIGATION 3.07 CLEAN-UP A. Clean and remove all debris from work areas including paving, curbs, catch basins, manholes and planting areas, etc. caused by the Contractor's work on this project prior to watering. B. All hard-surfaced areas shall be washed clean. C. Daily clean up shall be required on all areas used for circulation, parking, or other daily use. 3.08 SYSTEM FAMILIARIZATION A. Upon acceptance of the system by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide the Owner necessary keys and/or other tools necessary to operate/drain/activate the system and spend sufficient time with the Owner to insure that the system operation/maintenance/winterizing can continue after the departure of the Contractor.The Contractor will be liable for all damages or losses resulting from failure to comply with the provisions of this paragraph. B. The Contractor shall cooperate with Landscape Contractor in providing the Owner with a written "watering schedule" to ensure adequate watering of all plant materials during the Guarantee Period of this Contract. END OF SECTION 32 84 00-PAGE 17 OF 17 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING SECTION 32 90 00 PLANTING PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Install landscaping using the materials as shown in the Contract Drawings and/or as specified in the Specifications. Install landscape to grades and conform to areas as shown in the Contract Drawings. B. The location of work shall include all areas within the limits of clearing and grading and all areas outside of the limits which are disturbed in the course of construction activities. Restore all landscape areas outside of project limits that are impacted by construction to match existing or improved conditions. Confine operations to the working areas allotted by the Owner for operations, including material and equipment storage. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all materials, equipment, labor and related items necessary to complete the work shown in the Contract Drawings and/or as specified in the Specifications. The work included in this section (whether mentioned or not) shall consist of all labor, tools, materials, tests, permits and other related items necessary for the provision and installation of all plant materials in a first quality workmanlike manner. B. Coordinate the layout and installation of plant materials with the installation of the irrigation system to ensure complete and full irrigation coverage of all planted areas. C. This section includes a Guarantee Period of one (1) year duration from Physical Completion to ensure the health and establishment of plant materials. 1.03 REFERENCES A. This specification section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. 1. American Nursery & Landscape Association/American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z60.1, American Standard for Nursery Stock(ASNS). 2. International Society of Arboriculture Best Management Practice Series. 3. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA): Federal Seed Act and Soil Classification. 4. Washington State Department of Transportation Standard Specification, latest edition. B. In case of conflict between the requirements of this specification section and the listed documents, the requirements of the contract specification sections shall prevail. 32 90 00-PAGE 1 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING C. All standards shall include the latest additions and amendments as of the date of advertisement for bids. 1.04 RELATED WORK A. Related work in other sections of these Specifications includes but is not limited to: 1. Specification 32 84 00— IRRIGATION 2. Specification 12 93 00—SITE FURNISHINGS 3. Specification 3110 00—SITE PREPARATION 4. Specification 3123 13 —SUBGRADE PREPARATION 5. Specification 3123 16— EXCAVATION 6. Specification 3123 23.00— FILL AND BACKFILL 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Nomenclature for plants and varieties shall be in accordance with the current edition of: 1. Hortus Third, The Staff of the L. H. Bailey Hortorium. 1976. MacMillan Publishing Co., New York, or 2. Flora of the Pacific Northwest, Hitchcock and Chronquist, University of Washington Press, 1998, or 3. PLANTS Database Website, as published and maintained by the United States Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service, (http://plants.usda.gov/) B. The term "Contractor" as used in this Specification section shall refer to the Landscape Contractor. C. Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, and lawn will hereinafter be collectively referred to as, "plants" or "plant material." 1.06 PERMITS, CODES, AND REGULATIONS A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits and fees as required by the Local Authority and prevailing ordinances and/or codes. B. Keep fully informed and comply with all existing laws, codes, ordinances and regulations that in any way affect the conduct of the work as drawn and specified. If the Contractor observes that a conflict exists between permit requirements and the work outlined in the contract documents, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing including a description of any necessary changes and changes to the contract price resulting from changes in the work. C. Wherever references are made to standards or codes in accordance with which work is to be performed or tested, the edition or revision of the standards and codes current on the effective date of this contract shall apply, unless otherwise expressly set forth. 32 90 00-PAGE 2 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING D. In case of conflict among any referenced standards or codes or among any referenced standards and codes and the specifications, the more restrictive standard shall apply or Owner's Representative shall determine which shall govern. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work shall be performed by a licensed and bonded Contractor registered in the State of Washington and shall be qualified for landscaping work through certification by the Washington Association of Landscape Professionals (WALP) or by the Washington State Nursery and Landscape Association (WSNLA). B. Contractor shall have 5 years of documented experience in performing landscape work of comparable size, scope, and quality. C. Contractor must be experienced in landscape work of best-accepted trade practices and have equipment and personnel adequate to perform the work specified. D. Contractor must be familiar and comply with "American Standard for Nursery Stock" (ANSI Z60.1) published by the American Nursery & Landscape Association. E. The Contractor shall continuously maintain a competent superintendent or foreman during the progress of the work, with the authority to act for the Contractor in all matters pertaining to the landscape work. That individual, who shall direct the work, shall be thoroughly familiar with the types of materials being installed and the proper methods for their installation. F. The Contractor shall progressively clean the work site of debris and rubbish as the landscape work proceeds. G. Furnish evidence to the Owner's Representative that each pesticide and/or herbicide applicator is licensed for the specific class of chemical being applied. Also, furnish evidence that any chemical is registered for the proposed use by the Washington Department of Agriculture according to the Washington Control Act (RCW 15.58.050 through 130) and the General Pesticide Rules (WAC 16-228-1400 through 1460). H. Perform all necessary pruning of trees by an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist who is licensed as an arborist in the State of Washington. I. Site Inspections will be made by the Owner Representative. 1. Request Owner Representative inspections at least 72 hours in advance of the time inspection is required. 2. Inspections for the following critical path items are required: a. Pre-construction meeting prior to start of landscape work. b. When subgrade is being established and scarification is in process. c. When subgrade scarification has been completed. d. Observance of the subgrade percolation test. 32 90 00-PAGE 3 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING e. During soil preparation and soil installation activities (at least two inspections required). f. Finish grading and compaction prior to any planting. g. Inspection of plant materials before planting. h. Layout of plant material. i. All tree planting must be observed. j. Installation of mulch. k. Installation of sod. I. Installation of plant material. m. For Substantial Completion of all work (development of physical punch list items). n. For Physical Completion of all work(physical punch list items satisfactorily completed). o. Guarantee Period: quarterly site inspections up to Final Acceptance. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Plant Material Documentation. 1. Within 30 calendar days after award of a Contract, submit written documentation to the Owner's Representative that all specified plant materials have been ordered or procured. 2. List plant suppliers' names, addresses, and phone numbers and list respective growing or storage locations with addresses. 3. Submit color photographs of representative specimens of each type of tree and shrub on the plant list from the respective nursery. Photos shall be minimum 300 DPI digital *.jpg format, taken from an angle that depicts the size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Photos will show foliage, form, rootball, and trunk conditions. A scale rod or other measuring devise shall be included in the photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of three photos that show the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be provided. Label each photograph with the plant name, plant size, and name of the growing nursery 4. Approval of plant material documentation shall not be considered as final acceptance of the plant material itself. B. Soil Tests 1. Submit Soil Test Reports for: a. Native Topsoil (only if stockpiled for use as stated herein). b. Subgrade Soil. c. Planting Soil. d. Sod Lawn Soil. C. Soil Component Submittals 1. Submit a copy of the sales receipt for the purchase and a copy of the product labels and/or manufacturer data sheets for: a. Fertilizer and Soil Amendments. 2. Supplier Certifications, Sources, and test reports for: 32 90 00-PAGE 4 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING a. Compost. b. Sand. c. Sandy Loam. d. Fine Aggregate. e. Mulch. 3. Submit a sample of each of the following items: a. Planting Soil (1-pound bag). b. Sod Lawn Soil (1-pound bag). c. Rain Garden Soil (1-pound bag). d. Mulch (1-pound bag). e. Compost (1-pound bag). D. Watering Schedule: Prior to final acceptance of the Landscaping, the Contractor shall submit a written "watering schedule" to the Owner's Representative, coordinated with the Irrigation Contractor, to ensure adequate watering (summer, fall, winter& spring) of all plant materials during the Guarantee Period of this Contract. E. Temporary Storage: 10 working days prior to delivery of plant material to the project site, submit proposed on-site temporary storage location, water source, and proposed protection measures during various seasonal conditions, including protection methods form sun and wind. F. Weed and Pest Control Plan (including Invasive Species Removal Plan). G. Suppliers, Sources, and Catalogue Cutsheets 1. Landscape Boulders. 2. Root Barrier. 3. Tree Staking Materials. 4. Cobble Rock. H. Sod Analysis & Sample: See Lawn Sod as specified herein. I. Substitutions 1. The manufacturers, products, and suppliers are acceptable as specified herein. Substitutions may be allowed if proof of equivalent quality, suitable product specifications, manufacturer's literature, and other detailed information is provided to the Owner's Representative for review and approval. 2. No substitution of plant material, species, size, grade, or variety, will be permitted unless evidence is submitted in writing to the Owner's Representative that a specified plant cannot be obtained and has been unobtainable since the Award of the Contract. Provide the names and telephone numbers of at least five nursery suppliers that the Contractor has contacted. If substitution is permitted, it can be made only with written approval by the Owner's Representative The nearest variety, size, and grade as approved by the Owner shall then be furnished. 32 90 00-PAGE 5 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING 3. Should at any time, the procured nursery stock is lost or compromised due to weather or other natural occurrences, notify the Owner's Representative immediately of the need to locate new material. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Inspect the site before proceeding with any work, carefully check all grades, elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and verify all dimensions and conditions affecting the work. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or deviations between the Contract Drawings, Specifications, and site conditions shall be immediately communicated to the Owner in writing for clarification. Work done after discovery, unless authorized by the Owner's Representative and extra work arising from failure to notify the Owner is at the Contractor's risk and expense. B. Existing known utilities based on previous survey data have been shown and included in the Contract Drawings Additional information will be made available from the Owner or the Utility Companies. Verify, locate, and protect all known underground and above-ground utilities prior to digging or other earthwork activities. Promptly notify the Owner's Representative of any conflict between proposed work and obstruction(s). Failure to follow this procedure places upon the Contractor the responsibility and expense of making any and all repairs for damage from work therefrom. C. Underground Obstructions 1. In the event that undisclosed rock, concrete, crushed rock, boulders, gravel, soils contaminated with toxic substances, hardpan, or other underground obstructions are encountered in the subgrade, alternate planting locations may be selected by the Owner's Representative. 2. Where alternate planting locations are not accepted, the obstruction shall be removed to a depth of not less than three (3) feet below the bottom of root balls of plant material, when plants are properly set at the required finished grade. Alternately, other solutions to the problem will be reviewed with the Owner. 3. Work required to resolve the problem, such as removal of such underground obstructions will be as a unit price basis and agreed upon by a Change Order prior to commencement of work. D. Confine work to designated areas. Do not disturb existing vegetation outside project limits and protect all plant materials within project limits not designated to be removed, unless approved by the Owner's Representative prior to construction. Do not permit vehicular traffic or materials storage under or around new or existing trees. 1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY, AND PERSONS A. Take all necessary precautions to protect work in progress, all property, persons, walks, curbs, rooftop membranes and structures, utilities, pavement, and buildings from any damage that might be incurred arising from this Contract. The Contractor shall pay for any damage incurred by failure to take precautions at the Contractor's expense. 32 90 00-PAGE 6 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING B. Protect all paved surfaces (permeable and impermeable) from staining or clogging by planting soil and mulch. Do not remove protection until after initial acceptance of all work. C. Contractor is responsible for protection of landscaping work from theft and vandalism until physical completion of the work in whole or in part. 1.11 MAINTENANCE PRIOR TO PHYSICAL COMPLETION A. Phase 1 Plantings. 1. Coordinate construction schedule with maintenance schedule of Phase 1 plantings. 2. Coordinate with and allow access to Owner's maintenance personal for maintenance of Phase 1 plantings. B. Phase 2 Plantings. 1. Begin maintenance immediately after each plant is planted. Water, mulch, weed, fertilize, cultivate, and otherwise maintain and protect plants and landscape work on a regular basis (at least weekly) until Physical Completion. Tighten and repair tree ties and stakes as required. 2. Correct defective work as soon as possible after it becomes apparent and weather and season permit. Reset settled plants to proper grade and position, remove and replace dead plant material, and restore lawn areas and/or finish grade conditions. 3. Maintain mulch in planting beds at required compacted depths indicated in Contract Drawings. 4. Upon completion of landscape work and prior to receipt of certificate of Physical Completion, remove excess soil and debris from the site and repair all damage resulting from construction operations. 5. Do no pruning without approval of the Owner's Representative. 1.12 GUARANTEE PERIOD A. The Guarantee Period shall not begin until: 1. all landscape items on the list of items to be completed or corrected have been resolved, 2. all planting is alive, healthy, growing and installed as specified, and 3. the landscape work is deemed Physically Complete. B. Guarantee Period shall be 365 calendar days after the Physical Completion date of the landscape, including the irrigation system, to ensure healthy, vigorous growth and establishment of plant material and will end with Final Acceptance. C. Guarantee the work of this specification section against all defects of materials and workmanship, and plant material is established, remains alive, and is in a healthy, vigorous condition. D. Plant Replacement during the Guarantee Period: 32 90 00-PAGE 7 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing enough plants for replacement of unacceptable plant material through the Guarantee Period. Unacceptable plant material includes trees, shrubs, groundcovers, or sod areas that have died, been damaged, are missing, or that are, in the opinion of the Owner in unhealthy or unsightly condition, or that have lost their natural shape and symmetry due to dead branches, excessive and unnecessary pruning, incorrect staking, or excessive defoliation. 2. Any plant material that is 25% or more dead or disfigured shall be considered dead and must be replaced at no charge. A tree shall be considered dead when the main leader has died back. A tree, shrub, or groundcover shall be considered dead when 25% of the canopy is dead. 3. All plants are subject to one (1) replacement per item during the Guarantee Period. This includes dead plants, missing plants (theft), and plants stolen or damaged by the acts of others (vandalism). Replace dead, damaged, or missing plants with the same species, caliper, and/or equal size as the plants they replace, unless the Owner's Representative determines a substitute species plant of equal value may be provided. Repair all lawn areas that have been damaged by the acts of others before the end of the Guarantee Period. Replacements and lawn repairs shall be in accordance with original Specifications. 4. Plant material replacements made by the Contractor shall be completed during the spring (March 15 to May 15) or autumn planting periods (Sept 20 to Nov 15) unless otherwise approved by Owner's Representative. Plant material replacement and lawn repair shall be subject to the same conditions and shall be made in the same manner as specified for the original planting and shall be done at no extra cost to the Owner. 5. After each replacement, the Contractor shall submit a marked planting plan showing the exact location of each item replaced and the date when the replacement was made. Guarantee all replaced material during the Guarantee Period for an additional 365 calendar days from the date of replacement. E. Site Access: Contractor has the right to enter upon the property for inspection and curative treatment of any plants and materials needing such, and which are still under guarantee during the entire Guarantee Period. Owner is to be notified in advance of any inspection, corrective treatment measures, or curative treatment measures so as to arrange for approved, security clearance (if applicable) and convenient access to the area. F. The guarantee shall be applicable to any growing conditions through which plants of like kind could be expected to survive and any deformity or cause of death which could be attributed to, or affected by, the physiological condition of the plant shall be deemed replaceable cause. However, this would not apply to plant losses due to: 1. Extreme weather conditions such as wildfires, floods, freezing rain, wind storms (with recorded wind speeds greater than 60 MPH), drought, winter kill caused by extreme cold and severe winter conditions not typical of the project location, or abnormal rains, as determined by the National Weather Service. 2. Acts of vandalism by the Public or direct negligence on the part of the Owner. 32 90 00-PAGE 8 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING G. Inspection: Plants and lawn areas will be inspected quarterly by the Owner's Representative during the Guarantee Period. 1. Should the Owner's Representative determine that the Contractor is not providing regular adequate and proper care of plant material and lawns or is performing unacceptable work, the Owner's Representative will provide Written Notice to the Contractor to correct and remedy unacceptable work or practice(s). 2. The Contractor shall reply to the Owner's Representative within 5 working days of the date of the Written Notice with proposed corrections. Such corrective measures shall occur within 14 days after the date of the Written Notice unless the Owner's Representative agrees otherwise. Notify the Owner's Representative when the corrective work is complete. 3. Approximately 21 working days before the end of the Guarantee Period, the Contractor shall request a final site inspection by the Owner's Representative. Conditions found unacceptable by the Owner's Representative shall be corrected by the Contractor within 14 working days immediately following the inspection. After correction, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative for a re-inspection. Necessary replanting shall be arranged by the Owner's Representative in accordance with the best planting time of the year. H. As specified for the original planting, have a soil test performed by a soil testing laboratory for fertility analysis on two samples of planting soil from different planting beds within the project site. Perform the soil test between the second and third quarterly inspection and present the recommendations to the Owner's Representative prior to the third quarterly inspection. Apply soil amendments as recommended by the soil test report. I. If the Contractor does not perform the corrective work within the 14 working days after the date of the Written Notice, the Owner's Representative may have the corrective work done by others and deduct the entire cost of the corrective work from monies due or to become due the Contractor under the Contract. J. Final Transfer of Landscape to the Owner: Approximately 30 days before the end of the Guarantee Period, the Contractor may be required to accompany the Owner's Representative on a walking inspection of the Project. Conditions found unacceptable by the Owner's Representative shall be corrected by the Contractor within a 10 day period immediately following the inspection. After correction, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative for another inspection. When all maintenance and guarantee items are completed and at Final Acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide a memorandum to the Owner formally transferring the landscape and its maintenance to the Owner. K. Final Acceptance: 1. Acceptance of lawn. Acceptance of lawn areas as specified herein shall be based on a healthy, full, vigorously growing, and well-manicured stand of grass at the end of the Guarantee Period. Areas that are bare, have a poor stand of grass, are dead or dying, have 32 90 00-PAGE 9 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING weeds, or have a spotty or non-uniform grade due to any cause shall be remedied by regrading, removing and reaodding, remowing, and watering, as appropriate. 2. Acceptance of Plant Material. Final Acceptance of all planting work described in this Specification section, with the exclusion of possible replacements of plant materials under the Guarantee, shall be made by the Owner's Representative to determine 100% completion of the Contract work as specified herein. 3. Final Acceptance of the landscaping will be provided in writing by the Owner at the end of the Guarantee Period. 1.13 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE DURING GUARANTEE PERIOD A. It is expressly understood that the Contractor will be responsible, during the Guarantee Period, for normal establishment and maintenance of the project landscape.The landscape establishment shall include, but not be limited to, regularly scheduled watering, mowing, weeding, monitoring and treating any disease and/or pest-problems, cultivating and any other proper care according to best horticultural industry practices to keep the plants in a normal healthy growing condition. B. Once all landscape work is physically complete, Contract Time will not be assessed for the landscape maintenance work during the Guarantee Period. The Contractor may request a Supplemental Contract for the landscape maintenance work during the Guarantee Period. The minimum services, obligations, and scope for the Supplemental Contract shall be as specified herein. C. Weed and Pest Control: The Contractor shall maintain all mulched planting bed areas in a weed and pest free condition during the Guarantee Period per the approved Weed and Pest Control Plan. Applications of herbicides and pesticides shall be per the approved Weed and Pest Control Plan. D. Watering Schedule: The Contractor shall water plants as needed to promote healthy and vigorous growth. 1. For established water restrictions, the Contractor shall develop watering schedules in consultation with the Owner's Representative. 2. All automatic irrigation system components shall be maintained and operated as part of the landscape maintenance work. Fully operate the automatic irrigation system, including the setting of patterns and timing of controls during the Guarantee Period. Operate automatic irrigation during the time period of 2:OOAM to S:OOAM and coordinate watering with all work in this specification. 3. Change in the established watering schedule may be required to accommodate weather, seasonal factors, and as necessary; however, the Contractor shall provide at least 3 working days advance notice of such proposed change, including the reasoning for the proposed change. E. Mulch: Apply mulch to the specified depth as shown in Contract Drawings and maintain by applying additional topdressing of mulch when needed to maintain the specified depth. At a 32 90 00-PAGE 10 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING minimum, apply mulch 7 working days before each inspection of all planting areas and apply final mulch 7 working days before inspection for Final Acceptance. F. Fastenings: Tree fastenings shall be kept intact and effective in maintaining support for plants. Fastenings shall be adjusted as needed by the Contractor to prevent tree trunk strangulation, bark scaring, and non-plumb growth of the leader. Allow one inch clearance of tree tie from the bark per the Contract Drawings. Fastenings, ties, and stakes shall be removed at the completion of the Guarantee Period. Reusable, doweled wood stakes shall remain the property of the Owner and arrangements shall be made by the Contractor to provide for their delivery to an Owner storage facility identified by the Owner. G. Trimming and Pruning. Prune in order to eliminate dead growth and crossing branches and to minimize overgrowth onto walks and against walls and windows. Prune during the dormant season to maintain the overall appearance of project. Do not shear or hedge shrubs or trees unless otherwise noted in Contract Drawings or without prior approval of Owner's Representative. All pruning of trees must comply at a minimum to standards for best arboriculture practices as published by the International Society of Arboriculture and the Tree Care Industry Association ANSI A300. H. Care of Plant Material: Care for plant material immediately after planting work is completed. Water, fertilize, and protect plants against disease, drought, freezing temperatures, and pest infestation as required to ensure the plant material remains healthy and vigorous. I. Lawn Establishment: Lawn establishment shall consist of providing adequate and proper care for all lawn areas installed within the limits of the project, including mowing, cutting, aeration, thatching and fertilizing. Mow according to heights specified herein. The lawn establishment period shall begin upon physical completion by the Owner based upon both a uniform stand of grass and upon completion of the third mowing. During the Guarantee Period, the Contractor shall ensure the continuing healthy growth of the lawn. Adequate and proper care shall include the labor, materials, and equipment necessary to keep installed lawn in a presentable condition including, but not limited to, watering, mowing, trimming, cutting with an acceptable mulching mower, litter and debris removal, edging, weed control, and soil repair, regrading, and resodding of damaged or eroded lawn areas. Use of pesticides in lawn is prohibited. J. Mowing Schedule: The Contractor shall submit at least 5 Working Days in advance, the proposed mowing schedule to the Owner's Representative. The submittal shall also identify the type of mower equipment to be used. K. General Cleanup: A general cleanup shall be made after any landscape maintenance work. The Contractor shall remove all litter and debris to provide a clean appearance at the time of landscape inspections. 32 90 00-PAGE 11 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING 1.14 WEED AND PEST CONTROL PLAN A. Submit a Weed and Pest Control Plan for review and approval to the Owner's Representative prior to starting any landscape work. 1. The Weed and Pest Control Plan shall include: a. methods of removal and scheduling of removal of weeds and pests located inside the tree and plant protection fencing where shown on Contract Drawings. b. methods of removal and scheduling of removal of weeds that occur in newly planted areas. c. methods of removal and scheduling of removal of invasive species and/or noxious weeds that occur within the project limit of work. 2. The plan shall be prepared and signed by a licensed commercial operator with a Washington State Department of Agriculture (WSDA) Commercial Applicator pesticide license. 3. The plan shall include methods of weed and pest control, timing and scheduling of control operations, and the name, application rate, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) of all proposed herbicides and pesticides. a. Furnish the Owner's Representative with a copy of the current product label and MSDS for each herbicide / pesticide and spray adjuvant to be used. b. Identify and list the target weeds and unwanted vegetation to be removed specific to the project site. B. Herbicides and pesticides shall be stored in an offsite location. C. Consider herbicide and pesticide applications only as a last resort and only after other methods of control have proven ineffective. Preferred methods of weed control include mechanically or hand pulled weeds, reapply bark mulch after weed removal, and adjust watering schedule to avoid overwatering. D. Use extreme care to ensure confinement of chemicals within the areas designated. The use of spray chemicals shall require the use of anti-drift and activating agents, and a spray pattern indicator, unless otherwise allowed by the Owner's Representative. 1. Herbicides and pesticides shall not be applied within 100 foot radius of on-site and off-site wells or open water bodies. Weed removal inside this 100 foot radius shall be by hand or mechanical methods. 2. Do not use herbicides or pesticides within 15 ft of the top of rain gardens. E. All applications of post-emergent herbicides shall be made while green and growing tissue is present. Should unwanted vegetation reach the seed stage in violation of these Specifications, the Contractor shall physically remove and bag the seed heads. All physically removed vegetation and seed heads shall be disposed of off-site at no cost to the Owner. F. All noxious weeds (Class A, B & C) as defined by the County Weed Control Board and invasive weeds, including but not limited to Horsetail (Equisetum sp.), reed canary grass, English Ivy, 32 90 00-PAGE 12 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING Himalayan blackberry, evergreen blackberry, policeman's helmet, bamboo, yellow flag iris, and Japanese knotweed shall be completely removed from the project site. 1. Where noxious or invasive weeds exist, the weed's foliage and roots, planting soil and subgrade soils shall be removed and replaced to a depth necessary to completely remove all viable weed seeds, roots, corms, and rhizomes. 2. Cost to remove weeds, remove, and replace existing soil, and replant shall be at the Contractor's expense. G. Timing of chemical treatment for weed removal shall be in late summer or early fall unless the project construction working days fall outside of this time period and shall be determined in consultation with Owner's Representative, but should occur within a minimum of 3 weeks prior to excavation activities including clearing, grubbing, and mechanical removal of invasive plants. H. The approved Weed and Pest Control Plan will be subject to revision dependent on results and effectiveness of the implemented Weed and Pest Control Plan. I. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for rendering any area unsatisfactory for planting by reasons of herbicide or pesticide application. The Contractor shall replace, repair and pay for all damages caused by his/her negligence to the satisfaction of the Owner prior to final payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide all materials and equipment as required to complete the work as shown on the Contract Drawings and/or as described in the Specifications. 2.02 SOIL TEST REPORTS A. Provide soil analysis and test reports from an approved soil testing laboratory. Soil amendments shall not be incorporated in the planting work until the Soil Test Reports are approved by the Owner's Representative. Provide Soil Test Reports for: 1. Three samples per acre of subgrade soil. Each subgrade soil sample shall consist of a composite of soils collected from a one (1) inch, 8 inch, and 16 inch depth. 2. One (1) representative sample of each soil mix specified. 3. One (1) representative sample of stockpiled Native Topsoil if used. B. The cost for all soil testing must be borne by the Contractor. C. The Contractor shall be paid for the soil amendments that may be required to improve the subgrade soils, as recommended by the soil testing laboratory. Costs shall be determined on a unit price basis and agreed upon by a Change Order prior to commencement of subgrade soil amendment work. 32 90 00-PAGE 13 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING D. The Contractor shall be responsible for cost of the soil amendments that may be required for the planting soil mix, as recommended by the soil testing laboratory. E. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the most current edition of Methods of Soil Analysis published by the Soil Science Society of America, Inc. The Soil Test Reports shall include the following: 1. Fertility Analysis: a. Extractable analytes: nitrate, nitrogen, ammoniacal nitrogen, phosphorous, potassium, calcium, magnesium, copper, zinc, manganese and iron. b. Saturation extract values: calcium, magnesium, potassium, sodium, boron, sulfate, pH, lime content, salinity and sodium adsorption ratio. 2. Mechanical Analysis: a. Organic percent by over-dried weight. Organic content test shall be performed in accordance with Testing Methods for the Examination of Compost and Composting (TMECC) 05.07A, "Loss-On-Ignition Organic Matter Method" b. USDA particle size and gradation. 3. Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC) 4. Permeability or hydraulic conductivity testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D 2434, Standard Test Method for Permeability of Granular Soils. Assume a relative compaction of 85 % of modified maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557). 5. The Soil Test Report shall make recommendations for fertilizers and soil amendments to effectively amend and develop a productive soil. 6. The Soil Test Report shall include a written statement from the soil testing laboratory that the laboratory has reviewed the planting plan and this planting specification, and that its recommendations respond to the specific needs of the Contract. 2.03 EXISTING SUBGRADE SOIL A. Soil tests of the subgrade soil shall be made per Soil Test Reports section herein. B. Submit Soil Test Reports to the Owner's Representative for review and acceptance prior to procuring soil amendments and incorporating soil amendments into the subgrade soil. C. Determine the quantity of soil amendments and procure all soil amendments as recommended by the subgrade soil test report results. D. Submit a copy of the itemized sales receipt showing purchase of and quantity of soil amendments for both subgrade soil and planting soil amendment to the Owner's Representative. Provide copy of soil amendment labels showing grade furnished, certification of quality, and guarantee information. 2.04 NATIVE TOPSOIL A. Native topsoil from site excavations may be used in lieu of Sandy Loam as described in Subsection 2.06 herein. 32 90 00-PAGE 14 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING B. The general limits of topsoil materials will be indicated on the Contract Drawings. The Owner's Representative will make the final determination of the areas where the most suitable materials exist. C. Furnish topsoil that is the fertile part of the soil profile commonly referred to as the "A Horizon," typically ranging in depth from 3 inches to 12 inches, after top 4 inches has been cleared and grubbed. Do not take material for topsoil from a depth greater than 12 inches below the existing ground, unless approved. D. Select only source areas that are well-drained and, before clearing and grubbing, have a healthy crop of vegetative growth with no evidence of noxious weeds. Remove and dispose of all vegetation and top 4 inches of soil (seed bank horizon) before taking topsoil material from the source areas. E. Native Topsoil shall not contain any viable seeds, roots, or rhizomes capable of sprouting any State-listed noxious weeds or invasive root propagating plants including but not limited to horsetail, English ivy, clematis, knotweed, etc. Soil found to contain these prohibited viable plant materials shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. F. Stockpile native topsoil at locations that do not interfere with construction activities. Take precautions to avoid disturbing the existing ground beyond the project site or other areas as designated by the Owner's Representative. G. Test stockpiled native topsoil per Soil Test Reports as specified herein. Soil classification of Native Soil shall be Sandy Loam as defined by the United States Department of Agriculture Classification system and the requirements as described in Subsection 2.06, C herein. 2.05 IMPORTED PLANTING SOILS A. Soil Mixes 1. Sod Lawn Soil shall consist of Sandy Loam thoroughly mixed with the soil amendments as required by the Soil Test Report. a. Sod Lawn Soil shall have pH range of 5.5 to 7.5. b. Sod Lawn Soil shall have a minimum organic matter content by dry weight of 5% as tested by the Loss on Ignitions Test method. If found deficient in organic matter Sod Lawn Soil shall be amended with compost at rates calculated using a web-based soil amendment rate calculator or at a default rate of 22% by volume for lawn areas (2 inches compost scarified and/or tilled to an 8 inch depth; this compost is in addition to compost shown in Soil Preparation details) 2. Planting Soil shall consist of Sandy Loam thoroughly mixed with the soil amendments as required by the Soil Test Report. a. Planting Soil shall have pH range of 5.0 to 7.0. b. Planting Soil shall have a minimum organic matter content by dry weight of 10% as tested by the Loss on Ignitions Test method. If found deficient in organic matter Sandy Loam shall be amended with compost at rates calculated using a web-based soil 32 90 00-PAGE 15 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING amendment rate calculator or at a default rate of 38% by volume for planting areas (3 inches of compost scarified and/or tilled to an 8 inch depth; this compost is in addition to compost shown in Soil Preparation details). 3. Rain Garden Soil shall consist of a well-blended mixture of Fine Aggregate and compost measured on a volume basis. a. Rain Garden Soil shall be a mixture of 2 parts compost (approximately 35%to 40%) to 3 parts fine aggregate (approximately 60%to 65%). b. Rain Garden Soil shall be well-blended to produce a homogeneous mix with an organic matter content of 4%to 8% determined using the Loss on Ignitions Test method. B. All soil with amendments shall be thoroughly blended off site or on site with approval by the Owner's Representative. C. Compost, Fine Aggregate (for Rain Garden Soil) and Sandy Loam shall be as specified herein. D. Soil Test Reports for each soil mix shall be as specified herein. E. All soil shall be free of pests, toxic substances and other undesirable material harmful or detrimental to ornamental plant growth. Soil shall not contain any viable seeds, roots, or rhizomes capable of sprouting any State-listed noxious weeds or invasive root propagating plants including but not limited to horsetail, English ivy, clematis, knotweed, etc. Soil found to contain these prohibited viable plant materials shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 2.06 SOIL COMPONENTS A. General 1. Submit planting soil supplier's certification of sandy loam and compost, as applicable for Owner's Representative's review and acceptance prior to use on project site. 2. Certification tests shall be dated within ninety (90) days of proposed installation of soil on the project site. B. Compost 1. Compost shall be Fine Compost and comply with the requirements of Washington State Department of Transportation Standard Specification 9-14.4(8). 2. The compost shall be tested within 90 calendar days of proposed use. 3. The compost shall have a Solvita Compost Maturity Test of six (6) or above. Solvita Compost Maturity Test is available from Woods End Research Laboratory, phone (207) 293-2457, or 1(800)451-0337, or. The cost for testing must be borne by the Contractor. C. Fine Aggregate (for Rain Garden Soil) 1. Fine Aggregate for Rain Garden Soil shall consist of crushed, partially crushed, or naturally occurring granular material confirm to the following grading: Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/8" 100 32 90 00-PAGE 16 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING No. 4 95-100 No. 10 75-95 No. 40 25-40 No. 100 4-10 No. 200 2-5 2. Fine Aggregate shall meet the following gradation coefficients: a. Coefficient of Uniformity, CU = D60/D10 equal to or greater than 6. b. Coefficient of Curve, CC = D30^2/(D60*D10) greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3. D. Sandy Loam 1. Sandy Loam shall be as defined by the United States Department of Agriculture Classification system and the requirements as described herein. 2. Sandy Loam shall consist of loose, moderately well-drained, and friable soil. And be free of stones, debris, and/or similar objects. Sandy Loam should be fertile and free-flowing (pulverized). 3. Sandy Loam shall be free of pests, toxic substances and other undesirable material harmful or detrimental to ornamental plant growth. 4. Sandy Loam shall have a pH between 5.0 to 7.0. Drainage shall be a minimum of 1.5 inches per hour. Permeability or hydraulic conductivity testing shall be performed on accordance with ASTM D 2434, Standard Test Method for Permeability of Granular Soils. Assume a relative compaction of 85% of modified maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557). Particle Size shall meet the following sieve requirements: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1" 100% %" > 90% #10 > 70% 2.07 MULCH A. Bark Mulch shall be derived from Douglas Fir and Western Hemlock tree species. Bark is defined as the outermost coarse protective layer of the tree, located outside of the cambium layer. It shall be ground so that a minimum of 95%, by volume, of the material will pass through a one (1) inch sieve. Ground bark shall not contain elements in quantities that would be detrimental to plant life. B. Wood cellulose tissue of fiber(wood pulp), wood waste, wood shavings, wood sawdust, wood chips, or any product that contains greater than 5%, by volume, of the hard, lignified wood portion of the tree will not be accepted. 32 90 00-PAGE 17 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING 2.08 FERTILIZER AND SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Furnish soil amendments that are free of materials detrimental to plant life. Furnish manufacturer or supplier quality compliance certification. Ensure that material testing methods meet the requirements of the Washington Department of Agriculture appropriate to that material. Obtain approval for use of soil amendments before beginning work. Soil amendments may include the following: lime, dolomite lime, gypsum, rock, diammonia, or other phosphate, calcium or potassium nitrate, boron, and iron sulfate. B. Fertilizer and soil amendments application rates shall meet Soil Test Report recommendations. C. Fertilizer and soil amendments shall be packaged in new, unopened, waterproof, containers or non-overlaid bags clearly labeled as to weight, chemical analysis, manufacturer and content in accordance with State and Federal Law. Store fertilizer and soil amendments in such a manner as to prevent wetting and deterioration. Do not store fertilizer and soil amendments with plant materials. D. Agricultural lime shall be dolomitic limestone containing not less than 85% of total carbonates. Limestone shall be ground to such fineness that 100%will pass a No. 20 sieve. E. Iron sulfate shall be granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20% iron and 10% sulfur. F. Fertilizers shall be according to the following: 1. Lawn Starter Fertilizer shall be 'Starter Feed' (7-7-2) 100% Organic Fertilizer, as manufactured by Walt's Organic Fertilizer Co. or approved equal. 2. Lawn Follow-Up Fertilizer shall be 'Regular Feed' (9-3-5), and shall be 100% Organic Fertilizer as manufactured by Walt's Organic Fertilizer Co., or approved equal. 3. Fertilizers shall be a complete commercial brand with chemical analysis shown on unopened and undamaged container when delivered. 4. A minimum of 50% of any nitrogen fertilizer shall be applied in a slow-release form such as sulfur-coated or polymer-coated urea, IBDU, trinitromethane (Nitroform), or organic forms. 2.09 WATER A. Contractor shall make, at Contractor expense, whatever arrangements are necessary to ensure an adequate supply of water to meet the needs of this Contract. B. Contractor shall also furnish necessary hose, equipment, attachments, and accessories for the adequate irrigation of planted areas as may be required to complete the work specified. C. All costs for water incurred during the contract period shall be borne by the Contractor unless other arrangements are made with the Owner 32 90 00-PAGE 18 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING 2.10 PLANT MATERIAL A. The Contractor has two (2) options to secure approval of plant materials: 1. Have plant material available at the project site for review during scheduled site visits. 2. Have Owner's Representative review plants at the place of growth at the Contractor's expense. B. Owner's Representative reserves the right to reject any or all plant material at any time until final review and acceptance. Remove rejected plants immediately from the site. C. All plant material furnished by the Contractor shall conform to the requirements of the current issue of"American Standard for Nursery Stock" (ASNS) and in addition, shall comply with the following provisions: 1. No less than 10% of each variety and/or species of plant delivered to the project shall be accurately labeled with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing the legible designation of the common name and full scientific name and size of plant. Include the nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar. Whether or not labeled, any plants, which do not conform to the Plant Schedule and/or Contract Drawings, shall be replaced immediately with plants that conform to specifications. 2. All plant material shall meet State and Federal requirements with respect to plant health and absence of diseases and insect infestation. 3. All plant material shall be nursery grown stock that has been held in a nursery for at least one year. 4. All plant material specified shall be first-class representatives of their normal species or varieties in healthy growing condition with normal well-developed branch system and vigorous root systems. a. They shall be free from disease and insect infestation, disfiguring knots, sun-scalds, abrasions of the bark, broken tops, broken branches, torn roots, and any other objectionable features. b. Plants, which have suffered damage as the result of girdling of the roots, stem, or a major branch; have deformities of the stem or major branches; have a lack of symmetry; have dead or defoliated tops or branches; or have any defect, injury, or condition which renders the plant unsuitable for its intended use, will be rejected. 5. Large plants cut back to meet specified sizes will be rejected. Plants shall not have cuts or pruning wounds over 3/4-inch diameter that are not satisfactorily callusing over. 6. Plant material shall not have weeds at the tops of root balls or any foreign plant growth. 7. Root balls of all plant materials shall be solidly held together by a fibrous root system and shall be composed only of the soil in which the plant has been actually growing. The ball shall be securely wrapped with non-treated,jute burlap, or other packing material that is not injurious to the plant's life. 8. Provide the number of plants shown on the Plant Schedule in Contract Drawings, or to cover at specified spacing's whichever is greater. 9. Collected plant material may be used only when accepted by the Owner's Representative. 10. Trees: 32 90 00-PAGE 19 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING a. Trees shall have been grown with sufficient spacing to allow for symmetrical branch development and full canopy which reflects the natural characteristics of the species. Tree trunks shall not be noticeably imperfect in vertical alignment, have straight leaders, and there shall be no "included bark" in the crotches between the trunk and side branches. b. Trees with multiple leaders, unless specified, shall be rejected. c. Trees with a damaged or crooked leader, "Y" crotches, missing leaders, bark abrasions, sunscald, disfiguring knots, insect damage, or cuts of limbs over three quarter (3/4) inch in diameter that are not completely closed will be rejected d. Evergreen and deciduous trees shall be furnished balled and burlapped (B&B) unless otherwise specified in the Contract. Broken or "made" root balls will not be accepted. e. Trees grown in fabric bags shall have a well-established root system reaching the sides of the fabric bag to maintain a firm ball when the fabric is removed, but shall not have excessive root growth encircling the fabric bag. Fabric bags shall be entirely removed prior to planting. f. No pruning wounds shall be present with a diameter of more than one (1) inch and such wounds must show vigorous callous on all edges. Trees shall not be pruned within six (6) months prior to delivery. g. Provide tree root ball sizes complying with the latest edition of the ASNS. Cracked or mushroomed tree root balls are not acceptable. 11. Container-grown Stock: a. Plants grown in a pot or container shall have been given a sufficient length of time for new fibrous root system to have developed to hold its soil together and keep the root mass firm and whole when removed from the container. b. Plants shall not be loose in the container. c. Container stock shall not be pot or root bound. d. Plants furnished in pots or other containers shall be acclimated to outside conditions and equal to field grown stock. To acclimate plants to Northwest conditions, all plants used on the project shall be grown continuously outdoors north of the 42nd Latitude (Oregon-California border) from not later than April 1 of the year prior to the time of planting. 2.11 SOD LAWN A. Sod shall be comprised of 60% Perennial Turf Type Ryegrass, 20% Hybrid Kentucky Bluegrass, 20% Hard Fescue and contain no more than 1% other grasses. B. Sod shall be premium quality, free of all weeds, pests, diseases, Poo onnuo, and other undesirable material. It shall not be less than 12 months old nor more than 24 months old, grown in fumigated soil, healthy, and have a dense, vigorous well-developed root structure C. Provide a 12 inch square sample of the sod at project site for review and acceptance by the Owner's Representative. D. Plastic netting is not allowed. If netting is required, it shall be biodegradable. 32 90 00-PAGE 20 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING E. All sod delivered to the project shall be equal to or exceed the quality exhibited in the sod sample. Sod shall not be cut from the field more than one (1) day prior to delivery to the project site. Sod shall not be grown in heavy clay. F. Sod shall be grown in Western Washington or Oregon. Sod shipments shall have a certificate of origin and certification of approved treatment if the shipment originates in a known area containing grass infections. Sod available from: 1. Country Green Turf Farms, Arlington, WA; (306) 657-2175 2. JB Instant Lawn, Redmond, WA; (425) 821-0444 3. Lefeber Turf Farm, Mt. Vernon, WA; (360) 428-4054 2.12 HERBICIDE AND PESTICIDE A. All chemical herbicides pesticides shall be labeled and used in accordance with governing agencies defined in the Weed and Pest Control Plan. The Contractor shall use extreme care to ensure confinement of the chemicals within the areas designated. The use of chemical herbicides and pesticides shall require the use of anti-drift and activating agents and a spray pattern indicator, unless otherwise allowed by the Owner. B. All chemical herbicide and pesticides must be carefully selected in accordance with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), Washington State Department of Ecology, Washington State Department of Agriculture, King County Noxious Weed Control Board, and local sensitive area ordinances and regulations. 2.13 COBBLE ROCK A. Cobble Rock shall be 4" Cobble per WSDOT Standard Specification 9-03.11(2) Streambed Cobbles. 2.14 LANDSCAPE BOULDERS A. Boulders shall be pre-approved before delivery and located on the site by the Engineer. B. Boulders shall be selected at the supplier's yard and shall be free from cracks, flaking, and deterioration. Stone type shall be igneous. C. Obtain boulders from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties, including the capacity to place the material without delaying the progress of the work. D. Boulders shall be weathered, smooth with no sharp edges, and free from cracking or flaking. E. Deliver boulders to the project site in undamaged condition. Store and handle the boulders to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature change, contaminants, corrosion, breaks, chipping, or other causes. Do not use pinch or wrecking bars. Lift boulders 32 90 00-PAGE 21 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING with wide-belt type slings where possible. Do not use wire rope or ropes containing tar or other substance that might cause staining. 2.15 ROOT BARRIER A. Root barrier must be made of copolymer polypropylene, containing 50% postconsumer, recycled plastic with ultraviolet light inhibitors. Panels must be interlocking. B. Root barrier panels must be .08" thick, the color black, and at the height/depth indicated in the Contract Drawings. C. Recommended sources for root barriers are as follows: 1. "RP" Series- Root Barrier Panels, as manufactured by NDS, and distributed locally by Frank J. Martin Company, Lynnwood, WA, Ph. 206-523-7665, toll free 1-800-654-1786 or www.fjmartin.com. 2. "DeepRoot", as manufactured by Deep Root, Inc., and distributed locally by Berkey Supply, Inc., Woodinville, WA, Ph. 425-487-3310 or www.berkeysupply.com. 3. "Biobarrier", as manufactured by BBA Nonwovens Reemay, Inc., and distributed locally by Wilber Ellis, Auburn, WA, Ph. 253-351-6591 or www.wilberellis.com. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All areas as indicated in Contract Drawings shall be finish graded and approved by the Owner's Representative before commencement of planting. All grades shall flow smoothly into each other and produce positive drainage. The Contractor is responsible for any adverse drainage conditions that may affect plant growth unless the Contractor contacts the Owner's Representative immediately indicating any possible problem. Verify all grades with Owner's Representative before commencement of planting. B. The Contractor shall protect soil and provide adequate and proper care of all plant material (both retained and newly installed) and landscape work, including irrigation, done on the project from the time of installation to the end of the Guarantee Period. 3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Verify the existence of proper rough grading and subgrade elevations prior to beginning soil preparation work. All planting area excavation shall allow for compost, planting soil, and mulch depths as indicated in Contract Drawings. B. Areas to receive plant material shall be cleared, grubbed, cultivated and graded to accommodate the Work prior to planting and to provide the optimum conditions for plant and lawn establishment and growth. 32 90 00-PAGE 22 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING C. Subgrade shall be cleaned of all debris including concrete, stumps, sticks, roots, and rocks or lumps larger than one (1) inch. Subgrade elevations shall be as shown in the Contract Drawings. D. Percolation Test 1. After the Subgrade has been prepared, a percolation test shall be performed. This shall be accomplished by excavating three (3) pits that are two (2) feet in depth and minimum two (2) feet in diameter. Location of all three (3) pits shall be per Owner's Representative field directive. Fill each pit with water and allow the pit to drain for twenty-four (24) hours. After twenty-four (24) hours, re-fill the pit with water. If the time required for the pit to drain completely after being filled the second time is greater than twenty-four(24) hours, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative immediately. 2. The Contractor shall be paid for work required to solve the drainage problem, such as, installation of french drains or drainage sumps at a unit price basis and agreed upon by a Change Order prior to commencement of work. E. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify a weed and pest free Subgrade prior to beginning Subgrade preparation work. If required, the Contractor shall be paid for weed and pest removal based upon an Owner approved Weed and Pest Control Plan. F. Subgrade preparation and percolation tests shall be reviewed and approved by Owner's Representative prior to proceeding with the placing of planting soil. G. Placing of compost and/or imported planting soils on top of Subgrade shall constitute acceptance of Subgrade conditions by Contractor. 3.03 SOIL PREPARATION A. General 1. Soil shall not be placed, disked, rototilled, or worked when the ground or planting soil is frozen, excessively wet, there is ponding water, or, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, in a condition detrimental to the Work. 2. Incorporation of amendments in response to soil test recommendations and placing of soils shall result in a homogeneous blend to a minimum depth as shown on the Contract Drawings.The Contractor shall apply and shape the lifts in such a manner that the planting area has a continuously sloped final surface allowing for drainage from higher elevations to lower outer edges of the planting area. Where possible, ridges and ridge lines shall be the approximate center point, or centerline(s), of the planting area. 3. Uniformly grade areas within limits of planting areas, including adjacent transition areas with a smooth finished surface. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown or between such spot grades or points and adjacent grades. Irregular surface changes or transitions shall not be accepted. B. Subgrade Scarification 32 90 00-PAGE 23 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING 1. Apply soil amendments and scarify to depths as shown in Contract Drawings. If additional scarification is required to eliminate surface water ponding, notify Owner's Representative of problem areas. 2. After scarification, remove all debris or rocks over one (1) inch in size and establish proper grades. 3. Application of amendments and the scarification process shall be observed and approved by Owner's Representative prior to installing planting soil. C. Placing Soil and Soil Amendments: 1. For Sod Lawn Areas: a. See soil preparation details in Contract Drawings. Apply and mix amendments with a small excavator; do not use a rototiller. Compact by hand or one (1) pass of a motorized tamper. Water settle each lift of sod lawn soil before installing the additional lift of soil. Owner's Representative shall review and approve soil preparation work between steps. 1) Soil amendments for planting areas shall be applied per soil testing laboratory recommendations. 2) The soil amendments shall be thoroughly mixed with soils to produce a broadly- mixed blend at rates per soil laboratory recommendations. b. Incorporate the following soil amendments by broadcasting over sod lawn soil at an even distribution and rate prior to placement of sod. Then, rake the amendments into the top two (2) inches of sod lawn soil. 1) Dolomite Lime. Recommended application rate: Incorporate fifty (50) pounds of Dolomite Lime per 1,000 square feet in direct broadcast application. 2) Starter Fertilizer (7-7-2). Recommended application rate: Incorporate one (1) pound of starter fertilizer per 1,000 square feet in direct broadcast application. Do not apply fertilizer to lawn areas that drain directly into sensitive water bodies unless approved by governing agency. 3) Do not install fertilizer within 15 ft of the top of rain gardens. 2. For Planting Areas: a. See soil preparation details. Apply and mix amendments with a small excavator; do not use a rototiller. Compact each lift of planting soil before installing the additional lift of soil. Water settle or use one (1) pass of a motorized tamper. Owner's Rep shall review and approve soil preparation work between steps. b. Incorporate soil amendments by broadcasting over planting soil at an even distribution and rate prior to installation of plants. Then, mix the amendments into the top six (6) inches of planting soil. 1) Soil amendments for planting areas shall be applied per soil testing laboratory recommendations. 2) The soil amendments shall be thoroughly mixed with soils to produce a broadly- mixed blend at rates per soil laboratory recommendations. 3) All amendments shall be delivered to the site in the original, unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's name and guaranteed components analysis. In lieu of containers, amendments may be furnished in bulk, with a Manufacturer's 32 90 00-PAGE 24 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING Certificate of Compliance indicating the components analysis complies with the Contract. 4) Do not install fertilizer within 15 ft of the top of rain gardens. D. Finish Grading 1. Establish a finish grade with the compacted depths of planting soil and amendments as shown on the Contract Drawings and a specified herein. After installing soils and amendments, drag to an even grade, remove debris and rocks larger than one (1) inch in diameter that appear at the surface, and then roll for firmness prior to planting. 2. Finish grade is defined as the top surface of soil prior to the installation of mulch and sod lawn unless otherwise noted in the Contract Drawings. 3. Finish grading shall consist of placing, grading and lightly rolling soil, providing for surface drainage, cutting all necessary drainage swales and generally conforming to finish grades shown in the Contract Drawings and as directed by the Owner's Representative. 4. Compact finish grade of planting and sod lawn areas to 85% of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM: D 1557. 5. After settling, finish grades in sod lawn areas shall be one (1) inch below all walks, curbs and/or other hard surfaces. 6. After settling, finish grades in planting areas shall be 3 inches below all walks, curbs, and/or other hard surface edges. 7. All planting areas shall be finish graded and accepted by the Owner's Representative before commencement of planting, preferably before staking and layout. 8. The top of the mulch shall be flush with the top of any adjacent paved surface improvement such as sidewalk, curb, and other pedestrian walking area. 3.04 TRANSPORT AND MOVING PLANT MATERIAL A. Plant material transported in enclosed vehicles shall receive adequate ventilation. Plant material transported in open vehicles shall be protected by suitable cover material such as tarpaulins. B. Large trees shall be totally wrapped to prevent damage and windburn. Provide adequate protection so that trunks are not scarred in transport and branches are not broken. Tree trunks shall be wrapped with protective covering prior to handling and loading. Remove covering at the time of plant materials inspection at the job site C. Pack and ship plant material in accordance with prevailing nursery industry standard practice for the type of plant being shipped, and protect at all times against drying sun, wind, heat, freezing, and similar detrimental conditions both during shipment and during related handling. D. Move all plants carefully. Exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing of plant materials. Prevent damage to all plant materials. Do not drag plant material without proper root and branch protection. 1. Trees shall be handled by rootball only, not the trunks, stems, or tops. 2. Container grown plants shall be handled by container only, not the stems or tops. 32 90 00-PAGE 25 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING E. Tie branches on trees and large shrubs as necessary. Use burlap bags to protect tree bark from rope chafing. No plant shall be bound with rope or wire in a manner that could damage or break the branches. F. Plant material damaged in any way from transport and moving activities shall be rejected, discarded and replaced with undamaged materials at no cost to Owner. 3.05 TEMPORARY STORAGE OF PLANT MATERIAL A. Plants that cannot be planted within 24 hours after arrival to the project site shall be "heeled- in" in accordance with accepted horticultural practice and the following requirements: 1. Protect rootball of balled and burlapped or fabric-grow bag plants with moist earth, sawdust, bark mulch, or other acceptable material and the material shall be kept continuously moist. Do not use straw or hay to retain moisture. 2. Protect plant materials at all times from mechanical damage, excessive wet conditions, drying out, and extreme weather including drying winds and direct sun. 3. The root system of all plants shall not be permitted to dry out at any time. Set plants in shade and keep roots moist by covering with mulch, soil or other acceptable means of retaining moisture. 4. Foliage on plants may be sprayed with an anti-desiccant during drought and/or excessively hot periods. Anti-desiccant shall be specifically formulated for species of plants it will be applied to. 3.06 PLANT LAYOUT: A. Plants shall be placed at the spacing and locations as indicated in the Contract Drawings. Plant layout and staking (or otherwise marking the location of each plant) shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. No work shall start on the installation of plant material until plant layout and staking has been verified and approved by the Owner's Representative. B. The Contractor shall notify the Owner at least 5 Working Days in advance of projected completion of staking and allow 2 Working Days after the projected completion date for review and any adjustments of the layout by the Owner. The Contractor shall sequence the installation of plants to minimize disturbance to new plants and existing landscaping. C. No work shall start on the installation of plant material until plant layout and staking has been verified and approved by the Owner's Representative. 3.07 PLANT INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. All plant material shall be inspected and determined by the Owner's Representative to be acceptable for planting, prior to installing. 2. Do not install plants in weather conditions detrimental to plant material. 32 90 00-PAGE 26 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING a. Do not plant during freezing weather, when the ground is frozen, or when ground is excessively wet. b. Do not install plants when ambient temperatures may drop below 407 or rise above 807. c. Do not install plants when wind velocity exceeds 25 MPH. d. Plants shall not be installed with the top of their rootballs below finish grade. 3. For work performed during unacceptable and/or weather conditions detrimental to plant material, the Contractor may be required to provide the following services at no additional cost: a. Expert consultations with an ISA certified Arborist (for trees) or other expert as approved (for other plant material) to determine what plant care measures are required to maintain the plants installed in a healthy and vigorous condition during the unacceptable weather conditions. b. Replacement of all work performed during unacceptable weather conditions. c. Additional watering and maintenance of the plant materials installed during the unacceptable weather conditions and responsibility for all additional costs incurred. 4. Perform planting during the period between September 1 and May 15. Planting at other times shall only by done by written permission by the Owner's Representative and only if an automatic irrigation system is available through the summer. 5. Soak all tree rootballs and container plants which have become dry prior to planting. 6. If groundwater is encountered upon excavation of planting holes, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner. 7. Plants shall be removed from containers in a manner that prevents damage to the root system. Containers may require vertical cuts down the full depth of the container to accommodate removal. All circling roots shall be loosened to ensure natural directional growth after planting. 8. Dig pits or planting holes for plant material as indicated on Contract Drawings and consistent with good horticultural practice.The inside surfaces of all planting pits are to be rough, not smooth. If the Contractor encounters clay soil or any unusual condition which may be detrimental to the new planting, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative immediately. Unsuitable material, if encountered, shall be removed from the site and planting soil distributed to replace the unsuitable material as Extra Work in accordance with the Specification. Unsuitable material removal will be paid for as a Change Order in accordance with the Specifications B. Trees: 1. The Contractor shall provide the Owner a minimum 4 Working Days advance notice of the first tree(s) to be planted.The Owner shall be present to approve the planting method of the first tree(s). The approved method shall be consistently applied for all remaining planting of trees. 2. Tree pit excavation near a curb or sidewalk shall allow a horizontal clearance of at least three (3) inches from the curb or sidewalk without undermining foundation support of adjacent improvements. 32 90 00-PAGE 27 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING 3. Completely remove all twine, burlap, wrapping material, fabric grow bags, and wire baskets from rootballs after trees have been placed in planting hole. Completely remove all material from the planting hole before back filling. 4. All containers shall be removed from rootballs before planting. Containers may require vertical cuts down the full depth of the container to accommodate removal. For ball and burlap and container trees, roots showing at the edge of the root ball shall be loosened without tearing. The rootball shall be placed in the planting pit in a manner that ensures the roots are properly spread for lateral directional growth. 5. Set trees in the planting pit to proper grade and alignment. Set trees upright, plumb, and faced to give the best appearance or relationship to each other or adjacent structure. Set crown of rootball up to one (1) inch above the finish grade elevation, unless otherwise noted in the Contract Drawings. 6. Backfill shall be carefully placed and compacted by water settling. When planting hole is 3/4 backfilled, apply water to water-settle the backfill and remove voids. After settling occurs, the Contractor shall add enough soil to cover the roots but shall not rework the soil. Do not use frozen or muddy mixtures for backfilling. No soil filling will be permitted against trunks or stems or above grafts on grafted trees. Form a watering ring of soil around the edge of each planting pit to retain water. C. Shrubs and Groundcovers: 1. Plants supplied in containers shall be kept moist at all times and shall be removed from the container in a manner that prevents damage to the root system. The plants shall not be removed from the container by pulling on the stem. 2. All plastic, burlap, ties, and other container material shall be removed from the plant prior to planting. Containers may require vertical cuts down the full depth of the container to accommodate removal. a. Space groundcover plants using triangular spacing in accordance with indicated dimensions and offsets. Adjust spacing as necessary to evenly uniformly fill planting bed with indicated quantity of plants. Always plant groundcovers to within 18 inches of the trunks of trees and shrubs within planting bed. b. Set shrub and groundcover in the planting pit to proper grade and alignment. Set upright. Install plants so that top of rootball is flush with the finished grade after settlement. Check top of root ball for root flare. If root flare is not found, carefully scrape away excess soil until root flare is exposed. This level shall be the top of the rootball and installed flush to the finished grade. c. Backfill shall be firmly tamped or compacted without voids around the roots, then covered with mulch, and watered immediately after planting. D. Pruning 1. Pruning: a. Pruning of trees shall be performed at the nursery by the nurseryman and only to remove small or minor broken or damaged branches, or for aesthetic purposes unless otherwise directed by the Owner's Representative. Branches shall be pruned at the branch collar. Neither stubs nor flush cuts will be acceptable 32 90 00-PAGE 28 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING b. At the time of planting, pruning shall only occur to remove minor broken or damaged twigs and branches. No trees or plants shall be headed or pruned without reason or prior approval. No pruning shall be allowed to new plant material that impacts a tree's central leader, removes more than 5% of the foliage, or if foliage has not developed, more than 5% of the foliage buds, or significantly alters the natural form of the plant material being pruned. c. Pruning shall be done in such a manner as to retain or to encourage the natural growth characteristics and proper form of the particular plant. Pruning shall be done with a sharp tool to produce a clean cut without bruising or tearing the bark. All completed pruning cuts shall be in the living wood where callous tissue can develop properly. E. Apply Fertilizer per soil laboratory test recommendations to all plant material. As necessary, a follow-up fertilizer application for all planting beds shall be in accordance with recommendations from soil testing laboratory. F. Mulch planting areas with required mulch material at least 3 inches deep immediately after planting. Top-dress the entire tree pit including the watering ring, with the mulch depth tapered at the tree trunk to prevent contact at the trunk. Soil surface interface should be damp prior to application of mulch. Do not install wood chip mulch on top of dry planting soil.The 3 inch depth is measured after settling and/or compaction has occurred.Thoroughly water mulched areas. After watering, rake mulch to provide a uniform finished surface. 3.08 PLANTING ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Root Barrier Installation 1. Install root barrier panel per manufacturer's recommendations and specifications in locations as shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Install root barrier in locations shown in the Contract Drawings. 3. Install panels immediately adjacent to paving with ribs facing towards the tree roots. Trenches must be deep enough so that top of root barrier is 1 inch below the top of mulch. B. Landscape Boulder Installation 1. Examine the areas to receive the boulder placement, and the conditions under which the boulders will be installed, with the Installer present, for compliance with the requirements for installation and other conditions affecting the performance of the placement. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Protect the stone during setting as follows: a. Prevent staining of the stone from caulking or paving materials. Immediately remove such materials from the stone without damage to the latter. b. Protect boulders from damage from construction machines and materials. c. Clean stone surfaces that have become dirty and stained prior to setting. Remove soil, stains, and foreign materials. Clean stones by thoroughly scrubbing stones with fiber brushes followed by a thorough drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh filler or abrasives. 32 90 00-PAGE 29 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING 3. Set the stones to comply as indicated in the Contract Drawings and the final shop drawings. 4. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone must be replaced until the methods and results are acceptable to the Owner's Representative. 5. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that no damage occurs to the stonework until Physical Completion is approved. C. Install Cobble Rock as indicated on Contract Drawings. 3.09 SOD INSTALLATION: A. Installation: 1. Sod shall be brought onto lawn area by hand-operated wheeled equipment with proper protection of sod soil beds from heavy compaction. Sod layers shall be experienced, or if inexperienced, shall be constantly supervised by an experienced foreman. Sod layers shall kneel on plywood or some other platform during laying process. 2. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod. 3. Do not lay sod or install sod on saturated or frozen soil. 4. Lay sod immediately upon delivery to site, to prevent deterioration or drying. All sod MUST be installed within 12 hours after delivery to the project site 5. Lay sod tight with no open joints or gaps visible, with no overlapping edges and with an allowance for shrinkage. Stagger end joints 12" minimum. Lay sod with long edges perpendicular to primary slope. Do not stretch sod pieces. Spread lawn area soil over any exposed edges. Keep edges moistened as required or as directed. The Contractor shall ensure that the soil base immediately ahead of each sod layer is moist. 6. When piecing sod, use pieces no smaller than one (1) square foot. 7. Install sod with top flush with adjacent curbs, sidewalks, and drains. 8. Sod installed on slopes greater than 5:1 shall be pegged with wooden stakes and layed parallel to the contours. Pegs shall be set flush with finished grades. 9. Sod shall be rolled with a 200 pound roller after installation to ensure proper contact between soil and sod. On slopes 5:1 or less, roll with light lawn roller to ensure contact with subgrade. Final rolling must provide a uniform surface. After final rolling, the sod lawn shall be mowed if necessary B. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after laying. Sod lawn area shall be heavily watered, flooded, and saturated for a period 10 days to trigger active root growth. C. Flagging, fencing, and warning signs or other appropriate method of sod lawn protection shall be installed and remain for a minimum of 4 weeks. Do not remove flagging and warning signs until sod is firm to walk on and sod is not in a saturated condition. D. Water: Watering shall be accomplished once a week from March through September. At a minimum, a uniform application of one (1) inch of water shall be required over all lawn areas each week.The Contractor shall be prepared to water more frequently should very dry conditions persist and based on input from Owner. 32 90 00-PAGE 30 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING E. Mowing: 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for mowing all sod lawn areas. a. Mow whenever lawn reaches an average height of 3 inches. The cutting height shall be 2 inches with all cuttings retained using mulching mower equipment. b. Mowing shall be done by an acceptable "reel" type mower. Power driven equipment shall not cause ruts or deformation of improved areas. Sickle type grass cutters will be permitted only on slopes of drainage ditches, berms, or other rough areas. The equipment and tools shall be in good repair at all times and maintained so that a clean, sharp cut of the grass results. Each mowing shall be considered as one (1), complete coverage of all lawn grass areas to be mowed within a defined area. c. Trimming around traffic facilities, structures, curbs, tree pits, planting areas, or other features extending above ground shall be accomplished by use of tools that achieve a neat and uniform appearance. Edging along curb and sidewalk interfaces shall be incidental to mowing and shall be provided by the Contractor to control encroachment of grass. d. Grass cutting equipment shall be operated in such a manner and equipped with suitable guards as to avoid throwing rocks or debris onto the pedestrian and vehicular traffic areas or onto permeable pavement areas. Equipment that pulls or rips the grass or damages the turf in any manner will not be allowed. The Owner will be the sole judge of the adequacy of the equipment and methods of use. The Contractor shall return and disperse all lawn clippings to the lawn from all pedestrian and vehicular traffic areas, and from any other improvement. F. Follow-up Fertilizing: After the first mowing or approximately 30 days after the initial installation (whichever comes first) broadcast 'Regular Feed'- Broadcast at a rate recommended by manufacturer for lawn areas. Apply once a month for the first four months of the growing season. G. Sod Lawn shall be deemed physically complete when uniform, healthy, green, and vigorous growth is evident, with no dry or dead spots larger than 3-inch square, and after the third mowing has occurred. H. If sod lawn is inconsistent or not showing a vigorous green color, apply a turf coloring agent to the turf prior to Park Opening upon notification by Owner. Submit turf coloring agent product information to Owner for review and approval prior to application. I. Upon Final Completion, temporary flagging, warning signs, and other lawn protection measures may be removed. 3.10 CLEAN UP: A. Perform cleaning during installation of the landscape work. Water, dirt, debris, and rubbish to be kept off of all paved areas, pathways, and permeable pavements. Clean all paved areas. All excess materials, soil, debris, and equipment shall be removed from the site. 32 90 00-PAGE 31 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 32 90 00 27 AUGUST 2019 PLANTING B. Repair any damage resulting from landscape work at Contractor's expense. C. Planting areas immediately adjacent to walks, curbs, pavements, driveways, and other improvement shall be compacted and raked to accommodate the depth of mulch cover, with the mulch surface flush with the surface of adjacent improvement. Planting beds shall have a fine, even grade around all plants. D. Remove all metal, wood, and concrete debris, protective wrappings and coverings, and shipping materials from the project site. Remove all residues, repair all stains, scuffs, abrasions, and marks from boulders. E. Leave project in first quality condition. 3.11 SUBSTANTIAL AND PHYSICAL COMPLETION A. Inspection to determine Substantial and Physical Completion of planted areas will be made by the Owner's Representative, upon the Contractor's request. Provide notification at least 5 working days before requested inspection date. 1. Planted areas will be accepted provided all requirements, including the maintenance have been complied with and plant materials are alive and in a healthy, vigorous condition. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner shall assume all plant maintenance. 3.12 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance of all landscaping work described in this Specification section, with the exclusion of possible replacements of plant materials under the Guarantee Period, shall be made by the Owner's Representative and/or approved representative of the Owner to determine 100% completion and acceptance of the Contract work. This review shall be made upon written request to the Owner's Representative no less than 48 hours prior to the anticipated date of inspection. END OF SECTION 32 90 00-PAGE 32 OF 32 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 33 3100 27 AUGUST 2019 SANITARY SEWER UTILITY SECTION 33 3100 SANITARY SEWER UTILITY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work in this section shall include all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to furnish and install the following items and all other related WORK in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and as shown on the Plans. 1. Sanitary sewer mains (gravity) 2. Sanitary side sewers (gravity). 3. Sanitary sewer clean-outs (for gravity lines). 4. Connection to existing sanitary sewer system. B. This Work includes furnishings and installing connecting bands, branch connections, or other fittings, testing and all appurtenances required to complete the sanitary sewer. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. SECTION 3123 16— EXCAVATION B. SECTION 03 23 23.15 —TRENCH BACKFILL C. SECTION 33 40 00—STORM DRAINAGE UTILITY. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM) ASTM C1773 (2013) Standard Test Method for Monotonic Axial Tensile Behavior of Continuous Fiber-Reinforced Advanced Ceramic Tubular Test Specimens at Ambient Temperature ASTM D3034 (Er. 2006, 2014a) Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3212 (Er. 2007, 2013) Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals ASTM D5926 (2011) Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Gaskets for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV), Sewer, Sanitary, and Storm Plumbing Systems 33 3100-PAGE 1 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 33 3100 27 AUGUST 2019 SANITARY SEWER UTILITY ASTM F477 (2014) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe ASTM F679 (2016) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings ASTM D2657 Practice for Heart Fusion Joining of Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings. ASTM D3261 Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing. B. City of Renton Public Works Design and Construction Standards Plans (Current Edition) C. Washington Department of Transportation (WSDOT) (2016) Standard Specifications—Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature and specifications for pipe, fittings, castings, check valves, and manholes. B. Manhole structures are to be designed in accordance with the live load factor requirements in the most current version of AASHTO standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. C. Record Drawings: 1. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, and invert elevations. 2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 3. Prepare Record Drawings per City of Renton requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the WSDOT Standard Specifications and City of Renton Standards. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle pipe, fittings, and appurtenances in such a manner as to ensure delivery to the project site and final installation in a sound, undamaged condition. Keep the pipe clean. Load and unload pipe using hoists in a manner to avoid shock or damage, and under no circumstances shall they be dropped, skidded, or rolled 33 3100-PAGE 2 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 33 3100 27 AUGUST 2019 SANITARY SEWER UTILITY against other pipe. Damaged items shall be rejected and removed from the site within 24 hours. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Maintain sanitary sewer in areas of the site and Port designated facilities to be occupied and remain in operation by Port during construction. B. Notify Port of services shutdown. Provide notification at least one week prior to discontinuation of service, including estimated duration of shutdown. C. Outages must be scheduled in advance and be limited to no more than three, 48- hour periods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Comply with City of Renton Standards B. Comply with WSDOT Standard Specifications 2.02 PRODUCTS A. PVC Pipe: 1. Bell-and-spigot type with rubber gasket joints conforming to the requirements of Section 9-05.12(1) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. Schedule: SDR 35. 2. Lengths: a. Manufactured and provided in nominal lengths of not less than 10 feet or more than 20 feet. Use shorter pipe lengths to meet special conditions where shown on the Drawings or as approved. 3. Pipe Condition: a. No sun-yellowed pipe will be allowed. 4. Fittings compatible with pipe, injection molded, gasket type, and manufactured in accordance with ASTM D3034. Do not use solvent welded joints. 2.03 NONPRESSURE-TYPE TRANSITION COUPLINGS A. Comply with ASTM C1773, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground non-pressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. B. Sleeve materials for plastic pipes shall be ASTM F477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D5926, PVC. 33 3100-PAGE 3 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 33 3100 27 AUGUST 2019 SANITARY SEWER UTILITY C. Coupling for dissimilar sanitary sewer pipes shall be ROMAC INDUSTRIES SS1 sewer clamp or approved equal. Gaskets shall be VIRGIN SBR compounded for water and sewer service. Bolts, washers, nuts, lug and shell shall be stainless steel. Connected pipes shall be cut perpendicular and inserted into coupling so that ends are flush. 2.04 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall conform to WSDOT Standard Specification Section 6-02.3(27). 2.05 FRAMES AND GRATES A. Castings are to be load rated as indicated on the drawings. If not indicated, load ratings shall be HS-20. 2.06 WET TAP A. Saddle type connection shall conform to City of Renton Standard Sewer Details. 2.07 CLEAN-OUT FRAME AND COVER A. Frame and cover shall be locking type, Olympic Foundry#M 1025 or Engineer- approved equal. 2.08 UNDERGROUND LOCATOR TAPE A. Underground locator tape shall be green, at least 4 inches wide, four mil thick, polyethylene tape, with a metallic backing capable of being traced with locators. The tape shall have black letters with the following wording: "Caution: Sewer Line Buried Below." The locator tape shall be installed 12 inches above the top of all sewer mains and services. B. Tracer wire shall be TWHN or TWHH #10. Tape shall be sewer tracer tape or magnetic sewer tracer tape. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify excavation is ready to receive Work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations as indicated on Drawings. 2. Verify existing utilities have been marked. 3. Verify erosion control is in place and operating properly. 4. Verify inverts at points of connection and verify minimum grade can be maintained. Pothole, expose pipes, determine invert elevations, verify dimensions, and inform Port's representative of deviations affecting design prior to mobilizing crews and beginning construction. 333100-PAGE 4OF6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 33 3100 27 AUGUST 2019 SANITARY SEWER UTILITY 5. Verify and coordinate location of existing pressure sewer on float and adjust locations to match. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Protect elements surrounding Work of this section from damage or disfiguration. 2. Protect existing utilities from damage and disturbance. Provide shoring to support existing utilities and their support prism or remove and replace utilities where shoring is not practical. Removing and replacing to be performed per utility owner's standards. 3. Keep excavation free of standing water. 4. Protect finished Work, pipe, and bedding from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress. 5. Protect finished and backfilled work from damage. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Excavation, Foundation, and Bedding: In accordance with Sections: 1. SECTION 3123 16— EXCAVATION 2. SECTION 03 23 23.15 —TRENCH BACKFILL B. Connection to Existing System: 1. Comply with City of Renton Standards. 2. Remove debris by screening flushing water prior to discharge to existing sewer system. C. Pipe Installation (Gravity Pipe): 1. Comply with City of Renton and WSDOT Standards. 2. Follow manufacturer's installation procedures. 3. Lay pipe to line and grade indicated in Drawings. 4. Maintain line and grade for straight sections with laser beam operated by qualified personnel. Check line and grade constantly. If they do not meet specified limits, stop work immediately and remedy the cause before proceeding. 5. Provide equipment required to control flow and conveyance of sewage at connections to existing manholes and at locations where construction disrupts existing sewer mains. 33 3100-PAGE 5 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 33 3100 27 AUGUST 2019 SANITARY SEWER UTILITY 6. All PVC and concrete pipe, including side sewer stubs, shall have tracer wire and sewer tracer tape. Tracer shall be 18 inches below ground level. 3.04 SITE TOLERANCES A. Variance from established line and grade for gravity sewers shall not be greater than 1/32 of an inch per inch of pipe diameter and or not to exceed %-inch, provided that such variation does not result in a level or reverse sloping invert. B. Allowable deviation shall not be accumulative. C. Sewer shall be constructed to provide the cover and direction of slope as shown. D. The slope need not be constant but no high or low points shall exist in finished installation except as shown. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: 1. Comply with City of Renton requirements. 2. Provide all test equipment and personnel to prepare for and perform test. 3. Perform test after backfilling is complete. 4. Plug wyes, tees, and stubs with flexible jointed plugs or acceptable alternate. Fasten securely to withstand internal test pressure. 5. Perform pump station test with water and check pumping rate. B. Inspection: 1. Comply with City of Renton requirements. 2. Provide for inspection by Engineer after completion of pipe, and bedding, and prior to backfilling. 3.06 CLEANING A. Comply with City of Renton and WSDOT requirements. B. Prevent debris and foreign matter from entering sewer system. Provide screen at downstream end of cleaning to trap debris. Remove and dispose of debris. END OF SECTION 33 3100-PAGE 6 OF 6 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 33 40 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITY SECTION 33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work in this section shall include all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to furnish and install the following storm drainage components and all other related Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and as shown on the Plans. 1. Storm Drain Pipe 2. Trench Drains 3. Catch Basins and Manholes 4. Underdrain Pipe 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. SECTION 3123 16— EXCAVATION B. SECTION 03 30 00—CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. SECTION 03 2100—STEEL REINFORCEMENT D. SECTION 03 23 23.15 —TRENCH BACKFILL 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM) ASTM D1557 (2012) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort B. City of Renton Public Works Design and Construction Standards Plans (Current Edition) C. Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT) (2016) Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction. Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Catalog cut sheets and specifications for pipe, fittings, manholes, catch basins, trench drains, castings, treatment systems and accessories. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install products specified. 33 40 00-PAGE 1 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 33 40 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITY C. Manholes and drainage structures to be designed in accordance with the live load factor requirements in the most current version of ASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. D. Record Documents: 1. Provide field survey of all inverts and structure lid elevations. 2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions not noted on Drawings. 3. Identify and describe discovery of uncharted utilities not noted on drawings. 4. Prepare Record Drawings per City of Renton requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Surveyor: Land Surveyor licensed in state of Washington with experience surveying underground utilities. 2. Crew Foreman: a. Minimum ten years' working experience and six years' experience as foreman performing similar work. B. Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Schedule and attend meeting prior to beginning work. 2. Meeting to comply with City of Renton requirements. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with City of Renton Standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Comply with City of Renton Standards. B. Comply with WSDOT Standard Specifications. 2.02 AGGREGATE A. Bedding: per SECTION 03 23 23.15—TRENCH BACKALL. B. Gravel Backfill for Drains: WSDOT 9-03.12(5). 2.03 STORM DRAIN PIPE A. Pipe, Fittings and Coupling Bands: Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9- 05; use water tight couplings for all pipes. B. Acceptable Pipe Materials: 33 40 00-PAGE 2 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 33 40 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITY 1. PVC: WSDOT Section 9-05.12. 2.04 PERFORATED UNDERAIN PIPE A. Pipe, Fittings and Coupling Bands: Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9- 05; use water tight couplings for all pipes. B. Acceptable Pipe Materials: 1. PVC: WSDOT Section 9-05(6). 2.05 RAIN GARDEN CULVERT A. Pipe, Fittings and Coupling Bands: Per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9- 30; use water tight couplings for all pipes. B. Acceptable Pipe Materials: 1. PVC: WSDOT Section 9-30.1 2.06 CATCH BASINS AND INLETS A. Comply with City of Renton Standards. B. Load rating: Structures to be load rated as indicated on drawings, if not indicated minimum load rating shall be HS-20. C. Catch Basins: 1. Catch Basin Type 1: City of Renton Standard Plan 200. 2.07 METAL CASTINGS A. Comply with City of Renton Standards. B. Load rating: Castings to be load rated as indicated on drawings, if not indicated minimum load rating shall be HS-20. C. Frame and Cover: Lettering "STORM". D. Locking type. E. Grates in pedestrian access areas comply with ADA requirements. 2.08 CONCRETE A. Minimum f'c of 3,000 psi. 2.09 LEAN CONCRETE A. WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 6-02.3(2)D. 2.10 TRENCH DRAINS B. Concrete: Per SECTION 03 30 00—CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. C. Concrete Reinforcement: Per SECTION 03 20 00—CONCRETE REINFORCEING. 33 40 00-PAGE 3 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 33 40 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITY D. TRENCH DRAIN TYPE 1 1. Trench Drain Channel Product: NDS° Mini Channel by NDS°, or approved equal shall be used. The product must be compatible for fit up with the trench drain frame. 2. Frame and Grate: Iron Age Designs° - Minnione 3"x12", Product ID MA5- 12121. (i) Ductile Iron with Baked Oil Finish (ii) HS20 Load Rated (iii) Grating must be non-slip and ADA compliant E. TRENCH DRAIN TYPE 2 1. Trench Drain Channel Product: PolyDrain° by ABT°, Inc. or approved equal shall be used. The product must be compatible for fit up with the trench drain frame. 2. Frame and Grate: Iron Age Designs° - Minnione 5"x20", Product ID MA5- 20121. (i) Ductile Iron with Baked Oil Finish (ii) HS20 Load Rated (iii) Grating must be non-slip and ADA compliant F. TRENCH DRAIN TYPE 3 1. Trench Drain Channel Product: 4" Offset Slot Drain by Dura Trench°, or approved equal shall be used. The product must be compatible for fit up adjacent to existing concrete surfacing. (i) HS20 Load Rated (ii) Inlet must be non-slip and ADA compliant G. TRENCH DRAIN TYPE 4 1. Frame and Grate: Iron Age Designs° - Minnione 5"x20", Product ID MA5- 20121. (i) Contractor to provide connection hardware to provide vertical frame connection as shown on plans (ii) Ductile Iron with Baked Oil Finish (iii) Modified so that the grate is solid with no perforations while maintaining the Minnione relief pattern. 334000-PAGE 40F 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 33 40 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITY PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions, Contractor shall: 1. Verify excavation is ready to receive Work; and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on Drawings. 2. Verify existing utilities are marked. 3. Verify erosion control is in place and operating as specified. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protection, Contractor shall: 1. Protect elements surrounding Work from damage or disfiguration. 2. Protect existing utilities from damage and disturbance. Provide shoring to support existing utilities and their support prism or remove and replace utilities where shoring is practical. 3. Field locate and mark existing utilities, whether shown or not, before construction and avoid damage or disturbance. Protect, maintain, and repair, where damaged. For aid in utility location call 811, 48 hours (two working days) before beginning construction. 4. Field stake alignment and grade. 5. Maintain existing drainage during construction. Provide temporary ditches, drains, pipe, sumps, and pumps as required. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Excavation, Contractor shall: 1. Comply with SECTION 3123 16— EXCAVATION 2. Remove stones larger than 2 inches or other hard matter which could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. B. Pipe, Contractor shall: 1. Install per manufacturer's recommended procedures, ASTM standards, and WSDOT Standard Specifications. 2. Maintain line and grade per Drawings. 3. Join pipe per Manufacturer's recommended procedures and WSDOT Standard Specifications. C. Catch Basins and Storm Drain Manholes, Contractor shall: 1. Comply with manufacturers recommendations. 334000-PAGE5OF7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 33 40 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITY 2. Comply with WSDOT Section 7-05. 3. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. 4. Place base sections on 12-inch-thickness minimum compacted bedding. Smooth and level to ensure uniform contact and support. Where sub grade cannot be compacted due to excess moisture, provide lean concrete pad with minimum 12 inches thick. 5. Extend bedding to limits of excavation. 6. Compact bedding to 95 percent of maximum density per ASTM D1557. Verify alignment and elevation of entering pipes. 7. Construct structures plumb and level. 8. Make completed manhole rigid, true to dimensions, and water tight. 9. Backfill evenly around structure to prevent displacement and unequal stresses. 10. Ensure lift holes are wet and fill with mortar inside and out. 11. Smooth and point structure joints inside and out. Ensure water tightness. 12. Remove loops flush with inside wall surface after manhole is completed for pre-cast manhole elements where steel loops are provided in lieu of lift holes. 13. Remove sharp cutoff protrusions. If concrete spalling occurs as a result of loop removal, restore spalled area to a uniform smooth surface with cement mortar. D. Backfilling, Contractor shall: 1. Comply with 03 23 23.15—TRENCH BACKFILL. E. Trench Drains, Contractor shall: 1. Comply with WSDOT Section 7-08. Prepare trench drain trench subgrade in a similar manner to pipe trench. 2. Pour concrete trench drain foundation around set trench drain sections. Ensure trench drain sections are joined and meet line and grade. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction Testing: Per SECTION 3120 00— EARTHWORK. B. Engineer Inspection: After completion of pipe, catch basins, manholes, cleanouts, trench drains, and bedding, and before backfilling. 334000-PAGE 6 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 BID SET SECTION 33 40 00 27 AUGUST 2019 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITY 3.05 CLEANING A. Before final acceptance, flush accumulated construction debris and remove other foreign matter from storm drains. Do not allow flushed material to enter downstream system. END OF SECTION 334000-PAGE 7 OF 7 SUNSET NEIGHBORHOOD PARK, PHASE 2 100% SUBMITTAL- FOR PERMIT 10 MAY 2019 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION wdi = J Q O p J = p J O Q ? _ U O = n p O n = J w n O N Q w w >j Q co oo U = � O O Y � F J Ln p Q p d CO O CJ Q w (7 p CO Q = (D o COLLJ Z Z F Y 0 � Q = n pwn V)N LU wOQ _ = = �mmF 7) w o 0 UpU U o0 l _coQ w Q U W w a w X w 0 w Q Z 2 L H U p Z J w O Q Co O Q vi X > irn = O V N 72 C7 a z Q Q n m a Q N Lu w V) Z = O I— w J o w J m w Y w � a z z > w Q LU Q �— O U J Q F J O Q w D W LU J LU w d = O m In W O J CO J m J M X }N.+ d O W O O H Z c-I N M W O 0 N N X U 4J X Ow W In , � d UA %z J _ cn cn Aft i E 0 co ` r c Of N p N c w0Q . .�'Z4� a— w Q U U J LLI cUr� Of C) 0 0 0 u V 0 0 o -0 -0 o Q i= M TECHNICAL MEMORANDUM Ch2M- Geotechnical Design Recommendations for Sunset Park Phase I PREPARED FOR: Dean Koonts, Hough, Beck& Baird Karla Kasick, P.E. COPVTO: Karen Dawson P.E. PREPARED BY: Menzer Pehlivan DATE: July 8, 2016 PROJECT NUMBER: 677149 REVISION NO.: 0 This technical memorandum is to supplement the Geotechnical Data and Recommendation Report for the Renton Sunset Stormwater Retrofit/LID Project(CH2M 2012), and provides geotechnical design assumptions and recommendations for the proposed foundations for the lightweight structures that includes bathroom facilities and pergola that are going to be constructed as part of the Phase I of the Master Plan for the Sunset Terrace Neighborhood Park (the "Project") in Renton, Washington.The recommendations have been made to support 30 percent design of the project.This document is a deliverable under subtask 03.35.02 of the contract between CH2M and HBB Landscape Architecture. Project Summary The primary objective of the project is to provide a mix of spaces for the adjacent and surrounding community: open lawn areas for play and events, structured play and picnic areas, environmental facilities, restrooms, and convenient access points all arranged in a curving, informal layout that balances open vistas,focal points, and pastoral aesthetic. The park site was formerly residential housing that was recently demolished or will be demolished under the Sunset Lane construction contract. The demolition is intended to remove building foundations and light pole bases, but abandon utilities in-place. Harrington Avenue and Glenwood Avenue right of way will also be vacated (between NE 10th and Sunset Lane NE)for construction of the new park (Figure 1). The project will also include an extension of NE 10th Street west to Glenwood Avenue NE. The right-of- way and curb line for Sunset Lane NE will be shifted to the north to allow for development on the south side of the street. This new curb line will be the southern boundary of the park. Improvements to the park will be completed in two phases because of funding limitations.The improvements for the Phase I are summarized below. Phase 1: • Rough grading and seeding on west side of park, minimal landscaping (street trees) on east side of park • Install water line and sewer line for bathrooms and a water feature CH21M HILL,INC. 1 GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SUNSET PARK PHASE I • Demolish or abandon existing utilities (overhead and buried) and undergrounding the electrical and communication lines. • Construct bathroom facilities • Install a pergola • Construct curb and gutter including temporary curb inside the park for area west of the bathrooms • Install irrigation systems • Install electrical the restroom, and lightings (conduit only for lighting). Phase 2 could add a gazebo,walkways, park equipment, water feature, and additional landscaping. Limitations This preliminary Geotechnical Design Memorandum has been prepared for the exclusive use of City of Renton and the CH2M-led internal design team for specific application to the Phase I of Master Plan for the Sunset Terrace Neighborhood Park Project.The memorandum was prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practice. No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made. The conclusions in this preliminary memorandum are based on our understanding of the project at the conceptual design phase. Calculations may be modified as design is developed,final recommendations may change, and this document should be verified or updated to reflect updates made during final design. The preliminary recommendations in this memorandum are based on the subsurface conditions interpreted from explorations described in this document. If conditions differing from these are observed during subsequent explorations or during construction,the recommendations provided in this document must be verified or revised in writing. Subsurface Conditions The subsurface conditions described in this document are based on explorations performed for the City of Renton Sunset Stormwater Retrofit/ LID project and documented in the Geotechnical Data and Recommendations Report prepared by CH2M for the City of Renton (CH2M 2012). Area Geology The geologic units in the project vicinity, based on a Geologic Map (Washington State Department of Natural Resources, 2012) are Vashon Glacial Outwash (Qgo) and Vashon Glacial Till (Qgt). Vashon Glacial Outwash chiefly consists of stratified sand, gravel, and cobbles with minor silt and clay interbeds deposited in delta, ice-contact, beach, and meltwater environments (Dragovich, 2002) with generally moderate to high saturated hydraulic conductivity. Vashon Glacial Till is a highly compacted mixture of clay, silt, sand, gravel, and boulders deposited by glacial ice (Dragovich, 2002). Near-Surface Soil Conditions Surficial soils for the project study area were mapped by the United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) Soil Conservation Service (SCS), now referred to as the Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS).Typically,the NRCS maps depict conditions within 5 feet of the ground surface, and usually do not indicate representative conditions at greater depths.The surficial soils mapped by NRCS(2012) in the project area consist of Arents-Alderwood material (AmC), Ragnar-Indianola association (RdC), and Urban land (Ur). Arents-Alderwood material consists of moderately drained material from basal till.The material is classified with a very low to moderately low capability to transmit water (Ksat)with values ranging from less than 0.01 to 0.06 in/hr.The typical profile is gravelly sandy loam to very gravelly sandy CH2M HILL,INC. 2 GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SUNSET PARK PHASE I loam to a depth of 60 inches. Ragnar-Indianola association material consists of a combination of somewhat excessively drained to well drained material formed from glacial outwash and glacial drift. The material is classified with a high capability to transmit water (Ksat)with values ranging from 2 to 6 in/hr.The typical profile is fine sandy loam and loamy fine sand to a depth of approximately 30 inches underlain by sand and loamy sand to 60 inches. Urban land consists of fill material placed for development and can vary widely in composition, depending on it origin. The surficial soils mapped by the NRCS are fairly consistent with the soils encountered during the field explorations. Most of the borings to the west side of the project area, which is mapped mostly as Amc, encountered till between 1 and 4.5 feet below the ground surface (bgs).The majority of the surficial soils encountered throughout the project site contained primarily fine sand with estimated 15 to 20 percent material passing the number 200 sieve. Groundwater found within the project site was below the surficial soils described in the NRCS. General Subsurface Conditions The subsurface explorations performed in the vicinity of the project site as a part of the 2012 subsurface exploration program are B-6-12, B-8-12, B-10-12,TP-1-12, and TP-2-12 (Figure 2). The soil boring and test pit logs associated with these explorations are provided in Appendix A of the Geotechnical Data and Recommendation Report (CH2M 2012). Based on the subsurface explorations,the subsurface profile at the project site consists of following sequence starting at the ground surface: Fill/Outwash:The soil layer nearest to the ground surface was typically medium dense to dense silty sand (SM) and silty sand with gravel (SM), most likely originating as fill or recessional outwash.This soil unit typically contained 15 to 25 percent non-plastic fines.The gravel content varied from 0 to 20 percent. In boring B-6-12 and B-8-12,the Fill/Outwash unit was encountered between the surface and approximately 3 to 4.5 feet below ground surface (bgs)with Standard Penetration Test (SPT) N values ranging from 27 to 51. In boring B-10-12 and test pit TP-2_12 the Fill/Outwash unit was encountered up to a depth of approximately 20 feet bgs; in the upper 10 feet SPT N values ranged from 3 to 14 and in the lower 10 feet SPT N values ranged from 27 to 51. Glacially Overconsolidated Till: Glacially overconsolidated till was encountered below the Fill/Outwash soils at depths ranging between 3 and 20 feet bgs in the locations explored within the project area. This layer usually consisted of very dense silty sand (SM) or silty sand with gravel (SM)with SPT N values greater than 50 and non-plastic or low-plasticity fines content between 15 and 30 percent. Although no specific instances of cobbles larger than 5 inches or boulders were logged in the test pits, cobbles and boulders are commonly found in this geologic deposit and should be anticipated in excavations at the site. Ground water table at the project site was encountered at 15.5 and 20 feet bgs at the time of drilling (June 2012) in B-8-12 and B-10-12, respectively. Ground water was not encountered at the time of drilling in B-6-12. Seismic Conditions The site is classified as Site Class D based on International Building Code (IBC) 2012 guidelines.The short period and one-second spectral accelerations mapped at the project site from 2008 Unites States Geologic Survey(USGS) seismic design.The seismic design parameters estimated for site class D conditions and Risk category I/II/III at the project site are as follows: Design, 5 %damped, spectral response acceleration parameter at short-period, SIDS=0.953 g Design, 5 %damped, spectral response acceleration parameter at a period of 1 second, SD1=0.537 g Design, 5%damped, peak ground acceleration, PGA=0.38 g Seismic Design Category, SDS= D CH2M HILL,INC. 3 GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SUNSET PARK PHASE I Engineering Properties of Soils Recommended design engineering properties of the soils anticipated to be encountered in the project area are provided in Table 1.These properties were estimated from the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) N-values and empirical correlations provided by WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual, available laboratory test results, previous practice, and engineering judgement. Table 1 Engineering Properties of Soils Soil Unit Layer Description Parameters(unit) Recommended Value Unit Weight,y(pcf) 125 1 Fill/Outwash Cohesion,c'(psf) 0 Friction Angle,c�'(degree) 34 Unit Weight,y(pcf) 135 2 Glacially Overconsolidated Till Cohesion,c'(psf) 200 Friction Angle,c�'(degree) 40 Lateral earth pressure coefficients for use in designing pole foundations and walls less than 5 feet high are provided in Table 2. A factor of safety of 1.5 has been applied to the passive resistance to limit soil deformation needed to mobilize passive resistance. Active earth pressures should only be used if the wall or pole is free to rotate at least 0.01 times H, where H is the depth of pole or wall embedment below the ground surface. The lateral pressure on walls or poles is a triangular distribution, calculated as: oh = K * y * z, where; K is the active, at-rest, or passive earth pressure coefficient from Table 2 y is the unit weight for Fill/Outwash soil from Table 1 z is the depth below finish grade or the top of the wall For poles,the lateral earth pressure loading is applied over one pole diameter and the resisting pressure is applied over three pole diameters. Passive resistance within 2 feet of the finished ground surface should be ignored (i.e.,the resisting lateral earth pressure diagram is a truncated triangle). Walls or structures in occupied spaces (International Building Code controlled design) are not planned as a part of the project,therefore lateral earth pressures under seismic conditions have not been provided. If the project plan changes or exterior walls greater than 5 feet high are proposed,the geotechnical engineer of record should be consulted for specific recommendations. Table 2 Lateral Earth Pressure Coefficients for Pole and Wall Design Parameter Value Active earth pressure coefficient,Ka 0.28 At-rest earth pressure coefficient,Ko 0.44 Passive earth pressure coefficient,Kp 2.4 CH2M HILL,INC. 4 GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SUNSET PARK PHASE I Foundation Design Recommendations Strip footings or rectangular pads with minimum width and length of 1.5 feet founded a minimum of 2 feet below finish grade and slabs on grade will be suitable foundation types for the lightweight structures in the Sunset Terrace Neighborhood Park considering the subsurface conditions, constructability, cost, and environmental impacts.The allowable bearing capacity for strip footings founded on medium dense Fill/Outwash is estimated as 3000 psf. A base friction factor of 0.5 should be used between the foundation and footing. Construction Considerations The recommended allowable bearing capacity provided above is based on the construction recommendations provided in the subsections below. All earth material names can be referenced to WSDOT Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges (hereafter referred to as "Section" only), Section 9-03. All geotextile material names can be referenced to Section 9-33. Maximum density is defined by ASTM D1557. Site and Subgrade Preparation for Strip Footings The subgrade should be cleared of trees, shrubs, and any other vegetation; grubbed of stumps and large roots; and stripped of topsoil and underlying soils that contain significant amounts of roots or other organic matter. Rubble or debris larger than 3 inches in maximum dimension should be removed.The top 6 inches should be scarified and recompacted to at least 95 percent of maximum density. A geotechnical representative should observe the subgrade prior to recompaction to verify acceptable conditions. A geotechnical representative was not on site during demolition of the existing structures which included removal of footings and backfill with compacted granular material. It may be necessary to overexcavate and recompact some of these areas if compaction was not well controlled. The geotechnical representative should carefully probe these areas and may request proof rolling with a loaded truck or other piece of heavy equipment to verify that the areas will provide an appropriate firm, unyielding surface appropriate for the use. Use of underground storage tanks for heating oil is sometimes a concern during demolition of housing. Though not included in this scope of work, we urge a records search to determine if oil was ever used to heat the buildings. If the records indicate the potential for buried tanks that have not been removed, an inadvertent discovery plan should be developed. Backfill Under and Around Foundations A leveling course of crushed surfacing base course or top course at least 4 inches thick should be compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum density beneath spread footings and slabs. Excavations around footings should be backfilled with gravel borrow compacted in 6 inch maximum lifts to at least 95 of maximum density beneath paved areas and to at least 90 percent of maximum density in other locations. Unsuitable Soils If loose material below the depth of scarification, fine-grained, organic, or oversized materials are encountered,the geotechnical representative may direct overexcavation and replacement with gravel borrow compacted to at least 95 percent maximum density. Wet, large, or deep areas of unsuitable foundation materials may require replacement with a separation or reinforcement geotextile and ballast at the direction of the geotechnical representative. CH2M HILL,INC. 5 GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SUNSET PARK PHASE I Trench Preparation and Backfill Remove loose and disturbed material and trim off high areas and ridges left by excavating bucket teeth in the trench bottom. Remove debris and particles more than 4 inches in maximum dimension and compact to provide a firm, non-yielding surface.The trench width should provide at least 12 inches of clear space between the pipe barrel and trench walls or slope and at least 12 inches between pipes in the same trench to allow for compaction. Pipes and conduits should be bedded on a minimum 4 inches of bedding material. Bedding may be imported or select on-site material from excavations with the following characteristics: • Unfrozen,friable, and no clay balls, roots, or other organic material • Clean sand (100 percent passing the No.4 sieve)with less than 10 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, as determined in accordance with ASTM D1140 • Individual particles free of sharp edges (i.e., no recycled glass) • Non-plastic fines as determined by ASTM D4318. The bedding should be placed across the full width of the trench and graded compacted smooth. The upper 1 to 2 inches should be loosened to provide a cushion before laying each section of pipe or conduit. After the pipe or conduit is uniformly supported along its length, backfill the pipe zone with bedding material by placing material simultaneously in lifts on both sides of the pipe and between pipes and conduit installed in the same trench. The first lift should be less than or equal to half of the pipe diameter and subsequent lifts should be limited to 6 inches.Thoroughly tamp each lift, including area under haunches, with handheld tamping bars supplemented by"walking in" and slicing material under haunches with a shovel to ensure voids are completely filled before placing each succeeding lift. Do not use power-driven impact compactors to compact pipe zone material.The pipe zone should extend at least 6 inches above the crown of the pipe. Material between the pipe barrel and the trench should be compacted to at least 90 percent of maximum density. Backfill above a horizontal projection of the pipe should not be compacted until there is at least 3 feet of backfill above the pipe crown. Trench backfill above the pipe zone should be well graded sand and gravel with a 3 inch maximum particle size compacted per the requirements of the overlying land use, but to a minimum of 90 percent of maximum density. References ASTM. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. American Society for Testing and Materials. Section Four— Construction. Volume 04.08—Soil and Rock(1): D 420- D 5779. Revisions issued annually. CH2M (2012). Renton Sunset Stormwater Retrofit/ LID Project. Geotechnical Data and Recommendations Report, prepared for City of Renton, August. Dragovich,J.D, et al. 2002. Geologic Map of Washington— Northwest Quadrant. Washington State Department of Natural Resources, Geologic Map GM-50. International Building Code 2012. NRCS 2007.Web Soil Survey. Natural Resources Conservation Service.Web Soil Survey Release 1.1, accessed June 2016. http://websoilsurvey.nres.usda.gov/app/WebSoilSurvey.aspx Washington State Department of Transportation (2016). Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction. M41-10 United States Geologic Survey, 2008. U.S. Seismic Design Maps. CH2M HILL,INC. 6 GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SUNSET PARK PHASE I \ o\ RHA Housing i A RHA Housing RHA Housing '��\` \\ \\`��` \�� ,,�, �♦ .tea / \� Market Rate \ •^ \\ \ ` \\ \ \\ w / \ Houziry Market Rate \ \ Nousi. IMixed Use \ \ /'%✓ / �\ Market Rate Housing Figure 1. Sunset Terrace Neighborhood Park Phase I Plan w : I VIA A ■ • ■ ■ W� 0 Figure 2. Boring Location Plan CH2M HILL,INC. 7 a oo� zoa N a w0 ¢ N o2 o O 0 - o a o o a - o o V Q� ` o a� - m a Q s� 0 ihaw o o --- oz F o �mr W W m �o adaoa000w W —LL�� 00 a o M �� m z o rcw e m �w ow 0 os s o r z w �o � •� o a z tid a 0. o PRgiNENE , a\\ N z �m m i, —Aw- HARRINGTON ""'" AVENUE NE 4 4 o Quo Q > a < o>� �� o o <m w� 1 42� cos 001 , , 3 , 8 W� > > ��' > J W J a Q. ' W CL . . . W o Lu ,�EdE Oo o oo o LL PNE� �E o � z� V' �� o SES LP�E w a o to n - GQto oo - - ato Q _ t in N C14 gg5 N3 O 4 o ��ooal.�� No�oN�HadM �N��oNw N��ub 1 _ ee�e eze lnozl �av 3nv or�ew oos HMO E]WLLO311HOW 3dVOS4NVl 88H = v ' Sd33NI�JN3lIN0'd SFJOA3AdnS ONtlI,~j Navd lasNns 'ONI'SONIHOIIH V O3Oa'HSnB A3nans oiHdVaoodol - L.L _ IL > > f t v J r ti G x � z � = z i .m, y r \ 1 \ .e eze sozl a�3nv oNew oz HMO ElUMOEWHOHV 3dVOSaNV l 98H 'IVU'a V` SN33NI�JN3lIN0'd SFJOA3AF3nS❑Ntll Navd 13slvns 'ONI'SONIHOlIH V O3Oa'HSne A9AHns OlHdVH°Jodol(INV)1HVaNno9 - � o 3 z � x i 1 z Ui z - �! V a s a